《Bow of the North》


 Prologue

    I had a good life I''d say.


    My name is Robert Baskerville, the guard dog of Banders hills. Not literally of course, though the name did have a reason and I like to think it wasn¡¯t all due to the derogatory thoughts of my opposition.


    I was born the son of a hunter and loved the adventures that came with the position. My father was a 2nd tier archer, one of the strongest men in my village and the surrounding areas. He was a man of few words, possessing a solemn face with a closely-trimmed beard. Sharp brown eyes and eyebrows that were thin and often bent from concentration.


    My mother unfortunately passed when I had yet to reach my 5th birthday, so i did not know her well. I did remember her soft face and clear blue eyes that were always gazing at my father and me with affection. My father spent the next month with a constant frown, but eventually moved on to look after me. He threw himself into hunting and cultivation, which eventually allowed him to break through to 2nd tier when i turned 8.


    I loved my father who showed me how to track and hunt whether it was through the woods or the plains. When I was 10 he took me on my first hunt, the hunt that would change my life.


    My father, his beast companion Ace and myself went to a small grove besde the mountain in search of prey. Ace was a large wolf with grey matted fur and a friendly disposition. We were seeking a herd or family of whitetail deer, a prey that barely counted as magic beasts, something that a 1st tier archer such as myself should have had no trouble dealing with.


    As we were travelling along a small river we heard a thunderous roar from the nearby bush. Out of it leapt a humongous hound the size of a carriage, black fur with white vein-like patterns covering it that pulsed with each breath, white vapour pouring from its mouth.


    That was a Black-ice Hound, a tier 3 magic beast that dominated the surrounding area for over a decade. It ruled the higher peaks of the mountain and was unmatched in the surroudings in terms of physical strength. Before I could draw my bow, my father grabbed me with both hands before throwing me into the river. As my head bobbed to the surface, I crawled to the opposite bank and turned my head to watch my father and the beast fight.


    Ace charged the hound fearlessly, despite being a fifth the size, while my father shot arrow after arrow in rapid succession. Ace died first, giving his life to cripple the hounds rear right leg. he circled the hound, using his small size to his advantage, then latched onto the beasts heel. Even when he was being stomped into the earth he refused to release his grip until its achilles heel was shredded, before finally his lungs were crushed and death embraced him.


    That sacrifice allowed my father to struggle on, the hounds leaping ability was greatly reduced, causing father to kite the hound. Unfortunately the beasts hide was too thick for the arrows to cause serious damage and the ice magic flowing in its veins stopped any excessive bleeding. whenever the shot penetrated the skin a small trickle of blood would start to flow, then stop as is froze over.


    In the end its stamina was simply too much for father and one grazing swing of its paw sent him flying with a broken leg. As the beast moved in to finish him father shot a final arrow through its open mouth, collapsing in front of him. Unfortunately, just as father breathed a sigh of relief, the beast rose up one last time and with a single swing to my fathers jaw, snapped his neck.


    Unable to believe it, I swam to the other side, struggling with the slow moving stream and the weight of my water soaked clothes. Exhausted, lungs burning, i stood and moved forwards. As I sat there sobbing, my father''s body craddled in my arms, I heard a strange noise. Beside the body of the dead beast crawled a large pup nuzzling the body.


    It was at this point that I started to put things together. When you think about it, if that hound was in its prime my father should have never stood a chance against it. He was only at the starting stage of 2nd tier and Ace was only the peak of 1st. Although this doesn¡¯t sound too difficult to overcome, a respective tiers would be;


    1st = strength of 2-3 men, 2nd = 10 men, 3rd =100 men


    Combat strength not the physical strength.Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.


    1st tier has body of an average adult at the start and the peak of what a non-cultivator can achieve, with the ability to focus qi in certain extremites to give additional power.


    2nd the person has about twice to triple the strength and reflexes of a olympic athlete and they can project qi outside of the body. This means they can make their weapons sharper or more durable that will last a short time from leaving the body, the further you practice the tier until the peak of 2nd tier the better the enhancements.


    3rd the person is as strong as 10 men and can imbue their qi with elements. The hound has ice magic so it can freeze it''s wounds to prevent blood loss, and when qi covers its body it forms a freezing wind that quickly immobilizes the opponent.


    Although this isn¡¯t exact as different fields and experiences would provide different advantages. For example my father was not just a 2nd tier archer but a tamer as well, meaning he can communicate to a certain extent with his beasts. He and Ace fighting together could overcome 3 2nd tier warriors without too much trouble if needed. However this still doens¡¯t explain how he fought to a draw against a 3rd tier magic beast which could destroy them five times over without breaking a sweat. The arrival of this pup explains why the hound was so weak, it had recently given birth. That¡¯s why it was in this low down grove that would normally be free of large predators. It was avoiding it''s rivals and enemies that would take advantage of its weakness to strike.


    I started to make my way to the pup drawing my knife, revenge filling my eyes as much as tears. The young hound might already be as big as a goat but it had no training, experience and its teeth had yet to fully develop. As I stood over the defenceless pup I saw tears that weren¡¯t my own fall on the dead hound. It was then realisation struck me, we were both orphans to circumstance. It was pure coincidence that its mother chose to give birth in the same area as we went hunting. Pure coincidence that both the hound and my father had their children with them to protect. If we weren¡¯t around then either my dad or the hound would have simply run away with nothing to hold them back. Instead they both died to remove the threat to their childrens lives.


    As the tears dried I went to my fathers discarded backpack to fetch his trowel that would originally be used to dig a latrine, and started on two graves. Halfway through the pup trotted over to me and started to help, digging at the soft ground with its paws. It took the rest of the morning and the afternoon to finish the graves, especially for the pup''s mother with her incredible size. As we worked together, sharing the rations left by father, we reached an understanding and the beginning of a tamers bond formed between us. I named him Brutus, after the god of chance.


    From that day onwards my life changed. By the age of 18 I had achieved my fathers strength and was the greatest hunter in town. By 22 I was stronger than the lords head knight and with Brutus we were unmatched. At 25 I married the lords second daughter, Elena, and joined his army achieving many meritorious service. At 30 I broke into the 3rd tier at the same time as Brutus, becoming the only 3rd tier warrior in the Lords territory. It should be said that 3rd tier was enough to become a hegemon in an area, the 2 of us together were almost unstoppable.


    When nieghbouring lords sent their armies to ravage our lands, their generals were devoured by Brutus. When the migrating Flame Wyvern raided our livestock it fell to my bow and became a feast for the victims of its assault. For the following 20 years the lands prospered. The previous lord passed away to be taken over by his son, my brother-in-law, who I maintained good relations with. The unit I was originally tasked with became the most elite scout company in the surrounding lands. Though only a 100 strong they had half a dozen 2nd tiers with their accompanying beasts formed the core and the rest were all experienced archers, becoming the sharpest blade in the army.


    Alas all things eventually come to an end. As a 3rd rank warrior i could theoretically live till over a century at least, near 2 at most, that was unfortunately not the case for a solitary hunter such as myself. Due to long hunts in the wild, I would often receive injuries or be infected by poisons and without quick access to potions during my early days or healing techniques, I often had to rely on inferior methods that healed improperly. As I got older new wounds imposed upon old ones and a toll was taken. By 50 my heart started to fail.


    As I laid in bed with my wife to the right and Brutus to my left with many of my liutenants and soldiers waiting outside I thought that my life, though relatively short, was well spent with few regrets. The only things I wish I could have changed was enjoying my childhood more, and having children of my own. Whether it was Elena or I we both tried but failed to conceive.


    As I close my eyes to the setting of the sunset, I smile.

 chapter 1 - Qi, Sleep, Repeat

    Death is a curious thing. We all know about it, all experience it eventually, yet no one knows what comes after it. There are many religions, theories and ideas, some with evidence that they say proves what comes after, with others proving that they are wrong. The only thing they all seem to lack, is a first hand account.


    I was drifting on what I can only describe as a stream for an uncertain amount of time. Longer than an instant, and due to the fact I still had my sanity it was less than eternity. Eventually I felt something or someone pick me from that stream and carry me, each motion fluid with purpose. Despite my lack of comprehensionor understanding i didn''t panick. This wasn''t because i was brave or confident, i was just certain at a level that transcended consciousness, this was meant to happen.


    Until it sneezed.


    Now I know how out of place this sounds, and it¡¯s not like I could actually see it happen. All I know is that I heard something that was reminiscent of a person sneezing, the gender alluded me, before all fluidity ended and I was suddenly falling before losing my consciousness.


    That was the last thing I remember. Now I find myself in a new situation, one in which I can¡¯t move.I¡¯ve tried to stretch my body but the strength I previously relied on is nowhere to be found. I¡¯m in a warm place, surrounded on all sides by a strange wall. There is a constant beating whose rythm seems to lull me to sleep. ¡®This warmth is similar to when Brutus climbed into mine and Elena¡¯s bed to sleep, surrounded by a body''s heat¡¯ I mused.


    I struggled for a while longer but then I became tired from the exertion, and fell to sleep once more.


    After I woke up again, I started to take account of my situation. First, I am currently trapped with no easy escape route. Second, my qi pathways are empty. After discovering that shocking revelation, I rapidly tried to draw in more qi from the surroundings. It took some time but eventually the barest drop entered my network, and after exerting myself I once more fell to sleep.


    ¡®night night¡¯ I yawned


    When I woke, I checked myself once more and found very little change. ¡®Bad news, it wasn¡¯t a dream. Good news, that tiny bit of qi I gathered yesterday remained. The situation can only get better from here¡¯ I thought optimistically.


    My days soon entered a state of repetition. Wake, gather qi, sleep, wake and repeat. It went like this for what seemed like weeks. Now some of you might be thinking that with such a one-track cultivation mindset I would soon regain my former strength and they would be wrong. A little-known fact about cultivation is that it works best with both inner and outer training. Just like the saying a healthy mind lies in a healthy body, the same applies to the spirit. Without exercising my body, it would likely take me 20 years of this to reach the 1st tier and even then, I would likely be the weakest 1st tier in the world.


    ¡®But anything is better than nothing at this point¡¯ I mused half in despair at my daunting task, half in hope. Though i will not regain my former strength this way, i will at least be stronger than my current state, and that opens new possibilities for escape. At least the goal and the feeling of constant progress helped me to retain my sanity. The lack of stimulus other than the slight change in speed and depth of the beating is not good for my mind.


    Alas my days would not continue like planned. I was in the middle of a peaceful sleep filled with dreams of cherry pies, when suddenly the surroundings tightened on me. As I began to panic at my sudden changes, I noticed I appeared to be moving.


    Before I could make heads or tails of what was going on... light, sound and cold assaulted my senses for the first time in what seemed like years. I opened my eyes to the flickering of flames brightened the room and wails that reminded me of when someone has had their guts ripped from them (don¡¯t ask) and the smell of blood filling the room. Feels like a war just happened in this room.This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    Just as I tried to get my bearings, a giant woman with a frown appeared before me. She had short grey hair, wrinkly face and a frown dragging her lips.


    Now I''ve seen overly large people before, the largest was a flesh cultivator who had broken the 3-metre boundary at 3.15. This woman was a true giant cupping my entire body in her hands. I was just about to try and communicate when...


    *SLAP* ¡°AAAAHHHHHH¡± I screamed.


    ¡°Oh, good he¡¯s not stupid.¡± Smiled the giant, who has immediately gone on my list of dislikes.


    It has been a week since that day, and I have since assessed my general situation. First, I have not been captured and drugged by a group of giant people to be beaten and abused by them. My first clue was when the first giant, who I call Sadist due to the fact that she slapped my bottom the second we met and then smiled, handed me to another giant woman.


    Once the tears stopped and I could see her smiling, I felt almost immediately safe on a subconscious level. When she exposed her breast, instincts overcame me and I started to suckle. As the warm liquid flowed down my throat, sleep overcame me and since then i have not been harmed.


    The second revelation is that I am apparently a baby. Due to my lack of strength and movement, the clear disparity in mine and the women''s size has led to the conclusion that I have somehow reincarnated into the body of a baby boy (thank god) and that I have retained all of my memories from my past life.


    After debating that for a few hours, trying to come up with some other explanation once dreams were ruled out (that slap would have woken me up) and briefly considering that I have gone insane, but with no way to prove otherwise it was dismissed, I started to take stock of my immediate situation.


    My mother, and she is definitely my mother the bond I feel in my blood confirms it, spends the most time with me. She is rather comely, about 16 to 18 years old, brunette with straight shoulder length hair with a cheerful voice. No great beauty to be sure but no obvious defects and dimples showing her frequent smile makes her a pleasure to be around.


    The Sadist fortunately has only shown up once to give me what I assume to be a check-up, either that or she was seeing how best to hold me before throwing me out the window. Luckily my constant crying brought mother to my rescue. A soldier should always ask for help from one¡¯s allies and when outmatched it is no shame to call for reinforcements. The Sadist is clearly much older than mother, between 35 and 50 depending on how well she has aged. Her hands were callused and bony, more likely to be involved with the brewing of a cauldron than the caring of newborns.


    There were other guests but no one notable, half a dozen men and women who came by to see me and hold me for a while before leaving, that is until the 5th day. A young man, half a head taller than mother with hair a lighter brown than hers, with a slim build and lightly broad shoulders. He was dressed in travelling clothes and light leather armour, short sword to the side. He had clearly travelling for many days judging by his smell and the dirt covering his boots that had dried. My mother led him into the room and then handed me to him from my cot. He favoured his left-hand over his right and the slight smell of blood coming from his clothes indicates he had recently done battle.


    As he held me with shaking hands and as he looked at me with an awkward smile, I guessed 2 things. First, he was my father, the way he acted around my mother and the bond I felt, though weaker than with mother guaranteed my assessment. And second...


    ¡®He¡¯s quite good looking, future looks profitable in terms of aesthetics if these 2 are where I get my genes from.¡¯ I wryly thought.


    Since then father became the second most frequent guest after mother and I have had time to plan my future course of action. From the conversations that I have overheard I have realized that they are speaking a different language to that which I am used to, so learning that will be first on the agenda. Continuing my cultivation along with trying to expand my range of movement and strength is good preparation for the future. Once these 2 have been achieved I can start to collect information about the time, place and status I stand in this world. But first duty calls.


    ¡°WAAHHHH¡± I cried.


    ¡°Oh dear, time to clean you, messy thing¡± mother playfully says while picking me up, wet clothe in hand. *Sigh*, ¡®I fucking hate being a baby¡¯ I thought as mother wipes my bottom. Learning to go walk so i can go potty is definitely next on the list.

 chapter 2 - Status 1

    POV Greta


    That baby is strange.


    I have helped to deliver babies since I was a little girl, and in the past 30 years at least a third of the children born in Oakbridge have had my help to do so. From my experience I can say that Helen¡¯s baby, Ben, goes against common sense.


    I¡¯ve known Helen and David since they were babes and that was why I was so sad when Helen got sick. She was in the final few months of her pregnancy when she started to get a fever. We did everything we could, gave her nutritious soups, plenty of water and rest, but she slowly weakened. They couldn¡¯t afford to fetch a maester and I had seen this sort of fever before and it always ends with either the mother dying in childbirth or they both die.


    I told David he should pray for a miracle. And he must have because that is exactly what happened.


    Helen tells me it started when she first felt the baby kick and move. A few days later the fever settled, her appetite returned and her skin regained its colour. The entire village was in good spirits, especially when the baby was born. I was worried at the start when it came out silently. When a baby¡¯s born it will cry, if not then it is either dead or lame. Thankfully after a quick pat the brat started crying like no one''s business, healthy pair of lungs too.


    It was the months following that i noticed things were strange with the boy. The bugger''s appetite being particularly large wasn¡¯t anything of concern, but his manners were the real concern. When you think of babies, manners should be the furthest thing to come to mind. But this one will almost never cry when his parents have company and when he needs attending to, he will use only small voices at the start and progressively get louder until he is noticed. Babies are supposed to act like kings, when they want something, they want it immediately and will use the loudest voice they can to demand it.


    His social skills are also unheard of. When his parents are feeling sad, he almost seems to instinctually know, as he will give a clumsy smile, make silly noises and even stroke and hug their arms or hands. Which side are the parents and which is the baby here?!


    The parents are helpless, they think he¡¯s a genius and the other parents though concerned at first, have started to be jealous at how well behaved he is and how easy Helen has it. Though they are right about one thing though, that boy is a genius.


    At just 4 months he was already crawling about as if with boundless energy, at 7 months he said ¡°mama¡± and ¡°dada¡± soon after. By the time his first name day came he was responding to dinner calls and fetching cups of water for the pregnant Helen. Yep seems that those two had it so easy the first time around they thought to have another. I¡¯m looking forward to seeing if all their children will be as special, or if they will receive experience the countless sleepless nights that all new parents should suffer through. Hehehe.


    POV Ben


    ¡°Ben, can you go check on your siblings please¡± Helen asked, busy cutting the freshly made pies.


    ¡°Sure Mum.¡± I replied, putting down the cloth and bowl I was cleaning.


    Leaving the kitchen, I maneuverer through the noisy inn. It was lunch time and particularly busy today so mother hasn¡¯t had the chance to take a break yet. As I walk down the road past several houses, I reach my home. My family lives in a small single-story thatch house with a single wood paned door, three rooms. The front room acts as the dinning and kitchen in one, in the back there is a door that leads to my parent¡¯s room that has a double bed made from straw and woollen blanket holding it together. To the right of the bed is a small cot where me and my brother used to sleep, but now holds my baby sister. To the right is small closet like room that has a single bed which my brother and I share.


    Yep my family now has 5 immediate members. My dad, David, who is a member of the town''s guardsman, one of two sergeants who leads 9 others each. When I first met him, he had apparently just come back from a long mission that day. There were apparently a number of illegal loggers in the area and the margrave had tasked a knight, Ser Roc, to lead a squad to find them and arrest them.


    My father was just a normal guardsman at the time, serving for 2 years, with the sergeant being the second in command to the knight. After searching for several days, they found the loggers, but what they originally thought was a few vagrant loggers was instead a camp of 14 outlaws. The guards were spotted, losing the element of surprise but fortunately the bandits were in the middle of dinner so they were unprepared for combat. Like this although the bandits outnumbered them, thanks to the skill of Ser Roc and the fact our men were battle-ready state they were victorious, although the cost was great. 4 guards died, the sergeant at the time being one of them, dying to a crossbow, the same one that almost killed Roc if my father hadn¡¯t killed the user in time. Thanks to that act and the strong performance he apparently showed, he became the replacement sergeant from that day on, one of the youngest in our villages history.This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    My mother, Helen, is the cook at the only inn in town. Her father, my grandad, is the head chef for the margrave. Their children are myself as the oldest, nearly 4, my brother Ed, named after my Grandad, is a year younger than me, while my baby sister, Elsa, was born just 2 months ago.


    We¡¯re a normal sized family, but better off than most due to my father having a good position in the guards and my mother¡¯s job brings some extra money to the house. She can also bring the leftovers home after work which means we get some plenty of meat and veg in our diets, though not the best quality of course.


    ¡°Marg u here¡± I called as I opened the door.


    ¡°Ben you¡¯re home later than usual, where¡¯s Helen, did something happen at the inn?¡± asked Marg from the bedroom.


    The woman, or girl depending on who you ask, is Marg my aunt on my father¡¯s side. The reason she¡¯s here is to look after my siblings while my parents are working. The usual case with families like ours is that the wife would stay home to look after the young ones while the father works. There are 3 reasons both my parents can work at the same time, Marg is the primary reason.


    Shortly after Ed was born mother was complaining to Marg about how she missed working at the inn. Marg, 13 at the time, suggested that she could look after the 2 of us while she was working. Dad was sceptical, but Marg mentioned that if mum was working then they could afford to pay her to look after us, which she could use to save for her dowry. Dad''s dad was just a small farm owner and put a lot of money towards getting dad into the guardsmen, so there wasn¡¯t a lot saved for Marg. This made sense, and so for the past 2 years Marg has been looking after Ed and Elsa, I was nearly self-sufficient by 2 and really helped Marg with the others than her help me.


    The second reason was me, the fact I could already do the job of a sibling several years older than I, as well as having a calming effect on my siblings helped put their mind to ease. The third is that Dad took advantage of his patrolling duties, since our house is on the main road, to check in on us several times a day.


    Like this we have continued till this day. Dad has cemented his position in the guard, mother works as the cook at the Oakstrong inn, Ed and Elsa spend their days sleeping or playing, while I have started to make preparations for the future.


    From my cultivation I have found that the qi in the air is much smaller than in the past, so I deduced that this is not the same area, or even continent, as when I died. The village I am living in is called Oakbridge due to the fact the surround woods are primarily oak and the origin of the town was based next to a bridge that spans a small stream about 5 metres across. There are around 1000 to 1200 people living here, all free rather than slaves or serfs, thank god for that. The surrounding farms amount to another 500 to 800 people. The armed force amounts to 20 guardsmen, 2 knights and their 4 squires. The person in charge is the margrave. The village belongs to Lord Eddard Stark whose Sigel is a direwolf and is also the Lord Paramount of the North, Warden of the North.


    The social structure of this land was hard to figure out and was more of piecing together several conversations to get a rough idea. The lowest rung is the peasants, that¡¯s me, we have the obligation to pay taxes and obey the laws the nobility makes and in exchange they impose order and protect us from outside threats.


    The next rung would be knights, sworn to defend the people and their Lords. These are the lowest form of nobility and are sort of in between peasants and lords in terms of power and rights. A knight must be called Ser if not requested otherwise, repeated offences will result in either being fined or jailed if brought to the attention of the local lord. They are given their title by lords either for their skill in combat or for an act of valour. The lord then gives him a small part of their land, usually a few acres, and they pay a portion of anything they earn from the land to the lord, if they earn nothing, they pay nothing. An example is if a peasant farms the land then they have to give 80% of the food to the lord while a knight only has to pay 40%.


    The knight is considered in service to the lord, meaning they must fight alongside them when the lord goes to battle, in exchange they are considered a part of the lord''s retinue and insulting them is considered insulting the lord and they can demand satisfaction in the form of either an apology or a duel. Most peasants choose to apologise as even the weakest knight has typically been trained since young and they have no requirement to provide an even playing field. Meaning if you¡¯re a poor, crippled farmer and you refuse to apologise you will have to fight an armed and armoured knight with whatever weapons and armour you possess, even if all that amounts to is a stick and some dirty clothes.


    The title of knight can be either inherited or passed down along with any land you own, but the title can only be held by one person at a time. This means if your father is a knight you are still nothing more than a peasant until he passes the title to you, and if you have a sibling and they become peasants as well.


    The next step is a margrave, and these are knights who are trusted by the lords to manage parts of their territory if the size of it exceeds their family''s eye. The margrave doesn¡¯t get to keep the taxes from the territory and still has to pay the tax for their own territory, but they are payed a generous salary by the lords, and they are considered higher than the knights and local knights need to listen to their requests unless they have good reason to do so otherwise. The title is non-hereditary, and when they die only the title knight is passed to the children.


    After that is the lords. They have vast stretches of lands with even the smallest having a town and several villages. A lord is named only by the Lord Paramount, when a knight has accomplished an exceptional feat. They are given a part of their territory and choose a Sigil to mark their house. They can do whatever they want in their territory so long as they pay their taxes to the lord paramount and don¡¯t break the laws of the kingdom, of which there are few besides from treason and slavery. They don¡¯t need to follow anyone¡¯s order except the ones they choose and the oaths they swear upon.

 chapter 3 - New Goals

    Finally, there is the lord paramount, I think there is a king somewhere in the south but no one knows enough about how that works, so I''m going to stop at the Lord Paramount. He is the top dog in the North, the other lords are his banner-men who have sworn to protect and follow them into battle. Every lord pays taxes to the Lord Paramount, and he can travel anywhere in the North without the need to ask for permission. Other lords need to send word of their arrival and ask if they can enter another lord¡¯s territory first. The Paramount can enter anywhere he wants with any number of soldiers. This is only ever done when the Paramount has hard evidence of either avoiding taxes or breaking the kingdom¡¯s laws. If it¡¯s a minor fault that is proven true then a fine can be issued, and if it is serious enough the paramount can even declare the house a traitor, confiscating their lands and executing the ones at fault. Of course, this is a rare event even in the history of the North.


    Knights are an attainable rank for peasants with either talent, time or luck while Margraves are appointed as the lords require. The lords are special. Every recognized member of a family is considered a noble unless they are excommunicated. When someone is named a knight they are allowed to take a last name to identify themselves, unlike commoners who when referring to themselves or others either call them the son of whoever, where they are from or what they do.


    Lords form Houses, they not only have a last name to identify themselves but they also choose their own banners. Banners are their flags and sigils that they fly above their keeps or when they travel. This tells everyone that a lord is there and helps to identify them on the battlefield.


    As far as the strength of this world is concerned it is rather disappointing. In my world a village this size would have at least a dozen or more 1st tiers with some talented people reaching the peak of 1st tier. In Oakbridge the strongest person is Ser Ethan Roc who would at best be a match for a middle tier 1 fighter, and that is due to his skill with a blade and large muscular stature, not any form of qi reinforcement that I have seen. Now that could be due to the fact that the qi in this world is smaller than my previous, but that is only about half or so. As evidenced by my own achievements, cultivation is definitely possible, but it seems that at least in the village no one knows how to cultivate. Other than cultivation the rest of the world seems to be relatively similar to a village in my past world, the numbering and lettering were the same. The language is different, but figuring that out a least gave me something to do when I was a baby, and rough spelling was quite easy to piece together from how the words sound and several signs and letters I''ve seen.


    From the information I have good news and bad news about my current situation.


    The bad news is that in the world as a whole I and my family are incredibly insignificant. Our social standing is that of peasants, the lowest rung and the distance from bottom to top is larger than in my old world. Back then my father-in-law was the lord of a small state of about 200,000 citizens, with the largest city having only 30,000 and a total military of 3,000 soldiers. He was basically a king in the territory with no one above him. Here, the North is about 100 times larger than Banders Hills judging from the travel journeys I''ve overheard. A lord in this world only needs to spend the change he carries in his pocket to buy the equivalent of my entire family''s possessions, including our house.


    The good news is that in Oakbridge at least my family is considered very safe. My parents both have jobs with decent income and long-term employment, ensuring our position as upper class as far as the peasants here are concerned. Our ¡®connections¡¯ if you would call it that, are quite good as far as the towns elite are concerned. Mum¡¯s dad is the head cook for the margrave and has served him for ten years now and is considered almost a friend. Ser Ethan Roc, the person my dad saved and who made him sergeant, has continued their interactions and are considered good friends who have with the wives often taking turns cooking meals for the 2 families. We have no problem in terms of food, warmth or shelter and no disagreements with the leaders of the village or the neighbours.


    I can take my time to gather qi and strength till I reach 2nd tier again and I will have the power and capability to travel the world and do what I want. So long as nothing terrible happens...


    The front door opens with dad and mum entering, a frown on dad¡¯s face and tears in mother''s eyes.You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story.


    ¡°Marg, Ben I have something I need to tell the 2 of you.¡± Dad says forebodingly.


    ¡®Me and my fucking mouth¡¯ I mentally slap myself.


    David POV


    War.


    A word I hoped to have nothing to do with. When I was a boy, I wanted to be a knight, but I lacked the peerage to be a squire so instead my father spent most of his savings getting me into the town guard. After that for 2 years I hoped for conflict, a chance to be knighted on the field of battle was my dream.


    That dream mellowed slightly since Helen got pregnant but I never really got over it until I went on that mission to find the loggers. Before then the most conflict I had been in was a few fights that got out of hand at the inn, or catching a couple pick pockets at market days. That mission didn¡¯t seem to be much to be bothered about either. A handful of sneaky loggers trying to make a few coins on the side, when faced with a dozen large men armed with swords and a knight at its head, they¡¯d either surrender if we were lucky, or run and we have to chase if not.


    What we found instead was a camp with 15 brigands. After days of walking we spotted smoke and headed towards it where we found them in the middle of eating. Immediately they jumped up and grabbed whatever they had at hand while Ethan led us in a charge.


    I never knew about the smell of blood and another man''s insides. When that man swung his axe at me, I blocked hastily and injured my hand from the clash of our weapons. Fortunately, he tripped afterwards and as he was getting up, I thrust my sword, aiming for his back, but hit his neck. The blood spurted from him into my eyes, blinding me. As I blundered around trying to see, I could hear the sounds of screams and yells all around me.


    As I opened my eyes, I spotted one of the bandits arming a crossbow. As he raised it to aim, I charged and thrust my sword to his side, pushing him to the ground with myself on top. I lay there, gasping for breath, the smell of blood and guts filling my nose. By the time the battle was over, we lost 4 men, men I knew, men I drank and laughed with. Poor Mike had his head split open from a hammer. He had a wife and a young daughter, just 5 years old who ould have to live with relatives now. The brigands were down to eight when the surrendered, 2 so injured that they had to be put down.


    As we walked back to Oakbridge, carrying the bodies of the dead and injured, I was reminded of Helen and the child on the way. Thought about how miserable they would be if I was to die. When we arrived back in town Mike the butcher shouted to me.


    ¡°David, you need to get home, your son¡¯s been born, congrats!!¡± He said.


    I froze speechless. ¡®My son?!¡¯.


    I have no idea how I got home so quickly, but when I arrived and saw Helen she was in my arms before she could get a single word out. When she led me into the room, I could barely contain myself when I picked Ben up in my shaking hands. When I saw him smile and make a gurgling noise, I made a decision. No longer would I seek pointless honour and glory, and will instead dedicate the rest my life to looking after my family.


    As the years went by my family grew, having another son and a beautiful daughter. Ben has been growing up to look like me and is my spitting image when I was his age, dad says. Though I think he takes after Helen¡¯s family in terms of brains. My dad was just a farmer and I¡¯ve only learnt a few words and numbers from Helen, yet that boy can write his own name and count to 10 at the age 3. He¡¯s also responsible. I didn¡¯t stop teasing Marg till I was 12, something she still reminds me about, yet by the time Ben was 2 he was already the perfect older brother. Whenever his siblings would cry, he would be the first on there, half the time with a cloth, milk or toy. Everything was going perfectly.


    Then that fucking king had to lose his mind. Rhaegar Targaryen, the crown prince, apparently kidnapped Elianna Stark the Paramount¡¯s daughter. When the Paramount and his son Brandon went to Kings Landing to request her return, the king burned Lord Rickard alive and while Brandon was forced to watch, before strangling him to death. That¡¯s the sort of story you hear from the older folk when they try to scare kids from entering woods alone or misbehaving. Some others say the King was the one that took the daughter and ate her after cooking her with wildfire. others saythe crown prince sacrificed the Stark family to the Seven so he could be granted with a dragon. Whatever really happened, the fact that 3 of the Stark family is dead is confirmed.


    It was no wonder that the new Paramount, Lord Neddard Stark declared war against the king along with the Vale, Riverlands and Stormlands. As a part of the Stark domain Ser Roc and Ser Tran were chosen to lead my squad to fight. Now we¡¯re all gathered at the Trident in Riverlands, led by Robert Baratheon, Paramount of the Stormlands, waiting for the king¡¯s army that¡¯s marching North. When they try to cross the river at the ford, we will ambush them. The Northerners, us, are to join the Baratheons to charge the centre of the formation. I don¡¯t wish for glory, just that we survive.

 chapter 4 - News and Family

    Helen POV


    It¡¯s been six months since I last heard about David. Molly received a letter from her husband, Ser Ethan Roc, just before the battle of the Trident where he mentioned David was with him. We soon heard of their victory over the king¡¯s army and a week ago I heard the king had been killed and Robert Baratheon was named the new king and the soldiers had been sent home. The only part i cared about was the last. the nobles could drown for all i cared so long as they let David return.


    Every day I pray to the Gods, once at the edge of the woods and another at the bridge to honour both the woods and stream. I swear I wouldn¡¯t have been able to cope without Marg and Ben. Before David left, he brought our son to the bridge and asked him to swear on the Gods that before he returned, he would take care of the family. I swear I almost laughed despite the tears, with how serious he looked as he gave the oath before they embraced.


    Since then he has doubled his efforts to help the family. He started gathering water despite only being 5, played with his sisters and cleaned the house. The 2 things I find are quite strange is that he¡¯s started to throw stones at targets and has been running laps around the village. He says it is a game and that he is going on patrol while David¡¯s away. It was funny at first but he started to bring birds home that had their skulls cracked for dinner and several of my friends have praised me on how fast he¡¯s been running. Despite it being about a mile and a half around the village it only takes him about 15 minutes to perform a lap. The older kids sometimes joined him at the start for parts of it but now none of them younger than 10 can keep up for any significant time.


    I¡¯m worried that he¡¯s pushing himself too hard, but I''m sure once David gets back everything will be back to normal. Just then Mike burst into the inn shouting,


    ¡°HEY!! They¡¯re back!! the men that went to war are back.¡± He shouts in between breaths


    *smack*


    The bowl I was cleaning drops to the floor. I whip my head towards Greta, the question already on my tongue, when she interrupts me.


    ¡°Go, you silly child, go to him.¡± Greta snaps at me


    I thank her and rush to the bridge as fast as I can.


    As I reach the bridge, I can see the small procession of soldiers, Ethan, I mean Ser Roc at their head, mounted. As I continue forwards, I start to slow. ¡®I don¡¯t see David¡¯ the despair beginning to take hold. When i arrive in front of the group i confirm he is not there. I turn to the only one on horseback, and someone i consider a friend.


    ¡°Ethan, where is David?¡± I ask, forgetting to call him Ser in public.Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.


    Ethan doesn¡¯t mind, and instead answers in a placating voice. ¡°Helen, I am so sorry. David died at the battle of the Trident. He fought valiantly.¡± just like that my world turn on its head and i collapse to my knees.


    Ben POV


    *THWACK* a stone hits the log from the stump.


    I get up from the ground. Since I''ve just about perfected my aim at stationary targets I decided to start throwing while moving about. I would run towards and away from the target to start, moving on to zigzagging and even trying to throw while mid dive. My accuracy is much worse this way but I can now hit the log about 3 times in ten.


    When dad went to war, I started to think that I couldn¡¯t just wait around to grow up before picking up archery again. I should make use of my youth to improve my skills since my cultivation is unlikely to surpass my previous life. Unfortunately, I can¡¯t practice by bow skills at the moment as my body doesn¡¯t permit it. With my training that consists primarily of stretches, fighting kata and cardio exercises, I have the physical strength to out bench press any 10-year-old, however, the problem lies in that my arms are still too short for even the smallest bow.


    Since improving my skills as an archer is out for the time being, I have thought to improve my hunting skills and develop other skills. I''ve starting exploring the edge of the woods and nearby fields, searching for tracks and identifying the nearby flora and fauna. As for combat I thought of training in one of the few weapons just about every child has used at some point... stones.


    In my previous life I used hunting and throwing knives as my back up weapons, so since I didn¡¯t have enough sharp knives, other those we cooked with, I decided to use stones which could be found everywhere. It took me only a short time to get used to their weight and which were better for use than other, and my previous skills transferred onto this. When spring started a month ago, I started to hunt the surrounding birds, not too many as they would rarely return to the same place, I would kill one every few days and I could only catch enough to supplement our dinners otherwise I would get in trouble. While it¡¯s not illegal to kill and eat animals it is illegal to sell them when you¡¯re not a registered hunter. It requires 500 coppers a year and if you¡¯re not of age then you need a guardian to sign with you to become a legal hunter. Of course, I could easily make the money, my parents have over 2000 coppers or 2 stags in savings for a rainy day, and I could make that back just by selling a single bird for about 50 coppers to Mike the butcher once a week. With my knowledge of where the best place to hunt them and ability to crack a bird¡¯s skull from 10 metres with a stone I could bring in about 5 every 3 days, 8 if I use some simple twine traps. But if I want mother to register me, that would expose that I have been going to the woods, though only the edges, and that¡¯s just not worth it at the moment.


    As I¡¯m heading back, I notice the rather celebratory mood from the front of one of the houses. A family is hugging each other outside and I notice that the father was one of the guardsmen that went with dad. ¡®They must have returned¡¯ I thought, already running home. As I reach the front door, about to open it, I can hear the sound of mum crying, something I only heard once.When dad left, though this sounds worse. Reluctantly, I open the door.


    Mum is in the middle of the room sobbing, Ed is crying as well, asking why can¡¯t he over and over again, Elsa is crying as well though likely from confusion than sadness, she¡¯s still not even 2 yet. Mum turns to me.


    ¡°Oh baby, I''m so sorry, it¡¯ll be alright, come here¡± she tries to smile and wave me to her. Without knowing I had already started to cry, not even bothering to ask or deny what I already know.

 chapter 5 - Prey and Promise

    That afternoon there was a funeral for those we lost. Other than my dad there was only one other casualty, though 2 were seriously injured, one with a broken leg and another lost 3 fingers. Nearly ahundred people showed up at the cemetery to bury the clothing of our loved ones. Dad died several months ago and there was no money to spend on preservatives, so he was buried in a mass grave near the now named Ruby Ford. His only valuables were his sword and armour which belonged to the Lord, so they brought his clothes to bury in his stead. After the war ended Lord Stark generously gave each family of someone who died a gift of 2 silver stags, enough that if mother wasn¡¯t working and we only got essentials to live for about 200 days, all 4 of us. That time would normally be used for widows to find another husband and for orphans to be sent to relatives. For us there would be no one willing and able to accept 3 young children who were nothing more than burdens to them, no matter how pretty mum is. Her pay from the inn wouldn¡¯t be enough for all of us, not when we are still growing. I will not allow our family to be split apart, I gave my word to dad.


    After the funeral we went back to our homes and I asked to be excused so I could get some space. After I got permission I went to the woods and killed 2 birds in quick succession. I then carried them to Ser Ethan¡¯s house. Knocking on the door I waited, birds in hand.


    ¡°What is it can¡¯t it wait till... Ben? What are you doing here, shouldn¡¯t you be with your family? Nevermind, it doesn¡¯t matter. Ben I would like to apologize, I wasn¡¯t able to look after David, it was just so fucking chaotic and ¡­" Ethan came out with a bottle in hand, starting to ramble when he noticed who he was speaking to.


    ¡°I want to be a hunter.¡± I say holding up the 2 birds. They were a pair of magpies in the middle of courting when I struck them both with a stone, one flung from each hand.


    Ethan stares at me in confusion as he starts to gather himself. ¡°Ben what are you saying?¡±


    ¡°I caught these 2 in the 2 hours since the funeral. I need someone to register me and pay the deposit. Please lend me the money, I''ll pay you back?¡± I ask him, looking him straight in the eye.


    He must have seen something unexpected, because he drew back slightly, then thinking about what I said, before asking.


    ¡°Why?¡±


    Without hesitation I answered, ¡°I promised Dad I would look after the family, I intend to keep it¡±.


    He looks at me for a good second, before sighing, followed by a short chuckle.


    ¡°By the gods, David was a lucky man to get a son like you, My own boy is nearly twice your age yet he still lies to me when he promises me he¡¯ll learn his letters, misspell my name will he... Tell you what give me those 2 and we¡¯ll head down to the Margrave tomorrow and sign you up. No need to pay me back just invite me to your house now and then to taste your catch, it been ages since I''ve seen Elsa and I bet she¡¯s nearly as beautiful as her mother now.¡± Ethan says with a genuine smile on his face, and a far-away look in his eyes. I still don¡¯t know if he was looking to the past or the future.


    Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    Edward Marley POV (margrave)


    The sun is shining, the birds are singing and the streets are busy. Nothing could be better.


    It¡¯s been 3 years since the Trident and is now the 1st of March, the beginning of the Spring market, one of the busiest times of the year for the village, except for the harvest season and definitely the most cheerful. Spring has officially begun; the roads are clear and the merchants have arrived with both locals and travellers from the local farming settlements selling what the they¡¯ve produced and buying gifts to celebrate surviving the winter. It was definitely a lot better this year than after the war. Not only was the winter particularly harsh that year, but the deaths caused a lot of farms in the North to be undermanned and food was in short supply. We lost over 2 dozen people that winter to cold and starvation alone on top of another dozen to the usual reasons.


    As I look down at the busy street from my usual seat this time of the year, when I take a break from my work and the wife looks at clothes and trinkets from the peddlers, to watch the sign of prosperity for our village I spot an amusing sight down next to where the hunters have set up their tables to sell their smoked meats, jerky and venison sausages.


    ¡°COME GET YOUR LEATHERS HERE, GLOVES, BOOTS AND HATS, SPECIAL ORDERS AVAILABLE FOR MAKE AND DELIVERY, PRICE NEGOTIABLE!!!¡± An oddly loud and high pitched voice cuts through the noise of the surroundings.


    When Ethan came to the manor all those years ago asking to sign a 5-year-old boy for a hunting license I thought he was out of his mind. I knew who he was, barely, he was the oldest grandson of Ed my old cook who died last year. The few times I asked about his family he would always talk about how proud he was of his grandson who he claimed to be a genius. I would smile and dismiss it as the phase all elders get when talking about their juniors, but after seeing what he can do I realise he was downplaying it if anything.


    In the first year he was catching enough birds, rabbits and even foxes that he made around 4 stags on the meat alone. If it was just his hunting skills then I could pass it off as being talented, but what he does after is the real genius. Just looking at how he sets up his table is enough to wonder if I should hire him as my steward.


    First he never sells the entire animals and instead keeps the furs and leathers, his mother turns them into clothes, the cheaper and more common rabbits are made into the gloves, boots and hats he¡¯s shouting about, with thicker ones being made during the winter market and thinner work gloves for the spring before the market, while the more expensive foxes and the occasional badger are made into luxury hats, scarves and capes, peddling to the upper class in town or the travelling peddlers who are heading back to the larger towns and cities where they will resell for a profit. These tricks are nothing special, after all just about every hunter here is doing the same. The impressive thing is what he does on the side.


    He set up next to the other hunters not just because that¡¯s where the people looking for leathers go, but also because he wants to sell to them as well. Since last year he has been selling well made arrows and even self-made long bows that are way too big for him but are much better than the other hunter¡¯s and are almost made like they were meant for each individual hunter. At the start it seemed like most were too stubborn to use another¡¯s bow, when the few who did purchase one due to the quality and low starting price got much better catches than them, the orders soon flowed in. Because of this, and that he doesn¡¯t sell his meat at markets, he has a relatively good reputation among the hunters. Most don¡¯t concern themselves with the few coppers lost from sharing the leather business and those that did and tried to cause him trouble would be told to scram by Ethan if they were lucky, or have their tables kicked over, ruining their food by the guards if they weren¡¯t.


    The reason this sight is amusing despite seeing it several times for the past couple years, is that I can see a small shadow creeping up behind Ben while he¡¯s talking to a haggler. One of the guards see it as well but decides to wait and watch the show.

 chapter 6 - Haggling and Harsh Lessons

    Ben POV


    ¡°Sir, I can quite clearly see you already have a pair of gloves and you only want a spare pair, however I also noticed you only showed me the back of them. Now I¡¯m just going to guess by the state of the back that the front is likely already frayed if not holey. Wait I don¡¯t need you to start yelling about calling you a liar, as I said it was just a guess. A guess based on 3 years of making, wearing and selling gloves just like those but still a guess. So, you tell me that you only want a spare pair for 18 coppers, but I think you actually want a replacement pair that will last you the entire ploughing and harvest season worth about 36 coppers, so... wait one moment please?¡± I ask the reddening farmer as I take a quick side-step to the other side of the table where my unfortunate victim awaits.


    A vicious side kick lashes the would-be thief, that was reaching for a pair of gloves, across the temple. As he toppled to the ground and I lowered my leg I started to reach for the wood-cutting axe I keep under the table. When I brandish the axe and place it on my shoulder his 3 friends that were originally moving forward to help stop dead in their tracks, frozen, as I move towards their mate who was just recovering from the fall.


    As he turns to look at me, I swing the axe downwards. The blade digs into the earth, inches from the kid¡¯s leg.


    ¡°EEEKK!!¡± the kid shrieks, backpedalling as fast as he can.


    ¡°fuck off, next time you try that shit, your leaving something behind.¡± I say in a flat voice looking him straight in the eye.


    As he scrambles up, saying sorry over and over again, with tears in his eyes, running to his friends who join him in his retreat. The hunters and the locals clap while laughing while the clearly new customer is still standing there shocked.


    ¡°sorry about that, tell you what I''ll make it 34 coppers for the gloves and we¡¯ll call it even¡± I negotiate, as he quickly paid and left.


    ¡°Nice of you kid, giving a discount and that¡± the hunter at the stall next to me says with a knowing smirk.


    ¡°Come off it, Arthur, we both know that when I called his bluff on the old pair and gave him the price for a new pair he would have just started haggling again and I''d probably settle for 28 or 30 at best. If anything, I owe that kid for providing entertainment that saved me 6 coppers and about 10 minutes of time.¡± I say to him, smirking at the memory.


    ¡°Ha haha, good one kid¡± Arthur chuckles beside me. The other hunters had stopped treating me like a brat since a year ago and instead joked like I was one of them.


    It might seem slightly harsh what I did to the kid but in reality, it was kinder than he would get if he tried elsewhere. If an adult is caught stealing and the owner presses charges, the guards would chop off a number of fingers, depending on the theft, or the whole hand if it was a repeat offence. There¡¯s only a single cell attached to the guard¡¯s room that¡¯s for serious crimes where a person is awaiting trial. No long term sentencing here, too light a punishment to be deterrent and too expensive to look after dead weight. Child that age, my age though they looked younger from lack of protein, would be very unlikely to be dismembered, unless they robbed a noble, but they would still receive a serious beating from the shopkeeper and when they were brought to their fathers by the guard, they would likely receive another. In my case the adults know better than to try and steal from hunters who have the best eyes and fastest hands out of the different types of peddlers.


    As for the kids, they see that I''m about the same age as them and think I''m an easy target. So nearly every market one tries to slip by me and everyone receives a kick or back-hand to the head that¡¯s controlled to give them a tumble and disorient but won¡¯t cause long time damage or lasting mark. The axe is just for theatrics and to solidify the message to any would be repeat attempts. The first time I sold at market I was targeted 4 times in 3 days before I got annoyed and knocked an older kid¡¯s front teeth out. Since then, I use the axe, makes good stories around the taverns as well.


    After that incident the day continued as usual, made a few sales, had lunch that mum made me and chatted with Arthur about local gossip. All was well, until a young girl came up to my table, Mary the daughter of the blacksmith who I and my siblings play with occasionally, panting and out of breath.


    ¡°Ben *pant pant* there¡¯s trouble, some big kid started shouting at Ed and then punched him. There still fighting!¡± she said.


    *sigh* ¡°Arthur can you watch my stuff, I''ll be back in a bit¡± I ask the hunter. I¡¯ve known Arthur for 3 years now and he knows I have good connections with the town guard so I trust him not to steal, or at least not steal anything truly expensive. A missing pair of gloves is what I deserve if I leave my table unattended, that¡¯s just common sense.


    As I jog after Mary, I start to wonder why I can¡¯t get a break. This happened quite regularly when I started, some of the thieves I attacked would cry to their big siblings and come for revenge when the market closes and I''m heading home. It doesn¡¯t end well, none of the locals even try anymore since when I was 6. The butchers second son, a big bastard who was 13 at the time, brought 2 friends with sticks to ambush me when I was coming back from a hunt. They offered to carry my catch home for me, and when I politely refused, they insisted. A bit of back and forth, 2 stones, a trip and a shoulder throw, left 3 kids crying and 1 sighing. Guess which is which.


    The reason I was sighing was that we were fighting at the edge of the woods and one of the bullies had a sprained ankle from my trip, while the others had 2 broken fingers and the other had a dislocated shoulder. So not only did I have to help them limp home, but when we got home the adults yelled at us for a good hour straight, them for trying to steal and me for hurting them excessively. Luckily since that day they¡¯ve avoided me like the plague and I could go about my business in peace.If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    As we reach a clearing behind several houses, I can see Ed and another boy fighting. It¡¯s not that bad, although the other boy is clearly much older than Ed, and definitely winning, it wasn¡¯t one-sided. The boy was clearly a farmer¡¯s kid and although he¡¯s got some muscle, a lack of meat in his diet has led to a skinny frame for his size. On the other hand, Ed has eaten very well thanks to mother and me, and from about 2 years ago he started to join me in working out. Though he doesn¡¯t work as hard or know how to use qi, he is more developed than other kids his age and has copied some of my boxing kata, as evidenced by the other boys bruised face.


    Unfortunately, the difference in reach and weight can¡¯t be overcome with a few punches. Ed was soon caught and put into a headlock when I arrived. As I approached the boy¡¯s side, I grabbed the skin of his tricep and twisted.


    ¡°OUCH¡± he screamed in surprise, releasing Ed and backing away to confront the intruder.


    ¡°I don¡¯t like it when people pick on my brother. Apologize to him and leave or you are going to get hurt¡± I say as I plant my feet wary of him trying to tackle me.


    ¡°Me, apologize to you??!! Your brother is the one that stole my brother¡¯s sweets and made him cry, yet you want me to apologize?! Fuck you!!¡± the boy screams as he gets red from rage.


    ¡°What?¡± I ask, stunned for a brief moment. Looking behind the angry boy I see another who looks like a younger version of him with puffy eyes and dirty clothes.


    ¡°It was just a sweet roll there was no point getting so upset about it!¡± Ed shouts from behind. It¡¯s the truth? ¡°Just a sweet roll, my brother has been begging for one since last market, dad spent some his own saving¡¯s just to...¡± The other boy continued, but I had already started to tune it out.


    As I turned around, I looked at my little brother who I have loved, cared for and protected for 7 years. Look into his eyes Ifeel sadness, shame... and rage. Ed starts to look confused as I plant my fist in his gut with the strength of a full-grown man.


    ¡°UURRGH¡± Ed blurts as he buckles to the floor, vomiting his lunch. ¡®probably that sweet roll too¡¯ I think turning around to face the now stunned boy and our audience.


    ¡°My brother has caused you problems and the fault lie with me for lack of discipline. Here is all the money I earned at the market today.¡± I pass him my bag of 216 coppers. ¡°I¡¯m sorry for any stress, inconvenience and pain we have caused, if you¡¯re still angry, feel free to beat me as much as you want, just leave Ed alone¡± I say while bowing my head to the older brother.


    ¡°Wait, no, I-I, it¡¯s okay... you didn¡¯t have to do that.¡± he stutters confused. This isn¡¯t supposed to go this way, he¡¯s thinking. We were supposed to fight; one goes home cheering the other in tears. That¡¯s how brats'' arguments are resolved.


    ¡°yes, I did¡± I say to him as i walk back to Ed. I had no reason to fear him, he¡¯s taller than me but I''ve fought taller and stronger before and won. It¡¯s not a case of losing, it¡¯s a matter of what comes after winning. If this was just a case of 2 kid¡¯s playing getting out of hand, or Ed pulled a prank on someone and they took it badly then I wouldn¡¯t care whether they were weaker or stronger than me, they¡¯d have to kill me before they get anywhere near my brother. This wasn¡¯t one of those situations. This was a case of Ed stealing and bullying a kid smaller than him due to his fortunate circumstances and when someone came for revenge, he dragged his family into it with him, expressing no regret over it.


    ¡°Get up¡± I tell Ed who had mostly recovered now and was catching his breath. ¡°we¡¯re leaving¡± as I grab his shoulder, pulling him to his feet. Under the eyes of a dozen kids, some familiar some strangers, we leave the clearing, me in front dragging my brother behind.


    As we reach the main road I head straight to the inn, I can tell how Ed feels without looking. Betrayed, fearful and confused. Good, if he feels those then it means he will expect me to do the same thing if an incident like this happens again. Of course, he¡¯s not getting off this lightly.


    When we reach the inn, I tell him to wait outside, not caring if he listens or not, as I enter the building. If he thinks he can run then I will show him what it is like to be prey, before catching him and demonstrating the full extent of my fists of love upon his skull.


    I don¡¯t see mum, it¡¯s the market day so she¡¯s likely still inn then kitchen either cleaning up from lunch, or preparing dinner. Either doesn¡¯t matter as I don¡¯t need mum just yet. I make my way to Greta, who is standing behind the check in desk, no one in front of her just now.


    ¡°well hey there Ben, what brings you here, I thought the market was still going on? If you¡¯re looking for Helen, she¡¯s busy so come back later.¡± Greta says to me.


    ¡°Hey Aunt Greta, I don¡¯t need mum, but rather my brother needs a lesson in personal responsibility. Paul should be busy right now, mind letting Ed help him?¡± I ask her. She¡¯s not actually my aunt, or related to me in any way, but asks us to call her that and I forgave her for the first meeting, so I don¡¯t even call her Sadist behind her back anymore.


    Greta looks at me in slight surprise, and seeing the seriousness in my eyes, smirks.


    ¡°well that brat finally took one step too far, huh. Well, let no one say I don¡¯t do my part to help the children, Ed can work here long as he likes, hell he can help clean the latrines when he¡¯s done as well if you like.¡± Greta hasn¡¯t liked Ed much since he started copying my way of calling her Sadist, even before learning what it meant, and sharing it with the other kids. ,


    I thank her and move outside. When I see Ed is still there, I take my shirt off, exposing my upper muscles. My abs are tight, leading to strong pectorals. The other side, my back is taut from years of hunting. Defined shoulders hold a pair of arms reminiscent of crossbows, each capable of sending stones, or punches flying. Skin is rough and yellow form days of exposure to the sun and travelling difficult terrain. It is the body of a beast, honed from 6 years of training, hunting and qi enhancements, not the sort of body you imagine when thinking of a child.


    Ed has seen my muscles before, we¡¯ve even bathed together, and in the past, he would be proud to have such a strong brother. Now It¡¯s likely just reminded him of earlier as he¡¯s gone pale in anticipation of further beating.


    ¡°take off your shirt¡± I tell him. He likely doesn¡¯t know what I mean as he stands there. ¡°I said take off your shirt!¡± I say again, sharper this time.


    He complies, hesitatingly taking off his shirt, exposing the body of although healthy, in other ways completely normal 7-year-old body. As he passes me his vomit covered shirt, I wipe his mouth clean with the dry bits before giving him mine and telling him to put it on, which he does. After I bring him to the side of the inn where the stables are and hand him to Paul the stable hand. I tell Paul that he is to get Ed to do whatever he thinks he can and send him home before dark.

 chapter 7 - Hugs and Tears

    I head back home to get another shirt and put Ed¡®s in the dirty pile, before returning to the market. Thank Arthur for waiting so long and when I notice there is not even a single missing item, I offer him 5 arrows of his choice as thanks. There was another 2 hours of daylight left but I wasn¡¯t in any mood to haggle so I packed up my remaining items and went home.


    As I opened the door, I found Marg and Elsa playing with some dolls they must have bought. Last year both my Grandparents passed and Marg has moved in with us after selling the house. She is now 17 years old and has started to look for a husband. Since she has saved a small fortune for her dowry, she has started looking at the business men and their sons who come to Oakbridge from The nearest town, Bushburn, which has a population of several thousand, about twice that of Oakbridge if you include the farms nearby. The markets are the ideal places to meet these suitors, and when the kids got to sleep she and the other teens will meet at the bonfire circles to sing, dance and have ¡®romantic¡¯ encounters in the bushes and behind trees.


    I join them in their playing for the next hour or so when Ed comes through the door, his head held low.


    ¡°Marg could you give us a bit of privacy, I need to have a talk with Ed and Elsa, please¡± I ask her. Perhaps realising the atmosphere, she agrees and goes to the other room.


    When we were alone, I stand up to face the 2 of them. ¡°when dad left us, I made him a promise.¡± that got their attention as they both look up at me. ¡°I told him that while he wasn¡¯t here, I would look after this family. I swore it to him, to the gods and to myself. So that as long as I was alive you would always have someone to love you, to protect you, and give you kick when you go down the wrong path.¡± As they listen tears start to appear. I haven¡¯t told them about that, and we hardly talk about dad, but we still remember and miss him. ¡°I love you both very much, I hope you know that¡± tears have gathered in my own eyes now, but I have no intention of wiping them.


    ¡°I know Ben, I know. I¡¯m sorry I stole and pushed that guy, I j-just... no, I''m sorry.¡± Ed mumbles, I almost thought he was going to make excuses, but it seems a few hours of thinking has let him realise his faults.


    ¡°me too, I love you too¡± Elsa says as she hugs me first and then hugs Ed, trying to comfort us both. I move towards them and embrace them both. As the relief of Ed¡¯s incident being resolved, I can¡¯t help but think of Elsa. She hasn¡¯t had troubles like Ed and is in fact a complete angel, lots of friends, kind and hopefully with Ed¡¯s reform, 2 caring big brothers who will help keep her that way. The only danger is she will get spoiled and weak. As we hug, I notice that unlike Ed and me who have calluses, muscle and strength, she is soft and squishy in every way. It¡¯s fine for the moment, it¡¯s not like I want her to start getting into fights and become some tomboy, but when she gets older, she will need to get married.


    Neglecting the selfish thoughts of rage that appear whenever i think of someone marrying my precious baby sister... there are all sorts of dangers that are associated with being a peasant daughter. Although as a peasant we have a lot more freedom than nobles when it comes to picking our partners, such as families don¡¯t get to decide who they marry. While the parents will always have an effect on the daughter¡¯s decision and usually provide the dowry, they have no legal jurisdiction to force or betroth their children to one another. The only downside to marriage is that they¡¯re stuck with each other till one of the them dies.


    Mum was lucky, not because dad died, she and dad loved each other very much, but that she was an independent money maker. From mine and her income, we made more than enough that she didn¡¯t need or want another spouse, and lucky for me because she had offers. It seemed I underestimated mum¡¯s reputation in town.Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.


    Since my qi was given to her, it changed her slightly. Although she didn¡¯t gain any noticeable strength, but she did lose baby weight quickly, gain colour to her face and her hair became glossier. Combined with her fuller figure from several successful pregnancies and her original decent looks she became the belle of the village. She was originally about an 8 in the village and maybe 6 in a large city, but now she would be an 8 in the city and an easy 10 in Oakbridge. Add in her cooking skill, a decent dowry and you have the perfect wife.


    Elsa has inherited some of mums looks and will definitely become a little beauty, but even if she has her pick of the men there are still dangers. I¡¯ve seen several couple in the village that started happy ended with the wife being bullied or beaten. Fortunately, I haven¡¯t seen anyone beaten or stabbed to death, but it does happen every decade or so just in this small village.


    And that¡¯s only the physical danger of a bad marriage, not even counting the thousands of peasants that die every year to starvation, disease or miscarriage, all because they lacked the money to pay for food, medicine or a proper midwife. If I continue with my hunting, I could eventually earn enough to support this entire family throughout the rest of their lives. Multiply that number by 3 for each of our spouses and children? I could live in those woods hunting every day and I would still only barely get by.


    If I want Elsa to have a safe and happy life there are 2 options. The first is give Elsa the ability to live independently. If I turned Elsa into a warrior queen, and I can, teach her academics and send her to live in a large town or city then not only would she have a large choice of suitors to choose, but also the ability to survive on her own and turn anyone who tries to take advantage of her into her bitch.


    The second option is a background. I never planned to stay in Oakbridge my entire life and intend to explore at the very least the north if not the other parts of the kingdom. If I want to make money while travelling my best bet is to become a sell sword. Sell-swords are basically mercenaries that do jobs that may involve violence. While a normal solitary sell-sword might not earn much money, a skilled one that¡¯s also in charge of a company of other sell-swords does. There are at least a dozen companies in the north alone who could pull together 50 or more men and the largest from what I hear is the Cragmen, who are 300 strong. There are rarely any jobs that require so many men outside of war so most of the time so they are mostly split up on different assignments and will instead have a headquarters in one of the cities, but they are basically minor lords to a lot of people. Some lords can¡¯t even field 50 men in their worse years, and will invite large company leaders to dine with, and even marry their second daughters to them so they can have some assurances in war time.


    I have no intention to be one of the most powerful men in the North, but if I can gather 2 dozen men together under my banner, I could easily intimidate any would be suitor so long as they''re not a lord and even then, they¡¯d think twice before laying a hand on Elsa.


    As I think over my options, I have decided it would be foolish to put all my eggs in one basket, so I will instead do both. I will make sure Elsa learns some self-defence techniques and knows how to read and write, while I will continue my cultivation and become a sell-sword. Although the qi in this world is lower than the old, I started cultivating 6 years earlier than my previous and all the tricks and skills i knew have been remembered. If I wanted to, I could have become a 1st tier cultivator at 6 and become the strongest 6-year-old on the continent. Instead I chose to put off my ascension in order to form a stronger base than in my last life. This way although the qi is weaker, I will be able to draw it in at afaster rate and where previously I would be lucky if I ever reached 2nd tier in this world, with y new foundation I should have a similar cultivation speed to that of my previous life. In fact with the clearly weaker organisms in this world I could probably reach the 3rd tier without any of the injuries that I suffered, and could live free and undeterred for a century or 2. Of course this is all very hypothetical and dependent on me not doing anything stupid like surrounded by an army or challenging knights before I am fully grown.


    When mum finally got home, Ed and I told her what happened. She shouted at Ed for a good 15 minutes before hugging him and me. We then sat down for dinner with lighter hearts and full bellies.

 chapter 8 - Knights and dreams 1

    Greta POV


    ¡°Brat!! Get out of the kitchen and go help Paul with the stables the storm isn¡¯t getting any better and the damn door needs to be fixed.¡± I shout at Ed.


    ¡°yes Greta, in just a second¡± The boy puts down the spoon he was cleaning to start heading outside.


    ¡°Wait, Ed! Grab your cloak, it might just be around the side but with the door off you¡¯ll get wet trying to fix it.¡± Helen reminds the boy before he can get away. Without even bothering to reply he just grabs his cloak from the rack and races outside.


    ¡°Hmmph. Not even a thank you, looks like someone needs another lesson in appreciation.¡± I mumble as the thoughts of latrines pass my mind.


    ¡°oh, leave him alone Greta. You know as well as I how much he¡¯s improved.¡± Helen, ever the mother hen, comes to protect her chicks from my wolfly thoughts.


    She is right though, it¡¯s been 2 years since the brat was first brought to me, and every morning since then he would come to help his mother in the kitchen. After a while I hired the boy as an assistant so I could have him help with other tasks around the inn. I have to spend another 5 coppers a week, but the boys strong and got a good attitude now, unlike the start when he would complain about every stench, scrape or difficult task. Like just now, if I were to send him to help when he started, he would have found at least 3 different excuses in the time it took me to cross this kitchen to whack his ears. Now not even enough time to raise my arm before he¡¯s out of the room and into the storm, though that might just be my arm getting slower. *sigh* it¡¯s a sad day when your slapping hand can no longer keep up with the youths of today.


    ¡°so, where¡¯s the rest of the brats?¡± I ask seeing as the cleaning is done and there¡¯s barely any patrons.


    ¡°Elsa is still in BurnBush visiting her aunt and nephew, she won¡¯t be back for another 2 days.¡± That¡¯s right, the little Marg found herself a husband last year, the first son to a horse merchant, and popped a little tyke soon after, forgot about that. ¡°and my eldest was up at Ser Roc¡¯s earlier so he¡¯s probably still playing with Ethel, dreaming of tourneys and knighthoods¡±


    He he, that reminds me of that bit of drama 2 years ago. When the harvest had just begun, Ethel Roc, Ethan¡¯s son came home in disgrace. See sons can only inherit their father¡¯s knighthood if they serve as either the squire or the page of a knight for at least 8 years. They can''t serve their own father and they have to serve consecutive years. The boy left when he was 8 and last year, he was 14. The knight he was serving had terminated his squireship prematurely, thus ruining the last 6 years of effort, and getting another was no easy task.Ethan was furious and was scolding his son so loud you could hear it from the other side of the river. Long story short the boy had apparently told his father something and since then he has been training his swordsmanship non-stop.


    ¡°Personally, I¡¯m just glad Ben has made a friend his own age. He plays with Ed and the other children, but it always ends up with him either leading them around, or scolding them. Sometimes I think he¡¯s too mature for his age.¡± Helen muses. ¡®Yes, the boy that looked after his family since he was 2 and now earns more than most of the grown men in the village is too mature¡¯ I think as I roll my eyes. I still think the boy might be a spirit in disguise, and only the fact he sometimes gives me some hares for free, has stopped me form testing a few of my theories.The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°Own age, Ethel¡¯s nearly a man now, if he had a bit more facial hair people would think he was one.¡± I object. Ethel had his 14th name day this spring and with his height he¡¯s nearly the spitting image of Ethan a few years ago, before his winkles truly set in.


    Though it is still strange that those 2 ended up together. Last year was probably when it first started and since then, they¡¯ve been inseparable. You¡¯d think Ethan keeping his son in training would prevent them meeting, but instead it has only strengthened the bond as shortly after getting together, Ben has started training for several hours a day with him. Mind boggling.


    Ben POV


    *CLASH* the sound of 2 weighted stick clashing, one from the above the other below, resounded throughout the front yard.


    ¡°Ben! Lift your left elbow more, block perpendicular, if you don¡¯t the sword will slide down and strike your hands. Ethel! Watch your front foot, if you place it too far forward then you will just be giving your opponent a free point.¡± Ethan shouts at us from the side, pointing out our flaws.


    it is the mid-morning now, and I have been training with the sword for the past hour. We started with stretches, before rehearsing our strikes and foot work, followed by light sparing with wooden swords with weights attached to make them feel like real swords.


    After a few rounds of repeated spars with short water breaks, we stopped as the clouds started to come around. ¡°Alright boys, stop now there appears to be a storm coming in. Ben, do you need to get home?¡± Ethan asks as he hears a distant rumble.


    ¡°Not really, catches are already cleaned and stored.¡± I reply. ¡°good, you can stay for lunch, I''ll tell Molly.¡± Ethan returns.


    ¡°Ben should we continue our plans?¡± Ethel asks in anticipation, glad to have the rest of the morning off.


    ¡°Sure¡± I reply to their pleasure.


    The current situation started last year when Ethel came to challenge me to duel. See his father had been putting Ethel through some gruelling training and the stress had gotten to him in his anger he apparently claimed he was already the greatest fighter his age so he had no right to keep scolding him. Ethan then laughed and said that not only was he not the best in the North, he wasn¡¯t even the best in the village, mentioning my name. That earned me both Ethel¡¯s ire and curiosity.


    The next day Ethel found me and challenged me to a fight, throwing a practice sword at the ground, another in his hands. When I asked him why I would want to fight, and even then, why would I use a sword when I am better with a bow, he told me it¡¯s training to be a knight. I said;


    ¡°I¡¯m not the son of a noble, unless I go to the battlefield, I can¡¯t be a knight.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to go to the battlefield, you just have to come first in the tourney¡± he refuted me.


    I was surprised, and when I asked him more, he went on to explain his plan. Ethel lost his chance to become a knight the easy way when Ser Dane dismissed him. Although he could supposedly become a squire to another knight, they would need to accept him first. Knights can only have a single squire, and they are responsible for their upkeep and training, which is a significant financial expense, not to mention the risk of face. A squire is a reflection of the knight¡¯s ability, a poor squire means a poor knight to the other nobility, usually the knights will only take in the sons of their friends and for most they will receive financial compensation for the time and cost. Ethan spent all of his savings convincing a Ser Kane, a knight he had some relationship with to take on Ethel. Not only does he not have the money to pay another one but they likely wouldn¡¯t take him if he did. A 14-year-old squire is considered uncommon, but still happens, but taking on a squire that has already been dismissed in disgrace is a risk not worth taking, especially when Ethan is just an ordinary 2nd generation knight with no notable achievements or lineage. IfEthan was a lord, rich or famous then some lesser knights would take Ethel to make a good connection with him.

 chapter 9 - Knights and Dreams 2

    If Ethel doesn¡¯t become a knight then when Ethan passes away the land will be returned to the original lord. While Ethel can still inherit the use of the land, he will be only leasing it and have to pay the same taxes as peasants, a full 80% rather than 40%. This means he can no longer afford to pay other people to work the land for him, and will either have to sell the lease, or become a farmer. Both mean the end of their nobility.


    That was when Ethel told his father of his plan. Lords are known to have many parties and tournaments over the year, to alleviate their boredom. The tournaments vary depending on the size and the nature of the house that holds them but they will almost always have 3 main events and scatter a number of smaller contests in between them. The 3 main events are the joust, sword fighting, and archery.


    The joust is exclusive to nobles, only knights and higher allowed to compete. The sword and archery, however are open to all, noble or peasant. The point of the second 2 are to encourage the training of these skills in their men and to attract talented warriors. The sword fighting however has an interesting unspoken rule. Whenever the houses have a big tournament, once a year to several depending on how large the house. If the winner of the melee is a knight, they will be invited to participate at the feasts head table, a great honour and a chance to make connections with the lord and their family, however if it is a commoner, then they will be awarded a knighthood and given a plot of land.


    It sounds incredibly generous but is actually a very good deal for the lords. See, while they are given a plot of land and the prize money for winning, the land is almost always either barren, deserted or in an isolated area. If the knight goes to his new land and cultivates it with his reward money, then they will be receiving additional taxes from land that originally gave them nothing. The money given is usually only enough to buy some tools and hire a few temporary labourers, while the skilled swordsmen will provide the protection necessary himself. A 3rd of the time the knights fail, going into debt and having to sell back the land to the lord for coppers. Another 3rd the knights don¡¯t even attempt to cultivate the land, instead they use the money to properly outfit themselves as knights and instead work for the lords as a part of their retinue, their land handed off to either their relatives to use, or left till one of their successors who have ample funds cultivate it themselves. And the final group successfully turn the land into a settlement that attract new settlers, becoming the beginning of a village that further fills the lord¡¯s pocket. The lords get some skilled fighter, more taxes and expand their territory. Of course, there are exceptions, the title is never given to known criminals and almost never to foreigner¡¯s, for the sake of not losing face with the other lords.


    Ethel won¡¯t have any of these problems, he will probably try to sell the land to whoever is the highest bidder and then just inherit his father¡¯s land which is already a profitable farm. I on the other hand am interested in the new legal benefits the title will give me. My previous plan was to become a successful sell-sword so as to provide protection to my family. However, if I become a knight then that becomes much quicker and easier.


    I don¡¯t particularly need the land either, but it would be nice to leave it to my children or family. While the knighthood would allow me to travel anywhere in Westeros and I would have to bow to no-one except my liege lord or the king. My family will also get the backing of a skilled knight wherever they go.This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there.


    Since then I have been training with the Roc family in swordsmanship. It took me quite some time to get the basics, and Ethel is still better than me, however I have several advantages over him.


    The first is that I have finally broken through to 1st tier warrior and have achieved some relief in knowing I am no longer as weak and vulnerable as before. 1st tier is when qi is able to fill my entire body, and able to control its movement. Like this I can concentrate my qi in the extremities of my body. I can now muster enough force over my entire


    Second is that while my experience from my past life may have not have include sword skills, I have a lot of experience dodging swords and fighting alongside swordsmen, so I am used to their tricks and patterns. Also, I have recently carved my own hunting bow and relearnt my previous skill. With it when we go for tourneys, I will be able to win the archery competition with ease, impressing lords and earning coin.


    Finally, I was 4 years younger than Ethel, I will probably participate when I am 16, so I have plenty of time to grow and train.


    The planning that Ethel was talking about was our discussions on the lords of the Noth and which we would like to serve under. The smaller lords would eb easier to impress as the tournaments have less competition, however they also have less tournaments and there is less honour and security with them. While the large lords will be competed for by everyone in and even some from outside the North.


    I am of the opinion that since we are still young it would be prudent to challenge a number of tournaments to gain experience and then when we are confident we have a chance, participate in the larger Lords tournaments. Not only do the larger lords have larger armies so greater security but they are the victims of less conflicts, so we are likely to have to have better prospects. Ethel was more into being knighted by the smaller lords as he would get a higher status with them and be able to be knighted faster.


    As we were debating the pros and cons of each lord, lunch came and Ethan announced that he planned to bring us to BushBurn for the winter market. When we asked why he told us it was to participate in the fights.


    ¡°What?! But dad, the fights there aren¡¯t tourneys, they¡¯re just a bunch of drunk sell-swords looking to earn a bit of extra coin¡± Ethel immediately was against the idea. I had to say I was agreement with Ethel. The BushBurn fights was at the end of the market organised by the local margrave where usually about a dozen fighters would each give 100 coppers to a pot and the winner would win the combined sum. It lasted about 2-3 hours, small crowd standing around and the total prize is less than I could earn just by selling items at the market.


    ¡°Quite boy, you will go! It would do you good to fight people other than the 2 of us and while the matches might be small time, they use similar rules and scoring to the proper ones. Ben, I can¡¯t make you go, but I think you should for the same reasons as Ethel.¡± Ethan snapped at his son before calmly addressing me.


    After considering his points, I thought it would be good experience and I was planning to visit Marg after the Market anyway, so I may as well to it sooner. Although I''ll miss the best time to sell my gear, I have already saved a substantial 8.35 stags over the years and can still sell them to locals for a lower price. Our practice fights have been getting dull. After a year we have seen just about all of each-others tricks and patterns, if we keep it up we will fall into bad habits when we face others, expecting them to fight like we are used to, and when they don¡¯t, getting surprised.


    As the weeks went on like that, continuing to train with my sword and bow skills the market came around and we set off, planning to stay in the town at the inn over the next 3 days and leave the morning after the fights.

 chapter 10 - Deja Vu

    ¡°What do you mean I can¡¯t enter?¡± I ask once again to the clerk in charge of sign ups.


    ¡°like I said, you¡¯re too young boy, we can¡¯t have little kids being beaten with sticks in front of the whole town.¡± the clerk, a skinny man who had worse handwriting than Elsa, said with exasperation.


    ¡°I can vouch for the boy¡¯s skill with a blade being a match for any man in this match.¡± Ethan tried to reason with the man for the second time.


    ¡°Ser Roc, I understand your predicament, but the margrave has set the rules, and I must follow them. This event is for the entertainment of the town and we can¡¯t risk the chance of your squire making a mistake and getting hurt. Please understand.¡± It seems even Ethan¡¯s noble status wasn¡¯t enough to get the man to look the other way. If we told him that I wasn¡¯t even his squire then it would only decrease our chances. I would respect his integrity, if said aspect wasn¡¯t currently annoying me.


    ¡°Sorry Ben, it completely slipped my mind that they wouldn¡¯t let you in. Honestly you behave so much like an adult that I''d think you were a dwarf if you weren¡¯t so good looking.¡± Ethan says with a wry smile, trying to cheer me up with a light joke and a bit of flattery.


    ¡°It¡¯s alright Ser Ethan, please wish Ethel good luck for me, I think I''m just going to look around the market.¡± I dismiss Ethan¡¯s concerns with a wave and head back to the main street. Though I am a little annoyed that I couldn¡¯t participate, unlike Ethel I have fought many opponents in the past, more often than not to the death. As for the rules I already learnt them from the introduction and can always watch the last match of the day for the best idea of it. The summary is that single combat inside a certain area, using a wooden practice sword to hit an arm or a leg that¡¯s 1 point, torso is 2 and the head is 3. Best to 5 wins the match, every time someone is hit, they stop and restart their positions.


    What I''m most annoyed about is that I have nothing to do. I already visited the market and Marg over the last 2 days and I''ve seen just about everything.


    *Whine*


    I stopped dead in my tracks. Listening to that sound brought back memories, of adventure, friendship and home. As I approach a nearby stall that wasn¡¯t there the past 2 days, I see several cages with small new-born pups inside.


    ¡°Hello young lad, I can see you interested in our dogs. These are Alaunt hounds also called a boarhound. They are called that because they have been known to fight to the death to protect their masters when a boarhunt has gone wrong.¡± man in charge of the stall beamed at me when I approached, likely noticing my training leather and practice sword by my side. I come across as the son or squire to a knight, either one would be a potential customer, either for myself or for my family.


    ¡°I haven¡¯t seen you the past couple of days, why sell these on the last day of the market?¡± I ask as I approach one of the cages. He exaggerated his sales pitch, boarhounds are called that because they are used for hunting larger game and while they grow to be quite big, they rely on packs of hounds to kill boars or the more dangerous variety of prey.


    ¡°Well the margrave¡¯s hound recently had a large litter so he picked a few that wound inherit the hunting tradition and left the rest to me to sell. I was told this only yesterday, so you¡¯re in luck for getting such a great offer.¡± the man started sell me the idea of buying already. I could tell he¡¯s not used to sales, otherwise he never would have told me that the best pups were already chosen, thus lowering the price of the rest of them.


    I didn¡¯t care whether the previous owner didn¡¯t want them. As I looked down at a small brown pup, eyes still closed and pushing the hay about as it moved, I made a decision. I bought the pup for the price of 2 stags, pleasing the seller, as well as a large blanket and a leather sack with milk. When I picked him up he squirmed and whined at the unfamiliar sensation and smell, but that¡¯s to be expected, so I just held him firmly and let him tire himself out. Before feeding the pup, who I named Brutus in honour of my old friend, I headed back to the inn and asked if I could book one of the stable spaces for the night, as the inn didn¡¯t allow animals in the rooms.If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    After setting up a sleeping space for Brutus and myself, I intend to sleep in the stables tonight to have Brutus adapt to my smell as fast as possible and keep him safe, I got out the flask of milk and opened the top. I may have purchased the pup primarily due to sentimental reasons, however I have no intension on letting him become just a pet. I intend to turn him into a tamers companion, and to do that there is 2 things needed.


    The second requires time and that is training. The first step however can be done immediately. As I concentrate my qi in my hand, I cut it with my hunting knife, allowing my infused blood to flow into the milk, which I then feed to the hungry pup.


    Before I mentioned that tamer¡¯s have the ability to communicate with their companions and it is through this method. My feeding it my qi constantly over its infancy period, it becomes accustomed to me and my energy. Just like I can sense qi in the air, Brutus will learn to sense qi in me. When raising animals, the trick is to get them to associate certain tones and words with certain actions. Scolding the animal with an angry tone tells it to stop what it is doing, praising in a happy tone encourages certain actions and so on. The use of I gives another method of communicating that no one else can see or hear allows for silent commands and when reinforced with the other communication methods it helps the beast learn lessons faster


    If I''m really lucky then Brutus will learn to sense not just my qi, but the airs as well, growing to be a magical beast. This is quite rare, and this is why most tamers in my previous world prefer to buy or catch the young of magical beasts rather than animals, so they have a greater starting point. With that comes increase strength, lifespan and most importantly, intelligence. With that Brutus will evolve from a tool to a true equal and friend.


    It was nearly dark when the Roc¡¯s returned, Ethan drunk on his son¡¯s shoulder. Seems Ethel won the contest and received 1.3 stags, that he spent on wine for his father. Ethan, proud of his son, accepted and they drank for the last hour before returning to the inn. As Ethan went inside the bar for more liquor Ethel came to me and told me he was leaving.


    ¡°What are you talking about, where would you go?¡± I asked confused. Nothing in the past weeks indicated any ideas about leaving.


    ¡°One of my opponents today was from the Raven Claw mercenary group, he told me I fight really well and offered to let me join. Ben, I haven¡¯ been getting any better for a while, yet just today I learnt several tricks and moves I didn¡¯t know before. I want to go with them so I can become a knight, something I can¡¯t do in Oakbridge.¡± Ethel told me. He seemed quite reluctant and was earnest in trying to convince me his reasons. Likely he thought I would be betrayed that he was leaving me behind.


    ¡°Ethel, don¡¯t worry about me I understand. However, are you sure this is what you want to do? Being a sell-sword isn¡¯t going to guarantee you get stronger, in fact you could just die within the year.¡± I try to remind him of the dangers of fighting outside of the ring. ¡°Out there, there are no rules, the enemy could come at you with any weapon, from any direction and any number. It only takes a single stab from the back, or a stray arrow and you will die without ever seeing you killers face. You don¡¯t even need to be killed, wound your leg or your hand and you will be either crippled at worse, at best the injury could give you a great disadvantage in tournaments, preventing you from ever becoming a knight.¡±


    ¡°I know, but it¡¯s not like being a knight is a safe occupation either. Hundreds if not more died in the king¡¯s war, and as knights we will be obligated to go to war if the lord does too. At least this way I''ll experience a bit of freedom and if there¡¯s trouble I''ll have 30 brothers watching my back.¡± Ethel counters, sounding like he¡¯s repeating someone else¡¯s words, likely that Raven.


    *Sigh* ¡°Alright, it seems I can¡¯t stop you, though it¡¯s really your dad you need to convince.¡± If Ethan knew his son¡¯s plans, no amount of armour or sword skills will save him.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, why do you think I bought him wine.¡± Ethel smirks at me, revealing his deception.


    The next morning Ethan woke the inn up with a bout of cursing, his son¡¯s belongings disappeared, and only a letter in its place.


    The next day we returned home, Ethan understandably quiet and I had no intention to broach that prickly subject. When we arrived home, we went our separate ways, I expressed my thanks for bringing me and carried Brutus to my home. I¡¯d like to think that the affectionate welcome was due to missing me, and it probably was at the beginning, but the fact none of them even looked at me for the rest of the evening made their feelings quite clear. ¡®I mean I can understand the kids, but even you Mom?¡¯ I sulk in the corner, comforting myself with thoughts of harshly training my new hunting partner.

 chapter 11 - Hunts, Discipline and Returns

    The wind gently blows through the oak trees, rustling of branches startles the stag, he lifts his head and scans the surrounding. There is a small brook that it is leading its family to, some saplings across the water and a line of evergreen close to the right. (water deer)


    The shrubs seem suspicious, a light twist of his head signals them to stay, the doe keeping the fawn quiet, as the stag approaches the bush. It is just a few metres away when it stopped. A few ear and nose twitches later and it signalled the all clear. The 3 deer slowly moved to the stream, the doe leans to the water, receiving and arrow to the top of its skull.


    There is a burst of motion from the saplings, a large shadow dashes out and towards the fawn as it stands frozen. The stag barks sharply to the young, it¡¯s mate already dismissed, prompting a rapid retreat, only to receive another arrow to its neck. The lone child flees with all its might, zigzagging to try and through off its pursuer, ultimately futile. Brutus jumps on the smaller prey and snaps its neck with one powerful bite, blood dripping from its fangs.


    About this time, I separate from the sapling tree I was hiding next to and with a quick jump I''m on the other side of the brook. The doe dragged from the water, arrow still in its brain, and a make my way to the stag to check that it was killed and not just stunned. Around this time Brutus walks over to me, catch still in his mouth, placing it before me and sits on his haunch waiting with a smile on his face.


    I wait a few seconds before stroking his head. ¡°Good Brutus¡± I tell him, keeping sentences short to prevent confusion, only calling him Brutus and not ¡®boy¡¯, as well as sending a swell of qi to convey positive feelings. Brutus understands and begins to rub his face into mine and licks it all over, blood covering me in no time. I don¡¯t mind, I still need to skin the deer and that will be very bloody. Part of the reason I choose the brook to hunt is that it makes clean up easier. I used to hunt in the clearing but when I came home one day after a particularly large catch, I scared mum half to death and sent Elsa into tears. Ed only asked what I got.


    As I pick up the 2 grown deer, both about 15kg each, Brutus dragging his catch another 8-9kg, I think back on how Brutus has progressed. In the 3 years I have had him there was much good news and quite a few setbacks.


    The first year Brutus successively became a magic beast. Thanks to my qi infused blood and constant help he was able to sense the qi in the air. He has not reached the 1st tier yet, but with my training it is only a matter of time, and he has already shown the signs. He is only 3 years old, about an early adolescent in his growth yet is already the size of a grown boarhound about 40 kg. He has strong teeth and as demonstrated he possesses the speed and power to bring down mid-sized prey. Although he has the size of a grown dog his mind still had to catch up.


    We have tried this sort of hunt several times in the past but it has either failed completely or Brutus will fail to pull his weight. The way this hunt starts is in the preparation. First, I found this brook and then I will look for animal trails that lead to the brook. Finding the ideal trail and hiding spot, the hiding spot needs to be 30-50 metres ideally for the first shot, allowing myself another 30 metres which I can kill the second target from. My short bow is something I made myself, and has a maximum range of about 150 metres when arched, but if I want to kill with a straight shot it needs to be under 80. Me and Brutus would wait perfectly still for hours until the prey arrives. In the past Brutus would either bark immediately, thus scaring the prey, or he would fail his command.


    By sending qi in a certain way I have trained Brutus to charge and attack the prey. This allows me to silently coordinate with Brutus. If he doesn¡¯t start running the second I shoot the arrow, then either he runs too early causing the stag in this case to escape the range of my second arrow, or too late and the fawn outruns him. Either way he loses me several kilos of meat and leather. When he barks, ruining the hunt I would hold his head to the ground for 5 minutes, when he is allowed up, I head home while ignoring his barks and whines. If he messes up his attack then when cooking the meat, I would make him wait his turn until I am finished before he eats his. If he dares to not hand over the catch, or if dares to bite at me, that will earn him if I''m feeling generous a minute of painful pressure on his neck, or if the bite case... I will tie him by the legs and hang him upside down the tree while I skin the deer.This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    The saying ¡®Don¡¯t bite the hand that feeds you¡¯ is a good one but I like to add a second line, ¡®don¡¯t bite the hand that feeds you, or you will feed the hand¡¯. This sounds like a threat but make no mistake that this is serious, if he continued to bite me, I would have sold him to the butchers before he became big enough to threaten me or my family. It happens all the time in the North, if a farmer¡¯s dog has puppies the best 1 or 2 will sometimes be kept and they try to sell the rest. If no one buys them then they are either traded to the butcher for some sausages or killed and eaten themselves.


    But don¡¯t let this morbid story disillusion you to our current relationship. Brutus has proven himself as a worthy hunting partner and is now my blood. Anyone tries to bring a blade near him will pay dearly, should he lose the ability to hunt I will care for him and when he dies, he will be buried with dignity.


    We drag the bodies to a clearing where they are hung upside down and drained of blood. This is where I usually bring our kills, it has racks and a wheel barrow to take the bodies back. I skin the hides off to turn into leather, but the rest of the animals are sold to the butcher and we aren¡¯t paid extra to strip the meat, if anything he would claim we forgot some of the meat on the bones and pay me less for the decrease in weight. After skinning the bodies and rolling the hides I tell Brutus to stay and guard the corpses. I run back to the brook for a quick wash and head back. Brutus is given a clean with a water skin.


    I place the bodies in the barrow and place a tarp over it to keep the flies off. I push the barrow through the rest of the woods till we reach the clearing and can see the village. After walking for half an hour, saying hello to the loggers scattered about, we reach the butchers, receive payment and head home. I go inside with a smile on my face, greeted with a group of;


    ¡°Surprise!!¡± They shouted. I was expecting something like this, but Brutus wasn¡¯t so his surprise was a lot more genuine than mine.


    ¡°Congrats on turning 14 Ben. You¡¯re almost a man now.¡± Ethan greets me. He was in a bit of a slump after Ethel left and though he¡¯s gotten better over the years. Ethel hasn¡¯t returned home once in the 4 years since he left, though he does send letters every 6 months or so, telling us about how he¡¯s been and that he¡¯s well. He still misspells some words, to his father¡¯s annoyance, and I think the reason he stays away is that he knows his father will beat the living crap out of him.


    ¡°Thank you, Ethan.¡± I say and receive his gift. It is a sword, sharp and new. About 50cm long it would be classified as a short sword, just right for my legth. I test the grip and balance, not the best I''ve seen, but it will do the job and if maintained well it would last a while.


    The other gifts were somewhat less significant, but nice all the same. Ed got me a knife he bought at the market, good for carving meat. Elsa gave me a scarf she knit which would be great for the winter months. I have to say I liked Mum¡¯s present the best. It was a lemon cake with sugared cherries on top. Cherries were my favourite things in the past and it hasn¡¯t changed now. We all gathered around our small table and began a fantastic feast of chicken, roast potatoes, carrots and orange juice. We were just about to start eating the lemon cake when we heard a knock on the door. My mother went to open it, the guest spoke.


    ¡°Hi there Helen, it¡¯s good to see you again, is Ben here, I''m here to wish him a happy Birthday... Oh shit what are you doing here!?¡± the speakers voice sounds more and more familiar, and just as I''m about to place it Ethan stands up and rushes to the door, startling the guest.


    ¡°Bloody fool, bloody stupid fool.¡± Ethan grabs his son and embraces him in a hug.


    The following events could be described as touching, funny and annoying considering they were keeping me from my cake. After hugging Ethel and being hugged back, Ethan suddenly punched Ethel in the face, knocking him to the ground. He then declared that he was returning home to fetch the practice swords and if he hasn¡¯t improved since then he better be prepared for the beating of a lifetime. Like that he stormed off leaving the rest of us, my family was just standing around confused while I was thinking how to bring our thoughts back to dessert, deciding a direct invitation would be best.


    ¡°Ethel, good to see you, want to come in to join us, we were just about to have some lemon cake.¡± I grab his hand and lift him to his feet. The guy had grown since we last met. Ethel was about 160 last we met and about 75kg, now he¡¯s about 185cm and 100kg, well-built and callused hands from practice.


    ¡°Actually, Ben I was wondering if I could speak to you for a bit, it¡¯s quite important.¡± Ethel tries to dissuade my plans, rubbing his jaw and looking a bit sheepish, he likely wasn¡¯t expecting to ask in such a manner.


    ¡°Go on Ben, it¡¯s been ages since you have seen each other, we¡¯ll wait for you 2.¡± Mum needlessly mentions from the side. Resigning myself to a lack of cake, we walk off down the road and when we¡¯re at the bridge he broaches the subject.

 chapter 12 - Boy to Man

    Ethel POV


    That was not what I was expecting from the old man. I mean why would he just punch someone he hasn¡¯t seen for years, he must be going senile. No, I did not forget that I was the reason that he hasn¡¯t seen me for years, but I''m a grown man, he can¡¯t just treat me like a child anymore.


    I look at Ben and think to myself, ¡®I thought I had grown a lot, but Ben has clearly done so as well¡¯. I can¡¯t tell so well, but I''m pretty sure that he¡¯s about the same size as me when I left. I thought I was pretty tall for my age but Ben looks to match me in that regard.


    *sigh* ¡®I thought size would at least be something I would have over him, but that doesn¡¯t seem to be for long¡¯. I have always been sort of jealous of Ben, I mean the difference in our lives should have been to my advantage, but it was the opposite. I am the son of a knight, I was gifted in swordsmanship from young, even that rotten knight Kane agreed that if I kept it up, I could become a tourney champ in the future, he was where I got my original plan in the beginning.


    I challenged Ben when I was 13 and I admit it was both one of my best decisions and most embarrassing moments of my life. He was nearly 5 years younger than me, yet he had blood on his hands, corpses over his shoulder and muscles belonging to a horse. He was so quick I almost couldn¡¯t keep up, and if it wasn¡¯t for him not being used to the sword, he might have won. Since then we trained together and he became my best friend.


    The problem was I was the only one not improving. I was as good as dad when I left and Ben was only catching up to me, I didn¡¯t have a challenge. So, when that guy from Raven¡¯s Claw, Harold, invited me I took the opportunity. I packed my stuff while dad was drunk and snuck out to catch Harold on the road.


    The first month was pretty boring, I was the youngest and the smallest in the group, and my squad was a new one. They had expanded last year from 24 to 30, going from 2 squads to 3, with the new squad formed of new members,except for a few like our leader an old guy, Jack who was 45, though he could still punch my lights out when I called him that. The first month we took the easy jobs helping merchants in the area around Winterfell, where we were more labourers than guards, though Jack showed us a few moves.


    It was around October that we got busy, the entire Raven¡¯s Claw met up and headed north. The Long Winter had just started, and we moved to LastHearth, the Umber Household, where we would patrol the Belt, the land between there and the Wall, the legendary structure that you could see, barely, from miles away. A wall that spans 300 miles and is over 200 metres tall, covered in ice all year, manned by the legendary Men of the Nights Watch. It has been there for longer than any can remember, protecting the lands of men from the mad Wildings that roam the haunted woods. That is who we fought, Wildlings who had snuck past the Wall to the North. We were tasked with defending the eastern farms close to the mountains.


    It was the morning when we were travelling along the path and we saw smoke billowing in the distance. The 1st squad, the only one that was mounted other than the lieutenants, rode ahead while we were tasked to follow. I ra with the rest, tiring with my pack and armour equipped, and when we saw the farm we saw that it had been burned down, dead bodies were everywhere, some of the women were particularly gruesome, they were naked and had looked to be raped before being impaled, the spears not meant to kill but to torture.


    I and many of the other new boys threw up, even several of the veterans were struggling to hold it in. We saw the Captain, Hava, and the rest of the 1st squad coming from the woods leading a pair of women.


    ¡°These women were survivors of the attack, say that a group of a dozen wildlings came at night, they managed to run to the woods to hide as they slaughtered the others.¡± The had women turned pale and nearly cried again if their tears weren¡¯t already dried, when Hava said slaughtered. ¡°Here¡¯s the plan, Micah, you lead second squad into the woods to the northeast, that¡¯s where they said they went.¡± Micah was second in command of the Raven¡¯s Claw, and he was the best archer. The second squad were made of people who we either good archers or trackers. ¡°James, pick another man and ride to LastHearth, tell the guards what happened, the rest of 1st, pair up and scout the surroundings, look for survivors or another attack. I don¡¯t want any of you fuckers on your own, you need a piss you better hold your dick in one hand and your partner in the other.¡± That got a few chuckles. ¡°The rest of you find the least burnt building and clear it up, scavenge any supplies you can from these. Meet at report at sunset.¡±


    We all got to work, and by the time the sun set everyone except for James was back with zero accidents. Micah and the others even found the wildlings camp, and we made a plan to ambush them that night. The 2 main squads were to attack from the north from both sides, while my squad was waiting in the basin to catch any trying to flee. That was the night i first killed a man.


    The plan went well, we caught them by surprise and killed half in the first minute, the other half ran to us. I still think that Hava and Micah let them run on purpose to see if we new boys would spill blood. There was this large man, dressed in skins and bushy beard, a fierce look in his eyes and smelling of shit, he charged the man to the right of me, a large wooden club with a stone tied to it in hand. He knocked the man, Tal, on the floor and was lifting to finish him when he spotted me approach from the side. I started to panic when I remembered dad and Jack¡¯s training, found my footing and formed my stance, waited for him to initiate, and if he didn¡¯t, I would start testing with light strikes. He was impatient, swung at me, a war cry bellowing, as I used my sword to block, bending with the blow to absorb power, and throw the strike to the side. I swiped with my sword and made my first mistake. I was so used to training strikes, that I only put in a little strength, the blow just drawing blood, which surprised me, instead of being fatal.If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    We both stepped back, both shook by the altercation. He, because he almost died and me because I almost killed. My opponent panted and tried to regain his breath, his eyes adapted to the light and he got a better look at me. I was shorter than him, quite a bit, and was wearing leather with bronze guards, sword in hand. He didn¡¯t rush this time, carefully approaching me, making sure not to put too much weight on his left leg, which was bleeding from a cut, likely from an arrow. We started fighting again, I aimed for the upper body to start, trying to trick him into forgetting his leg. He blocked frantically, the club unsuited for such duelling, more for crushing heads in raids. I took a step back, feigning weakness, he took the bait with a wild swing, forgetting he put his weight on his left. As he winced, I thrust my sword before his club came down, right into his gut.


    He dropped his club and grabbed my shoulders, it seemed he was trying to push me away, but he was already too weak to fight me. I could see the fear in his eyes and fee his breathe as he desperately tried to live. I kept my sword there and tried to shove it deeper, all to try and kill him as fast as possible. When I felt his arms go weak and his legs buckle, I finally withdrew my sword. As I did blood flowed in greater quantities, followed by his intestines that fell to the floor, his body then falling on top of those.


    We cleaned the battlefield and checked our wounded, many of us, myself included were in shock that night and we headed back to camp. The captain brought out the wine and I drank myself to sleep that night, avoiding the dreams of terror. The following night I wasn¡¯t so lucky, the nightmare of what I did to that man, sometimes he would ask me why, others he would try to strangle me in revenge, others he would be replaced with myself, the only similarity was that I would wake up sweating and panting.


    Tal, the guy I saved, helped as he would talk with me about it, but no offense to him but he¡¯s hardly a priest. The real help came when we returned to Last Hearth and Hava brought the entire company to the brothel. I had thought about going to one before with my pay, the others even talked about it before, but we were forbidden by Jack, saying we could only go when permitted by the captain.


    When Hava brought us there he told us, ¡°You can only become a true man when you have popped your 2 cherries. Your first fight, and your first fuck. You did the first one, now to complete the trial.¡± He then led us in and I experienced one of the greatest nights of my life. The captain had used the money rewarded by the lord for that fight to rent all the girls in that brothel. It wasn¡¯t the best place in town and they weren¡¯t the best girls, but they were soft, kind and they were ours.


    I have been in many more fights since then, some we won, some we won, half the new boys from then are dead, and we lost as many of the vets, but we replaced the numbers over the years, getting stronger overall and more united. We became one of the best companies in the east coast, with plans to expand, but we have lacked the fame to expand. Even if we can find more people to join us the large lords will choose the other more famous companies over us.


    That was when Balon committed treason. The Ravens were in Winterfell when the news arrived, Hava was debating with the lieutenants if we should head south to the Riverlands. They have less competition down there, but on the contrary, there are less jobs and our fame is in the North, going south would have meant starting all over again. That talk was put to a stop when we found out that the Iron Islands had rebelled against the king and we were going to war.


    I never met anyone from the Iron Isles, they kept to themselves, and even when they traded with the North it was always on the West coast. Jack has been known to go off about them, as well as the rest of the oldies, claiming they were nothing but a bunch of smelly fish fuckers, who we would be raided by every year.


    The Lord Paramount had declared that he would support the king in his war, but unlike the last one against the Mad King, this time it was voluntary for the other lords. One of the lords, Maccah of House Moss, asked us to support him. The lord had used us before and thought highly of us. However, House Moss was a small house and could only field about 30 men, and couldn¡¯t afford to pay us much. He wanted to participate in this war to earn honour and gratify himself to the Starks. Hava agreed to the low price, telling us that he both trusted Moss and that this was our chance to earn fame. With the right to loot we could make up for the low income, and Moss would help to alleviate our supply expenses.


    We were given a month to say goodbye to our families and meet at Moat Caitlin where we would board ships and depart for the Islands. I hadn¡¯t been home for nearly 4 years now, but this war seemed especially dangerous. I figured I should see dad in person, and as I was thinking of home, I thought about Ben and how he would be doing.


    As I travelled home, I got an amazing idea in my head. I should invite him to join me. I might not be able to recruit anyone to the Raven¡¯s by my own authority, but even if he hadn¡¯t improved a bit since we were last together, just his skill as a hunter would get him part of Micah¡¯s squad for sure. And together we might even have the chance to be knighted on the field. The thought became more and more appealing as I travelled, the image of the 2 of us, he with his bow, me with sword, cutting down foes this way and that, earning the praise of the king and knighted for our valour on the field.


    That brought us back to the current moment. I planned to see dad after meeting Ben, and not getting knocked on my ass first, but in the end the result is the same. So, I explain the situation to him, why I came home and my plan.


    ¡°So, what do you think, it¡¯s a great idea right? With the 2 of our skills, working together, we should be knighted with no problem. Even if we don¡¯t, we are sure to get noticed and it would only be a matter of time before we are picked. The rewards we will get are sure to be amazing as well.¡± I tell him the smile on his face growing as I talk, clear that he sees my vision as well.


    He waits, and after he¡¯s sure I am finished, he speaks;


    ¡°No¡±

 chapter 13 - Reasons

    Ben POV


    ¡°No¡± I tell Ethel, trying to, and failing, to keep the smile off my face.


    ¡°No!? What do you mean no?¡± He asks me after he recovers from the shock. ¡°This is the best chance to get knighted, wars like this don¡¯t just happen like this. I asked my friends in the Raven¡¯s and they know of at least a dozen people who were knighted in the last war, with dozens if not hundreds were knighted that they don¡¯t know of. I have improved a lot since we last met, don¡¯t let earlier misguide you.¡± He tries to convince me in case I didn¡¯t understand the earlier argument. ¡°i am the best fighter in my squad, I was made second in command and I have fought in dozens of battles. I can see you have gotten stronger than before, you¡¯re as strong as I was and I saw those deer, you killed three in a single day. With your bow Micah would be an idiot not to let you join. Why don¡¯t you want to come with me so we can win honour and glory?¡± He demands.


    ¡°I can¡¯t feed my family with honour and glory.¡± That confused him. ¡°You say that hundreds were knighted in the last war, that¡¯s true. But that was because hundreds of knights died and thousands of soldiers. You say we could get noticed by the king and other high lords, but this is a war where the greatest fighters in the kingdom will be gathered, and unlike in a tourney there is no guarantee that we will be seen by them. They could be storming the gates of Pyke while we are taking a mine or fishing village. It¡¯s all a matter of luck. Even rewards, this is war, it is expensive, not even a war for gaining new territory, just reclaiming old ones, there will be few looting because the king won¡¯t allow the Isles to become completely desolate, and even if he did the Iron Isles are even poorer than the North, their wealth is concentrated in their fleet of ships, which will either be sunk or taken by the king. It is a war with low rewards and high risks, with a good chance that of no rewards at all.¡±


    My breakdown of the large picture had him stumped for a while, leaning against the bridge and one hand running through his hand. ¡°How do you know all this stuff?¡± He asks me.


    ¡°Unlike you I always enjoyed reading, Greta let me use any of hers, and I asked a merchant who lives in BushBurn if when he travels to Winterfell if he will pick up any history books for me. I have to pay him a decent price, but it¡¯s worth it to know the general situation in the kingdom, and he¡¯s the brother of Marg¡¯s husband, and I give him some good catches for free every now and then, so I''m pretty sure he isn¡¯t tricking me. I plan to travel the kingdom one of these days, see the world and knowing where danger will likely occur is a good way to avoid it.¡± I explain to him the value of knowledge. It¡¯s not his fault, unlike me who during my younger years, when I was too small to train to any significant state while remaining healthy, I had nothing better than to read, while he was training as a squire and that only required basic literacy to accomplish.


    He started to get a self-mocking smile, and asked me, ¡°So, I''m about to risk my life for little to no rewards, any advice, oh wise maester?¡± he mocks me while seeking comfort. Honestly, I can¡¯t see much solid advantages, but I can think of a way to make this worthwhile, which he actually mentioned himself earlier in his story.


    ¡°To be fair your captains goal for going to war is a relatively good one, gaining fame and reputation so he can improve the standing of his company in the North. It is a relatively easy goal, just going to war will give your company a battle record, and it will give himself and the company better prospects for years to come. Your problem was aiming too high. You wanted the 2 of us to gain the eye of the king, greatest man in the country, when we are just a pair of children, skilled but not the best. Your captain has 30 men backing him up yet he only wants to raise his standing with the lords in the North. Instead of trying to appeal to the high lords, start small, focus on showing your capability to your captain, he might promote you, or to Lord Moss, he might be a small house and you don¡¯t want to become his knight, but if he spreads your name to his friends then you will earn a reputation for bravery and skill, making it easier to be knighted in the future.¡± I explain to him while usinga few stones to represent the difference in standing, Ethel is the smallest pebble, and the king is the largest boulder under the stream.


    ¡°Then why don¡¯t you want to go with me, together we could both accomplish it much easier?¡± He led me back to the topic of joining him.


    ¡°I have to stay and provide for my family. This plan is one that will only start paying off in a years time at least, in the mean time my family will be without my income. My siblings aren¡¯t little kids anymore, they are grown and they eat a lot, my mum can¡¯t afford to give to give them the same lifestyle with her job alone. Sure, they might not starve short term, but they will be eating little other than bread for months. Besides I saw what happened to your dad when you left and I don¡¯t want to put mum through it.¡± I finish with a low dig. I might have respected his decision to leave to pursue his dreams, but not telling his dad when he left and not coming back for several years, that was a dick move.


    ¡°What, did something happen?¡± Ethel asks, a bit worried now. Seeing his dad still healthy earlier probably relieved some of his guilt, not knowing it took him nearly 2 years to recover.Unauthorized content usage: if you discover this narrative on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°The first year after you left, he went into a deep depression, he hit the bottle and would rarely leave the house. It took both your mum and Helen weeks to get him to walk around the town again and months of me pestering him for lessons to work back into shape.¡± The knowledge is starting to sink in, the guilt clear on his face. ¡°Your dad has been training you to become a knight all your life, he knew that you would eventually go to war and have to kill people, though probably not this soon. My mum doesn¡¯t even like that I go hunting in the woods even after all these years. She can¡¯t wait for me to start going to tournaments because she thinks that while they are violent, they rarely end in death or serious injury. I have only told her that would aim for the archery and not the melee. Not only are they safer by far, but they have no chance of becoming a knight, where I would have to go to war. I plan to tell her when I am 16 and going to my first tourney. If she knew that I was going to war then she would likely collapse.¡± I tell him my reasons for not joining him, leaving out possibly the most vital, but the one least likely to convince him. I have no interest in being called brave.


    In my past life I took countless risks, was responsible for protecting thousands of people and led entire armies to war. I don¡¯t want that this life. I want to explore the world, see amazing people and cultures and live how I want to. I won¡¯t give up my loved ones or my duty to them, but I want to pursue some of my own happiness this time.


    Ethel went quiet for a while and we decided to head back. I went home to finish my cake, finally, and Ethel returned home to see his mother. I later learned that he and his dad fought, with Ethel winning easily, and they spent the rest of the night celebrating. When Ethel left after 2 days, we all said goodbye, I gave him some of the toughest leather gloves I had and a solid cape for those cold nights on the sea.


    2 years later Ben POV


    Today¡¯s the day, my equipment is prepared, I have my bow, sword, money and clothes. The only task left to do is tell mum.


    In a weeks'' time Lord Stark is having a tournament for his eldest sons 13th birthday, the tournament will be at Winterfell, and there will be a good chance that the winner of the melee will be knighted. Even if they aren¡¯t the prize money for the melee and archery will be 20 dragons each, after 10 years I have made about 10 dragons. With that sort of money, I could a decent horse for future travels and a house.


    I got home and opened the door. It was dinner time and mum was serving us grilled salmon from the stream, potatoes and veg. Ed and Elsa were there, Brutus was waiting at the side as well. Ed was a bit smaller than me at 160, but we both had room to grow yet, he had been taking swordsman lessons from Ethan and said he planned to join the guard next year when he was old enough, with a strong body and decent skills he would be accepted without a doubt and have good chance of leading the guards in the future. Elsa clearly took after mother in looks, with the increased income with Brutus helping hunt, our family was as rich as the Roc family, just below the old margrave, who retired a year ago and was replaced by another, who is in his forties and has a cheerful personality, Elsa could afford to dress up in nice clothing, has several dresses and even a few copper necklaces, which she brings out at market time.


    She is a beautiful young lady, in my mind at least and she has started to get involved in romance. Not flirting or relationships yet, thankfully, but rather she and her friends like to gossip and hear about the stories of nobility, where true love always triumphs. I have no intention of bursting her bubble just yet, though I won¡¯t protect it from being broken.


    As we finished eating, I brought up the topic of the tournament. ¡°Mum, you know about the tournament that the Starks are having next week, the one people are talking about at the tavern.? I intend to participate. I know all the rules and I have prepared the money for the entry.¡± I start with the light stuff, she has always known I was going to go to the tournament, just as an archer.


    She pauses for several seconds, closes her eyes and then speaks. ¡°Haaaa, I knew this day would come, you are a grown man and you would eventually leave for some adventure, though I do wish you gave me a bit more notice, I would have helped you prepare. Maybe I can still pack your lunch, would you like some sandwiches for the journey?¡± she smiles, perhaps seeing through my concerns that she might be opposed, but her acceptance was welcome, just hope it would hold for what was to follow.


    I take a deep breath. ¡°Mum, I will not just be participating in archery. I will do the melee, and try to become a knight.¡± I let it out, keep it short and ready to counter her arguments.


    She was about to get up, but when she hears that she faces me and said. ¡°I know that, why would you remind me?¡± she tells me, the confusion in her voice genuine.


    I open my mouth, of all the arguments she could have used, those weren¡¯t what I was expecting. It seems she noticed my surprise as she started to laugh. ¡°Ben you have been friends with Ethel from the moment he mentioned knights, you practice your sword every day, and you are one of the most efficient person I know.¡± She lists some of my characteristics. ¡°I don¡¯t know where you get it from honestly, but you wouldn¡¯t waste your time practicing something if you didn¡¯t think it had value. What other option was there for you but knighthood?¡± it wasn¡¯t just mum laughing at this point, my siblings were chuckling as well. I hadn¡¯t told them either for fear they would tell mother, but it seems they are all a lot more perceptive than I thought. The points she just mentioned were pretty obvious when i think about them, and I don¡¯t think they are stupid, but I guess I always just kept my first memories of them in mind when I look at them, not realising they are all grown up. Mum is a middle-aged lady who has raised me for 16 years now, Ed is almost a grown man who has his future planned out, and Elsa while still young, probably knows more about the village happenings than me.


    The night ended on a happy tone, the following morning mum kissed me goodbye, the kids hugged me, and I left with Brutus across the bridge and on to the Kingsroad where I will head north to Winterfell.

 chapter 14 - Winterfell

    Me and Brutus were walking down the Kingsroad, travelling for the second day in a row now, when we finally arrived in Winter town, the largest town beside White Port in the North. There were supposed to be about 200,000 people living here, though the numbers fluctuate around the year, with the highest being about 300,000 in winter, and built right next to the Winterfell stronghold. Winterfell is considered one of the most magical places in the kingdom.


    It was built by the Stark forefather thousands of years ago, Brandon the Builder. It is built over a natural hot spring system that gives the surroundings mild temperatures that can allow food to be grown even in the Long Winters. Some say that the cause of it is that a giant dragon, far larger than any of the Targaryens, was killed and its body was buried under Winterfell where its body heats the area even to this day, the theory has never been proven or disproven yet.


    When we arrived, I paid the entry tax at the gates and entered the town to find a decent inn. The competition would start 5 days from now, in that time I need to register and look at the competition. The inn I found was a small one by the gates, like always they didn¡¯t allow pets inside the rooms so I paid for a stable for Brutus. I didn¡¯t need to worry about sleeping with him, he is fully bonded with me now and there are few people who would risk angering him. He broke through to 1st tier about 2 years ago and gained a lifespan similar to mine. He is still in is growing years yet he is over 100kg already looking like one of the biggest dogs in the North, far surpassing what a normal Alaunt should grow to and looking like a large variation of a great dane. He is intelligent enough to read facial expressions and tones as well as recognize uncomplicated sentences, he won¡¯t randomly attack anyone, and if someone tries to harm him, he can signal me with qi, and I can deal with it.


    After finding an inn, it was still the morning, we decided to explore the town on the way up to the registration office. Winter Town was definitely the biggest city I had ever seen, past life included, yet it was at the same time a lot more humble and quaint than I expected. Part of that would probably due to it being the summer still and the busiest time for the city would be when winter comes and everyone crowds here to get warm. Right now, the city is at about half capacity, though more people are arriving by the day to see the tourney.


    Around lunch time me we went to the main market where the smells from the variety of different meats and baked goods had us both watering at the mouth, that scared the piss out of a man who was buying skewers and when he turned around saw 2 hunters staring in his direction with a hungry gaze. He calmed down when we walked past him to buy the same as him, walking off embarrassed at the misunderstanding. The market didn¡¯t just have the common and respectable establishments. It seems even the home to the stoic Starks can¡¯t avoid the oldest professions in history. Down the side streets there were a number of brothels and gambling dens, sign and subtle hawkers attracting customers. The pleasure girls were quite odd from what you would expect, due to the cold they didn¡¯t put girls with skimpy clothes, flaunting their breasts and asses, although the clothes they wore were lighter than most others, their clothes showed their full figures hiding inside of dresses, and used light make-up and interesting hairstyles, with subtle gestures leaving a tempting and mysterious looks. They almost reminded me of winter lillies, stem and flower.This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.


    I will have to check out their establishment later, if the prices are reasonable then i will go before the tourney, if not then I will go after when I have some winnings. Don¡¯t look at me like that, yes, I''m talking to you Brutus, I was married to Elina, I loved her very much, I was loyal to her for 18 years, but she isn¡¯t in this world, and I am going through puberty. It was not something that I expected as someone with the mind of about 56 years but it appears puberty is based primarily through hormones as opposed to mental. In fact, when I went through puberty the first time I didn¡¯t notice it as I experienced it slowly and didn¡¯t know how else to act, just like everyone else, this time I can see the changes in my behaviour, and a healthy release would be necessary, I won¡¯t become a monk for the rest of my life.


    After unjustly rebuking Brutus, we made our way to the top of the city where the registration office was. This is where visiting nobles come to announce themselves, and will be taken to their residence, or in the case of myself I need to pay the entry fee for the tournament and be authorised.


    The entire process took about an hour, half waiting in que and the other them verifying my identity, a letter from the margrave and Ethan helped with that, when I finished, I turned to leave when I noticed Brutus was missing. I sent a signal to him which he responded with the all clear, finding him licking a pair of children. They were a pair of boy and girl, the older was the boy about 13, black, curly hair stroking Brutus on the back, while the girl was about 6 or 7, long brown hair and was currently laughing as Brutus licked her face. ¡°Brutus come.¡± I call him. I usually have no trouble with Brutus playing with children, he usually has a soft spot for them, but these 2 were clearly nobles, I could tell from the fine clothes, and I have no intention for waiting for their guards to come round the corner, swords waving because they think their ward is currently being eaten.


    ¡°Apologies Ser, we didn¡¯t know you were the owner of this fine hound, my sister and I were just walking around when he came up to us and started sniffing us. He must have liked it as he began licking Arya and I couldn¡¯t resist petting him. My name is Jon, Jon Snow.¡± the boy, they were siblings apparently the hair colour is odd for siblings, though the Snow makes sense, answered. In the North if a noble has a bastard then they will have their last name be Snow, designating them as illegitimate, unless the king says otherwise. I hear that the other lands have similar rules, but just call them by different names.


    ¡°No worries, I was just wondering where he went. My name is Ben, son of David, of Oakbridge, and this is Brutus. I am not a knight so there is no need to call me Ser.¡± I introduced us and corrected their mistake, I was wearing chainmail and wore a sword on my hip, my bow was at the inn.


    I spoke to the 2 for quite some time, finding them to be delightful. Jon was a capable young man who was training in swordsmanship and was very proper for his age, the girl on the other hand was nothing like you would expect of a noble daughter. She was headstrong, spirited and curious. The 2 of them had left the castle, I found out they were Stark children to my shock, and they were out here to see the competitors for the tournament. I almost ran for the inn the moment I heard they were Starks, but Brutus¡¯s whining combined with Jon¡¯s offer to give me the list of melee competitors convinced me to stay. When an hour had past, we heard several guards calling their names and they went off before they would get in even more trouble. I likewise made myself scarce and headed to the inn where I am staying.

 chapter 15 - Preliminary trials

    I woke in a soft bed with a soft cover, lying beside a softer woman. It has been 4 nights since that day, and tomorrow is the day the tournament starts, though I unfortunately need to get up for the preliminary. Noble competitors can join the competition so long as they had the permission form their family head. They represent their families in the contests and the lords won¡¯t let their names be tarnished if their family couldn¡¯t compete. Peasants like me however not only need to pay an entry fee of 10 stags, but also need to pass a trial, where all the peasant competitors are placed in a ring and only a certain number will be allowed to enter the tournament proper. The tourney proper lasts 2 days, 32 contestants, the semi-finals and finals on the last day, the other matches on the first. As for the peasants there are about 83 people, so only 8 of us would pass.


    Over the days I waited I would usually spend my days either training, exploring the town and looking for useful books or items to bring home with me. The nights I would spend usually at the tavern talking with the other patrons, exchanging gossip and stories. One of the groups were a couple of locals and they brought me to this brothel last night. I had quite a few last night, and thinking that the price was good and the preliminaries were in the afternoon, I should give it a go. Definitely worth it, the girl, I don¡¯t know her name, was skilled yet not over ambitious or fishing for tips, though I gave a large one anyway.


    I got dressed and headed back to the inn where I got both my bow and sword. Brutus spent the night happy with a bone and full belly. We headed to the outskirts of the city where the preliminary took place. The archery was first, simple to do, 10 people stood on a line and would fire arrows with different coloured feathers at a target, about 100 metres away, at the same time. The person who hits the closest to the centre passes, if 2 hit roughly the same then whoever shot first wins. This was a piece of cake, as soon as the referee called to fire, I had my bow raised, drawn and fired in under a second, admittedly I was using qi to speed up my movements. I heard a few cheers from the Stark area, seeing Arya clapping enthusiastically, to her father''s, the lord Eddard Stark, surprise. Jon, I spotted in the crowd, clapping as well though a bit more considerate. This sort of event continued until there was 5 people who passed, only 53 people applied for the archery. With the preliminary over we were told that the competition would occur on the second day of the tournament.


    The archery contest is done in a single day where 10 people, 5 peasants and 5 nobles in this case, would shoot 10 arrows each at individual targets, the lowest score would be removed and the next target, farther than the previous, would be fired upon until a the last 3 contestants were left, and the final target would be fired at and the highest score would win. Since it can be done in about an hour, it will be done between the melee finals in the morning and the joust in the afternoon. At least among the peasants I have no threat of being beaten.


    The melee is somewhat more difficult, the rings are for a maximum of 100 people at a time, we use practice swords and proper armour, you are out the moment a solid blow to your body or head occurs, with referees around to decide when you are out. It is done until 16 people remain standing and they will join the nobles tomorrow. There are no preliminaries for the joust as it is a noble exclusive event.


    The difficulty with the melee is that it requires not just skill, but planning. If you seem like an easy target and try to hide from fights, then you will be challenged by multiple people, tiring out and someone will eventually get a lucky hit in. If you show you are a difficult opponent then you might be able to frighten the weaker opponents, but the other competitors, those who feel they have a chance in the tournament, might try to group up against you in order to make the fights easier later on. I might be a good fighter, I could probably beat 4 in quick order, or 2 at the same time, but if 3 come at once then I will be brought down quite quickly. There are 3 solutions, the first is to balance your skills so you appear to be both good enough not to challenge, and not a threat to the real competitors. Second is to find allies, either someone you know and trust, or paid to watch your back during the preliminaries. The third.... scare the shit out of everyone.Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.


    The second the horn blew for the start of the match i dashed to the largest man I could find and swung my sword straight at their head. They got their sword up and blocked of course, that was the plan. Because I caught him by surprise and suddenly aimed for his face, he leant back at an odd angle, putting his left leg back while his right was left forward, straightened. The natural motion would be in the next half a second to retract his right and reset his stance, but I don¡¯t allow that, in that half a second, stomped on his straightened leg, breaking it. As he fell down in pain, I swung my sword again, this time colliding with the side of his head knocking him out. That wasn¡¯t the end though, as he laid on the ground broken and defenceless, I raised my sword above my head, ready to bring it down again, when the referee shouted for me to stop.


    ¡°Stop, he is out, another attack and you will be disqualified!¡± he shouted, some fear in his voice, likely shocked, as the audience is, on how brutal someone can be. I show a disappointed expression. As they carried my opponent off the field, l looked around, a feral look in my eyes and a bit of blood I smeared on the corner of my mouth, terrifying the ring and creating a large space around me. I think to myself, ¡®step one complete¡¯.


    The people you least want to fight in these tournaments are not the honourable champion fighters, but the bloodthirsty maniacs. I have showed that not only will I cause injury that could cripple a fighter, but I won¡¯t just stop after the first blow, I will continue to attack even after they are unconscious. I feel bad for the guy, but he is a mercenary that I scouted yesterday, a tough opponent that could give me trouble in a fair fight, and everyone enters these competitions with the knowledge that they could get hurt. That was the first step to my plan, now for part 2.


    After scaring my surroundings for a good 4 seconds, I suddenly yawn and lose the look in my eyes. I turn around and walk to the edge of the ring, kneel on the edge and rest my head on my sword. This is the second story I had to spin, the fear they currently have will only work for a few moments, soon they will realise there are over 80 people here, I am greatly outnumbered, and as I mentioned earlier if they get the idea to gang up on me to remove a future challenge, thus I will lose. The trick is to appear as less of a threat, you don¡¯t bother me, I don¡¯t bother you. Everyone is in this fight to win, no one wants to lead the charge against me and be the removed or injured, not when there are easier pickings.


    Like this the fight resumes a more normal setting, fights picking up here and there. Soon there are only 30 left and someone thinks to test whether I am really unprepared or not, kneeling on the ground with my eyes closed. They approach slowly, trying to keep quiet, several others are watching as well. Unfortunately for them I have another set of eyes. Just as he is about to strike me overhead, Brutus signals me with his qi, a signal that we spent the last few days to mean an attack from the left. My kneeling posture seems to be a weakness, but it means that if someone is going to strike me form above. With that knowledge and Brutus¡¯s signal I know enough about where the attack is to get a block in and rise to my feet at the same time, throwing him off balance. With my sword I direct him into passing me, and with a kick between the legs with studded boots, I send him out of the ring and to the ground in a painful huddle. That earns me some cheers from the audience, not just the Starks siblings this time.


    The rest of the competitors had lost all interest in challenging me now, they don¡¯t know how I parried that blow and what is unknown is to be avoided, that was step 3. Like this the fighting continued till there were 8 left, mostly older blokes, merc heads who were veterans. With the winners decided we were told to come back tomorrow morning. I left the courtyard, waving bye to Jon and Arya.

 chapter 16 - Dogs and Bones

    The next day was pretty standard, I arrived at the stands alongside the winners from yesterday and the nobles, mostly knights though there was the heir to House Umber, the ¡®Small Jon¡¯, Jon Umber. I had seen the Great Jon in the stands and I can see how he got his title, he looks like a giant bear, though Small Jon is a bit undeserving, considering he is nearly as big as his father. He is about 210 cm with a powerful frame and large greatsword.


    Fortunately, I wasn¡¯t chosen to fight him the first day, I won my first fights against a knight and 2 mercs, earning me a place in the semi-finals. I had a bit of fame in this tournament as the youngest person here. Even Jon Umber was 20 years old, while I was only 16 and could fight as well as most knights.


    I was unable to gain any advantages in the proper melee. It is done on a point system, same as the one in BushBurn, first to five, the only difference is that we use real weapons, blunted though, and our own armour. I didn¡¯t have the chance to find or get used to proper armour, so i just used some leather that I made and reused Ethan¡¯s old chainmail. I won my first 2 fights with a 5 to 1 advantage though the 3rd was tough, at 5 to 4, with him leading at 3 to 2 at one point. Luckily, I got used to his movements then and pulled ahead at the end. Needless to say, the fights are a lot harder than I thought, it seemed that I didn¡¯t give the fighters of this world enough credit. While they don¡¯t have qi, they still train their sword skills, and the qi I have would only put me at middling level, giving me strength to probably match someone with Eddard Starks build in an arm wrestle, but it¡¯s still nothing amazing in this world. The people in this tournament are elite fighters, but nowhere near the best in Westeros, not even among the best in the North probably.


    After my matches in the morning I was free for the rest of the day, though instead of going back to the inn, I went to the medical tent to buy some ointments. I might have won my fights but I received more than my fair share of hits, bruises were covering my body and I was limping slightly due to a hit to my right leg. At the tent, after applying the salves and letting them set for a bit, I heard Arya and Jon come over, along with another boy slightly younger than Arya. Brutus, who had previously been lying on the floor outside covering his nose to avoid the smell of medicine, upon seeing the new arrivals immediately went up to bother them, giving the new boy a particularly long sniff, much to his delight.


    While Arya and the new boy were playing with Brutus, Jon came to me and greeted me. ¡°Hello there again, that was a decent match against Ser Thomas, he was considered a contender in this contest, a veteran of Pyke. Though, I must say your preliminaries were probably the most eye-grabbing of your matches.¡± He gives a knowing smile. ¡°Me and Arya decided to bring Bran, our brother, when we spotted you sitting over here by the tent. I hope you don¡¯t mind?¡±


    ¡°Not at all, it¡¯s good to talk with someone, I will likely be sitting here a while and chatting distracts from the pain.¡± I gesture towards the leg. ¡°That does look quite painful, will you be better by tomorrow?¡± Arya who had paused from stroking Brutus, asked me with concern.


    I give a smirk. ¡°Not likely, in fact I might withdraw tomorrow depending how I feel.¡± ¡°WHAT?¡± Arya asks in disbelief, her brothers mirroring her shock. It seems they were picturing the image of me limping to the field, giving it my all and either emerging victorious by some narrow margin, or falling broken and spent, having fought the good fight but ultimately losing.You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    ¡°Why would you withdraw, you already beat Ser Thomas, he was one of the best in this tournament, the others aren¡¯t much better?¡± Jon asks me, his siblings nodding beside him looking for my answer.


    ¡°Have you ever heard the story of the dog and the bone?¡± they shake their heads, Brutus lifts his head at bone, and I pat him down to stop his anticipation. ¡°There was once a dog who had a bone, he was carrying it home one day, when he comes across a pond, where he sees his reflection. He thinks it is another dog and that he is holding a large bone, larger than his. The dog gets greedy and bites the water to try and steal the other dog¡¯s bone, and not only does he fail, but he drops his bone into the water in the attempt. Do you see the point?¡± I explain with a tale I heard in my last life, though it seems only Jon has guessed my point.


    ¡°Tomorrow I will participate in the finals for the melee and the archery. I have confidence I could win the archery, but the melee is out of my reach unless a miracle happens, like I recover the full extent of my abilities and one of my opponents gets disqualified. Like you said the other competitors aren¡¯t any better than Thomas, however they are relatively uninjured and even if I could beat one, I would not be able to beat 2. In fact if I tried I would likely just worsen my injury, or worse, injure my arms or hands, and be unable to compete in the archery afterwards, losing my bone. If the archery was first and I could secure victory first, then I might try the melee as I have little to lose.¡± I explain the metaphor to them, a look of comprehension appearing on Brans face, though Arya still seems unconvinced.


    ¡°Even if you can¡¯t win, by fighting you could still show your skills.¡± She points out


    ¡°That is true, for a warrior this is the prime opportunity to show their skills, making it easier to get work, or in my case be knighted. I will admit that I am tempted, but it is just not worth the cost.¡± I deny her.


    ¡°Is money the only thing important to you?¡± Arya asks, disappointment in her voice.


    ¡°Of course not.¡± I tell them to their surprise. ¡°It¡¯s just that the benefits of another fight are outweighed by the prize for winning the archery. If I cared only about the money I wouldn¡¯t bother with this tournament, I would just become a thief and rob the winners, but that would mean giving up my pride and honour. Living a life full of wealth but haunted by the deeds of my crimes is just not worth it. At the same time, I won¡¯t let pride and honour get in the way of that which matters to me more, like my life or my family.¡± She frowns staring at me, this seems to be a bit too complicated for a child, so I change the subject.


    ¡°Arya, you want to be a knight in the future, like I do? Well, we are similar in that we were both born with disadvantages in that case. You were born a girl, you don¡¯t get the same training as your brothers. You are smaller and weigh less. Likewise, I was born a peasant, I need to work for my food and to look after my family, leaving less time for training.¡± That got here attention, she mentioned yesterday that it was her dream to be like the Visenya Targaryen and Nymeria Martell, 2 of the most famous and accomplished female fighters in the last 300 years.


    ¡°We have it harder than others, our journey will be long and hard. If we want to accomplish our goals, we don¡¯t rush into everything, gaining injuries that will delay us. We must be efficient and know what is worth fighting for and what can be exchanged.¡± Arya was entranced, as was Bran and even Jon was starting to get a look in his eyes. I need to make sure they understand both parts of the lesson. If they think efficiency is everything and neglect the other part they could go down the wrong road. I grab Arya and turn her to her brothers. ¡°Remember though, while it is alright to trade what you can for gain, you must draw the line and never cross it. That which you decide as priceless, even if the gods were to offer you a dragon, a kingdom, even immortality, you must refuse if the cost is them.¡± She looks at her brothers and then at me. I see the understanding in her, strong determination for one so young.


    After we all calm down, I offer to buy them a sweet-roll at the stands, then we part ways.

 chapter 17 - Troubling Times

    Eddard Stark POV


    The tourney was quite a success, Rob enjoyed it and has increased his training with the master at arms, Umber and I drank to the success of his son in the tournament, complaining that in a few years he would have to hand over the reins of the house. H still has many good years I told him to his pleasure, leading to this splitting headache this morning. I am now sitting at the breakfast table, trying to nurse my headache with some food and water, My wife Catelyn next to me and my children sitting around me, except for Arya who seems to have snuck off somewhere and Jon who feels more comfortable with the soldiers than sitting at our table with Catelyn here.


    It really is a shame that she can¡¯t accept him but at the same time I can¡¯t blame either one of them. The only one who knows that Jon is not my bastard is me, but I can¡¯t tell them the truth, at least not yet, as it would mean either killing Jon or going to war and I feel like, despite my friendship with Robert, war would be the only way to go if I didn¡¯t want to break my promise to my sister, Lyanna. At least the rest of my family is getting along.


    Bran and my youngest, Rickon, were talking excitingly about the tournament, despite Catelyn¡¯s constant reminders not to talk while eating, they would quite down for a few seconds before something comes to mind that gets them both heated again, my wife giving up after the 3rd time with a tired smile at her happy boys. Sansa, my eldest daughter, was less happy about the tournament, and was more pleased with the market. She spent the days strolling around the shops looking at the few trinkets that were brought all the way from the south, especially kings landing. She has been constantly asking if we can visit some day, though I have refused her for now, and thankfully Cat agrees that she is too young to make the travel without us, even with and escort, and both I and her can¡¯t leave the North unattended.


    My reasons don¡¯t just include her age, Jon Arryn, Paramount to the Vale, Hand of the King, and the man who was almost like a father to me, has sent a letter via ravens that the situation in kings Landing has been getting more and more unstable. My friend and my king, Robert has been seriously neglecting his duties after the war with the Iron Islands. From the messages I exchanged with Arryn over the years, he told me that at the start, while at the start he would definitely prefer to drink, party and fight than lead, he would at least attend to half the Small Council meetings, Where the Masters of different fronts would discuss the important topics in the kingdom. The war with Balon Greyjoy, when he declared himself the king of Salt and Rock, was the changing point.


    Before the war the coalition of Arryn and the Baratheon brothers was enough to create a lead in any policies they made. They were mostly keeping the Lannisters under control, though they had to be careful, the Tyrells and Martells were only part of the kingdom in name, with tensions still high from the war. They both lost many friends and family members during the war, with the butchery of Ellaria Martell and her children nearly Leading the Dorne to fight to the bitter end. Only the fact that Doran Martell was in charge of Dorne at the time, known for his wise mindset, kept the war from extending knowing that they had no chance of victory.


    When Palon died and his son, Balon, took over he declared independence from the Iron Throne, the king, and that he would no longer answer to the mainland. If he had done just that the kingdom would likely have collapsed, his assumption in declaring independence was that the rest of the kingdoms were too weak from the war and we were all divided, which was true. If he had declared independence and either kept to himself, waiting for us to come to him, or if he had targeted the lands loyal to Robert, then the Reach and Dorne would have likely declared independence themselves and we would have been too weak to stop them. Instead Balon did one of the most stupid things and attacked the Westerlands and the Reach with raids to try and burn the ports and fleets, but also sent his eldest son and most of his ships to Seaguard, the fort that was built by the Riverlands to specifically defend against such an attack.


    His son died at Seaguard, along with his forces, and while his raids caused much damage, they ultimately ended in defeat. So not only did he waste the forces he spent years building up, but his actions led to the Reach joining Robert in his war against the Iron Islands, clear that if let be the Ironborn would only be a threat and not an ally. This united the kingdoms, with only Dorne maintaining a fragile peace. Unfortunately, the situation on the small council only got worse.If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.


    Although during the war Robert was exited and enthusiastic, after he got even worse, now attending 1 in 10 meetings if they were lucky. In addition, at Pyke Robert and his brother Stannis, the master of ships, apparently got into an argument, and after the war he returned to Dragonstone, an island territory that he was enfeoffed, and where he builds, maintains and trains the kings fleet. If Stannis wasn¡¯t loyal to a fault and excellent at his job, there might have been greater concerns in the kingdom.


    Nevertheless, with the 2 older brothers leaving the court, the dominant power was weakened and king¡¯s landing has become a den of countless snakes who dream of being dragons.


    ¡°Ser Roderic, did you contact those from the melee and archery?¡± I ask the head of my knight order. There were several capable fighters yesterday that other than the winners that I asked Roderic to extend an invitation to. I couldn¡¯t offer them knighthood or extra rewards, of course, but there were a few free roaming knights who I could hire to join my knight order, of which there are about 100 members. They were mostly knights who had lost their lands through debts or bets and needed to earn money to maintain their lifestyle. Members of my order would receive suitable compensation, while what I get is capable officers who must listen to orders. Although all knights who have sworn to my family need to answer the call to arms in war, there are several times when war is not called but a military officer is needed, like a bandit group, rebellion or plague. The knights of my order are not only capable fighters and literate like all knights need to be, but they are also integrated with my forces so they can lead small numbers independently. The peasant members could be recruited into my guard to form my elite unit for protection and special jobs.


    ¡°I did, My Lord, several of the sell-swords agreed though none of the knights did this time. The one you asked me to look into specifically also refused, though he did state that if he was to enter into anyone''s service in the future it would be the Starks.¡± He tells me after remembering the odd request I mentioned.


    During the feast on the final day of the tournament I spotted Arya and Sansa having an argument. Arya and Bran were apparently telling Rob and Rickon about a sell-sword they met. They were discussing something that he said when Sansa came and said something Arya didn¡¯t like, which led them to arguing like always, and Cat had to take them away. I was curious so I asked Bran what it was about. They apparently went to see Ben, the winner of the archery the other day to congratulate him on his match.


    I remembered the man, a commoner who made quite a show in the preliminary matches, not only did he demonstrate excellent archery skill but he was the star of the melee. The first surprise was when Arya and Jon clapped for him, though I was relieved that it was just because they had met the previous day by coincidence. When he injured that man, I was somewhat angered in his brutality and I admit I was looking forward to him getting walloped by the others. His later actions took me by surprise, and it took me a while to realize what felt wrong. It was like a play, every action he made was done to influence the other opponents. That made me a bit irritated as those sorts of tricks were quite distasteful, though when I considered the setting, I couldn¡¯t think of any better method to achieve victory


    The fact he didn¡¯t just have tricks, but actual sword skills as well, made me feel better as well. The match against Ser Thomas, a man who fought during Greyjoy Rebellion and achieved several accolades, was a testament to his skill. When I was curious and found out he was only 16 I was shocked. I thought he would be at least 18, probably 20, yet for a peasant to train such skills in both the sword and bow at such an age is nearly unheard of. When I asked Bran what the argument was about and heard the tale of the dog and bone I first chuckled at the imagery and then smiled at the fact he both understood the message and applied it to his actions. When he surrendered the semi-finals I was disappointed, though considering he then went on to win the archery I have to say it was wise decision. Arya had apparently started talking about becoming a knight, when Sansa told her she couldn¡¯t and Arya used the boys argument on her, that she needed to be efficient, to which Sansa asked how she was going to be efficient, which brought Arya to a still, not having thought that far head, the argument devolving into the general name calling and useless arguments again. While I don¡¯t like that he is encouraging poor habits in Arya, his philosophy was very interesting.


    I had already decided to recruit him for my guards then, and when he won the archery, I offered to give him an officers salary, the boy was still young so he could be trained into a capable knight or soldier. The fact he refused this time was disappointing, but not unexpected, after all when I was his age me and Robert were obsessed with exploring and adventures, I''d be a bit saddened if someone that young didn¡¯t experience life while he had the chance.

 chapter 18 - Enemies (revised)

    2 years later Ben POV


    ¡°Wait, wait, I¡¯m sorry just take the stuff, take anything you want, just let me live!!¡± The man screamed, I was impressed with his ability to make coherent sentences despite the broken legs, though the adrenaline might just be numbing him, it wouldn¡¯t affect my next decision.


    ¡°Sorry but the horse crushed your legs in your fall, if I turned you in to the authorities, your crimes would have you sent to the wall, but with your injuries the cost would be too great for what you are worth, and I have no intention of letting you go free, so...¡± I explain before cutting his throat, turning around to walk away as he bleeds out. As I walk back to where my horse is tied up, I pass the dozen dead bodies, all with a single arrow placed either in their head or chest. Speaking of which here he comes, apparently having finished chasing down his opponent.


    As I climb on my now retrieved horse, I think to myself that this was a lot of work and bloodshed that could have been avoided if they had simply kept a cooler head, and not been such petty arseholes. It all started last night, I was travelling along the kingsroad and stopped at an inn for the night. Instead of bringing Brutus to the stables like I usually do, I let him roam the nearby woods as he had been feeling skittish from the lack of hunts this week. When I arrived, I ordered some mutton for dinner and listened to the conversations around me. In one corner of the inn there was a rather spirited game of dice happening, lots of laughter. When I finished my food, I thought of nothing better to do, so I went over to join them.


    It was quite a bit of fun, found out that they were sell-swords, new company called Grey men, named after the mining town they came from, to the south East of the North. They were travelling along the road for the same reason as me, to compete in the Starks upcoming tournament, though it would just be the captain, a man who¡¯s name I had forgotten, that would have competed due to the cost of admission. This tournament would be a much more high profile one, thus the price of entry is 50 stags instead of 10.


    Anyway, the game went well, made a few friends I thought, except for this one guy who was apparently way too drunk and way too unlucky. He had been on a losing streak even before I arrived, though he lost a lot more when I arrived. That''s not to say I was lucky, in fact I lost quite a bit to the other players, it¡¯s just that he started losing even more when I arrived. The fact he was drinking more meant that he was betting bigger as well. After one particularly bad hand he asked in a quiet voice, ¡°You think you¡¯re pretty clever, don¡¯t you?¡±.


    He was speaking into his hands and the noisy room meant we didn¡¯t know what he was saying or who he was speaking to, so one of his friends tried to get him to speak up. Instead of speaking he flipped the table and drew a knife. In one move he leapt at me. I was shocked by the sudden change in atmosphere, so I was unable to react properly, I just managed to get my hands in the way and grip his wrists, though his momentum forced me over and onto my back. He continued to try and stab me, but I was much stronger than him and had caught my senses now. I was 18-years-old, 190cm tall, over 100kg of lean muscles, with qi in the upper part of the 1st tier. My body was at the peak of what is humanly possible for my size, and with a burst of qi to my hands, I exceed that.


    With a decisive twist of my wrists I snap my opponent¡¯s arms, causing him to drop the knife and by pulling him over my head and with both feet in his gut I send him flying over a nearby table to crash on a set of chairs. His friends move at this point, their captain rushes to the man that attacked me, I now remember that they might have been brothers, while I rise to my feet in a smooth motion my opponents knife still in hand.


    The rest of them start to surround me at this point as the screams from their friend ring around the room. They are way too intoxicated and emotions running high to think about who is at fault, all they know is that their friend is hurt and I was the one who did that.


    I check my situation. 11 opponents if we count the captain attending to his brother, equipment is the swords that they have started to draw. They aren¡¯t used to fights in close quarters with lots of obstructions like this inn, otherwise they would use knives. To be fair I am not used to interiors like this, in my last life most of my fights happened in the woods or the wide-open areas, I was rarely involved in sieges or street fighting. Fortunately, I am used to keeping track of my surroundings and my activities the last 2 years has given me lots of practice with multiple opponents from every direction like this. As for my own equipment, I have similar apparel to them in that we are both wearing travelling clothes, though my weapons don¡¯t include my sword which I left in my room, instead I have a total of 6 throwing knives and a pair of hunting knives.


    With the throwing weapons I could quickly dispatch the men in the direction of the door before any of them even come close to me, leaving me with only 5 left that are pursuing me. If i use my remaining knives to make it to the doorway, I can use the frame as a shield to keep people from my sides, and if I grab one of the dead men¡¯s swords I could hold them off one at a time and either slowly wear them down, or run if they decide to go out the back or window in an attempt to surround me again. I am clearly in better shape and could outrun them easily, until Brutus arrives and kills them all.


    I was just about to start, when the door to the inn burst open and a number of armoured men entered the building. ¡°Halt, in the name of Lord Stark, you will all lower your weapons and surrender!¡± The man at the lead demanded in a loud voice with a sword in his own hand. The guy at the head was clearly a knight and the rest of the men, 8 in total, were wearing Stark colours.


    These men were definitely patrol men, the Starks send them along the kingsroad and other major roads, from the Wall to the Neck, checking parts of the road for damage and conducting inspections into the settlements and businesses. ¡°It was them, Ser, they were the ones who started swinging knives and swords about.¡± One person without armour entered the room and pointed at me and the mercenaries. It seems one of the other patrons had run out of the inn at the start and was lucky to spot the patrol. The knight looked at us and was about to speak when the inn-keep interrupted him. ¡°Hold on, that man over there was the only one causing trouble, the man in the middle was only defending himself.¡± he attested to my innocence. I gave him a nod in thanks.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    The knight paused for a moment as we all stayed still, likely considering our stories, but I needed to put an end to this before my plans get messed up. I walked over to the bag of money we were using, some of the contents were spilled onto the floor, scooped up the coins and passed it to the captain. ¡°I would like to drop all charges against these men. I suggest you take this money to get his injuries treated, let¡¯s put this behind us and part ways.¡± I say to the captain, who nods in acceptance. ¡°Thank you for defending me, I will pay 10 stags to cover the cost of damages.¡± I say to the inn-keep. The broken table and plates would only cost about 200 coppers at most, the high compensation is to get him to drop the charges. He understands my meaning and accepts.


    The knight looks around the room and sees that we have all come to an understanding, sheathes his sword and leaves the building. Before we leave, he tells us that we should disperse and not cause more trouble. We all go our separate ways, I return to my room, while the mercs leave, likely camping outside to save on costs.


    I didn¡¯t have to drop the charges, the situation would likely have resolved itself in my favour, but it would have taken too long. This event would be taken as either attempted robbery or attempted murder. Both require a trial, and that means several days of waiting while the local margrave organises the evidence. I have no fear of being found guilty, I had several witnesses and even if they tried to bribe the judge, I am richer than them and can top their price. But the delay would likely result in me missing the tournament, and this is the most important one in 2 years, the one I will finally be knighted. The money I gave the inn-keeper and the mercenaries was only small change to me now, not worth what I would lose from the tournament. Beside the only guy to really attack me had both his arms broken.


    I went to sleep and woke up at dawn to go find Brutus. I could feel him resting in the clearing so I made my way over to him. He was lying down in the morning sun, catching a few a few winks, when he felt me and ran over to me. If it was anyone else who saw Brutus running at them, they would likely start running as well, just in the other direction. 150kg, 120cm tall, he has surpassed most beasts in the North except for bears and dire wolves. Even then they would have trouble taking down Brutus. He has developed mentally to a similar level as a human child, broken through to the 1st tier of qi and can use it in a similar manner as me to create bursts of strength. I don¡¯t fear him, and instead embrace him as he snuggles me, smelling his wild scent from spending the night in the woods, a mixture of moisture, mud and blood from his nightly kill.


    As I make my way back to the inn, I notice a disturbance outside the stables. The inn-keep from the previous night came up to me with a worried look on his face, even more so when he notices Brutus to my side. ¡°S-Sir, I am terribly sorry, last night someone broke into the stables and stole your horse. The stable hand says that when he went to check the horses last night, he saw the silhouette of the men from before ride off with your horse.¡± I stopped listening after that, the talk of how the patrol had already moved on so they couldn¡¯t help, and how they would contact the lord to make them wanted men. All that didn¡¯t matter. They crossed a line, pushed me too far. I gave them the money despite it being their man that started it because I wasn¡¯t looking to make enemies that were unnecessary, they only slow you down when diplomacy is an option. It seems it wasn¡¯t enough and instead of counting their lucky stars that they got away from this mess with their lives and freedom, they held a grudge against me and tried to get back at me. Once they did that, they proved that they would hold a grudge against me and they were determined to be my enemy.


    I brought Brutus to the road and had him find the scent once I identified the tracks. We followed the road for a mile till it seemed they had changed directions to the border forest on the left, likely trying to throw off any pursuers, who would likely continue along the road. We followed the tracks into the forest, keeping low and in the underbush for about an hour, until I spotted their look-out. Rather than take him out we back tracked to avoid detection and started to take a long loop around to try and take them from the rear. They have a group of 12, the look-out facing the direction of the road will likely be their only one, as it is extremely unlikely for anyone to come from another direction, he has to remain in earshot of the main group to warn them, so with those rough measurements I could guess where their camp was. I found their camp with several tending to a fire and another making dinner, and a pair tending to the horse, 7 including mine. The rest of them are looking after the man I injured the night before, wrapping his arms and splint, while talking to distract him from the pain. Me and Brutus head to a slightly raised area and wait. With Brutus and me together, plus the element of surprise we could take them, but it would be hard without injuries, some of them have crossbows near to them.


    After another 10 minutes the cook calls for dinner causing everyone to look his way, presenting the chance i was looking for. I loose an arrow and take the one closest to me, the injured man, through the back of the head. He wasn¡¯t a threat, but he could have warned the others the others beside him, instead he goes down silently and I launch another arrow in half a second. This one strikes the captain who just turned around after hearing a light noise from his brother, only to receive an arrow to the eye. The person to the left saw this and was about to scream when Brutus who had started running when I fired my first arrow, tore his throat out.


    The others had noticed us at this point, and grabbed their weapons. The 2 men with crossbows raised them to aim at Brutus, but he had run round the left side of the camp to use the tents as cover. While they were distracted with Brutus, I took them both out, and just like that they were down 5 men with only 6 left. They were panicking, confused and with no leadership, when Brutus leapt from behind the tents, confident that I had dealt with the ranged threats, to confront 2 sword wielding foes. They were no match for him, a few scared swings later and one had their arm torn off and the other had crushed ribs from a body slam.


    The rest had started to run when Brutus leapt from cover, not even bothering to help their friends. The furthest that got away was the one beside the horse that thought riding would let him escape, I just left him for last, shooting the runners instead. What he neglected was that while he was faster on horseback, on foot they could use the foliage as cover, the horse on the other hand is a larger target and needs to avoid the tighter spaces. I shot the horse from 100 metres between the trees bringing him to the ground, sending Brutus to chase the man on look-out who will no doubt have run away after the screams of fear from camp, and I went to finish off the injured one left.

 chapter 19 - Recap

    I didn¡¯t bother looting the bodies, most of the money was found on the captain and there was too much effort taking their weapons or searching for trinkets and the horses would make this too obvious it was me. I cut the horses loose and left their bodies where they were, we were far enough from the main road that no one should find them before animals dispose of the bodies.


    As I reach the main road and continue along my journey, I think about the plan for the upcoming week. Since my first tournament I realized that my skills with the sword were very lacking, and while I don¡¯t plan to change my specialisation, I felt it would be a waste of my second life not to develop them. I didn¡¯t need a teacher, Ethan might not have been the best swordsman but he had over a decade of experience training the guard and fighting himself. Instead what I needed was experience using a sword in a variety of situations.


    The way tournaments were carried out presented a prime opportunity in that account. I went from tourney to tourney, focusing primarily on the preliminary rounds to begin with. The preliminaries not only were relatively safe from injuries, the wooden weapons and rule allowing one strike, ¡¯and I know that sounds hypocritical, but the problem isn¡¯t my reactions¡¯, but they also let me fight many opponents from different directions. Since I have no intention of becoming a noble, I won¡¯t need to practice the duelling aspect first, though I did practice those, but instead I focused on creating a battlefield environment.


    I fought different from my first tourney, aiming not to win the match, but to beat as many opponents as possible. I didn¡¯t fight stupid, but i did fight aggressive. In the beginning I never got past the preliminary, the other opponents would see me as a threat and come at me from several sides, striking me down before I even beat my second opponent. Eventually, I got used to it, and started to predict how the opponents would attack me, just like in the past when I would hunt prey so many times that I predicted where they would go and how they would move. I soon beat my 2nd opponent, then my 3rd and it went on till after a year of tourneys, even when I was surrounded, I could bring down 5 opponents before being struck once. I earned a reputation in the North, became one of the ¡®seeded¡¯ foes among the commoners. That wasn¡¯t a real title, it just meant that I was an audience favourite, due to my aggressive moves and incredible speed. It was about then I finally won a preliminary fight, not because I was able to cut down dozens of opponents, but because my opponents started to recognize me and stopped ganging up.


    People who come to these tournaments are there to win, I mentioned that they didn¡¯t want to sacrifice themselves for others. Well this one tournament it seemed everyone thought that at the same time they saw me. So, anyone I attacked fought defensively, tried to wear me down and stall till the other competitors attacked me or the numbers were met. Incidentally no one took the bait and there was only me and 2 others at the end. This was only a small tournament for a small house, only 30 people entered. I won the proper tournament as well, the first time ever. Lord Glaven, the lord whose son¡¯s tournament I was attending, offered me a knighthood. I respectfully declined, saying I wished to travel the North more. I went to many more tournaments since then, using the same tactics. I rarely passed the preliminary except when in smaller tournaments, where i would sometimes get lucky and people would avoid fighting me in the preliminaries, in which case I would always win the proper matches as well.


    I didn¡¯t just participate in the melee, I also did the archer. As you would expect, I won every one of those, which allowed me to not just fund my continued training and send money home to my family, but earned me a reputation as the greatest archer in the North. The fact that I have remained undefeated for 2 years and my young age, meant people started to say I was blessed by the gods. I received many propositions from mercenary companies, lords and even foreigners who saw me to come into their service. I would come with different excuses every time, ¡®The North is my home¡¯, ¡®i want to travel¡¯ or ¡®I need to look after my family¡¯ the excuse would depend on the recipient and would be the one least likely to offend the other side.


    I would return to Oakbridge every year for a month in winter, and this year I heard that Ethel became a knight, in service to house Moss, the lord he fought for at Pyke. He entered the Lords tournament and won, to his father¡¯s great joy. He acted as I expected, sold the land he was bestowed to a merchant and came home to take over the family estate so his father could retire. He still needed to answer the Houses call for war, but other than that they don¡¯t care where you live. He was looking to marry a woman he met in Grakhold, the keep of House Moss, and was going to convince her to come to Oakbridge in the next year.The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.


    With the money I have saved over the years I not only bought a horse, I also purchased a set of proper armour, plate, and a new sword. The money I sent home was used to expand our home to include a new kitchen area and 2 bedrooms, allowing our previously cramped house to become more than spacious. Ed had already joined the guards and was planning to purchase a house for himself next year.


    Elsa had grown to become a beautiful young woman to the pleasure of the village and the displeasure of her brothers. Whenever me and Ed see one of the boys offer her flowers, compete for her attention or otherwise try to steal our delicate flower, Ed will often have to keep me back before I tear them a new one. Unfortunately, even if I try to keep myself away from Elsa when she is playing with her friends for fear of disturbing them, I neglected, at the beginning, Elsa¡¯s 3rd brother. It seems my thoughts of stalking her suitors and hunting them down went through the link with Brutus and he hunted them on his own. He didn¡¯t hurt them, thank god, but he did make it a habit to stalk the boys from behind, lightly growling and panting on their necks, often causing them to cry. Elsa quickly got mad and would try and push Brutus away, she would never fear the pup she helped raise, but the normally obedient Brutus would be adamant to stay by her side. I am loathe to admit that I would usually laugh at these, until she got frustrated and would come crying to me to make him stop. Realising enough was enough, I would drag the reluctant hound to the woods and make sure he was within sight whenever Elsa was playing so I could make sure he didn¡¯t interrupt them.


    Mum had unofficially retired, with Ed earning for himself and my income, she was the lowest earner in the family other than Elsa. She now volunteers at the inn to help Greta, who is now the oldest person in the village, with grey hair and sharp nails she is called a witch by the kids. Greta doesn¡¯t really work anymore and has mostly handed the inn over to her nephew.


    When Ethel told me about his knighthood, I decided that it was time for me to earn my place as well. My siblings are almost all grown up and I have trained my sword skills to an acceptable level, all that is left is to win the tournament at the Starks. There are several reasons I didn¡¯t take any of the other Houses offers for knighthood and instead waited for the Starks. The first is the Starks are stable, they have remained in power for thousands of years, have loyal forces, decent management skills and are loved by the people. They might not be the richest house, though they are probably the best in the North, but they have a lot of land and from that comes a large army so they are unlikely to be provoked by anyone. Their stability is also one of the best, Lord Stark is in his prime and is healthy and strong, he is unlikely to die for decades, even if he did, he has several sons and daughters who are all healthy and from what I''ve seen, capable.


    That leads me to my second point, my relation with the next heirs is considered very good. Since my first tournament I didn¡¯t just go to other Houses, I returned to Winterfell about 8 times over the past and I would always see the Stark kids, though not by intention. We would be travelling the town and Brutus would sniff the air and either bring them to me or me to them, usually Arya or Bran as he seems to like them the most and vice versa. They had since introduced me to their other siblings, Rickon, Robert and Sansa. Rickon seems nice though a bit less adventurous than Bran, I get along with Rob even better than Jon, as unlike Jon who seems a bit too gloomy, Rob is more cheerful and will ask me for sword practice from time to time. I have gotten to know the castle staff in the years, so they treat me as a guest most of the time. Out of all the children the one I like the most would still be Arya who reminds me most of a combination of Elsa and Ed, cheerful and adventurous, which makes her sister a bit of a disappointment as she is what I was afraid a spoilt Elsa would become. She is polite definitely, but she seems a bit tuck up and is very dismissive of my experiences. The others enjoy my hunting stories and adventures, but she likes the ones about knights and ladies instead.


    But back on track, when the Lord does die, I have a good relationship with the heirs, so even if we go to war on the off chance, I will unlikely be put on the front line, meaning about 20,000 will have to die before they get to me. Morbid but practical, see f 20,000 men couldn¡¯t stop our enemies, unless I reach 3rd tier, there is nothing I will be able to change from that situation. Not to say that I could kill 20,000 men at 3rd tier, but I could undoubtedly assassinate the leader or perform guerrilla attacks for a week till they shit themselves at the slightest noise in the night. Yes, this is from experience. Irregardless if the North looks to fall i will do my part and then get my family and loved ones out of the North to wherever is safe.


    But all of this is hypothetical and unlikely to happen. No point making contingencies for every possible situation.

 chapter 20 - Pleasure and Business

    I reached Winter Town the next day, and despite my ¡®detour¡¯, I still had 4 days till the beginning of the tournament. This one was for the same reason as my first, Rob would be having his name day soon, though this time the celebration would be bigger, as he is turning 15 and would be considered a man in the North, with the tourney lasting twice as long, and as many competitors. The reward for winning the melee will be 100 dragons, and 80 for the archery.


    The first thing I did when reaching the city was find an inn and book a room. The second I did was head to the largest brothel. Now before you get any ideas, this is not apleasure visit. I have passed the age where I am having to cross my legs everytime a mature woman passes me by. No, the brothel is where I go for information on my competitors. The lords and knights that compete will stay in Winterfell, and I can get info from my Stark spies, aka Bran and Arya, on the names and reputations of the competitors.


    The peasant competitors will have to stay in the city, and due to the need to find accommodation they will always arrive several days before the contest, like me. Now what are a bunch of young men, nervous about their upcoming fights, stuck in a city with lots of wine and beautiful girls for several days likely to do at least once. Most of them will spend at least one night here, and if not them one of their men will. Of course, this is not an original idea, and in fact it was a mercenary from one of my previous tournaments that I made friends with, that told me this. The smart mercenaries will do the same as me, fortunately, the brothels aren¡¯t under any confidentiality agreement, and will tell me about not just the patrons of pleasure but the ones who ask for information as well. Of course, that means they will tell them about myself as well, but I am always noticed the second I enter the city anyway so no loss to me, after all I am a tournament champion, master archer, possess great looks... and I am the only person in the North to have over 100kg of man-eating fur walking beside me.


    When I reach the brothel, I am escorted to a private room. I have used their services before, both of them and know I am a big spender. ¡°May I ask what you will be needing today, honoured patron?¡± The guide, a lightly clothed girl with full breasts and light red lipstick asks me with a bow. I sit on one of the chairs while Brutus gets on the bed and gets comfortable. This is one of his favourite places because it is one of the few places he is allowed on furniture.


    ¡°Please inform Marsal that Ben of Oakbridge has arrived and would like to request some sensitive items, also a bottle of Moonshadow please.¡± I ask and hand her a coin worth 10 stags. She smiles and departs saying she will return with the wine immediately. The wine is a local delight, about 5 stags for a bottle, the rest was a tip. She returned a moment later with the bottle and a glass, telling me Marsal, the owner, would be hear in a moment.


    I waited for about a minute, sipping the wine and listening to Brutus¡¯s deep breaths, when a thin man wearing a thin vest and curled over hair entered. This man was the owner of the brothel, Seven Kingdoms. It gets its name from the fact that they are the only place that has girls from every territory in the seven kingdoms, even from Dorne which is so far South that you would need to travel twice the width of the North to reach its border. Considering the North is the largest territory that is quite the distance. He accomplishes it due to his backer, the master of Coin, Lord Peytr Baelish of the Vale. From rumours he is the richest man who doesn¡¯t belong to one of the great houses, and owns or manages every whorehouse and brothel in the kingdom. That is an exaggeration of course, but where there¡¯s smoke there is fire.


    ¡°Hello there, old friend, you too Brutus, why you are so big now, I should have brought the leg of cow rather than a goat.¡± Marsal addresses me and has one of the girls place a goat¡¯s leg that has been cooked with exotic spices before the sleeping dog. He immediately wakes up and, after nodding thanks to the girl and Marsal, digs in to his treat. That¡¯s the other reason he likes this place, the owner knows what he likes. I have been a patron of Marsal for a long time, pay upfront without haggling and given him a few favours on the side. This mutually beneficial partnership has developed into a mild friendship, though he would not give me a discount because of it, and I would expect no less.Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    ¡°May I assume you would like the breakdown of the competitors again? Also are you willing to receive a few targets this time? The first question has only one answer but the second question is the favours I do for him. See, Marsal runs a few betting rings, with the preliminary being one of the biggest gambles due to the variety of contesters and the many ways the fight could go. Since the fighters are placed randomly in the ring, one of the contestants could be the greatest fighters in the North, he will have high odds to get past the preliminary, so lots of people bet on him. If he is placed next to several other good fighters and gets taken out immediately due to bad luck, that would be a win for Marsal.


    That is where someone like me has such an appeal. Not only am I a skilled fighter, but I don¡¯t intentionally try to go for the win, just like to fight, thus very few would bet on me, though that is not the appeal. See whenever those good fighters that lots of people bet on lose, Marsal makes money, so he would pay me to specifically target them. I am not only fast and able to manoeuvre through the other fighters, but almost no one can last long against me in a one on one fight anymore. I get to fight some worthy opponents, make some money and earn some favours with a powerful businessman, wins all around.


    ¡°Sorry Marsal, no targets this time, though if you want to make some money, I suggest you bet on me this time round. This time, I''m going for the win.¡± I tell him with a smirk on my face. He raises his eyebrows at that, he might not be a fighter himself buthe has been judging fighters for a while and knows I could have been the champion at one of the Starks tourneys for a long time but chose not to, in fact he once offered that if I told him when I went for the win, he would give me a share of the proceedings if I won.


    ¡°Well, it seems old Crag will no longer be the favourite to win, a toast to a new knight of the North.¡± He raises a glass to me and I return it. He is likely aware of the rumour that I have been refusing knighthoods for some time because I want to join the Starks, my returning his toast confirms it. Once we downed our drinks and poured another, we got to business and he told me all about the competitors, Marcus, the leader of the largest mercenary company in the North, the Cragmen, in particular.


    Brutus and I left after an hour, both groggy from wine and full bellies. As I walked, I thought over the information Marsal gave me, about the prime competitors. There are many strong fighters here, but only 2 I need to watch out for. Ser Bradley Koln, head knight of House Mormont, a huge motherfucker that uses a great sword and has been fighting against Ironborn raids since he was a boy, about 30 years ago. The other is that Marcus fellow. The last leader of the Cragmen stepped down last year and Marcus was his second in command. He is strong and duel wields a pair of war axes, fierce in a fight and worst of all has very little sense of pain. There is a drug in the North called the Blood of Berserkers, a type of wine that when drunk in small quantities makes you high and see strange red hallucinations. The side effect of taking too much too often, is that it will dull your sense of touch permanently and turn you blind so that you can only see the colour red and no outlines. Marcus somehow either got he got the concentration just right, used a special formula or got extremely lucky, because while he can still feel it is dulled so he knows when he is hurt but doesn¡¯t feel enough to stop fighting, and from what I hear he can see just fine.


    Ser Koln won¡¯t be much of a problem, he is strong and has a large range, but with qi I can momentarily stop his sword and strike him for the point, but Marcus is a problem. He is not only fast and strong, but he fights wild, not to mention I don¡¯t have much experience fighting against double axes. The real danger will be fighting him later in the tournament. Including the preliminary matches there will be 3 days of melee matches with a day off between the semi-finals and the finals. Marcus is the sort of person who if the injury isn¡¯t serious enough then he can keep fighting at full capability, I on the other hand will run the risk of being injured early on in the tournament and fighting him while weakened. I have confidence that I can move enough to avoid serious injuries, but if I get hit a few times on my legs like the first tourney, then I will be seriously disadvantaged. Of course, this is hypothetical, Marcus might get unlucky and lose early on in the tournament, or I could be matched up with him in one of the first few matches and fight him fresh. Hell, he could even be eliminated in the preliminaries, as unlikely as that... is?


    I suddenly get an idea, a rather dirty one, but I never claimed to be clean, in fact I rather like mud, part of being a hunter. With those inconsequential thoughts passing I turn to return to the Seven Kingdoms, when Brutus starts to bark and run off. I sigh and follow knowing the likely destination, and resolving to carry out my plan tomorrow, I still have 4 days.

 chapter 21 - Upset

    Eddard Stark POV


    Winter is coming. That is not a quote or a worry, that is a hope. We have had Summer weather for 5 years now, usually that is a great joy, but I worry for what is to come. Though it is not a precise estimate, the commoner''s belief that a long Summer brings an even longer Winter has some truth to it. At the moment the grain stores are enough to deal with 3 years of Winter, with what we can trade from the South to cover the other 2, but if it goes on any longer then there will be starvation again. I have been dreading more and more but I can come up with only a few solutions to the problem, few of them good. The most obvious would be to increase tax on everything but grain, so that I could trade for even more food, but that would just mean throwing the people to poverty and suffering from revolts, that would weaken the house. With no other obvious solution, I can only try to govern the kingdom as best I can, and hope the gods are merciful.


    ¡°Father there he is, there¡¯s Ben and Brutus.¡± I am interrupted from my dreary thoughts by my daughter Arya, who has spotted her friend in the crowd of preliminary participants. She and Bran have been spending the past couple days playing with Ben and his ¡®hound¡¯ Brutus. If I didn¡¯t ask him myself, I would swear that dog is a direwolf with how large it has grown.


    I am somewhat looking forward to this tournament due to the high quality of the competition this year, especially since Arya has told me Ben is attending to attain knighthood this year. I have been wanting to receive him under my banner for some time, his skill with a bow and arrow has left him undefeated for years, combined with his exceptional swordsmanship and decent manners makes him the ideal knight. I watch with anticipation as the contestants are arranged, it seems he was lucky and didn¡¯t get any of the true contenders next to him, especially Marcus, the popular favourite to win in this tournament. Unlike Ben he is not among the people I am trying to recruit. Firstly, he is the leader of 300 men and is unlikely to give up his command, wealth and independence to serve under me, and also his reputation is quite poor, his rumours of short temper and brutality is well known. He hasn¡¯t committed a crime or I would be forced to hunt him down, but he is not someone I want to represent my name. It looks like he is taking no chances and has 10 of his right hand men enter the contest as well, to make sure there are no lucky hits that deny him his place. He is right to be cautious as this match has 300 people enter, the largest there has been in years.


    The match is called to a start and the chaos begins. There are dozens of dropouts in the first few minutes and space in the courtyard quickly clears up. It doesn¡¯t seem like there are going to be any lucky wins this time, when there are only afew dozen left, the remaining contestants are either composed of groups from mercenaries like the Cragmen, or several of the loners have paired up in groups of 2 to 5 to survive. There can only be 32 winners passing to the finals, so there is one of 2 ways this fight can end, either the groups clash in small scale fights, or the leaders of the groups have their own members quit so that the numbers will drop to allow them to go forward. The second option will be unlikely to happen as there is quite the difference in group sizes, the smallest only has 2 members and the largest is Marcus¡¯s group which is down to 9 members including himself. The only question is who will attack first, if Marcus attacks then the other groups may jump him, so they are at a stalemate at the moment with everyone keeping their distance. Of course, that wouldn¡¯t be very entertaining so if there is no one eliminated in one minute, then the match will be reset with the ring much smaller to contain the remaining members.


    Arya and her brothers were pretty worried about this aspect at the start, as their friend, Ben, was never one to partner up before. Though I suppose that was due to the need for training, this time he has taken precautions as at the start he quickly found his own group, in fact they seemed to have arranged it beforehand as they gathered around him. He has a group of 6 men around him, and seems to be waiting like the rest of them.


    ¡®oh, thought too soon¡¯ I thought as his group suddenly starts to move. It seems he gave a signal to his men and suddenly they charged to Marcus¡¯s group. His men don¡¯t fight though, instead they just tackle his men and clear a path to Marcus. I saw 2 things I never expected. The first was Marcus¡¯s eyes widen in fear, though that was only for a moment, he quickly readied himself and swung his wooden axe downwards. The second was the moment a man became the wind. I was watching Ben one moment, and in the next he became a blur, ducking to the side of the axe and swinging his sword with such speed and strength that it snapped in half on Marcus¡¯s side.


    All of this happened in under a second, and the audience was petrified for a moment, to see one of the prime contestants in this tournament, surrounded by his men brought down in a single blow, it was unthinkable. Marcus was one the floor, not even his armour could protect him from that blow, he was holding his sides and gasping for air. It was Arya who reacted first cheering for her friend, though it quickly became warning shouts as she saw 2 groups of fighters running towards him. Ben is now alone, his other men were all struck when they forced open the gap, and was unarmed. We all thought he would be eliminated, when he suddenly smiled and ran towards one of the groups and rather than be attacked by them, they let him amongst him and handed him a replacement sword. It was clear that these men were allies that were in reserve. The other group was now the one in trouble as not only had they made their move, but they were now facing a group of 5 with Ben as the core. They were forced to stop and look around them, stuck in the exact same position Ben was just in, exposed to all sides.The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    It seems there will be no need for a reset as these actions seemed to send the rest of them into a stir, everyone started fighting again to gain an advantage in this upset. Soon the fighting finished and the winners were decided, Ben being among them. The crowds soon dispersed, the upset and events they saw on everyone¡¯s mind.


    Ben POV


    ¡°What was that, how did you do that, why did you do that?¡± Bran quickly shot his questions at me pertaining to the match that had just finished.


    ¡°What confuses me the most, is why did you go after Marcus, do you have a grudge against him? Rob, the young Stark heir that has started to take after his father¡¯s looks, begins to question the core of the problem. The other brothers that have gathered around also express doubt at the seemingly lack of reason behind my actions.


    I sit on the bench, sipping at my water flask, my legs shaking, and begin to explain my scheme. ¡°It all began the day after I arrived and met with you guys.¡±


    ¡°When I heard that Marcus was attending the contest, I knew that he would be my greatest trouble in the preliminary. Not only is he good but he would surely have many friends to back him up. If I was going to beat him then I needed to get rid of his protectors. It was at that time I started to look for assistance. First, the Cragmen have been conflicting with another company called the Silver Glade, a large company, though a 3rd the size of the Cragmen. They have been suffering loses both in the field and in contracts, looking for a long time for a win. One of their lieutenants and a squad of their men was in Winter Town for a job, I got in contact with them and told them I got a job to remove Marcus from the tourney, and I needed their help. I agreed to split the bounty and pay the entry price for their men to enter with me and assist with the removal of Marcus¡¯s guards. This gave me an opening for my strike.¡± I take a swig of water and a deep breath before I continue, my audience captivated by the many opinions and history between unknown groups.


    ¡°The problem was that the Silver Glade men were untrustworthy, sure I could trust them till Marcus was taken out, but if I told them I was trying to win the tournament, they would have charged much more than their help is worth. Instead I formed a second team unknown to the first. This team was made of low skilled mercs who I have met and have found to be reliable in the past. I pay them a deposit to form a team, and if I help them pass the preliminaries, giving a boost to their reputation and fame, then part of the money will be returned.¡± I don¡¯t tell the children that in order to find these people that I used a brothel owner to act as intermediary. ¡°The plan was that after I take out Marcus, they would gather around me, causing the other groups to hesitate in attacking us, and with myself to act as the main fighter, I got the rest of them to pass as well. I had to pay them the remainder of the bounty for taking out Marcus, but I have now removed my greatest competition and the prize for the melee is now mine for the taking.¡± I laugh an evil laugh, causing Jon to smile awkwardly at my schemes, Arya and Bran mimicked my evil laugh, Rickon looked confused at the twists and turns in the story, while Rob looked thoughtful. It was Rob who brought up the next question.


    ¡°If you could gather a group of 12 men including yourself, why didn¡¯t you just have them all attack at the same time, one group from the front, the other from the back? You would have won just as easily and some of the Silver Glade men would have survived, you would have been in an even stronger position than you were this time?¡± He asks inquisitively, already debating the tactical standpoint of my actions.


    ¡°Rob, do you know what is the most terrifying thing in this world is?¡± I ask, putting him off-guard with the unexpected question, shaking his head. ¡°It¡¯s the unknown. In this world the greatest fear of an army to face is not strong city walls or strategically arranged battle lines, it is the unknown force that can strike from anywhere, hiding in the fog or forests. Like this many a small force has often brought entire armies to a stand-still. If I had all my cards exposed in the first move, then my enemies would still have attacked me, they would just have been smarter and attacked with more groups. When one of the groups that they thought was unrelated to me suddenly join my side instead, all my enemies got worried. What if there are more groups that are my allies, what if when they attack me, they are then attacked from behind. Instead of focusing all their attention on me, they looked to the other groups and saw the other groups looking at them, ruining their momentum. I was forgotten and it became a free for all. I was tired and my allies were weak, but instead of finishing me off they doubted each other, allowing me to benefit.¡± I explain. If Rob is going to rule in the future, he needs to know that sometimes you have to look weak and hide your cards in order to surprise your foes and deal a decisive blow at the right moment.


    As Rob and Jon are left stunned, the only ones of the siblings to understand my reasoning, I talk with the others about how I plan to go about the tournament, wondering if I have any other plans and strategies to win the rest of the tournament. I disappoint them by telling them there are no more schemes. For the first time in both lives I am going to win, not as a hunter or a general, but as a knight.

 chapter 22 - Koln of Bear Island

    With Marcus out of the tournament I felt much more assured of victory, though that¡¯s not to say I got cocky. There were a total of 64 people involved in the main tournament, peasants and nobles, with there being 2 rounds on the first 2 days and the finals on the fourth. From the preliminaries I saw the skill of the other peasants and there was nothing special, while Ser Koln was the only exceptional knight, and I was still sure I could beat him.


    I didn¡¯t dismiss anyone however, there were several new arrivals to the tournament, and just like I defeated Ser Thomas in my first tournament, I was an unknown fighter, while I don¡¯t think there will be any other reincarnations in this tournament, the fact I have not figured how my own was possible means a repetition is always possible. Rather than someone like myself appearing it is more likely for a dark horse who was hiding their skills, which could either end in me being taken out unprepared, or injured meaning I lose the later match. Instead I treated every opponent like the finalist, used my superior reflexes and speed to counter strikes before going for a light tap to score the point. I avoided over committing or using my qi so I could be ready for a burst if they came at me with an unexpected move. In order to be fully committed to the melee I didn¡¯t even sign up to the archery competition this time.


    Fortunately, the first 2 matches were easy, I won with a score of 5 to 0 in them both, nothing flashy to the audiences disappointment, though they were happy with the second days match up. I was faced with Ser Koln in the 3rd round, the one before the semi-finals. Ser Koln and I were the favourites to win since Marcus was outed, and he was much more entertaining to watch. You might think that in a fast-paced duel based on a point system, someone who uses a bulky great sword would be disadvantaged, but that is only if you rely on points to win. If someone scores a hit on you, you have 4 more tries until you are out. But that only works if you can still fight after the first hit. Even blunted, being hit with 150cm of steel, wielded by a 200cm man, is enough to kill a man if it hits the wrong place and even if you block it, if you lack the strength then you will either lose your sword if you are lucky or break your fingers if not. Though deaths are rare, they most commonly happen due to people like Ser Koln use large weapons and accidently strike someone¡¯s chest or head. It¡¯s not malicious, he is just fighting with all his skill. His first opponent forfeited after 2 points, and his second didn¡¯t even try to fight. Th audience was looking forward to our match, imagining they contest between speed and strength.


    The second day I arrived at the stands to prepare for my fight. The Stark kids showed up to greet me, with a surprise guest of Marsal and another lad, younger than me, fit and steady gaze, though he looked slightly nervous in front of me. Marsal said his name was Nathan and was his nephew, he was a fan of mine and asked to greet me. Ispoketo him for a while before the match began, asking what his interests and hobbies are. I then entered the ring, across was Koln who nodded to me. I returned the nod, and we waited for the start.


    The referee stood in the middle of us and addressed us to the audience. ¡°Lords and Ladies, honoured guests, I welcome you to the 3rd round for the melee, this tournament is done in celebration of our Lord Stark¡¯s eldest heir, Lord Robert Stark.¡± He indicates towards the Starks, the audience giving applause. This speech is done before all the matches that the Starks observe. ¡°Our first contender is Ser Bradley Koln, chief knight of House Mormont of Bear Island, the man who led the defence against the Iron born raids 2 years ago!¡± Koln salutes the Starks as the audience applauds him.


    2 years ago, one of the lesser houses from the Iron Islands launched a number of raids to Bear island, as they have for as long as anyone can remember. Bear island has been the most contested land between the North and Iron Islands for millennia. The ownership will swap hands every century or 2, the current owners, House Mormont, have had to fight them off for nearly 2 centuries now, with the constant fighting meaning they commonly send they¡¯re women to fight when the men are away. The current head is Mage Mormont, though most call her ¡®Mace¡¯ due to her skill with a war mace. Her daughters are said to each be as fierce as her, with the rumours being that Mage is actually a spirit of Bear Island, with her daughters being the offspring of her and the bears local to the island.Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    ¡°Our other contender is someone who has gained fame over the last 2 years, greatest archer in the North, the fierce hunter, Ben son of David of Oakbridge!¡± The referee introduces myself. Without titles he likely spent the last hour thinking of an appropriate nickname for me to rile up the crowd. It worked as especially among the commoners the mood was incredibly excitable. I bow as is required for a commoner addressing a Lord.


    We ready our stance and prepare for the referee to call the start. We don¡¯t wait long, for once he checks with the both of us that we are ready, he blows a small whistle made from antlers to signify the start. Koln charges me to begin with, launching a diagonal strike towards my shoulder. I get my sword in the way a manoeuvre the strike away from my body. Allowing my sword to slide along his I deliver a quick counter, striking his arms, before breaking off the confrontation.


    ¡°Arm, stop, point Ben.¡± the referee quickly calls the point informing us to pause and reset our position. The audience cheers, with Koln supporters calling for him to get his head in the game. Koln looks surprised at this outcome; my speed and strength were much better than he expected. Redirecting a sword is a lot harder than most would think, especially with a smaller weapon yourself. My blade is about half the weight and half the length of his, with him being larger and wearing thicker armour his momentum is astounding. The thing he didn¡¯t realise is that I am basically all muscle, with fat minimized to the smallest degree, meaning my explosive power, even without qi, is only slightly less than his.


    We reset and begin again, this time Koln is much more careful, rather than aim to finish this with a single blow, he uses the range of his sword to compensate for his lack of speed. I try to do a repeat of the last fight, look for an opening and dash in for a quick blow, but he¡¯s ready for them. Although he is slower, he knows how to adjust his hands and shoulders to move the sword from a strike to a block in a smooth motion, cutting off my attack. One time he even managed to predict my movement and throw a punch towards my face. Just like the preliminaries attacking with other body parts is allowed but it will only count as a point if his weapon strikes me. With a burst of qi, I manage to lean back and avoid catching the worst of it, though it still connects with my helmet and throws my head back. I roll back with the blow, gaining distance before I stand up, mocking myself for such a foolish move.


    It¡¯s time to get serious. This time when Koln swings his sword, I neither block, parry or dodge. I swing my own sword directly at his blade, qi flowing throughout my body. His blade is sent back, seemingly against the laws of physics. In that opening I lunged forward, striking his helmet with a solid blow. The referee was slow to call the break this time, likely surprised by my strength, though I didn¡¯t move to strike a second time. ¡°Head, stop, 3 point, Ben¡± the referee finally called after a 3 second delay.


    As we reset, Koln was clearly still dizzy, though he was given only 5 seconds to decide if he wanted to forfeit, then the fighting began again. Koln tried to fight defensively, he no longer swung at me, instead he used his sword at maximum range, keeping me at a distance while he tried to regain his balance. I don¡¯t give him the option, I rush and attack from several directions, forcing him back again and again till he was at the edge of the ring. He was forced to attack or be forced out and lose anyway, which I took advantage to score another point on his arms. ¡°Arm, stop, final point Ben, winner!¡± the referee reacts quickly this time, calling the match, followed by eruptions from the audience. It was an amazing match, even the Koln supporters cheered for me, there was no debate that I was the better fighter, only a few who lost money betting didn¡¯t cheer. We returned to our supporting positions, listened to Eddard Stark complement our match, to which we both bowed. We shook hands and went our separate ways, Koln went to get his head looked at, it was bleeding slightly despite the helmet, while I went to find Brutus, who was already greeting the Stark kids.

 chapter 23 - Knights, Squires and Strange Life

    Marsal POV


    Magnificent, it seems I picked the right person. ¡°That was incredible! How did he do that, Ser Koln is at least twice his size, yet he swatted him away with barely any effort at all!¡± My nephew is shouting at me, shaking my arm, all seriousness from earlier has disappeared, only an excited boy watching his favourite champion remains. I lied to Ben earlier when i told him Nathan was his fan, but it seems now that lie has become the truth.


    My nephew has been causing me quite a bit of trouble recently, going on about how he wants to squire for the knights. My brother died about 9 years ago, and since then I have been raising him as my own. I taught him how to read and write, arithmetic, history, the only thing I failed to teach him was common sense. As a resident of Winter Town, just like all the other boys, when he was young, he would watch the knights and wish to be like them. The problem was that unlike the others he actually put in the effort to become one, but he lacked the talent. He was always a short lad, runs in the family, lacked the training and skill to make up for his deficiencies.


    Most people would give up when they realize they can¡¯t accomplish their goal, but not Nathan. He decided if he couldn¡¯t become a knight, then he would be the next best thing, a squire to one. With my resources buying him a place would be an easy matter, but he didn¡¯t want just any squire ship, he wanted to squire for the best fighters. The problem with those people is that the vast majority are either the head of Houses knight forces, whose status wouldn¡¯t allow them have a brothel owners relative as a squire, and the others are those who also act as mercenaries, and their squires don¡¯t do well, they will either be treated as slaves, or die, most of those guys have had 3 or 4 squires in their careers either from them quitting or dying.


    So, I needed a knight, or someone who would become a knight, that is not only skilled enough to get my nephew¡¯s attention, but also smart and kind enough to take care of Nathan. That was where Ben came in. I have been paying attention to him for the past year as a potential knight. He has the skills, the reputation and the brain. From our talks I have found him to be much smarter and wiser than many nobles his age. When he told me that he would be attempting to be knighted this time I decided to introduce Nathan to him with the hope the pair would be taken with the other. I can firmly say Ben impressed Nathan, and from what I saw he was not too disappointed with him either. If I take advantage of our past relationship, and being first to offer, I should be able to convince him.


    Ben POV


    ¡°torso, stop, final point Ben, winner Ben!¡± The referee shouts to the crowd as I strike my opponent in the side. This was the final match on the fourth day and I had finally accomplished my goal. The semi-finals and finals went as expected, I won them both with a 5 to 0 lead, becoming one of the first in many years to win a flawless victory in the Stark tournaments for all my matches. I bowed to my opponent, a knight under House Glover, and bowed to the Starks as I waited for my reward. The Stark kids were cheering for me as well, though Sansa and Rob were more subdued due to their station, and Jon had quietened in general over the years, but the younger ones were shouting their lungs out until their mother, Lady Catelyn Stark, hushed them.


    Eddard rose to address to audience. ¡°A splendid match, you both fought with honour, bringing glory to yourselves and your families. There can be only one winner though. Ben of Oakbridge, step forward.¡± I walk forward till I was within several metres of him, then I got on my knees and asked him. ¡°Lord Stark, how may I assist you?¡±


    ¡°Rise young man.¡± I do so. ¡°Your actions today have brought pleasure to my family and my subjects, and for that I would like to reward your valour. I offer you a place among my court, as a knight of House Stark, to bear my name wherever you may go. Do you accept?¡± He lays it on a bit thick, if I wasn¡¯t sure that he knew I was already planning to accept from his kids, I would think he was trying to force me into accepting, to refuse would mean insulting him in front of an audience, making a bad enemy. Since I know he isn¡¯t then I decide to play along.


    ¡°Lord Stark you have given me a great honour. I would like to accept. I swear by the Old Gods and the New, that I will serve you and your family, from this day until my last day.¡± I declare to the audience.


    ¡°Very well, after the award ceremony, come to the Winterfell keep, you may swear your oaths and be instilled as a member of my court. Know that as a knight you will be required to choose a family name so I hope you will decide before then, if you haven¡¯t already.¡± Eddard smiles to me and calls the melee to a close. The archery will follow this and then the joust before the award ceremony. By the time all that is finished then the sun will start to set, and I will swear my oaths to the setting sun.


    I return to the stands under the applause of the spectators, intent on finding some food and freshening up before the ceremony. It is not a requirement to be clean, but I will be swearing in front of the Stark family and any of the knights currently present in Winterfell, it is wise to make a good first impression considering I may need to work with them in the future. I was just making my way to Brutus, when I saw him munching on a large roasted chicken, Marsal and his nephew standing to the side, smiling as he wagged his tail in happiness.Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.


    ¡°Marsal, Nathan, pleasure to see you, is this just to deliver my cut, or do you have other business with me?¡± I ask him, reminding him of the promise he made me. ¡°Ben, can¡¯t you just enjoy the moment, celebrate with your good friend and not think about money all the time?¡± He shakes his head in a sad manner, exasperated that in my moment of triumph the first thing to come to mind is further profit.


    ¡°¡¯When the field has been harvested and the ramparts built, only then shall I call myself king¡¯, not the most relatable notion, but I make it a habit to never let an opportunity pass me by, especially one with all to gain and nothing to lose. My knighthood is a guarantee already, unless I murder someone in the next few hours, I will become a noble under the most powerful Lord in the North. Besides as a noble I will need resources to maintain my new luxurious lifestyle.¡± I give a fake sweep of a cloak over my shoulder, giving my best noble prick imitation.


    ¡°PFFFT, HA HA, sorry, the image of you at some noble ball just passed my mind. You are the sort of person who never remains more than a month in the city, and gets antsy if you and Brutus don¡¯t hunt in the muddy woods at least once a week. You personally told me that you see cities as little more than trading outposts for good wine, sex and spices, not necessarily in that order.¡± Marsal fails to stifle his laughter with his hand, reminding me of when I got incredibly drunk at his establishment once and ranted my complaints with the city. Don¡¯t get me wrong I like the markets, buildings and knowledge you can find in them, but the smells, confusion and noise of cities will mean I will never settle down in them. In the past life even when I was married, I didn¡¯t live in the city centre, but on the outskirts with the mountain to my back which I travelled every day. The Starks have the right idea. Not only do they have their keep right next to the Wolfwoods, and from what the kids tell me they even have a small grove within their walls, called the Godswood, where the holy tree, Wyrm tree, stands. It is supposedley large tree that has lived for thousands of years, with the image of a face growing on it. It is to that tree that I will swear my vows this evening.


    ¡°Haaah, but enough of that for the moment, I was wondering if you could do me a favour?¡± He asks while I''m in a good mood. ¡°Depends what the favour is?¡± I answer, not committing.


    ¡°My nephew has been wanting to be a squire for several years, and he considers you one of his greatest inspirations. I also think he cannot go wrong with you. After you take your vows would you be willing to take him under yourself?¡± He asks to my surprise. Marsal has always been somewhat dismissive of knights, seeing them as shiny soldiers, good for getting people betting and better at killing, but nothing religious or honourable about them. He once told me that if he believes in any god, it is the god of gold, similar to the Iron Bank of Braavos, though there isn¡¯t a literal god of gold they worship, they are the most powerful merchants on the planet, with banks in every major port and capital in the Seven Kingdoms.


    Before I can debate the pros and cons, Marsal continues, ¡°I am willing to pay the cost for up keep, monthly or yearly, however you want, provide his own horse and equipment. Nathan is literate, talented in numbers and has learned how to take care of horses and armour for several years now. All you need is to take him with you when you travel, treat him like a servant who cleans and cooks if you must. Please, do me this favour.¡± He bows his head, Nathan copies him as well.


    I consider the possible disadvantages. If the costs are taken care of and he is already trained, the only possible problem with taking an unknown person as a squire would be the risk to my honour and face if he messes something up, but I was never much bothered about that, and can always dismiss him if he turns out to be a problem child. I turn to address Nathan.


    ¡°Nathan, if you follow me you will be required to follow my orders, you may give advice and suggestions, but my decision will be final. If you fail to accomplish your tasks, I will send you home, am I understood?¡± He nods and thanks me.


    We all go our separate ways, I get stopped once more by the Starks, who congratulate me, saying they didn¡¯t doubt me for a second. I tell them that I need to get ready for the ceremony and that i will see them at the feast later. I and Brutus head back to the inn where I ask for a heated bath to be prepared, paying the extra cost. I take a nap while I waited, then wash and change into some more formal clothing I had prepared earlier in the week, and waited for the reward ceremony at 5 and then the knighthood ceremony at 6.


    I walk down the cobblestone pavement, sword by my side, flanked by guards with Lord Stark in the lead. The Godswood seems to surround us on all sides, the rustling of the trees in the wind sounding different from every other time I have entered the forest, almost like they are trying to speak. There is an energy in the air, not qi though, something else. Qi belongs to the world, and though I have been in areas in the past where the qi is slightly higher or lower, this is the first time I have ever felt the qi replaced by something else.


    I have my hand on my sword the entire time, suddenly wishing that Brutus was beside me, he had to wait in the courtyard outside. The rest of the guards and knights don¡¯t seem to notice any change, though they have become more solemn due to the religious reasons, when they see my restless appearance, they thought it was just nerves for being knighted and even smiled slightly. The only special case would be Lord Stark. He feels different when I look at him, since entering this area I have felt he has gotten stronger, straighter back and calmer. I don¡¯t think he has noticed it, and if it wasn¡¯t for the fact that I feel no malice in this place I would have booked it, fuck being knighted.


    When we reach a large clearing, we appear in front of what can only be the Wyrm tree. The face of an elderly person, indistinguishable gender, and what appears to be the origin of this energy. I am entranced, it gives the feeling of constantly sending and receiving something, yet at the same time completely oblivious to our presence. It was that final aspect that allowed me to calm down and pay attention to the ceremony. I said my vows, gave my oaths and we left the clearing to return to the dining hall, where a great feast has been prepared to celebrate Rob¡¯s Name Day. I am lost in thoughts, giving only the most minimal of responses to the knights and guards that try to talk to me. I have come to 2 understandings from this ceremony, the first is that this world is not deprived of extraordinary life like I previously thought, and second, I would need much more preparation and resources before I explore this world in its entirety.


    Oh yeah, as a knight I was required to take a family name. I chose the only one suitable. "I am Ben Baskerville, knight of the North." I declare, the name of both my lives joined into one.

 Poll for future work

    A - GoT fanfic, orphan, no plot knowledge, shadow powers, assassin build, villaneous lead.


    B - GoT fanfic, plot knowledge, warrior build, navy officer reincarnation, plot knowledge, anti-hero


    C - One Piece fanfic, plot knowledge, spearman, OP character


    D - Naruto fanfic, no plot knowledge, earth specialty,


    E - Original, any sort


    To fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisTo fill the character limit i will do thisThis book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.

 chapter 24 - The King Cometh

    Nathan (Ben squire) POV


    ¡°Nathan hurry up, i swear if you separate from me I won¡¯t bother to look for you.¡± Ben calls from ahead. Ser, even if you don¡¯t search for me. Afterall it¡¯s hard to miss a renowned knight riding beside a bear sized dog.


    Ben says that Brutus is a boarhound, and I might have believed it at one point but not anymore. At over 150cm tall weighing 400kg if you met him by a river your first instinct would be a cave bear had come to hunt. Fortunately, we are with him and this isn¡¯t the first time they¡¯ve been to this city for a tournament so they are recognised, otherwise the city watch would likely show up in force to put him down. He still receives the odd scream from a startled passer-by and stares from inquisitive children, but after 4 years they have mostly gotten used to him, and is now treated as one of the wonders of Winter Town.


    Once we reach the castle, we are approached by the door guards.


    ¡°Ser Baskerville, it is an honour to see you again so soon, how can we assist you?¡± He asks with a bow. We are frequent visitors for the Starks these past few years. Whenever Ben appears for a tournament he will stay at the Knight quarters in the Winterfell keep, where he will always be greeted by the Young Lords and Ladies. My uncle once told me that it was good to give them space and not get in their way unless they initiate it, trying to establish a relationship forcefully would only result in a negative opinion from everyone. I listened to his advice but didn¡¯t really care about connections, I was just happy to be interracting with them.


    ¡°I heard the king was visiting Lord Stark and I came to pay my respects.¡± We heard the news when we were in Karhold, the Karstark House¡¯s settlement. As a large house in the North they have several businesses in their name that travel all the way to the Capital in the south, so they got their news faster than most others. It only makes sense to see what the king is like. Afterall the king hasn¡¯t visited the North in all the years he has been in power, despite the supposed friendship between the Starks and Baratheons. To be fair, the North is about 600 miles away from King¡¯s Landing, unless there is important business, the king shouldn¡¯t be travelling so far.


    ¡°Of course, the king sent a messenger this morning, he will arrive tomorrow at noon with his family and the rest of court. When he arrives, you can meet him with the rest of the knights.¡± The guard informs Ben. ¡°What an honour, to meet king Robert, I heard he was a fantastic warrior.¡±


    Yes, the stories of Robert still sing in the North even 6 years after the war with the Ironborn. Ser Ethel often complained to Ser Ben that he wishes he had seen the king and Lord in action. Ben has often had to comfort the despondent Ethel reminding him the war against the Greyjoys was nowhere near as glorious as people made it seem. The largest victories were primarily made by Lord Stannis,the master of ships, and the men of the Seaguard, the battle of Pyke was difficult and gruelling, with very little rewards for the men who fought. If Ethel had joined the main contingent with the Lord and the King, an ordinary merc like Ethel would have just been cannon fodder when taking the beaches, becoming food for the crabs.


    I used to disagree with Ben¡¯s viewpoint and was quite dissappointed when the knight I chose to serve appeared to be qiute the coward. I later realised Ser Ben was just cautious and avoids danger when possible, but when we once were stopped by a dozen bandits in the road, they barely got a single word out before 2 were dead with knives in the throat another was torn to pieces and from then on they were just cut to pieces. It was the first time I had ever seen someone move that fast. From then on I kept my opinion to myself and followed him faithfully.


    As Ben thanked the guard, Brutus started to sniff the air before bounding off in the direction of the courtyard.


    ¡°Guess the Starks are out playing today.¡± Ben says with a sigh, turning to me. ¡±well better catch up before he causes an incident.¡± He then starts running at a light jog while i bring the horse and our luggage to the stables where I can ask the men there about our accommodations.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    Ben POV


    As I round the bend, I can see Brutus nuzzling Bran, while Rob and Theon laughing by the side. It seemed they were in the middle of archery practice judging by the discarded bow and targets. Theon was someone I only got acquainted with after I was knighted. He is apparently the son of Balon Greyjoy, the ruler of the Iron Islands, with Theon the next in line. After the war 6 years ago, Theon was taken by Lord Stark as a ward, though the unofficial reason is as a hostage, to keep Balon from rebelling again. I feel bad for the guy as he isn¡¯t a bad kid. He is the same age as Rob and can be a bit of a dick sometimes, but who wouldn¡¯t if they were taken from their homes as a child and their lives are in the fate of someone hundreds of miles away. Fortunately, the Starks are almost impossible to dislike, after 6 years Theon has opened up to the other Stark boys, to Rob especially. He still acts arrogantly from time to time, but that is just compensating for years of inferiority complex.


    ¡°My lords, sorry to interrupt your practice but I seem to have misplaced my steed, would you happen to know where he has gone?¡± I say while sending a silent message to Brutus. At the signal, Brutus grabbed Bran by the scruff and chucked him onto his back where he held on tightly, giggling all the while.


    ¡°It seems your steed has been stolen, you really should treat such a fine beast better, Ser Ben. Many would give their legs for such a prize, myself included.¡± Rob lightly goads me.


    ¡°You¡¯re just in time really, Bran hasn¡¯t made a decent shot all day, he could use some pointers from the greatest marksman in the North. Really,I think the kid needs to find a different goal than the kings guard with skills like those.¡± Theon adds in jest, he knows that he himself was no great archer, though he is capable with a sword for his age. I will often give the boys some tips in the bow, though I am inferior in terms of sword skill compared to the master at arms, so other than sparing I don¡¯t try to advise them on those.


    Bran told me the last time I was here that he wanted to join the kingsguard in the future. The Kingsguard are a group of 7 warriors personally chosen by the king to protect him. Each of them must swear eternal vows to serve the king unto death, with each of them having accomplished feats so astounding that they are sung for hundreds of years. It is a good goal for Bran, as the second son he is unlikely to inherit and the kingsguard is a good method for Nobles to strengthen the bonds with royalty. Of course, that is under the condition that he can achieve the skill required.


    ¡°Big words for big boys, but which of you was a marksman of 10.¡± another aged voice came from the ramparts. As we looked up to see Ned stark, I bowed to my knees. Brutus copied me with a tilt of the head, allowing Bran to slip from his back. I keep the fact that I was a better archer than most by the age of 8, I am probably an exception to the rule.


    Chuckling, Ned said, ¡°Rise Ser Baskerville, and Ser Brutus, having the 2 of you in my keep fills me with ease. Tell me Ben have you come just for the king or will you grace my family with a visit as well.¡±


    ¡°you honour me lord stark, if you will have me.¡± I say getting to my feet and returning a smile. My frequent visits to the stark children, especially Bran and Arya who I get along best with has earned me quite a few browny points with the lord of Winterfell.


    ¡°I have told you before, you when among friends you may call me Ned if you wish.¡± Ned Stark tells me.


    ¡°You do me a great honour Lord Ned. Now Bran, how about I give you a few pointers with the bow and then we can go play with the others.¡± I tell him


    After an hour of practice Bran has started to calm himself a bit more and has stopped getting his fingers in the way of the fletching, though by now the strain on his fingers is affecting his accuracy. When we decide to stop, we see Arya waiting at the edge of the courtyard, bouncing from one foot in anticipation. She was likely told by her father not to interrupt our practice.


    As we walk over, I spot 2 lean looking dogs which Brutus wanders over to smell. The dogs cower before the mighty beast, displaying subservience and allowing Brutus to smell them as Arya hugs him to try and get his attention.


    ¡°Hey brat how¡¯s it going.¡± I call to her. Arya reacts best to informal address than calling her a lady of any sorts. ¡°Who¡¯s the pups, have you brought Brutus a snack.¡± At the mention of snack Brutus starts to drool a little.


    ¡°No, bad Brutus! They aren¡¯t pups, they are direwolves, this is Nymeria and this is Summer.¡± says Arya in indignation. The direwolves, released by Brutus, proceed to stand by their respective masters. Nymeria stands at attention, chest out by Arya, while Summer licks Bran¡¯s hands which were likely tired from practice. ¡°When Nymeria grows up she will be even bigger than Brutus, and then he¡¯ll be the one bowing to her.¡± Unlikely, Brutus is still only at the peak of 1st tier and still has room for growth. Even if the direwolves grow to be as large, they will still be no match for Brutus with his increased intelligence and strength. The fact the Starks have gotten dire wolves is still news to me as they weren¡¯t here the last time I visited, and unlike dogs, no one sells them so they would have had to be caught.


    ¡°Alright fine, you win. Now how bout I show you 2 a new knife trick while we wait for lunch.¡± I tell them to their delight. Like that we spend the next hour playing, the dogs joining at times, till lunch came and the starks went their own way.

 chapter 25 - Home Again

    Elsa POV.


    The as the sun starts to crest the horizon, I rise from my bed and prepare to start the day. Since mother passed and Ed moved to Ben¡¯s house, I often find myself feeling quite lonely, and miss our crowded past. After grabbing a bronze cup of water and placing on my leather leggings and top, I leave the house to perform my exercise. My training starts with stretches followed by 2 laps of the village. Once the muscles are all warmed up and limber, I start to do 60 squats and 60 pushups, followed by 50 situps. Then I go over the exercises Ben taught, particularly the soft skills which focus on the disarment and disabling of lightly armoured men.


    When Ben first started training me, I thought it was a pain and complained. But when the boys were playing with sticks and told me I couldn¡¯t join, that I had to be the princess that needed to be rescued, I enjoyed putting them in the ground. Later when I started to get older and had started developing, I got into a problem with a drunkard at the inn. I was waiting tables when suddenly someone, a big beefy guy who had been drinking since noon grabbed my ass, hard. When I screamed, he and his friends started to laugh at me putting tears in my eyes. When Greta started shouting that she would call the guards, they tried to play it off and one of them tried to rub my head with an apology. I grabbed that hand and twisted, before forcing it behind his back. With a quick repositioning of my left leg in front of his and pushed forward, tripping him into going face first to one of the tables, knocking 2 front teeth out. Facing his stunned companions, I curtsied, saying in a demure voice, ¡°Apology accepted, my good sirs¡±.


    The evening almost ended in a brawl between the creep¡¯s buddies and the other patrons who came to my defence. Fortunately, a pair of guards showed up one of which was my brother. The night ended with them apologising for the disturbance and forced to leave Oakbridge that night. Since then I understood my brothers concern over my ability to protect myself.


    In the future I shouldn¡¯t have these problems though. I plan to marry a knight just like my big brother. They will be able to protect me from harm, take me to parties and live in a big house just like the Roc family. I once fancied Ethel, but then he got married and I put a stop to that plan, though that¡¯s not a problem as I can just aim higher now. It¡¯s a good thing I never told Ethel about those feelings as I now visit his house every day. Since about 2 years ago I have been going to the Roc family to see Ethel¡¯s mother, Molly, and learn Etiquette from her. My friends told me that if they wanted to marry nobility then it would take more than looks, you need manners and knowledge of high society. I tried asking Ben but he told me that he never paid attention to that so he couldn¡¯t teach it. It was about then that Ethel told me that his mother served under a noble lady for several years before marrying his father and she agreed to teach me what I needed to know.Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.


    As I finished my exercise, I went down to Ethan¡¯s house to continue my lessons, saying good morning to Mum and Dad¡¯s graves on the way up. Since Mum died and Ed moved out to live on his own, I inherited the house. Usually Ben would be the one to inherit, but he bought a house of his own 3 years ago so I could have the house to act as my dowry when I decide to marry. The house is much larger than when I was a child and could be sold for several dragons if I wanted to. I also have about2 dragons worth as a yearly allowance from Ben that is kept at the margraves for safe keeping.


    Ben POV


    As I cross the bridge, my horses hooves clapping against the solid wood, I can¡¯t help but think back to what has happened these past few years;


    Mom died a year ago. She came down with a fever during the middle of winter. I tried everything I could, but it ultimately resulted in just making her comfortable. Without a local healer and the roads blocked by a foot of snow no outsiders could be brought. When she passed, she asked me and Ed to look after Elsa, protect her from the cruel world.


    Ed continued in the guards and has now moved out of the house, about ayear after I became a knight and is now the best swordsman in the guards. Not a very impressive accomplishment when the guards are only 20 strong. But the fact that he¡¯s been exercising since young and was trained in the sword by me and Ethan puts him way ahead of the rest.


    Ethel is still with Raven¡¯s Claw which has increased in numbers to 45 men. Even after becoming a knight of a minor house, he kept travelling with the mercenaries, and has become one of their lieutenants, in charge of 10 men. His reason was that unlike me who can hunt, he needs a job to save funds for his own children. He married the woman he was courting, called Sasha, and they have been trying for a child. He still spends winter in Oakbridge with his family and tells stories of his adventures down at the tavern.


    Elsa brings me worry still. She grew up to be a fine young lady and is at the age she should be looking for a husband. I am in no rush to marry her off despite making the preparations, but I''m afraid her ideals are a bit too high. She grew up around me and Ethel talking about knights and their stories and tales, leading her to dream of marrying one in the future. I have no problem with that, as the sister of a knight, beautiful and literate she¡¯d make the perfect wife for any knight or even some non-inheriting lords son. I''ve even brought her to several tourneys and feasts to meet the younger knights and capable sons.


    The problem is she is too picky. The young men she meets are either too immature, ugly or unskilled. Between me and Ed there hasn¡¯t been anyone that¡¯s dared mess with Elsa for years and I am a multi champion archer and swordsman who could beat any of her suitors with my hands tied behind my back. Ironically the only boys she has taken a liking to were Rob and Jon the Stark boys. They are very skilled for their age, good looking and have inherited their fathers serious temperament. They are also the only ones not scared of me. Course she¡¯s only met them once and I''m sure if she gets to know them she¡¯ll dismiss them same as the rest.


    ¡®*sigh* I just hope she grows out of it eventually and learns that this world isn¡¯t a fairy tale. Knights are usually not much more than peasants that have good fighting skills and manners.¡¯ I think while heading towards home.

 chapter 26 - Ruby Ford

    I waited in the house till dark. Nathan was sent ahead to the inn for the horses before heading to my own house where he will sleep for the night, while Brutus napped in his kennel behind the house. Due to not knowing how big Brutus was going to grow when he was young,I have had to remake that kennel twice to adjust for his new sizes. As I started to prepare the fire, I heard Brutus barking before a squeal of delight and loud laughter rang out. As a smile played across my face, I continued to stroke the fire,letting Brutus greet them first.


    When the door opened 2 people and one dog entered. Ed was a fully grown man and hadn¡¯t changed much since last time. He was about 1.9 metres tall, same as me, fully built with strong arms and sturdy legs. It looks like he has been trying to grow a beard, though I tell him it just looks scraggly, maybe he¡¯ll grow into it. His hair is thick and brown with deep blue eyes and his mouth twisted into a grin.


    Elsa on the other hand has grown even taller than when I saw her last, about 1.6metres, tall for a girl her age and with light brown hair flowing past her shoulders. Her face was split in a wide smile and before I could greet her, she gave me a hug, leaping into my arms, while Ed patted my shoulder.


    ¡°Wasn¡¯t expecting the 2 of you to come here together. Didn''t want to interrupt your work and lessons so I waited here for Elsa and then planned to find Ed after patrols.¡± I tell them when they let go. ¡°I¡¯ve already started the fire and bought some tomatoes earlier, thought we could have some soup for dinner.¡± indicating the fire and chopped tomatoes, as well as a few herbs and other vegetables. There is already bread in the pantry.


    ¡°That sounds lovely Ben. I passed Ed on the way back from the Roc house and invited him over for dinner anyway, though we were going to eat at Greta¡¯s.¡± Elsa explained.


    ¡°So, what brings you home so soon? Thought you said you were going to the Wall and then to Whiteport.¡± Ed mentions my early return. About 3 months ago, after my most recent visit home, I decided to take a break from tournaments and see some of the greater sights in the North and start planning future journeys. I had already visited most of the landmarks and Houses in the North, the Wall was the only one left, and after that I was going to White Port, the largest port town in the North, where I was planning to look into ships for crossing the Narrow sea to the continent of Essos, the land mass East of Westeros. There are few ports on the West coast due to the constant Iron born raids and the lack of trading partners. To the East there is Essos, which is said to be far larger than Westeros and has more cities on its East coast than we do on the entire continent, and dozens of small islands scattered around. Other than the Iron Islands there has never been any discovery of other land masses to the West. All journeys out there end in either failure or death.


    ¡°The Wall isn¡¯t going anywhere, but as I passed Winterfell I heard that the king was visiting the North and wanted to see him. I¡¯ll explain the details to you later, but the main reason for my return is that I plan to go south. I will meet up with the Lord and kings procession at the Ruby Ford to pay respects to Dad¡¯s grave. Then I will continue to see Kings Landing, get a look at what makes this capital city so special. I came back to see if you guys wanted to join me.¡± I told them about the kings arrival in the North, though they probably already knew, that sort of news tends to spread.


    They both got sad when I mentioned dad, but cheered up quickly when I mentioned King¡¯s Landing. ¡°The capital! I''ve always wanted to go there! They say the streets are all paved like the kings road and there are parties and festivals happening every day. At the Rob Starks last name day, I saw one of the noble girls who was wearing a dress from kings landing and it was absolutely beautiful, please let me come.¡± Elsa asked, her mind already filled with gowns and jewellery.


    ¡°It could be fun, I''ve always wanted to see if the southerners are really as soft as the travellers say.¡± Ed says with a chuckle, bringing a frown to my face. Ed has been listening to lots of gossip at the tavern in Oakbridge and BushBurn over the years, and one common conversation topic is how the southerners don¡¯t know the hardship of a harsh winter, and because of it they all grow up with smooth skin and bleeding hearts.


    ¡°Ed, I''ve told you about that sort of talk. Saying the south are a bunch of softies is like them calling us stupid barbarians. Though people rarely travel to the north I''ve still seen my fair share of merchants and sell-swords, many of them more than tough enough to match any northerner. If you guys come you are to be on your best behaviour, after all we will be travelling with the royal family who are from the south as well.¡± I say to them both and only move on when they both agree. Afterwards we all start to pack and prepare for the road. We will have to go to Bushburn to rent a few horses for Ed and Elsa, and then it will be about a week on the road to meet with the royal court and then another 2 weeks till the capital. All in all, we will be gone for nearly 2 months, so me and Ed would need to ask the captain of the guard for him to leave, though with a few silvers to hire a sell-sword to stand in should solve any issues.This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version.


    ¡®here lies the heroes that stood against the mad king in the battle of Ruby Ford. May there spirits live on¡¯ read the stone memorial placed in front of a field of many different flowers. There was everything from daisies of the north, water lillies of the riverlands and blue clovers of the Vale. This field was where the peasant soldiers of the armies dead were buried. The families of the soldiers brought flowers from their home to pay tribute and after 15 years those flowers spread to cover the entire field. The strange thing is that usually one or 2 of the flowers that are considered more invasive than others would absorb all the nutrients and kill the others, but here there are dozens of different species living in harmony, making it a special landmark hat has inspired many painters and bards in the area.


    The three of us were standing in front of the grave, Nathan was several meters back watching the horses. Ed and me placed several flowers next to the grave and Elsa buried a copper coin in the dirt. She said she regretted not knowing dad better, and that coin was the first coin she ever earned. Not sure what the symbolism behind it was, but the emotions were palatable. As the one of us 3 that remembers him the best,I can say that he would be happy to know we came to see him, and that we all grew up healthy and safe.


    After an hour we got on our horses and started to return to camp. We had met with the king¡¯s court yesterday and were camping with the other Stark knights and guards while we travel. Arya and Ned were happy to see us and Sansa greeted Elsa, they had met before at one of the partieswhen I introduced her, though she was too busy flirting with the prince to give us much thought. Arya said that she was really bored the first few days of travel. There were very few people her age on this trip, the boys didn¡¯t think a girl should train like a knight and the girls were like Sansa and Marcella,the Royal Princess, who didn¡¯t like that stuff to begin with. Recently she said she found a boy who would practice stick fighting with her, so she was a lot better, and now that I and Brutus were here she was a lot happier.


    I did hear some very sad news concerning her brother. Bran had been climbing one of the eastern towers, as he usually does despite his mothers wishes, when he fell from the tower. He lived, thank god, but is now bed ridden and in a coma. That came as a shock to me and Brutus, and I was very distraught for the first day, for the first day wishing I had practiced medicine skills. In my old world there was a type of practitioner that specialised in healing, called binders. Just like I use qi to manipulate my own body, they use it to manipulate others, speeding the recovery system, mending bones and causing livers and other organs to work better in order to flush out poisons. I never learnt it in my past life and I wasn¡¯t willing to try it here. Without the first clue how to do it, rather than healing them I would likely just hurt them. It was an unofficial stance that the Binders not only acted as healers, but were also the best torturers. Imagine someone manipulating your insides to displace themselves, tearing your bones apart and then putting them together again over and over again, it is a never-ending hell which I am glad to have never experienced, and have no intention to inflict it upon anyone else. Don¡¯t get me wrong, torture is sometimes a necessity in war when the one your torturing has information that could mean the life of yourself and your entire army, but it should always be the last method of information gathering when there are other options. Without a teacher I would have to experiment on countless animals and eventually people, just to get the barest idea of how to heal like a binder. That is a price I am not willing to pay.


    With no other options, I resolve myself to just visiting Bran when I return from kings landing and trying to cheer him up, instead I put my thoughts to something more productive like helping Arya. Personally, I don¡¯t think Arya should focus on trying to fight like a knight. She just doesn¡¯t have the size, now or in the future, for armoured and mounted combat. I offered to show her the bow and knife which are more suited to her, but other than learning a few knife tricks that are more showy than practical, she insists on learning the sword.


    As we were travelling along the river, pondering if I should give her and her friend a few lessons while on this trip, Ed could help as well, I saw a young boy running like his life depended on it away from a clearing and towards the woods. As I was about to call out to the boy, I saw a disturbance by the river and almost doubted my own eyes.


    Arya, Sansa and Prince Joffrey were there, Joffrey was swinging his sword as Arya desperately dodged out of the way while Sansa screamed in a shrill voice to the side. Half a second later I stabbed my heels into my horse, bolting forward with Brutus running beside me, drawing my bow and an arrow. By the time I had an arrow knocked and aimed Brutus was already ahead and just 30 metres from the fight, I was twice the distance. I knew Brutus would be too late, Arya was pinned to a tree and Joffrey¡¯s sword was raised, murder in his eyes. I drew my bow to full length, qi flowing to my arms, releasing the arrow.

 chapter 27 - Putting on a Show

    ¡°AAARRGH!!¡± Joffrey cried, from pain and surprise as the arrow connected with his sword, knocking it from his hands and throwing him off balance.


    ¡°GROWL¡± Brutus was there a moment later and pounced on him, stepping on his back so his face was in the mud. When he placed his jaws close to his ears and growled, you could hear a faint whimpering as well. Combined with Sansa¡¯s now full on screaming and Nymeria¡¯s barks it made for a cacophony of chaos.


    ¡°All of you shut the fuck up, anyone talk without my say will get hamstringed, fuck your parents!! Brutus come.¡± I below in my loudest voice, ringing across the ford and silencing the rest. As Brutus returned and Joffrey turned over, I could see that not only had he pissed himself, but his right hand had a broken thumb and index finger from when my arrow disarmed him. Now that the threat to his life has passed, he had started to clutch his hand, the pain returning.


    ¡°Arya, explain yourself, what happened?¡± I glanced the 3 of them and judging that Joffrey was obviously out and Sansa was in the middle of a mild panic attack, I deemed Arya as the best source of information.


    As she explained, though she was unclear and jumbled in parts, the rough situation was explained to me. Arya and her friend, a boy called Micah, were practicing here when Joffrey and Sansa rode in, I only see Sansa¡¯s horse still here so Joffrey¡¯s must have been the one that ran off. Joffrey attacked Micah, cutting his face, and Arya hit him with a stick causing Joffrey to attack her. That¡¯s about when I showed up.


    ¡®Fucking nobles¡¯ I think to myself, forgetting for a moment that I was technically one myself, though the lowest sort, knowing just what sort of storm this is going to cause. If they were commoners then this would likely end with being called kids being kids. I would probably have to pay for the healer, but that depends on how I felt, after all it was Joffrey¡¯s fault, and if the parents were looking to just make a profit then I would likely break their hands as well for pissing me off. These kids are the most high born kids in Westeros. This could be called attempted murder of the Stark¡¯s daughter, assault of the crown prince or even treason, maybe all 3 if they intend to punish all of us. The key point is that although I am a knight my status doesn¡¯t count for squat compared with them so I''m likely to be the fall guy if the deck isn¡¯t stacked. Blaming any of the other parties would result in either war or weakening of royal authority, something everyone wants to avoid.


    I briefly consider killing Sansa¡¯s horse to slow their return to camp and fleeing to the nearest port and out of Westeros, but quickly dismiss it. Even if I kill the horse it would take them at most half an hour to get back, then I will be declared a traitor and a pursuit is sent after us. As a 1st tier archer I could likely kill 5-8 if I have the advantage of range but they will surely send more and I would have to travel for several days through the Riverlands before even reaching the Eastern coast let alone a port that would no doubt be closed by the time I reach it. If I was alone, I could maybe hide in the woods, with me and Brutus we could outrun any trackers, lay low for a few weeks and then either become a bandit or flee when people have lowered the inspections at ports. But with Ed and Elsa here they will definitely be called accomplices, with no chance I can avoid the kings trackers for more than a week, leaving me to fight and die.


    This leaves me with only one option. Stack the deck.


    ¡°Nathan, find that Micah boy and bring him to Lord Stark. Arya, you get on the horse with Sansa and return to your father straight away, tell him what happened, Ed, Elsa you 2 go with them. I will stay here with the prince and treat his wounds.¡± After I finished giving orders, I prepared to set the stage, rehearsing my lines and creating a back-ground.


    King Robert POV


    ¡®Bugger me, I need a drink¡¯ I thought as I listen to the 2 sides of the room shout at each other.


    I can¡¯t help but think that this is karma. For years I''ve longed for another war where I can leave that blasted capital and get back to what I do best. Then the first time I leave the crownlands in years I am sitting in the middle of what is beginning to be a war between the Lannisters and Starks, my 2 greatest supporters.


    It started when I went out for a ride with Ned earlier, only to be interrupted by a messenger telling of trouble with his girls. He raced back of course, and I started to get a strange feeling so I headed back as well, though much slower.I was right of course. Turns out my fucking son had caused a shitstorm with the Stark girls. I just called for myguards to mount up and to look for the brat when a horse with 2 riders was racing straight for the camp, a huge beast running beside them, the leading rider shouting, ¡°Make way, make way for the prince!!¡±. Everyone cleared the way, whether out of fear of the horse, hound or prince, none was certain.


    He stopped right in front of me. I recognized him, he was one of Ned¡¯s knights, he owned an enormous hound and was someone Selmy said was a good fighter. When he dismounted and knelt on one knee before me, I could see Geoffrey behind him on the horse clutching his fingers, and was about to ask what was going on, when the knight spoke loudly and clearly, voice echoing in the surroundings.This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.


    ¡°Your Majesty, Ser Ben Baskerville has witnessed a crime involving the royal family and the Stark household, I request a trial.¡± My heart fell and my stomach clenched at those words. I could see my wife turn red with anger at Geoffrey¡¯s injury and Ned was walking over, having heard the situation from his daughters and already got that look of righteous combat in his eyes, and I could already tell it would be a shit show.


    The final verdict was obvious. My son stupidly attacked a boy and the girl then hit him with a stick in an attempt to save her friend. No harm so far, until the bugger tried to kill Ned¡¯s girl and Ser Baskerville injured his hand. If it wasn¡¯t for the fact it was what caused this mess, I would be praising the hell out of the fact a man can knock a man¡¯s sword from his own hand from 60 metres on horse back. Cersei was out for blood and wanted them all punished and would likely have tried to involve Ned if she could think how. But even if I wanted to punish the girl, and I don¡¯t, I couldn¡¯t as there are several witnesses saying my son was the idiot at fault. Realising that, she settled on Baskerville, saying that he should lose his head for trying to kill the prince. And that¡¯s led to this stalemate.


    On one hand, he injured my son, which is bad, on the other he was protecting the child of his lord which he is sworn to do. If this was the normal petty bullshit she was bringing up I would reluctantly punish the knight, with a few whips for show, and then send some gold in secret to apologize. He would be publicly shamed and never be able to attend noble functions again, but he would live. But this time is different. I¡¯ve been in enough battles to see that that the Stark men are subconsciously getting in formation, and Ned is ready to confront me on behalf of his child¡¯s benefactor. If I insist on punishing him then although they wouldn¡¯t draw swords, but the tale would spread all over the North and Riverlands of how the corrupt king ignored the law to punish the noble knight. Ned would likely never forgive me.


    After thinking over the current situation and wondering which pile of shit would be easier to swallow, the cause of this, Ser Baskerville, spoke.


    ¡°Your Majesty, may I offer a solution to the current problem?¡± He spoke clearly, and for the first time since I asked him for his rendition of events. Not seeing anyway he could make this worse, I allowed it.


    ¡°I can understand your Majesty¡¯s predicament, torn between your love for your son and love for your friend, Lord Stark. As such I propose we let another judge this case.¡± I like what he¡¯s saying but there¡¯s no one else who could take over for the king in this case, unless... ¡°I request trial by combat, let the god¡¯s decide my fate.¡± yeah that.


    Ben POV


    The plan worked almost perfectly. I knew that if I wanted to stand against the voice of the prince, who from what I''ve seen is a cunt and won¡¯t acknowledge his faults, I had to first get a backer and second make it clear that this was nothing but children playing gone wrong. The first was easy, I sent the Stark girls home first, they would tell Ned who would be obligated as my Lord to stand up for me and demand justice, especially since I just saved his daughter¡¯s life.


    The second part was trickier. First, I delayed Joffrey¡¯s return by insisting on treating him and slowly travelled back to camp, this was to allow for word to spread and gather an audience, all despite the prince¡¯s complaints and threats to hurry. I only sped up when I reached the camp and saw the king, rushing before him and immediately calling for a trial. Like this, while my side, the Starks, will have had time to get stories straight and prepare, the prince and queen¡¯s side won¡¯t. With the evidence and testimony of the Starks, Micah and my family the recounting of the events obviously showed that I was innocent. There was just one problem.


    The queen is a complete bitch.


    I swear even after hearing how this was all Joffrey¡¯s fault, she still only wanted to make me and Arya scream in pain before mounting our heads on spikes. Not literally, but you can read between the lines that she wanted us punished and was willing to go to war to do it. That was unexpected. I thought the queen would be grateful that her son wasn¡¯t either killed or killed Arya, but nooo, she only cares that her boy was hurt.


    That¡¯s when the plan fell apart and I needed to go to back-up. The queen clearly had a lot of influence and even if Ned had a falling out with the king over this it wouldn¡¯t do me any good, as I would still be punished. Likely by death and being lucky if my family avoids the same fate. So, I called for a trial by combat, the back-up plan I thought for if anything went unexpected.


    It is an ancient custom that has been around since before even the Targaryeans, where if a noble feels he or she is falsely accused then they can demand to be judged by the gods, represented by either themselves or their champion in a fight to the death. The winner is declared innocent and pardoned of all charges. The requirement is that the crime must be in doubt, if I attacked the king in front of his guards, he could declare me guilty and any request for combat would be met with dismissal. As a knight I have this right. I might prefer the bow to sword, but I am still the best swordsman in the North with my qi giving me the strength and reflexes of 3 men combined. Joffrey only has a few men he could call upon, the most dangerous would be the Hound but even then, I have full confidence in victory.


    If this was the capital, I would be a bit worried as he could postpone the fight so he could recruit the most skilled fighters in the land, or try to poison me in my cell. Here however, the court is being held in a small inn while the king needs to return with all haste and wants this over and done with.


    ¡°Very well then, let¡¯s get this over with, who will champion my son?¡± Robert asked, clearly happy that I offered a solution that let¡¯s everyone stand down with no repercussions to him. Just as the Hound was about to step forward, reluctantly I might add, the fucking Kingslayer spoke.


    ¡°Your majesty, I would like the honour to represent my nephew in this trial!!¡± Jaime announced to the shock of the entire room.


    ¡®Am I cursed, or is someone fucking with me?¡¯ I thought as the second plan of the evening goes wrong, and retreat to the mental drawing board.

 chapter 28 - Trial by Combat

    Jaime Lannister POV


    ¡°Why are you doing this?¡± Cersei asked the second she was through the door.


    ¡°I could ask you the same, what was it father told us before we left the capital?¡± I asked in response, knowing full well the answer.


    ¡°They tried to murder my son, the fact I didn¡¯t ask for all their heads is already mild enough.¡± she tries to deflect.


    ¡°He had 2 broken fingers, they¡¯ll probably heal by the time we return if not a week later. You know what I am talking about.¡± I put down my sword that I was sharpening and checking for damage, and turn to face her.


    ¡°Father told us to try and win over the Starks if we can, and if we can¡¯t then to avoid their ire. We both agreed that after the accident with the boy we would keep quiet and try not to gain attention.¡± I remind her when it is clear she doesn¡¯t want to admit it. When that boy found us on the tower, I knew what needed to be done, reluctant as I was. If there was any other option that wouldn¡¯t have ended with the deaths of my entire family I would have taken it. When I think back to how I pushed that boy I wonder whether it was a test by the gods. The worst part is I don¡¯t know if I was right or not.


    ¡°Ned Stark is a naive and incompetent old fool, from the distant North, he¡¯s no threat to us.¡± Cersei states as she picks up a chalice and fills it with wine.


    ¡°Naive, yes, old, maybe, but he is not incompetent. He has ruled over the North for 17 years and has a firm hold on his bannermen. But it¡¯s not his strength we need to worry about, the Lannisters outnumber the Starks 3 to one. It¡¯s his stubbornness and sense of duty we have to be careful of.¡± I pause to wet my throat, noting Cersei is still dismissive. Father explained some of this to me in a letter, and I pieced together the rest, and I wonder if Cersei either didn¡¯t understand or just ignored the advice. Likely the second.


    ¡°Ned is the hand of the king and about to enter the snakes den that is King¡¯s Landing. With his attitude he will likely bite everyone with even a bit of corruption, which is everyone. He will be torn apart, but not before leaving his mark on his enemies. That¡¯s what we are right now. If we waited until we reached the capital we could have turned everyone against him and even brought down our own enemies with him. But this stunt has turned his full attention onto us, and worse everyone else¡¯s.¡± She is frowning now, I can tell she is getting the idea, but I need to push the importance. ¡°This is the first confrontation Ned is having before he enters the politics of king¡¯s Landing and it is against the strongest power in Westeros, us. If he wins it will define the momentum of the Starks rise and our fall. Instead of rallying against him, they might choose to step down from him to attack us instead.¡±


    ¡°But it doesn¡¯t have to be you that fights, the Hound is sworn to fight to the death for Geoffrey, he would fight instead.¡± Cersei sighs and consents to the importance to this duel, her only remaining issue is her concern for me.


    ¡°Perhaps but we can¡¯t risk it. That knight is called Ben Baskerville, he was knighted 2 years ago at one of Starks tourneys. The fighters of the North can¡¯t be compared to the ones in King¡¯s Landing but the fact he has fought in dozens of fights in the last 2 years since then and hasn¡¯t lost yet proves his skill. The Hound is good, but I''m better. We can¡¯t risk losing this fight.¡± I hold her in my arms and embrace her. She stays like that for a while before we kiss and enter one another.


    Ben POV


    The sun crests the horizon, a chill spring wind sweeps the crowds as they stand around a rough ring in the ground about 30 metres wide. The king declared the duel would take place the next day so to allow the combatants proper rest, though it didn¡¯t help me except give me more time to worry about what is coming next. My family came last night, Elsa in tears, asking if I was going to be alright. I tried to reassure them that it would be fine. They are now standing with Brutus next to the Starks, Arya looking particularly concerned and guilty. I heard she tried to ask her father several times to protect me which warms my heart.


    Before I arrived, Nathan asked me if I needed help putting on my armour. It is the scale variety, an expensive set made by the Tully family, that when worn looks like fish scales. I bought it last year due to its light weight and effectiveness at deflecting arrows and cuts, though it is quite weak to thrusts. As an archer primarily and someone who relies on speed to fight with a sword it was the best option. I told him no and to instead to fetch my hunting gear and sword, a set of leather with slots for several throwing knives and a pair of hunting knives on each side. This is a trial by combat, not a tournament, so all and any weapons are allowed. This startled the audience and Ned asked me if I would be fine with such a light gear, to which I said it was perfect for the job.


    Jaime on the other hand was decked in full king¡¯s guard plate armour, minus the cloak, with one of the finest swords attached to his waist. King Robert stood up from his seat of honour.


    ¡°We stand here before the gods, New and Old, this day to decide the fate of Ser Ben Baskerville, who has requested trial by combat, representing himself. My son, Geoffrey Baratheon, will be championed by Ser Jaime Lannister. May your blades strike true. Begin.¡± He declared the start of the duel and sat on his makeshift throne with a drink in his hand.


    We both drew our swords at this point, standing 5 metres apart, and assumed our stance.


    ¡°Nothing personal Baskerville, let¡¯s give them a good show.¡± Jaime calls to me, his voice slightly distorted by his helmet, though not enough to conceal his confidence


    ¡°Apologies Ser Jaime, but this isn¡¯t a show.¡± My face loses all emotion, and Jaime pauses as he sees me looking at him as no man should ever look at another. I lift my sword overhead and declare, ¡°This, is a hunt!!¡± with those words I swing down and throw my sword straight at his chest.This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    Jaime is shocked, but he still manages to twist his body and use his sword to change the direction of the projectile enough that it flies to the right of him. This rapid motion, combined with the blow from the sword, throws him off balance and exposes his left side. With a wide stance he regains his balance as he suddenly feels a sharp pain in each of his legs, causing him to collapse to the ground. As he glances towards them he sees 2 of my throwing knives lodged in each of his hamstrings through the gap between his greaves, the blood flowing in a slow trickle.


    I stand up straight returning to my original position. ¡®Checkmate¡¯ I think as I note both knives hit their target.


    ¡°Surrender Jaime¡± I tell him


    ¡°You damn coward, Baskerville. Why would I surrender, I haven¡¯t lost yet?¡± Jaime directs a scornful, hate filled glare my way, while he refutes my offer. He adjusts his position to cover his leg, sword in front to fend off any follow up. It is pointless as I have no intention of attacking.


    ¡°You have no chance of winning now, due to the fact you can no longer strike me.¡± I tell him, which brings a confused look. ¡°Look at our respective apparel.¡± I hint.


    Everyone notices the distinct difference between our armour, the more martial backgrounded already noticing the issue and realising my plan, to their great displeasure. Jaime also notices the problem when I make no move to attack, and even seem to be keeping my distance. He gets one of the most enraged looks on his face and seems to be doubting I could be this despicable. I need to hammer the situation home so I still explain it.


    ¡°You are wearing a complete set of plate armour weighing about 20kgs, now supported by 2 bad legs. I am in fit condition, in equipment weighing only a few kilos at most. This arena may only be 30 metres wide but I am more than capable of staying out of your range.¡± The reveal of my plan brings complaints and calls for an honourable fight from the audience, but I ignore them and focus on Jaime.


    The rage is clear on his face now, his helmet discarded. He reaches for the knives and with a grunt pulls them both out, inviting a small spurt of blood.Fortunately for him, I didn¡¯t hit any arteries. With his sword as support he rises to his feet and charges at me. The audience is cheering for him at the moment, except for the North faction, the visiting lords and their guards want the ¡®Kingslayer¡¯ to remove the dishonourable knight. Ironic.


    His efforts are futile as I simply retreat to the edge of the ring and run around the outside. Jaime tries to keep up, but between the armour and his wounds he can¡¯t reach me despite every effort. As the minutes go on his legs bleed more and more and he eventually slows to a stop. If the audience wasn¡¯t forbidden by threat of death, I bet one of them would have tried to hold me still as I passed them, allowing Jaime to stab me. When 5 minutes had passed since the start, Jaime finally stopped, the loss of blood too great.


    ¡°Baskerville!!!¡±He yells and then pants before continuing. ¡°Fight me like a man, or kill me, just stop this foolishness! This is humiliating for me, you and your lord. Do you have no care for his name.¡± He had realised there was no way to kill me and was trying bait me into ending it, even if it meant his death. I had to admire his determination to die before surrendering.


    ¡°Like you said, nothing personal, but I can¡¯t kill you. You are the son of Tywin Lannister, Lord Paramount of the Westerlands and one of the most powerful men alive. You are also the brother to the queen. I may just be some ignorant fool from the countryside, but even I know the folly of killing you.¡± It is time to perform step 2 of my plan. See I never had any concern that I would lose to Jaime. He is a good fighter but even without the earlier trick I would have won. With my knives I could have landed 3 or 4 of them even with his best efforts to dodge, and then I could have carved him up. If I was feeling flashy, then I could have used qi to strengthen my body for extended period.


    At the peak of 1st tier I have much more energy to spare than years ago, when I first broke through. I could boost my strength for about 2 minutes, moving so fast and strong he would be lucky to withstand a dozen or more blows. I¡¯d likely be exhausted and unable to move at the end, but I would have had an over 95% chance of killing him. The problem was winning without killing him.


    The Lannisters are one of the most powerful families in Westeros, of same status as the Starks and even if his father was able to understand that it was me or him and not seek revenge, the bitch queen has already shown her stripes. If she was willing to have me killed and tortured for breaking 2 of her son¡¯s fingers, imagine what she would try after killing her brother. She is the sort of person who would use dirty methods, and I don¡¯t fear assassins but I don¡¯t want to test all my food and water for poison for the rest of my life.


    This led me to this little performance and reveal. The effect was immediate, the lords and knights already start to comprehend my reasoning. Although they still aren¡¯t happy with my actions, they understand that they would likely try to avoid that fate at all costs if they were in my shoes.


    ¡°Surrender Jaime. If you continue then your wounds will only get worse. At best you will ruin your muscles and you will never fight again, at worst they will get infected and have to amputate them. If you feel you need to regain your honour then I will duel you again another time, so long as it isn¡®t to the death, with no tricks involved.¡± I try to convince him of the logic, as the only part of my plan remaining is reliant on Jaime.


    Since this is a trial by combat, it can only end in several ways. First is I am killed which means the gods say I was guilty and the sentence is carried has been carried out. The second is Jaime dies I which case I am innocent and can go free. However, there is a third method. If Jaime surrenders and the surrender is accepted by all other parties, namely me, the judge, in this case the king, and the prosecutor, Geoffrey, then he will be allowed to withdraw and I am innocent.


    He looks down for a moment, seems to consider for a moment, then says ¡°Get it over with, a lion doesn¡¯t beg the dogs.¡± Fire burns in his eyes, his decision made. I sigh, draw another throwing knife and ready myself to plant it in his skull. I will likely have to bring my family back to the North and go into training for a few years until I have sufficient strength. Whether the Lannisters leave us alone or not will depend on whether Ikill their entire family in secret or not.


    ¡°WAIT!!! Stop, don¡¯t kill him! Robert do something he¡¯s your brother-in-law!¡± Cersei was screaming from the side, trying to get Robert to cancel the fight or something. She was in hysterics and had lost her previous demeanor that looked to be in charge of everything.


    ¡°What would you have me do woman, the idiot doesn¡¯t surrender.¡± Robert tells his wife causing her to break down in tears. It¡¯s likely she would have rushed into the ring if the king and Selmy weren¡¯t holding her back.


    I sigh and resolve myself to making an enemy for life when I hear a mutter. ¡°I surrender¡±.


    I turn to face him and realise he was looking to Cersei as well. I was the only one who heard him so he spoke louder, ¡°I surrender!¡±


    The king heard him this time and looked to him in surprise followed by everyone else. His sister in particular looked shocked followed by relief followed by shame as she realised it was because of her that he swallowed his pride.


    Not one to look a gift horse in the mouth I spoke, ¡°Ser Jaime Lannister, your love for your sibling is most admirable. I am sorry our first duel had to end in such a manner.¡± I accept his surrender with a deep bow. By implying to the audience that not only is this not the last time we will fight, but also that he only surrendered because of his love for family, I am saving as much of his honour as possible and hopefully avoiding another conflict till he asks for a rematch. By the time his legs heal and he comes for me I will have broken to the 2nd tier and have no fear of him or his family.


    Like that the most confusing and possibly stressful duel in the last 50 years came to an end.

 chapter 29 - Oaths and 2nd Tier

    The events for that day unfortunately didn¡¯t end there, after the fight the king asked to ride with me.


    ¡°I must say Ser Baskerville I am disappointed. Yesterday I talked with Ned and asked him what were your chances of victory and what he told me had me looking forward to a great fight. He said you were the fastest swordsman in the North and in terms of bow you are unmatched. Your hound who Ned told me wasn¡¯t the father to his dire wolves but instead just an ordinary boar hound, one the size of a bear maybe, but of normal birth. I had thought to offer you a place among the King¡¯s guard if you won though now, I am not so sure.¡± Robert confessed his previous intentions, surprising me.


    ¡°You do me a great honour, your Majesty, but the king¡¯s guard wouldn¡¯t suit me. Before a knight I am a hunter, and me and Brutus wouldn¡¯t trade the woods of wilds for the congested city if we could help it. Not to mention I have now displeased both your wife and son, who would not like my company much.¡± I quickly try to dissuade him from any further thought of me in the King¡¯sguard. For most second sons and low born knights it is the honour of a life time, but being a King¡¯s guard means swearing to protect the royal family for the rest of my life, I would likely never return home and lose all my previous freedoms. The fact I would be required to give my life to save the queen and prince if it came to it.Made my skin crawl.


    ¡°Fair enough, it was just a thought, no need to look for escape routes.¡± The king replies, my intentions seen through. ¡°You were right to fear Tywin though. That man is dangerous to everyone who gets in his way. That man would like nothing more than to stick himself or his son on that throne, instead he just settles for controlling me.¡± Shit, I do not want to get involved in any more politics, and if the king opens up to me in confidence, I might get dragged into it. I quickly excuse myself, saying I needed to check on my family and head back to camp. When I get there, I can see my family with the Starks, Arya and Elsa looking particularly worried.


    ¡°Ben I am so sorry that this happened, it¡¯s all my fault.¡± Arya tells me, clearly regretful of the danger I was put through. I just hope this hasn''t traumatised the girl. Though knowing Arya she will bounce back soon.


    ¡°Ben are we going to be alright?¡± Elsa was clearly put through a lot, between worrying for my safety and thinking of the future problems, she was drained. She had never been involved in such heavy actions like treason and fights to the death. She had seen her share of duels but they never ended in death, the ones she saw at least.


    ¡°Both of you don¡¯t need to worry. The fight is over now and both of us have got away with little injury and not much loss of face. They should be as eager to put this whole thing to rest.¡± I comfort them to their obvious relief. I wasn¡¯t lying, though I may have been more optimistic about the chances of this blowing over than I let on. I am just a lowly knight of the North, hardly a political opposition, and the Lannisters should have much greater troubles than me to worry about. With my offer for a duel mentioned earlier, they shouldn¡¯t try to have me killed for fear of suspicion, and instead want Jaime to remove this shame by defeating me. If they paid me enough, I might even be willing to take a dive, provided the conditions weren¡¯t like today. They get honour, I get money and relief from losing a powerful enemy, win-win. Of course, this is all under the assumption they can see more than a step ahead. For a normal noble family this shouldn¡¯t be a problem, but from what I''ve seen of the queen, I have my doubts.


    Just as I thought I was finally off the hook, Ned came up to us and asked to see me alone, a deep frown on his face. We rode for about 10 minutes in silence and when we were far enough from camp for anyone to accurately discern us, I bowed to him from horse back and broached the topic I was sure he wanted to.


    ¡°Lord Stark, I have brought shame to your name and the name of the North today, for that you have my greatest apologies. You took great pity on me when you knighted me, which I have repaid with dishonour. I have no excuse except it was the only way to ensure my families safety.¡± I give the most heartfelt apology I could think of. As a knight of House Stark whenever I fight, I am bearing their name. My fight will have dragged their name into the dirt and could even cause me to lose my title. It would be a shame, but I would also be forbidden from seeing the Stark kids again. A shamed ex-knight has no business corrupting the children of a great family, and all that.


    ¡°Ben¡± Ned starts to say as he places his hand on my shoulder and pulls me upright. ¡°You saved my daughter¡¯s life, that is a debt I can never repay. Why on earth would you need to apologise?¡± He asks looking me dead in the eye. He is completely serious, though he appears to have a slight smile tugging on his lips.


    That was not what I was expecting. ¡°But the duel... you must admit my Lord it was not the exemplary demonstration of skill.¡± I remind him, honestly wondering if he forgot.


    ¡°That is true.And yet it was still one of the most noble demonstrations I have ever seen.¡± He smiles at me. ¡°You were willing to risk your life, throw away your fame, position and dignity all for the sake of avoiding causing your family trouble. Why did you? I have known men who would sell their family and responsibilities for even the slightest rise in station, or even to just avoid blame.¡± He asks me, genuinely curious.


    I think for a bit and point to the East, saying, ¡°2 miles from here lies my father¡¯s body, who died at the Trident to make this kingdom a safer place for me. Before he left us, I promised I would look after this family.¡± I turn to look at him, startling him with the conviction in my eyes, ¡°Fuck the Lannisters, even if the gods themselves descended they would have to crawl over my corpse before they even think of harming them. Pride, dignity, fame? What¡¯s that, can you eat it? They are currency that I would spend in a heartbeat if it meant keeping that oath.¡± I declare, opening up for the first time to him. This was probably not the best idea to reveal all my feelings to my Lord, especially my willingness to oppose my superiors. No matter the position that is always an undesirable trait in a subordinate.


    Ned is silent for a moment likely stunned by my outburst. After a few moments he smiles, and laughs in a deep voice, slapping his leg twice to the displeasure of his horse. ¡°Well said, Ben well said.¡± He compliments me. ¡°Those who keep their oaths are in short supply these days, knowing another is serving my family brings me comfort.¡± He drew his sword. ¡°I swear to you Ser Baskerville,by the gods New and Old, if you protect my family, I will protect yours.¡±This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    Ned Stark, Paramount of the North, the Quiet Wolf who declares war and the entire North follows, just swore an oath to me. I¡¯ll admit it I was stunned. When the Mad King declared war and the North, Vale, Stormlands and Riverlands rose up, itwas only the North that was completely united.All the others had lords that refused the call or even sided with the king. Only the North rallied together behind the recently named heir, who was only 20 at the time. People have argued that that is because of the distance from the North to the capital they have always been estranged from the influence of the royals, but that doesn¡¯t change that the Starks have ruled the North for thousands of years and Ned is the undisputed ruler. An oath from someone like him, especially someone famous for keeping his oaths, is the same as gaining the backing from the entire North.


    As Ned resheathed his sword and heads back to camp, leaving me dazed, I think that my previous priorities have changed. I never put too much thought into the oath I gave when knighted, my relationship to the Starks and protecting Arya was due to my fondness for the children and I was sure I could get out of the situation alive. Now, I feel that just like when I served my father-in-law from my previous life. Ned Stark is a lord worthy of serving. I turn my horse and return to camp, a whimsical smile on my face.


    My goal still haven¡¯t changed, I will not dedicate my entire life to the Starks, but I think going the extra mile is more than necessary.


    Our journey to king¡¯s landing continued without further troubles. The tension between the Lannisters and the Starks were stretched to be certain, but fortunately Cersei was too busy tending to her brother and son to be starting trouble, while the king and Ned stopped further conflict between the guards and banner-men.


    I did decide that I needed to speed up my cultivation so that I would have greater options. Before this journey planned to wait until our return to break through to 2nd tier but that was a mistake. If I was 2nd tier then I could have fled with my family and avoided capture if I didn¡¯t want to risk the trial. Or the fight with Jaime could have been much smoother. I had to use tricks and dirty tactics to beat him without killing him, but at second tier I could have beaten him easily just relying on my increased reflexes and strength.


    It took me 10 days to break through to the 2nd tier. The 1st tier involves having qi flow to every part of your body allowing for bursts of strength. The 2nd involves pushing that energy outside the body. This not only increases your qi greatly, boosting your physical strength far beyond what your muscles would previously indicate, but you can mould qi into objects you touch. In my case I would use it to wrap my bow and or arrows.


    The bow would gain greater tensile strength effectively doubling my range. Imagine a bow that has a maximum range of 300 metres suddenly doubling to 600. Without shields or cover I could wipe out a dozen archers before they even get in range to return fire, and even when they are with my superior skills and power, I could kill another dozen or 2 easily.


    With the arrows I can make the qi stay within the arrow for a few seconds, giving it extra penetrative power. The arrow method is a lot more costly so I rarely use it except for particularly sturdy foes. With my new sword skills, I even have an additional method of combat than my previous life. I can use qi to strengthen my sword and sharpen it so that it outclasses most other varieties.


    With my superior physical abilities and qi levels even my previous qi skills have been increased. My body has evolved so that my muscles are like metal fibres, even without qi I could achieve the previous levels of speed and strength that was only possible for short times when boosted. When I do use qi to work my muscles, I can use 10 times a normal man¡¯s strength, allowing me to chop a tree with a single swing.


    When we finally arrived at the capital my family and I split from the Starks, after promising to visit Arya and Ned at the keep, so that we could find lodgings of our own. When the five, 4 people and 1 dog, entered the city the first thing we noticed was the smell. I had never quite realised how large numbers of people crammed into small space could cause so much rotting and shit. It was almost unbearable for Brutus, whining constantly, even going so far to use our bond to express his displeasure with qi. Winter Town is much more spread out and the population is half the size, with a lot of them moving in and out at times. This city has over half a million people living here every day.


    ¡°Nathan, ride ahead and try to find us lodging near to the port, hopefully the smell of the sea and the winds will help hide the scent of shit and filth. We will be near the docks, come find us when you¡¯re done.¡± I order and hand him several stags which should be enough to find us rooms in a decent inn. ¡°Yes Ser.¡± He answers.


    As Nathan trotted off down the streets to the merchant district we turned to the sea and headed for several large ships being loaded and unloaded. The sights were amazing, there was everything from spices from Essos to fish from the Iron Islands. The trinkets and toys were numerous and complicated, variety astounding. Ed and Elsa split up to find their own forms of interest, I sent Brutus to follow Elsa as a guard.


    While I was walking along the docks, looking at this and that, I spotted a curious ship that didn¡¯t have anything loading or unloading, just a wooden desk with a man writing on it. As I get closer, I see a sign that says, ¡°Braavos, Red Runner, passage and delivery.¡± On the side there is a clip with a large 2 next to it. I approach the desk and ask the man there.


    ¡°Hello sir, could you tell me what these signs mean?¡± I place a coin worth 100 coppers on the desk to encourage a helpful response. He takes it, smiles and places his quill down before addressing me.


    ¡°This here is the Red Runner, under the command of captain Jack. We are a passenger ship. For 3 dragons we will escort you safely across the Narrow Sea to Braavos. We also transport small items such as letters and valuables for a negotiable price. The number means how many days are left before we depart.¡± The man replies in a heavily accented voice. ¡°The number on the side means we are leaving in 2 days, so if you want any of our services you better tell me today, tomorrow is the day we don¡¯t take anymore requests and finish our preparations.¡±


    I thank the man and continue along the pier, spotting many similar ships, the difference being in their destinations, names and numbers. I walked around the port some more, the beginning of an idea forming in my mind when I spot Brutus along with Nathan and the others. We head to the inn he found, place our horses and Brutus in the stables and rest from the journey.

 chapter 30 - Hands Tourney and Prizes

    It has been 5 weeks since we arrived in the capital, much longer than we initially expected. The original plan was to stay for about a week at most, see the sights, buy some souvenirs before leisurely returning home. That plan was disrupted 3 days after our arrival when the king announced that there would be a hands tournament with unprecedented prizes.


    Ignoring the joust that I had no intention of participating in, the melee had a first place prize of 20,000 dragons and archery was 10,000!!! That is an insane amount of money. The North is considered one of the poorer regions and the Starks quite frugal. The largest prize for a tourney was 100 gold. That¡¯s a lot of money still, as much as some small lords might make in a year, after expenses. I had saved about 200 dragons over the years, stored at the iron bank in Winterfell. I was planning to wait a few years when Ed and Elsa were married and I had saved about 1000 dragons before setting off to explore Westeros. When I was looking at the Red Runner previously, I was wondering if I could make use of similar services to see parts of Essos as well.


    This tourney throws all previous considerations and worries out the window. The archery is a given, I could win with my eyes closed. I would have been worried about the melee before I broke through, after all, this isn¡¯t the North and this is the greatest tournament in the last decade with fighters from the entire kingdom and beyond. But now I have the speed and strength of 3 men, my sword when imbued with qi is sharper and stronger than all except maybe valerian steel, and even then, it would be a tie. Although I am still worried there might be someone who has comprehended qi like me or some other form of energy like the Wyrm tree, so far my sources have given no indication of such in Westeros.


    That makes for a total of 30,000 dragons. With that forget renting space on a ship, I could buy a ship. 10g for a decent mid sized ocean vessel, 10g for the entire crew for 5 years, and another 5 for expenses like docking, supplies and lodgings. I would leave the remainder deposited with the Iron Bank or maybe the Starks, 1g would be withdrawable by my siblings for emergency and still plenty left over for extra costs.


    Unfortunately, my decision to stay had left my family and I in a financial situation. I originally only brought 3 dragons with me for kings landing. Ed had 4 stags to buy some things and Elsa was going to rely on me for some spending money. The money I brought was originally enough for us to stay for a week comfortably, not 6 weeks. We had our own rooms each, but now Nathan stays with me and Ed with Elsa, as well as cut down our costs to the absolute minimum. Even then it wasn¡¯t enough and I had to borrow another dragon from the bank with mine and Nathan¡¯s horses as collateral.


    That wasn¡¯t the only problems we came across. Ed found the night life in the capital to be too enticing and between the drinking, gambling and whores he spent his savings in just 4 days, and nearly got scammed into taking a shady loan by some crooks. Instead he begged me for 3 days for some money till I told him he could either go work at the docks for some spending money or I would send him home. He has since been working as a porter in the warehouses and is a lot more reasonable in his spending.


    It was fortunate that he already got into some minor trouble a few years ago in Winter Town, where he borrowed too much and I had to pay it back. The amount was small and I had him living on nothing but black bread and potato soup for a month after that until he paid me back, learning his lesson.


    Elsa got into trouble with a completely different crowd, and partly because of my lack of thought. Elsa spent her days seeing the sights of the city and visiting the markets, even though she lacked the money. I and Nathan were busy training for the contest, so during the days I had Brutus look after her. Unfortunately, King¡¯s Landing isn¡¯t as used to seeing giant hounds as Winterfell. At first everything went well, people would clear the street at first, then curious children would stroke him and merchants would offer free gifts to Elsa. But after the first week she came across a noble who asked if Brutus was for sale. He was a reasonable man and understood when he was rejected and engaged in some discussions about me uponrecognising my name, before leaving. Others however didn¡¯t take it so well.


    Some were just annoying and would repeatedly pester Elsa with increasing prices or bother me while I was training, but others took it too far. They felt I was snubbing them by not even negotiating and was just an ignorant bumpkin knight from the North. They would insult my sister and humiliate her in public. The next night they would find their horses killed by an arrow and their carriages set on fire. Wasn''t me of course, I was nowhere near the area as many can attest.I was as far as half a kilometre away, on a nightly stroll.But most got the message and stopped. I decided to take precautions and asked Ned to write a letter in his name to warn any future idiots. Since then there haven¡¯t been any more troubles.


    There was some good news, Ethel arrived in King¡¯s Landing today along with several of his men. He heard about the tournament 4 weeks ago, so he got 10 of his men from the Raven¡¯s and took an escort job for a merchant down to the capital. He told me he came to participate in the melee, though he acknowledged his low chance of winning. Ethel is one of the best swordsmen in the Raven¡¯s, just below the captain, so his captain told him he could try his luck to raise the reputation of the Raven¡¯s Claw. I was glad to see a familiar face and offered to buy him and his men a drink when I win to which they laughed and agreed.The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    Robert (king) POV


    ¡°Come on you prissy girls, put your fucking backs into it!!¡± an eager spectator shouted and I agreed. The 2 men in the ring were wrestling but were evenly matched and they had been acting cautious for the past minute, making me wish I could declare I would break their skulls If they don¡¯t finish it soon. Alas, this fucking crown means I have to act as my ¡®station¡¯ demands it. I don¡¯t know how Ned manages it, appearing so stoic yet not stuffy like my brother, and he doesn¡¯t even seem to be trying. He sometimes lets that attitude get in the way of the important things, like when he debated me on that Targaryen girl. Doesn¡¯t he realise that if we wait until sheis an actual threat it will be too late. It is not just the Dothraki we have to worry about if she comes to power, it is the people she inspires.


    If the Targaryen girl has the entire horde at her back, then previous supporters would likely back her as well. Dorne would be the first and the Reach might follow. If that bastard Balon throws in his weight as well we might just lose without even fighting the girl, and even then it would be a civil war that we would take decades to recover from. Despite his protests I still ordered the assassination, soon it would be carried out and I could put it in the past.


    The rest of the tournament was a success though, haven¡¯t had this sort of fun in years. Old Thoros came as well, have to introduce him to Ned, show that man how you are supposed to spend these tournaments. Drunk and happy, not constantly grumbling over coppers.


    Oh, as I was daydreaming someone finally won the wrestle. The left picked up the right and they smashed into the ground so hard I felt it here. The crowd loved it and I agreed with them, it was a brilliant move. ¡°Well done, you have pleased your king. Have this man awarded 20 crowns!¡± I announced to the crowd¡¯s immense pleasure.


    ¡°Is wise to give so much to a couple of sweaty commoners for just throwing one another onto the ground.¡± Cersei, the bane of my fun, inputs. The woman never could appreciate the finer things in life. She likely wouldn¡¯t have attended these tournaments if it wasn¡¯t required of her, though who knows, maybe making me miserable would have been enough motivation.


    ¡°Quiet woman, the commoners love that sort of thing and therefore they will love me, isn¡¯t that right Selmy?¡± I reply to my wife before asking Selmy who is standing guard beside me today.


    ¡°It¡¯s true the common folk enjoy large rewards, especially the unexpected ones, your grace.¡± Barristan replies, understanding as always. Barristan Selmy was a man I always respected, even when he served the Mad King. He was someone who was like Jon Arryn and Ned, loyal to a fault.


    ¡°Tell me Selmy, what¡¯s your thoughts on the finals?¡± The tournament is coming to an end after 2 weeks, unfortunately, and the minor contests have all finished.All that¡¯s left is the finals for the main events tomorrow, archery, melee and joust.


    ¡°There are 3 finalists that were already favourites to win. Lord Gregor Clegane in the Joust, Thoros of Myr in the melee, and Lord Varis Yronwood. But there are 2 dark horses this time around your majesty, Ser Loras of house Tyrell and Ser Baskerville of the North.¡± Selmy¡¯s words put a smile on my face, firstly because one of them is Ned¡¯s man and because it puts a frown on Cersei¡¯s face.


    ¡°That¡¯s right, Baskerville is the only man to be the finalist in 2 events, the melee against Thoros and archery against Varis of house Yronwood in Dorne.¡± I drive the thorn a bit further, reminding the wife of the man that beat her brother. I may not have liked how it was done, but thinking of that proud prick kneeling in the mud makes me smile, and the fights he¡¯s shown so far have all been clean and quick, showing his undefeated title isn¡¯t for nothing.


    ¡°Yes, your majesty, Ser Loras has been popular in the joust for his showmanship and looks, winning many of the ladies support. Baskerville on the other hand has been a popular among the men and children, particularly the commoners. It seems his rise from common birth acts as an inspiration for many, and between his unique hound and his impressive swordsmanship, he has been called the ¡®Beast of the North¡¯ by the commoners.Even the nobles have taken to calling him the ¡®Starks Fang¡¯. It seems news of his relations to the Lord Hand has spread. Though personally it feels they have neglected the truly impressive aspect, which would be his bowmanship. Though it is hard to tell from a layman¡¯s perspective, he has accomplished each of his victories in the archery so far with minimal effort.¡± Good old Selmy, sharp mind and eye, no different than all those years ago.


    ¡°¡¯Starks Fang¡¯ how fitting.¡± Cersei comments from the side. I had almost forgotten she was there, so engrossed with worthwhile conversation. ¡°All the real knights compete in the joust, the melee and archery are just side sports, any barbarian can swing a sword hard if they train, the joust requires skill, intelligence and courage. Baskerville is nothing more than a coward that runs whenever a real challenger appears.¡± Cersei down plays his accomplishments while also raising the opinion of her men. The fact that Clegane is the most likely to win the joust is a Lannister man and Baskerville defeated her brother by basically running away is not lost on me.


    ¡°Ser Baskerville is of common birth, your Grace, he never rode a horse until the age of 16. While most knights and lords learn the ways of the joust from childhood, either as a squire or from tutors, Baskerville was hunting. While your Grace is right in that the joust requires a good deal more skill than the melee or archery, he has surpassed many in both.¡± Ned walks up from out of no-where and defends his man¡¯s honour. I thought the man said he was too busy to attend the tournament, dealing with his daughters.


    Sansa had been spending time with Joffrey and they seemed to be getting along, despite the ugliness on the road. The other one was given a dancing instructor, though from what Ned and Selmy told me the man is a swordsman from Braavos, one of the best and most expensive kind as well.


    ¡°Hmmph, of course you would say that.The fact remains that he hasn¡¯t even won the contests yet, and even if he did it would only be because the best fighters are either in the joust or don¡¯t bother to participate for a few dragons offered as reward.¡± She dismisses Ned¡¯s claim and leaves her an out at the same time, the snake. Though I think only a Lannister would call tens of thousands of gold ¡®few¡¯. Like this we watched the rest of the events in tense silence, wishing that I wasn¡¯t king so I could just drink myself unconscious.

 chapter 31 - Thoros of Myr

    Ben POV (day of finals)


    I woke early today, stretched and warmed up before the melee that was in the morning. The archery would be after that and the joust would be in the afternoon, just like all the others. I told Nathan to check my armour and sword, making sure it was fitted properly, no scales placed awkwardly that would affect my movement. I will use scale armour instead of my hunting gear as throwing knives aren¡¯t permitted in the melee.


    My opponents today are Thoros of Myr, the red priest, in the melee and Varis, the heir of house Yronwood of the Dorne in the archery. I have scouted both competitors, they likely the same with me, and the melee is definitely my greatest concern. Archery is a given, while Varis is undoubtedly a great archer, he is nothing compared to me. I could have beaten him before breaking through and now I can out shoot him while standing on one leg. I won¡¯t do that of course, while it would make a great tale and let me gain fame, it would also make me the enemy of a strong house by humiliating their heir. The melee on the other hand is going to be difficult.


    While I have improved my close quarter ability and in terms of pure swordskillsThoros is about the same if not worse than Jaime, the problem is that flaming sword of his. Yes, a literal flaming sword. I heard stories about it before, but always assumed it was just the colouring or nickname from some battle or myth, but no, he literally sets the sword on fire. When I first saw it, I nearly shat my pants. It was during the semi-finals, Thoros was fighting Beric, Lord of House Dondarrion from the Stormlands. Apparently, he didn¡¯t find any of the previous fighters worthy, because he set his sword on fire for the first time in the tourney. When I saw that my first thought was to surrender ahead of the match, second was to run from King¡¯s Landing immediately. I had seen only one man do that before and it was in the previous life against a 3rd tier warrior.


    Me and Brutus were both 3rd tier at the time, our elements were ice, Brutus could use a roar that freeze his surroundings, while I cast it on my arrows to create frozen bolts that could each destroy the trunk of a maple tree. Our opponent was the general of the neighbouring territory and we were at war for a mountain pass. If they got the pass then they would be able to invade our eastern borders. Fortunately, me and Brutus were both 3rd tier at the time and were guarding the pass.


    The enemy had twice our numbers but we had the height and strategic position. With the range of my bow it didn¡¯t matter if it was siege weapons, armoured infantry or longbowmen, none could reach our lines without losing either their leaders or enough soldiers that they were forced to retreat. With no other choice, the general charged himself, bearing the brunt of my assault to lead his men to the lines.


    I ordered a preemptive strike before he could reach our defensive position, shattering our forces for the rest of his men to follow through. My rangers galloped past their right flank, peppering them with arrows, drawing them to attack us. While a company of pike men formed an angled line, forcing the cavalry to change direction towards the walls of the pass and away from our defences.


    When they reached the wall, they were forced to stop, at which point my rangers that had run past them turned around to cut off their retreat and the pike men closed in around from the left, trapping them. Without momentum the cavalry had lost their greatest advantage. We then engaged the enemy, Brutus and I taking on their general. It was a tough fight, they were an elite unit and the general was strong. By the end I was exhausted and Brutus had several large wounds and burns that would take days to heal, even for his regenerating abilities.But we won, and losing their general caused the enemy to retreat and sign a ceasefire agreement, with their lord paying reparations for 5 years.


    Now however, I and Brutus are at the beginning of 2nd and peak of 1st respectively, with it being just me fighting Thoros. ¡®fuck that shit, I''m out¡¯ I concluded. Good thing I decided to watch the rest of the match. I wanted to see if I could figure out why such a strong warrior was here, despite the rest of the competitors paling in comparison. The first clue I was mistaken was his speed. He was fast, for a human, and strong, and while his swordsmanship was incredible, but he was no-where 3rd tier. The second was that sword, the flaming blade was nothing compared to the generals. When he swung his sword, it acted as a whip burning down droves of men, when it clashed with steel it would melt, destroying the opponent¡¯s weapon in just 2 or 3 strikes. Thoros¡¯s flame stuck to the blade, and it was hot to be sure, but you would likely need to place it on top of another sword for a good minute to cut through.


    His fight with Beric was a good fight, with Thoros emerging victorious, to the kings great pleasure. After asking around I found that the flame is the result of wildfire, not qi. Wildfire was an alchemical substance that was used primarily in war to burn enemy armies. It was invented by the Targaryen ancestors, though since their reign a number of organisations outside the Alchemist Guild has attained the knowledge to make it. The Red priests of Essos are apparently one of those organisations.


    That made me feel much better, but thinking about it I would still have trouble in the finals. Thoros might not be as fast or strong as me, but he is a better swordsman, and this isn¡¯t a fight to the death, rather they do it to either first blood or to surrender in the finals, I think it is to make a better show. I considered just using qi to strengthen myself from the outset and destroy him, but felt reluctant to do so. Thoros seems like a swell fellow and all these years of duels and tournaments have affected me in a way. If I use overwhelming qi rather than the sword skills I have trained over the years then it feels like cheating. This will probably be my last tournament in Westeros and ending it like this would be disappointing.


    After considering for a while I resolve myself to go both ways. I will rely only on my superior body for the beginning and try to fight that way, but at the same time I will be ready to use qi at a moments notice to speed myself up. That will be avoid losing strikes or potentially dangerous strikes. I can use qi for a flashy finisher though. This will be considered giving face to the kings friend.If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    It seemed that the king met Thoros several years ago and was the winner of many tournaments, and participated in the kings wars. Due to their similar temperaments they would often drink together, to the High Septons displeasure. The primary religion in Westeros and Kings Landing is the belief in the Seven Sisters, and the association of the king with the priest of another religion has been a sore spot for them. The fact that he never stays for long and has never tried to convert the king, or anyone for that matter has been his saving grace.


    Thoros is a veteran of many battles, same as me and he knows how to take every advantage of that sword. He will not only try to burn the person, but the flickering flames can be a distraction and reveal openings.


    When it is time for the fight Nathan helps me put on my armour while Brutus walks beside me to the field. We walk through the crowd of commoners, separated by guards and rope, to the ring. I can hear calls of ¡°Thoros¡± and ¡°Red Priest¡± for my opponent, and ¡°Baskerville¡± and ¡°Beast¡± for me. Not sure how I feel about ¡¯Beast¡¯, definitely intimidating and strong, but makes me sound wild and impulsive. Oh well, I guess I should just be glad ¡®Hound¡¯ was already taken.


    As I enter the ring, I spot Thoros, praying to his sword as he cleans it. We both bow as the King and Ned arrive, they take their seats as we are introduced, announcing our titles, honours and homeland we represent. The fact Thoros gets more cheers from Myr than I do from the North, shows how detached my land is from the capital, if a city across the Narrow Sea has more suppoters than one of the Seven Kingdoms. I had Nathan hand me a flask of water which I took a swig from before pouring the rest over my head. It won¡¯t do much against burns but if my hair is wet at the very least it shouldn¡¯t catch fire.


    ¡°In the name of House Baratheon, I command you 2 to get on with it!!¡± The king bellows good naturedly, and we start.


    Thoros lit his sword on fire while I drew my own and we began to circle. The crowd has been split into those that are silent for fear of missing something and yelling at us to start. I oblige the second half.


    A quick step inwards has my sword swinging down towards his neck, fast as a viper and with no warning. It¡¯s not enough, Thoros gets his sword up and catches my blade on the guard. He uses that to swing my sword downwards and steps inwards, releasing his left hand and striking towards my face with his elbow. I not only duck under it but get my shoulder in and push him off and away.He has excellent reflexes and is more skilled at close combat than me, but my speed outmatches him easily.


    We repeat the clash, me more than not the initiator, trying to overwhelm him with my superior speed and stamina, while Thoros will block with the minimal of movements, before countering with either a jab or thrust or even another punch or kick. This repeats 5 times before we retire.


    We reform our stance as the audience cheers, not expecting to see such speed and varying fighting styles. It is clear that both me and Thoros are not duellists, we were warriors, those who would do anything to win, and rely on instincts more than patterns. Thoros is smiling at me and despite myself I smile back before leaping in for another go.


    We repeat the same process for a number of times, when I make a rash move. I feint a swing and instead step to the right and crouch down, where I sweep my sword at his left leg from below. Thoros spins on his heel and blocks my strike with his leg brace. Not only that but he takes advantage of my position to strike my side. The flaming blade strikes the scales, sparks flying with several scales as well and bounces off, we both back off once more.


    The crowd is hushed, knowing that the fight was very nearly decided there and then. The more martial spectators know that the end isn¡¯t far off. I managed to twist my body so the blade would bounce of my scale, still sore though, but Thoros is worse off. The fast clashes have taken their toll. If you can¡¯t tell by the sweat pouring down his face or rapid breaths how tired he is, then the blow to the leg should have.


    I had made several similar strikes, though none so risky, and he would always step back rather than try to block it with his armour. He has received enough of my strikes to know how much power was behind them. Even though my sword hit armour and not skin, the force still travelled through and has hurt his leg. The only reason he let that happen was because he either couldn¡¯t move in time, or he could but chose not to because he knew he couldn¡¯t continue for long and had to risk injury to finish this fight, which he failed.


    I was just about to begin the final assault when Thoros charged at me instead, taking the initiative. Before it was always me starting our altercations, he would whether them in the hope that I tired, exposing a weakness. I had recently broken through so he would have better luck trying to outrun a lion than outlast me. He likely realised both his leg and stamina wouldn¡¯t last if he gave me control over the pace, instead risking a quick assault to throw me off. I parry the flaming blade, it getting especially close to my face, ash and sparks flashing in my face, throwing me off. That was then he made a decisive thrust towards my shoulder, a move that would undoubtedly break my armour and draw first blood, ending the fight. Just as planned.


    In one fluid motion I twist to the side and swing down on his blade at the same time. The enormous blow exceeding what is humanly capable sends his blade flying, causing Thoros to stumble. I place my sword by his neck.


    ¡°Yield!¡± I demand, the stands silent, allowing my voice to carry across the courtyard.


    Thoros pauses for a moment, then starts to laugh, ¡°By the Light, I have seen the some of the best fighters in the world, from knights, khals and pit champions, but I swear by the god that that was the single fastest swing I have ever seen! Ser Baskerville, I¡¯d like to get a drink with you, your treat of course.¡± Thoros holds his hands up in surrender, before holding one out to me.


    I sheathe my sword and bow to him, ¡°Thoros of Myr, that was one of the greatest fights in my life.¡± That¡¯s the truth, even counting my previous life there was few times I would put myself in such a difficult situation. An archer has many advantages with not letting your enemy get close being one of them. ¡°I would be honoured to join you for drinks and tales.¡± I shake his hand when I rise.


    ¡°HA HAHA, great match, I was so caught up I didn¡¯t notice I spilt my wine, you will have to make up for that!¡± Robert bellowed with a loud voice, appearing happier than I have ever seen him. ¡°I invite the both of you to the feast tonight, you will sit at my table, that¡¯s a command from your king.¡± He adds on, showing he had perhaps drunk quite a bit of that wine before the match as well, or the stuff he¡¯s drinking is much stronger than the stuff I am used to. Knowing the king¡¯s reputation, it could be either.

 chapter 32 - Observers

    Arya POV


    *clash* The sound of wooden swords clashing rings out throughout the large room. This room lies in the Tower of the Hand, located in the Red keep, possibly the second most important building in the kingdom. This room however has no real importance, it is designed as a ball room and is primarily used for lessons and the occasional dance function. Recently the dance performed in this room is somewhat different.


    Syrio slashes at my leg, I spin to my other and riposte towards his shoulder, which he catches and returns. Back and forth, getting faster and faster, eventually Syrio strikes my side. ¡°Dead¡± he says, like he always does when he wins, which is everytime.


    ¡°Your body is eager, you strike faster than usual, less complaints, but your mind is not in this room, and this means it is open. The dance is a meld of mind and body, missing one leads to stumbles, and with blades that stumble means¡± He strikes me again. ¡°Dead. Now take some water, tell me where your mind has gone that the great Syrio Forell fails to command your attention.¡± He mocks me with false arrogance.


    When father told me a month ago that I would be getting a dance instructor, I thought it would be like all the other tutors that forced me to try and be what I wasn¡¯t. But Syrio was different from them, he was incredible, and I have never loved father more than when he let me use needle to train. Except for when he gave me Nymeria. She was lying down on the floor, where she always was. When we first started our lessons I had to calm her down from barking at Syrio whenever he struck me. Now she trusts him and doesn¡¯t interrupt, except when Syrio told me to catch cats to train my speed, she would join the chase then.


    ¡°My friend, Ser Baskerville, he was in the finals for the melee yesterday, and it was one of the most amazing fights I had ever seen. Thoros had a flaming sword and i thought Ben would be in trouble, but he was winning the whole match, just slashing and cutting everywhere, sometimes he moved so fast I didn¡¯t even know what was going on!¡± I confess. I was so proud and bragged to Sansa when Ben won the tournament, but she was just going on and on about Loras. So what if he won the joust, when the Mountain knocked him down he just got beaten like a child and the Hound had to save him. Ben told me that is what happens when you put an athlete in the battlefield, as soon as the rules go out the window they can¡¯t fight as well as even the common soldier because they are too distracted by everything going different from how it usually does. He did say that Loras will learn from this experience to not lower his guard so much.


    ¡°Ah yes, I saw this match yesterday, though I will confess my seating was likely not as good as yours.¡± He teases me, he stood with my fathers other guards, and was lower than I was. ¡°This knight was definitely impressive, he moved like a viper and struck like a tiger, yet I couldn¡¯t help but feel he was holding back throughout the fight, as if he was testing himself.¡± That is one of the best compliments Syrio has given a fighter. Most of the others would be ¡®a difficult fight¡¯, saying though they are good he is better. ¡°But this is in the past now, we cannot dwell on it, for if our eyes are looking to the past we cannot see the present, and in the future we will be...¡± He strikes towards me again, I block this time. ¡°Dead¡± I say. We continue with our practice, though I still wonder from time to time what Ben is doing now, usually followed by ¡®Dead¡¯.


    Ben POV


    It has been three weeks since the tournament, and it has been very busy. Immediately after the reward ceremony, I brought my 2 chests of gold, one big and one small, to the Iron Bank. I somewhat smugly paid back my 1.2 dragons debt, and deposited a total of 29900 dragons with a little less than 100 was taken out for some celebrating.


    I went to the Red Keep in the evening, where I was invited to the table of honour with the other champions.Thoros was also invited, and we were seated just down from the royal and Hand¡¯s family. We made merry with many stories shared all around, the king particularly happy that he had such a variety. The stories and gossip about high society from Ser Loras Tyrell might not have been to his fancy, but Thoros gave many a good story of adventure and combat, while I set the scene with stories of dark woods filled with terrifying beasts and difficult hunts.


    Thoros and the king later dared me to drink with them, which I obliged. I might not enjoy the bottle to such a degree as the 2 of them, but I still drink on occasion and with my increased metabolism and control of my internal organs I could match them for most of the night. It was an enjoyable evening for the most part, though the glares I kept getting from the queen and her eldest were annoying and made sure that I only ever drank from mine, Thoros¡¯s or the king¡¯s bottle. I refused every other drink that came my way, either with excusing myself, forgetting the drink somewhere or spilling the drink in a clumsy stumble, to the amusement of the gathering, just on the off chance. I thought the queen and her brat would be smart enough to not poison me in the middle of the king¡¯s feast, but considering they were willing to start a war over 2 broken fingers, I had my doubts.


    There were 2 people that I was seeing for the first time that interested me. From the corner of my eye I observed them as they watched my performance at times and could tell they weren¡¯t fooled for even a moment. They were the masters of Coin and Whispers, Lord Peytr Baelish and Lord Varys respectively.


    I had heard of Baelish sometime ago when I was still in the North. He was a famous Brothel owner and money lender 2 decades ago, when due to his exceptional accounting skill he was brought by the late Hand, Lord Jon Arryn of the Vale, to serve as the master of coin. Since I arrived in kings landing I learnt several other facts. The first is that he seems to control the city watch, called the Goldcloaks, due to their corruption and greed. I discovered that when I visited the brothels and wondered how they never seemed to be bothered by customers, peasant or nobles. I later found that the brothels belonging to Baelish apparently received extra protection from the Goldcloaks, while the other brothels in the city would be constantly raided and accused of crimes, arresting the owners, giving him exclusive monopoly over the flesh trade and other activities in King¡¯s Landing. From those facts I pieced together who was running things in King¡¯ Landing.Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    This is more than I expected from a city like the capital. Congested cities and corruption go hand in hand, you never get one without the other, even Winter Town has it¡¯s criminal elements, like thieves bribing guards and rigged trials, but it is still relatively ordered, no-one wants to push it too far and risk the Starks famous Ice, a magical greatsword, cutting their heads off, and the corruption is limited to mostly minor patrollmen and lowly officials.


    But in King¡¯s landing the Goldcloaks, the primary law enforcement and even the men responsible for defending the city from invaders is corrupt from the inside out, and worse the one holding the leash isn¡¯t even the king, but instead it is Baelish. If he wanted to he could command the Goldcloaks to side with whoever he chose in the event of an invasion, completely controlling the city. I suppose the reason he was able to do so was by primarily focusing on the sordid activities and leaving the businesses of powerful people alone. The players in the city look down on such lowly activities, not realising a monopoly means he now makes more money than any other business and can buy a small army, which he has done.


    That however is a problem for the king and the Starks, I have no intention of delving into that sort of mess.The only solution I could offer is murder Baelish and the commanding officers in the watch and then promote the least awful middle officers to command and fill the missing ranks with Stark men.From personal observance I can attest they are loyal and dutiful. Then it is just the slow retraining of the Goldcloaks ranks till they reach an acceptable standard.


    It would be hard and we would be met with heavy resistance. The backers behind the Goldcloaks would not like their investments being made worthless. But with the biggest supporter, Baelish, removed the other parties would lack the unity and strength to contest the Hand of the king. The newly promoted officers would be the ones that want this to work the most as it is the way they can remain in power. The lower officers will be kept in check by the stark men, and with their former superior¡¯s heads as warning, they will fall into line.


    The rank and file soldiers are the least corrupt of the bunch and the easiest to correct. There will be a good number of them who accepted the odd bribe and abused their position, but the majority of them joined the Goldcloaks to secure their livelihood. They don¡¯t care who is in charge, they will mostly be too new and green to have gotten especially dirty. With proper officers, training and benefits they will quickly become an elite unit once again. There will still be corruption, but it will be reasonable, and the fact the royal family is once again the ones in charge of the city¡¯s armed forces is the important point.


    The reason I don¡¯t suggest this to Ned is that it is impossible for the king to agree to go all the way. Half measures won¡¯t work, he might be able to arrest the officers in the Goldcloak for corruption, but Baelish is not just a Lord, but he is the master of coin. Even if they call for a trial, that man has been in power for 2 decades and will cover his tracks well.A trial would fail to kill him or likely even prove he is innocent. It would only put him on the offensive, making sure we don¡¯t try anything like this again. From there he will simply erode any good work we have done, the Stark men will be either killed or crippled in ¡®accidents¡¯, or they will be corrupted and bribed like the previous guards.


    Men like me will likely join the fate of the former. Baelish will not touch Lord Stark or his family, but he will likely be kept deep in bureaucracy for the foreseeable future, as will happen when you become the enemy of the man that manages your money. I have no confidence from keeping my family safe from a man who controls 4,000 armed men who can accuse me of anything and have me jailed and killed. I could assassinate him, I have the capability to infiltrate the castle and one of the disadvantages of having such a high position is that their movements are primarily routine and predictable. He will likely have taken precautions and have guards, but if I climb one of the walls and towers, kill the watchers, and the castle is mine. I could literally shoot him with an arrow anytime he walks in an open pathway or through the gardens, climb down the walls and be out of there before anyone can find me. I have had to do this several times in the past to weaken our enemies leadership.


    Ned would never agree to such an evil act, murdering a man on assumptions without a trial. I would either have to find some way to broach the topic to the king, or do it in secret behind everyone¡¯s back. However, I don¡¯t have enough of a standing with the king for him to take my advice to kill his Master of coin, and even if he doesn¡¯t hang me for conspiring treason, the word would definitely get to Baelish making me number one on his shit list. There is no need to take such a risk though, so the guy is corrupt, so are half the people in this world, so long as he doesn¡¯t harm me, my loved ones or my interests, we have nothing to do with each other.


    Varys on the other hand is something of a mystery, having only heard his name recently. It was when I was visiting Arya in the Keep and spoke to Ned who was complaining about the Small council. He told me about the members on it and most I already knew about, but Varys was the only I was hearing about for the first time. Master of Whispers is essentially head of information and is responsible for spying on potential threats, both internally and externally.


    Varys had once served the previous king, Aegon Targaryen, the Mad King, and later swore to serve Robert in exchange for his life. Ned claims that he is very good at his job, smart and seems to have good intentions, though I take that with a pinch of salt considering the source. Don¡¯t get me wrong, Ned is in no way stupid, but he is somewhat straightforward when it comes to people and a bit too trusting of those who are supposed to be on his side.


    Despite my acts being seen through by the more astute observers, I continued the charade for the sake of the masses, and the evening ended on a high note. Nedhashis work cut out for him if he wants to sort through this mess. With Roberts clear lack of enthusiasm to work, I think his only hope will be to get Joffrey away from his mother and raise him with some morals before Robert dies. Maybe a new king with some actual want for ruling would correct the kingdom, though I fear Ned has left it too late.

 chapter 33 - Eyrie Circumstance

    The following days were spent no less merry though with better company. Ed, Ethel and the other Raven boys joined me in celebrating, on me as I promised earlier. We went to the best taverns and a number of brothels, though I didn¡¯t really take to the latter. The women in the capital smelled too much of desperation and seemed to mix way too much perfume and oils to disguise smells, and the make-up would come off when feeling their skin. I am definitely a Northern boy, they have similar tastes. Though the others seemed to enjoy them so I let them have their fun while I mostly enjoyed the dances and drinks.


    After a number of days I decided to get productive, and made some serious progress on my travelling plans. I found a distraught captain by the docks, a man named captain Curt Douglass, and when I asked what he was worried about I was told he was selling his ship. He came from the city of Myreen in Essos originally, though he was now quite mobile in the region, selling products here and there. His biggest yearly profit came from selling spices from the Summer Isles, an archipelago to the far South of Westeros, to the nobles in kings Landing. This year, due to the tournament bringing an even larger crowd, he thought he could purchase an even larger volume of spices to sell at the market. The problem was that to do so he borrowed a large amount of money from the Iron Bank, with his ship being put as collateral.


    The plan wasn¡¯t a bad one and if everything went right, he would have made enough to not only repay the bank, but could even have saved enough to buy another ship and start his very own fleet. 2 things went wrong however, the first was that due to his success in previous years, 2 other crews had the same idea as him and purchased the same spices as him. They arrived at the Summer Isles before him as well, meaning there was a shortage when he bought.So the price was higher, meaning he would have had a lower turnover. If that wasn¡¯t enough when he was sailing back to Westeros he was caught in a storm.Between changing routes and repairing damages,it set him back 2 weeks on his journey, so not only did he not arrive before the tournament, he arrived in the middle. At this point his competitors had already cornered the market, and between the late arrival and no longer monopolising the trade, he was forced to sell his product at much lower prices than previous years, barely making any profit at all.


    The money he made however was only barely enough to pay his crew and not enough for the debt. Just like that, a ship that would normally be worth 9,000 dragons was being used as collateral to the iron bank for less than half the amount. I started to get an idea, though I wasn¡¯t just going to take his word over it. I asked when the debt needed to be paid and when he said 3 days I bid him good-bye. I spent the rest of the day asking the other port workers if the news they heard was true, and received confirmation from several sources. I went to the Iron Bank and bribed one of the clerks to find out if what he said was true. After confirming there as well, I also found the exact amount owed was 3,230 dragons. With the information confirmed I returned to Douglass the next day and told him who I was and about my proposition.


    He would sell the ship to me for 4,000 dragons, for a period of 5 years, and I would hire his crew of 60 sailors for the price of 8,000 over the same period. The supplies would be paid for out of my own pocket and they would be responsible for my safe passage around the world. After the 5-year period I would return his ship to his full command and we would go our merry way. The payments would be conducted through the Iron Bank in King¡¯s Landing.


    Captain Douglass would open an account and the payment would be done every 6 months, provided that the bank received confirmation from me either in person or by letter. There are banks all throughout the world and they run a messaging service for such contracts as ours. They only deliver messages between banks, and only certain times of the year, but the price is much more reasonable than a lot of private message companies and merchants.


    Since then I have been getting to know the captain and the crew, discussing certain journeys and what we will need, though that was all hypothetical for now, as the first journey would be to White Port. I needed to return my siblings home, Ethel and the Ravens are also joining us after I offered to give them a lift, to the pleasure of the rest of the crew, as extra protection is always welcome, though perhaps not necessary in this case.


    The eastern coast is considered a well patrolled area, due to the fact that the kings brother, Stannis Baratheon, the master of Ships commands the Kings fleet from Dragonstone Isle to the east. He has made it a habit over the past decade to train his troops by hunting pirates, on the sea and in their bases, none are safe. It is said that while Stannis lacks the kings charm, he is every bit the skilled tactician, and unlike the king who has devolved into gluttony and debauchery, Stannis has kept himself sharp throughout the years. His nickname, ¡®Iron-face¡¯ is the sort of thing Tyroshi pirates tell their children about when they misbehave.


    With all the preparations in order we decided to use the last of the gold I previously withdrew, about 64 gold, to celebrate properly for the next 2 weeks, which was decided to begin, to my distress, at one of Baelish¡¯s brothels. Though they are not my favourite places to go, I figured, please a crowd, and start off with it. So, our group of 8 was travelling down the street, Myself, Ed, Ethel, Douglass who was quite the drinker we had found, Nathan and 3 of the Raven boys. Oh, Brutus is also next to me as Elsa has other protection today.


    The other crew members were busy at the docks getting ready for set off, while the other Ravens were looking after Elsa. They volunteered to do that and she had no avoidance to extra help so I had allowed it. I''ve grown out of the age where I feel the need to tear the head off every boy that gets close to her. Though if any of them take advantage, or hurts her, I will literally feed them to the hounds. Don''t have to go far, Brutus would gladly do it, and is big enough for 5 of them.


    We were walking down the street, sharing a bottle of wine we bought, when I spoteed outside our destination a friend, Jory. Jory is the captain of Ned¡¯s guard and someone I had spoken to on a number of occasions. I wouldn¡¯t call him a friend, but definitely an acquaintance. He was standing outside the entrance of the brothel with 2 other guards who were familiar, definitely part of the Lords guards, but I don¡¯t know their names.This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    ¡°Yo Jory, what are you doing in this shady part of town. Don¡¯t you already have a wife and child back home?You wouldn¡¯t want rumours to start, would you?¡± I tease the man. I wouldn¡¯t really tell his family if he was here for that, it is a relatively common thing in Westeros and is family business that has nothing to do with me. I do reserve the right to view those people as lesser men and women if they did, due to personal principals, but Jory doesn¡¯t look to be here for that. He is fully armed, sober and on the look-out for trouble. Jory looks surprised to be greeted, but calms down when he sees who it is.


    ¡°Ser Baskerville, greetings, no I am not here to partake, but rather Lord Stark has business here.¡± He answers, ever the honest sort.


    ¡°Lord Stark, as is our Lord Stark, has business here?¡± I ask doubtfully. Ned Stark is one of the most dutiful men I know. Sure he has a bastard, Jon, but he had him when he was in his 20¡¯s and around the time his family was dying like flies, with a war everywhere.Stress levels were high to say the least. The only other reason he could be here was if he was meeting someone in secret. In that case, I should probably give the Lord some privacy.


    ¡°Ben come on, if we are too late the Lord will get all the good ones.¡± Ethel encourages me. ¡°We will wait out here, no need to interrupt him.¡± I declare in a serious tone, giving a signal with my hands. This was a signal we invented when we were boys, usually when playing pranks, and I have since taught it to Nathan to mean there is danger. The Oakbridge boys and my squire see the signal and get the message, sobering up, Douglass doesn¡¯t know the signal but follows the mood of the rest of us, while the Raven¡¯s listen to Ethel. When I am sure they are not going to enter, I settle outside to talk to Jory about the Stark family, as I hadn¡¯t seen then for the last week as I have been busy with journey preparations. I also do it to give Ned a favour. If he is meeting in a brothel, with only a few guards rather than a full squad, then he must be incognito. My group might have added to the numbers and seem more noticeable, but we are all dressed and look like the sort of people that would patron the establishments in the area, so we help Jory and his men blend in.


    From Jory I here that the girls are content. Sansa and Geoffrey get along well, with the direwolf Lady earning her the jealousy of the other noble ladies who all envy her temperament and beautiful fur.


    Arya on the other hand has been running all around the keep, and often losing her guards to the chagrin of Jory and the other guards. She says it is for her dancing lessons, though they are more like fencing from my old world. I was surprised when I saw Arya show me some moves, as I had never seen a fencer in this world yet.


    In my past there was a type of warrior specialisation called fencer. They were rare in the battlefield though they were favoured by the courts and on occasion by assassins. It was a type of combat that focused less on sweeping and more on thrusts, meaning it was not suitable for wide areas where you were having to fight with or against many people, but was especially effective on singular targets. I had never met a fencer who broke through to the 3rd tier, but those in the 2nd tier could create a dance with their movements, disassembling their opponents, controlling the rhythm of the fight, and when they struck, it would often look like a single blow yet the opponent wold have 5 to 6 holes on them, with only the sharpest of eyes could keep track of them. I never had to fight one, but between 2 of similar levels it would depend entirely on the range. If they are at a distance, they lack the defensive capabilities to resist my shots, and if they were close then they would stab me before I could get away.


    I had never seen someone use fencing skills in Westeros, and just assumed that it was never a developed style here. Though apparently it is more popular in Essos, at least Braavos where her instructor came from. This makes me anticipate the other continents even more.


    The only Stark who has been having trouble has been Ned, who seems to have recently had a falling out with the king over something, though Jory doesn¡¯t know what. The past few weeks the lord has been particularly interested in how the previous hand perished and has been visiting the last places Lord Arryn went to before he died. This seems like the sort of crusade someone like Ned would undergo.


    I was just talking about some of the other events that had happened, when Brutus suddenly barked, quietening the rest of us, and using qi to tell me he hears danger approaching. When everyone was quiet, I listened as well, and in a few seconds I started to hear a light banging noise, repeating in a pattern, getting louder as it gets closer. Lord Stark was just leaving the building with Peytr Baelish, the man I assume Ned was meeting, when a large group of armoured men rounded the corner of the street, a mounted man at their lead. As they got closer, we realised those were Lannister soldiers, all armed and armoured, and the mounted man removed his helmet to reveal himself as Jaime Lannister. Half the men passed us to lank us from the other side, effectively cutting off our retreat, while Jaime trotted in front of us. He appeared to be surprised when he looked at us, though he was even more surprised to see me, and scowled before addressing Ned.


    ¡°Lord Stark, sorry for interrupting you on your day off, but I seem to have replaced my brother. You remember him right, small fellow, likes to talk and drink?¡± he asks sarcastically, to which Ned remains silent. The brother he is talking about must be Tyrion Lannister, the famous dwarf of House Lannister. He was apparently in Winterfell when the king arrived but I didn¡¯t see him. Arya told me he was a funny man, though he often smelled of wine. ¡°You don¡¯t know? Now that is confusing, because a little spider told me that he was currently being held in the Eyrie dungeons, after being kidnapped by your wife, Lady Stark.He was brought to her sister in the Vale where he is being held captive. Now that your memory is refreshed, I hope you can explain to me why he was taken.¡± Jaime continues, getting less sarcastic and a bit more irritated as he talks.


    The Eyrie is the Keep of House Arryn, the Capital of the Vale, and one of the places that, like Winterfell, has the record of never being broken byan army in the last 2 thousand years of recorded history. It is supposedly a marvellous sight, a large mass of rock is held up by 4 supporting rock pillars from the nearby mountains, sort of like a natural, giant table. No-one knows how such a wonder of nature was made, but what everyone knows is that it is said to be impossible to invade by land. It is one of my top 5 places I want to see in Westeros and considered whether to stop in the Vale on the way home, or to go there immediately after the Wall to see it. The current regent of the House of Arryn is Lysa Arryn, the sister of Lady Stark. If this is true then it can only seem to be a conspiracy by the sisters.

 chapter 34 - Stupid Decision

    ¡°Catelyn is acting on my orders, it was I who commanded your brother to be captured.¡± Ned says to my shock. That does not sound good. ¡°Well then it seems you will have to come with me, my Lord.¡± Jaime declares, which Ned refuses. ¡°Well then, looks like we can only resort to violence to correct this injustice. Men, at the ready!¡± Jaime calls his men to attention, brandishing their spears and shields. Jaime suddenly looks to me and my group.


    ¡°Ser Baskerville, how good it is to see you again.¡± He greets me with a fake smile, which I return. ¡°Likewise, Ser Jaime, it is an honour to see you again so soon, might I ask what your business is with me?¡± I ask him while slowly reaching towards my sword.


    ¡°No business today, unfortunately, this is a family matter. You and your men can leave, I will repay my debt to you another day.¡± He says, keeping a cool head. It seems his business with Lord Stark is important enough to him that he can ignore his grudge against me for the moment. If he was a lesser man, he would use the situation to get revenge against me, but instead he leaves me an out, one I am tempted to take.


    I hate the idea of abandoning Ned, but the statistics are not in our favour. Excluding Baelish and including Brutus, our side has 13 fighters, while the other side has 4 dozen soldiers, not including Jaime. That means they have almost 4 to 1 advantage, and that is not including the quality of the fighters. Our guys aren¡¯t weak, but it is the difference in equipment that is the problem.


    The capital has strict weapon laws, the only people allowed to bear arms are nobles and their guards, and even then their armour and numbers are strictly regulated. Me and Ethel are armed and as my squire Nathan also has a sword, while Ned and his 3 guards are all decked in leather armour and have short swords.Most of our people have a knife on them for emergencies that they always carry. Brutus is an arsenal all on to himself, and I am carrying not only my sword but a number of knives, because I am paranoid as fuck, but even with our skills we can¡¯t turn these odds.


    The Lannister soldiers are all decked in full plate, from boots to helm, and Lannister craftmenship is nothing to scoff at. Their weapons are primarily spears meaning they have everyone but me beaten in terms of range, and from their sure footing, firm formation and lack of nervous faces, these aren¡¯t the paper tigers like the Goldcloaks.These are soldiers who have spilled blood, both others and their own. Brutus and I could likely take down 20 on our own, but we would need time, time in which everyone else here would be slaughtered and then killed ourselves after then tire us out.


    I was just about to order everyone to stand down, when from out of the blue, Ned beats me to the punch. ¡°Baskerville, you and your men can leave, this has nothing to do with you. Go back and protect your family.¡± I turn in surprise, seeing the serious look in his eyes and know he was giving me permission to run.


    As a knight I am sworn to defend him in times like this. I was prepared to lose my knighthood by leaving because it would still be better than dying, yet he is letting me leave. There are few times in my life, both of them, that I have felt shame, but this is definitely one of them.


    I weigh my options again, look to the sky and sigh for the stupid decision I am coming to. I turn to my companions and ask them. ¡°Ed, Ethel, is there any chance the 2 of you will leave me here?¡± They smile at me.


    ¡°Not a chance.¡± They both answered. I sigh and hand Ed my sword, while I draw my hunting knives. He will be a decent match for the guards with it, and I can make up for the lack of range with my speed and strength.


    ¡°Curt, you were hired to serve as my captain, there was never any requirement that you need to fight for me.If you want to leave you will be well within your rights. The deal will transfer to my sister in the event of my passing.¡± I remind the captain of his obligations, allowing him to leave.


    ¡°Fuck that shit,you selfish bastard. I have been fighting the pirates of Basilisk Isle for years now, you think I''m afraid of some shiny ponce on a white horse? You gave me a chance to recover, allowed me to stay as a captain when I would be forced to start from the bottom again if my ship was sold. You and I have a deal, that means you get my loyalty. Now pass me a knife, I forgot mine back on the ship.¡± he berates me for a minute, then receives the knife I loan him.


    Nathan looks at me expectantly. ¡°What?Did you think I was going to let you leave? You''re my squire, you are required to fight by my side when needed. If you tried to leave I would have to cut you down to preserve my honour.¡± I tell him in a serious tone, deflating him while the rest laugh. ¡°Ha ha, sorry Nathan, the truth is that I have known you for only 2 years and I am certain of your loyalty.Asking you would be pointless and insulting.¡± I say as I pat his back, cheering him up significantly.Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site.


    The only ones in question are the Raven lads. They look like they are trying to psyche themselves up, but they are shaking and afraid. I don¡¯t blame them, unlike the rest of us they only have a dagger on them, and unlike Curt they all have families in the North to look after, they don¡¯t want to die. I was about to let them go when Ethel beat me to it.


    ¡°Ravens! This is an order. Find our brothers and the rest of the crew and bring reinforcement as soon as you can!¡± he orders them. They wait for a moment, then give a grim look, salute their sergeant, and move to leave. They squeeze along the wall, watchful of the Lannisters stabbing them in the back. No attack comes and the soldiers move to allow them through, closing the gap once they are past and running down the street.


    I turn to Jaime and speak. ¡°Sorry Jaime, but I¡¯m a Northerner, we look out for our own. Now what¡¯s it going to be?¡± I ask as both sides ready for and engagement.


    ¡°Stop this madness, Ser Jaime, think this through.¡± Baelish tries to calm the hostility, which I compliment the effort, even if it is futile.


    ¡°Get back inside your brothel Littlefinger, stay out of the way.¡± Jaime dismisses the man.


    ¡°I will fetch the city watch.¡± Baelish reassures Ned, and makes his way back inside the brothel... Wait, how is he going to fetch the watch from inside... the... brothel...


    Just like that, inspiration struck, so distracted by my thoughts and planning that I barely even notice what is being said.


    ¡°If you kill me your brother is dead¡± Ned threatens. ¡°True. Very well, kill everyone but...¡± Jaime starts but doesn¡¯t finish, because I have already grabbed Ned and rushed towards the brothel.


    ¡°Everyone get inside now!!!¡± I shout as I drag ned by the shoulder into the building. My guys hesitate for a second, then follow us in. Baelish could be seen on the other side of the entrance making his way towards the back when he turns in shock to see us all rush in. Once they are in I close the door and slam the door bar in place. Spotting a table nearby I throw that in the way for good measure.


    ¡°Listen up, here are your duties! You two, see those windows I want one of you guarding each of them, anyone tries to climb through, stab em.¡± I command the 2 guards I don¡¯t know and instruct them to guard the 2 ground floor windows that are on either side of the door. They are made from stained glass intersected by thin steel rails, likely to keep out thieves. They won¡¯t hold for long against a man hacking at them with steel, but it will get in the way and make it much easier to defend.


    ¡°Ed, Ethel you 2 are with me and Brutus guarding the main door, Brutus gets the front, you 2 will attack from the side.¡± I can hear them hammering at the door now, finally realising our plan. They will take some time to attack the hinges to remove the door as they didn¡¯t bring any equipment for a siege, so I can finish my preparations.


    ¡°Curt, Nathan you 2 are on back-up. Whenever you see trouble help.¡± I tell my squire and captain to ready themselves to assist when one of the entrances look like they are going to fall.


    ¡°Lord Stark, you and Jory are to follow Lord Baelish out the back exit or window or whatever other way he was planning to go and find the city watch. We will hold them off from hear.¡± I give my Lord his job, somewhat backwards, but desperate times and all that. He seems to think for a minute, looks around the room, realises that he won¡¯t be able to help here and nods.


    ¡°Stay alive, all of you. I will return as soon as I can. Baelish hurry up we need to leave.¡± He turns and runs off with Baelish through a door to another room, Jory following along. Baelish commands the Goldcloaks, they will reinforce us if he gives the order, and even if he doesn¡¯t time is on our side. The Ravens that left will soon find the others and the men from the crew will join us. It might not be much, but if they ignore the laws and equip their arms, then we will get another 10 soldiers and 20 to 40 of the crew, however many they can gather. It will be enough to turn the tide, and if not then it will surely get the kings attention when a hundred armed men are fighting in the streets.


    And that is all under the assumption that Jaime still has the men to fight after trying to get in. Jaime has the advantage of numbers, armour and range. By entering this brothel, I have just turned all of those advantages, into disadvantages. Numbers, only one person can enter those entrances at once, and we have the advantage of skill and positioning. Range, spears are very helpful in the field, and out in the street they would have likely spiked us all in a matter of minutes. Inside a cramped building however, and those long weapons just get in the way and leave you exposed.


    As for armour, I spot a liqour cabinet and smash the lock with a qi enhanced punch. Solid oak reinforced by a steel lock collapses under the blow of ten men. Opening it I see a fortunes worth of expensive wines, all encased in fragile glass bottles. I grab a many as I can carry and place them on a table about 3 metres from the door, behind Brutus who stands at the ready, then grab some more till about 2 dozen bottles are lined nicely on the table. I didn¡¯t care for the content, but rather their size and shape. I then place my knives on the table as well, in easy to grab positions, and wait as they try to break down the door.

 chapter 35 - Battle of the Baelish Brothel.

    Jaime POV


    ¡®Sieging a fucking brothel. Why was it that when I was thinking how today was going to go, I never thought this would be one of the options?¡¯ I think while the men hack at the door.


    This all started when I asked Varys about the location of my brother. While we were coming back from Winterfell, he said he was going to the Wall in the North, to piss off it if I remember correctly. He sent a raven to me about 3 weeks ago saying he was returning, only he never made it here. The last anyone had seen him was in the Riverlands. It was Baelish who told me that he received a letter from the Vale that Tyrion had been kidnapped by Catelyn Stark and was now being held prisoner by her sister, Lysa Arryn in the Eerie.


    After asking Varys what was going on, he confessed that he only recently got word that Catelyn was under the impression that it was Tyrion who sent an assassin to try and kill her son, the one I pushed, to keep him from revealing any secrets. That is a load of horseshit, but when he told me that it was Lysa Arryn that told her sister to be wary of the Lannisters in the first place and that was why she brought Tyrion to the Eyrie, I felt extreme worry for his life.


    I wouldn¡¯t worry so much if it was just Catelyn, she has Ned¡¯s noble temperament, and would not kill Tyrion without a trial. Her sister on the other hand is severely unhinged. She has been paranoid for years, and her husband¡¯s death has left her fearful of assassins. She and her sickly son are both disillusioned, and Lysa has a habit of sending who she thinks is an assassin through the Eyrie¡¯s famous Sky Door, a hatch in the keep that is located hundreds of metres from the ground, which they use to execute people.


    That has led to arather precarious situation. Father has organised an army to invade the Riverlands and attack the Tully House, the family home of the 2 sisters, in order to force them to release Tyrion. That would take too long however. Not only would we have to fight a war, we would then have to negotiate with the Tullys to get their daughters to release my brother, by which time Tyrion would likely be dead.


    Father doesn¡¯t care about that part. He is only declaring war to defend the Lannister name and show we can¡¯t be taken lightly. If Tyrion dies then it will just mean the Tullys will be forced to pay greater restitutions, which he couldn¡¯t be happier about. Cersei has always hated Tyrion and can¡¯t wait to see him dead. She would never speak to the king on his behalf, and if she did it would be to manipulate the situation into being worse than it already is.


    The only chance I have to save his life is to use a hostage to try and force Tyrion¡¯s release. When one of the servants in the keep, one of the men under Lannister employ, told me Ned Stark was in the obscure part of town with only a few guards, I knew this would be my best opportunity. If I can capture Ned and bring him to the Westerlands, we can negotiate for Tyrion¡¯s release, and father can probably get some benefits as well.


    The king won¡¯t speak on Ned¡¯s behalf. Ned recently quit his position as Hand of the King, so he is no longer is a part of the royal court. This is now business between the Lannisters and Ned¡¯s family, with Ned¡¯s side being thee one in the wrong in the first place. His friendship won¡¯t win over his fear of my father.


    I grabbed as many of the Lannister guards that I could find on short notice, and made my way here. That was when everything started going wrong. There was not a handful of guards but rather a dozen men and a bear. One of the men was obviously Ben Baskerville, the bastard who beat me before. The rest didn¡¯t look like guards except for a few, rather a gathering of knights and mercenaries on their day off.


    When Ned came out, I asked him to come with me, which he obviously refused, and I got my men to ready for a fight. Seeing that Baskerville and his group were just in the wrong place at the wrong time, not there to specifically protect Ned I decided to let them go. First was to reduce the opposition.Though I was certain we would still win, it would be more chaotic, and if Ned was killed by accident this would all go face up very quickly. Ned is one of the most respected nobles in Westeros, some would argue even higher than my father. Capturing him to release my brother, no one will speak up if he is eventually released. Murdered by a detachment of guards in the streets of Kings Landing by a company of Lannister soldiers? The rest of the nobles would think we are acting like kings and overstepping our authority. If Tyrion were to die then, not only would very few speak up on our behalf, but many would side with the Starks in their counterattack.


    Second was that I still intend to get a rematch from Baskerville. I need to redeem my honour in fair combat with him. Although most of the lords and witnesses believe he won through tricks when we fought, the second-hand people only hear that I lost, and that lead to many doubts of my skill over the last weeks. I wanted to go for him earlier, but the opportunity was never there. My legs were healing for 2 weeks and by then the tournament was fully underway. If I challenged him he would have refused based on his desire to keep in top form. After the tournament I was distracted by my brother¡¯s situation and revenge was the last thing on my mind. I may have completely forgotten about our rematch if I didn¡¯t see him today.


    I felt it was shame originally that he didn¡¯t leave, as I would have to settle for killing him like this. Now my only regret was not killing him as soon as I saw him after the trouble he has caused. When he dragged Ned into the brothel, I was so shocked that I didn¡¯t react for a few moments, and by that time the rest were already inside and the door closed. That one move has thrown everything into question.


    Knowing Littlefinger, that snake will have an escape route in every establishment he owns. If Ned gets away and back to the Red keep it could be a major setback for me. Not only would I not be able to save Tyrion but my own life might be in danger.


    If I could grab Ned and bring him to the Westerlands, then Robert the fat king wouldn¡¯t make too much of a fuss, other than the required words and letters, seeing as I was no longer within his reach. But if Ned escapes then Robert will definitely come for me. Using armed troops to attack nobles in the capital is a major crime, one that is usually punishable by death.


    Of course, the king won¡¯t have the courage to have me killed, but I will be imprisoned and the Starks will have the power over both of my father¡¯s children. Tyrion will be completely forgotten, all of father¡¯s attention will be on releasing me. Hell, he might even use the situation to have me removed from the kings guard and sent home to inherit the land, what he¡¯s always wanted.Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    My only hope is to break in quickly, and either Ned is still in there, his honour compelling him to fight with his men, or he has fled, in which case I need to chase him down and capture him. Both these plans rely on me breaking in in the next few minutes. It looks hopeful when my men have chopped one of the hinges off, and now have a spear in to act as a lever. Once they pried it off, I ordered them to enter.


    The largest man went first, sword out, and threw the table blocking the way to the side. That was when an object suddenly collided with his helmet, shattering itself, and causing the soldier to scream in pain, covering his face. Before we could see what happened, a giant shadow reared up from the doorway. A giant mouth closed its fangs around the soldier¡¯s head, and with a mighty twist his head was ripped from the torso, a bit of his spine following. As we stood there horrified, we heard a low growing, followed by a crunching and spitting noise. What remained of the soldiers head was spat outside the door onto the pavement. The head was still inside it¡¯s helmet, though the steel helm was now dented with large teeth marks and looked like it had been placed in a vice.


    Half the men covered their mouths at that sight, several losing to their stomach and vomitting, for even veterans like themselves had rarely seen such a brutal way of killing before. We saw the culprit through the door, that humongous hound that Baskerville keeps, blood dripping from its jaw. As it is creeping backwards, shadows covering so that its silhouette and eyes are all we can see. Ben calls to us from inside.


    ¡°Why Jaime that was rude of you. Not only do you show up for dinner unannounced, but you only brought food for Brutus. Not to worry though, he and the rest of us have plenty of room and it seems you brought lots of extras. They even provided their own cutlery and platters, how thoughtful.¡± He taunts from inside.


    This is bad, the men are getting restless. The image of what happened to the last man is still clear in their minds, and they are thinking that they could be next.


    ¡°Calm yourselves, it is a beast. You, grab the corpse and drag it to the side for the moment, we will bury him later.¡± I instruct a man to remove the sight so that it can¡¯t continue affecting moral. ¡°You 2, ready your spears. You will go in together and when that mutt attacks, you will skewer it.¡± I tell two others my plan for breaching the building. No matter how large that hound is, it is still made of flesh and blood. Without the room to manoeuvre it will either have to retreat, or will attack and be struck with the spears.


    They move to my commands, the two with spears slowly moving to the doorway, just enough room for them both to enter at the same time. They watch the dog in through the entrance, not looking away for a second, the rest of the men behind the, ready to attack if they do fall and finish the dog.


    Suddenly the same noise from before sounds and the soldiers clutch their faces again. My men are ready to attack when the dog charges, but instead of an attack from the front, they are attacked from the sides. A sword enters them each, both in the waist, before being withdrawn and hacked down on again. The dog wasn¡¯t the only one guarding the entrance, seems 2 men were hiding by the side of the door. The spearmen were so focused on the dog that they didn¡¯t see the threat to the side.


    As their bodies fall and my men retreat again in the face of unexpected threat, I can finally see what was making those noises. On the floor beside the bodies are broken glass pieces, and what I can only assume is wine mixed in with the blood to make a contrast of different red colours. The first death was so gruesome that I didn¡¯t see the shards of glass and neglected to notice some of the liquid wasn¡¯t blood.


    So that was his plan. He has been throwing bottes of wine at their faces.When they shatter on their helmets, the glass and wine enters their eyes through the gaps, blinding them. This leaves them open to attack, in several ways as the previous deaths demonstrated.


    I observe the situation again. The front of the building has only 3 entrances that can be accessed, the front door, and 2 small windows. There are several windows on the upper floors, and if I had some ladders it would be the ideal entry point as they lack the numbers to guard them. The windows have rails that would require time to hack through, and even then my men would need to crawl through, just asking to be beheaded.


    The door could fit 2 men as was just demonstrated, but they attack anyone coming in from 3 sides, 4 including Baskerville¡¯s projectiles from a distance. From personal experience I know of his accuracy and he won¡¯t miss a target, any assault through there will be bloody and costly time wise.


    These buildings are all joined together, so if we want to look through for rear entrances we would have to leave this street and find the opposite street. Neither me or my men are used to this area, and there is no telling how long that could take to find the rear entrance, even if it wasn¡¯t a hidden one. Moral is low and time is against us. The longer I stay here the more likely we will be found by Goldcloaks and that will be the end of everything. I need one more confirmation before I decide to cut our losses or go all in.


    ¡°Ned Stark!! Is this how the famed Lord of Winterfell fights!? Hiding in abrothel instead of fighting me like a man. Maybe youshould start conscripting whores to fight your battles since you like their company so much.¡± I challenge in a loud voice, loud enough that if he is in there, he should hear me.


    ¡°Lord Stark is a bit busy right now and has no time for you at the moment. You will have to settle for us lowly knights and sell-swords if you want attention. Though if it is an honourable fight you want, I will gladly oblige. Just tell your men to back off 20 metres down the street and I will come out so we can have that rematch you wanted.¡± Baskerville replies from inside, taunting me. Little does he know he gave me what I wanted to know.


    I know Ned wouldn¡¯t be stupid enough to give up his strategic position to fight me out here, but he would not resist answering me himself if he was in there. Since it was Baskerville that answered I know that Ned has likely run off rather than stay to fight. This means continuing the fight is pointless. I would only lose men and time in order to exact revenge on Baskerville. Though the anger he has caused me makes it tempting, it is not worth the lives of my men. If he left earlier then enough time has passed that we will never catch up. Staying here is playing into their trap. If reinforcements come, either the Gold cloaks or Stark men, then I will be captured.


    I do admit that I am tempted by his offer for a rematch before I leave, but that is only when I could be sure there would be no tricks. From what I have seen of Baskerville he is more likely to throw a bottle of wildfire at me the second my men are clear, or sick his hound on me, than give me a proper duel.


    Even if I was sure he could be trusted I would have to refuse. I saw him fight Thoros and though I am sure I could still win, it would take time.That would defeat the main point of ending this engagement. I ignore him and turn to my men instead.


    ¡°We are leaving. Head back to the manors and preparehorses for a 12-man escort, we are leaving kings Landing at the earliest.¡± I tell them, giving orders for 2 men to carry the first man¡¯s body in a sling man from some capes. The other 2 are still in the doorway and will have to be left as I don¡¯t want to risk more casualties for their retrieval. I will just give a message and bribe the Goldcloaks to release the bodies so that they can be properly buried. That should help recover some of the moral. I give one last look to the brothel, imagining the day I can confront Baskerville in a fair fight, and on that day I will let him know what it means when ¡®a Lannister always pays his debts¡¯.

 chapter 36 - Double Retreat

    Ben POV


    ¡°They are leaving!¡± Ed calls from the front.


    ¡°What?¡± I ask in surprise. That was not one of the actions I thought he would take. I thought they would resume their attack, but with all the openings this time, turning into a full skirmish. It would be fierce fighting with casualties and injuries on our side, with many of the Lannisters dying. I told Nathan to go back into the building and find the staircase to the 1st floor and any windows that lead to the rear alley.He just came back a second ago to tell me there was.


    The plan was that once they break inside, I would use as many projectiles as I could to slow them down while the rest retreat up the staircase. Once up there we could use the high ground to cause even higher casualties, while one of us uses the sheets from the brothel rooms to create an escape route out of here. While everyone else is climbing down I and Brutus would slow the soldiers down and when everyone is out we would follow, cutting the sheets and jumping. We could make the leap even from the 2nd floor if needed let alone the 1st.


    We would use the time it takes them to reorganise to flee. This is all under the assumption we haven¡¯t either killed them all or sent them into a retreat. Between the entrances and stairs acting as choke points and me and Brutus acting as the core attackers, they will likely lose dozens in the fighting. Most armies flee when they lose more than 30% of their troops, though that depends on the composition, training and size of the force.


    The other option would be if Jaime fell for my bait and agreed to duel me. In the past when using qi I could probably beat Jaime in 10 or more moves, now that I have broken through, with greater strength and duration, I could dismember one of his limbs in 3 moves, then take him hostage to force the rest of the troops back. Since we are at the point of no return I don¡¯t care if I offend the Lannister House or not. Hell if they didn¡¯t retreat fast enough or refused I would probably just kill Jaime and use that to affect their moral. From what I have seen and heard of Jaime¡¯s arrogance, this was a likely option.


    Him ordering a retreat was not what I was expecting. Although we killed 3 of his men in a rather easy and brutal manor, and they will definitely be affected, it was not enough to cause a rout. Those deaths were due to surprise attacks. I know it, he knows it, the men out there know it. Although we have the advantage of positioning and their weapons are less effective in here than out there, they still outnumber us nearly 5 to 1. It would be tough but they would still be able to get inside, and then he would be able to swarm and slaughter us. The casualties would be reasonable for wiping out our entire force. He could even split his force into 2 and send them around the other side of the building and come at us from both sides. We would be unable to defend both sides and without the choke points his casualties would be greatly lowered. Of course, that is assuming he doesn¡¯t know I have broken through to 2nd tier, and together with my men I could fight my way through either of the weakened sides.


    I haven¡¯t shown the full extent of my abilities since breaking through, even against Thoros I held back with my qi usage. So, it was unlikely for him to have taken plans against that, and without the knowledge that we have already planned an escape route, I can¡¯t think of why he would run away.


    I was half expecting that this was a trick to get us to come outside, but when they all run off towards the direction of the Red Keep, and don¡¯t leave any men on the corner to watch us, I amalmost certain this is not a trick. Jaime doesn¡¯t seem like a coward, so either he is trying to catch Lord Stark, knows about my plan to retreat or there is something else I am not considering.If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    ¡°Pack-up boys, we¡¯re leaving!¡± I call to the others, giving a quick check on Ed and Ethel to see if they were injured in any way. ¡°Listen I want the 2 of you to split up and take different roads back to the Keep. Assume everyone that tries to stop you is an enemy, that is trying to silence you. If they are not the Lord or the King you ignore them and run as fast as you can to the Keep. When you get there, and if the Lord hasn¡¯t returned, tell the vice captain what has happened. Get him to increase guards on the girls and keep them safe. Then tell the king what happened, he will order a search for the Lord.¡± I give out a list of commands to the two guards that I don¡¯t know the names of.


    ¡°Thank you for your help, Ser Baskerville. We will always remember your service, and comply with your orders.¡± They salute me and run off down the street, taking different ways when they reach the end.


    ¡°Listen up, we are going to run back to the inn at the fastest speed we can. Brutus and I are in the lead, if we spot trouble we will warn you and we will decide what to do then. Let¡¯s go.¡± I order the rest of the group, and start to run. I have no intention of being found by a pile of dead bodies, covered in blood and weapons. I have about as much faith in being found innocent if tried as I do in rocks floating. This city does not have a reputation for fair and impartial investigations.


    I could have followed the guards back to the keep to make sure Ned got their safe and if not try to find him, but I done enough already. Now I need to make sure I and my family survive the night.


    We run for 5 minutes before we reach the inn. No trouble on the roads, though we did get some concerned looks and angry shouts from pedestrians, and when we entered we saw a warming sight. Elsa was already there, safe and sound, but other than her the rest of the people were all buff men looking like they were going for war. The Ravens were all decked in their Leather and bronze armour, swords by their side, as well as about 32 men from the crew that were equipped with a variety of weapons, from cutlasses and fishing spears, to kitchen cleavers and sticks with nails inside. They were anodd mix to call an army, but they were filled with grim faces and ready for a fight. I like to think they were coming for me, but if I''m being honest they were likely doing it for Ethel and Curt., their sergeant and captain respectively.


    ¡°Boss!¡±, ¡°Captain¡±, ¡°Ben¡± was the mixture of calls and shouts, Elsa quickly rushing to hug me and then Ed when she saw he was safe as well. There was a lot of relieved shouts and calls for what happened.


    ¡°Alright, quiet down, all of you!! We will tell you all what happened later but for now we need to move quickly. Captain how soon will it take to load the rest of the supplies and be ready to set sail?¡± Once I finish comforting ElsaI shout to be heard above the din. I address the Curt to find the time requirements for our next moves.


    ¡°2 days, maybe 1. I would have to check what they got done today.¡± He gives me a vague answer.


    ¡°You¡¯re all working overtime. I want that ship to be stocked and ready to sail for White Port by morning. Relax I''ll pay you double for the day.¡± I say when it looks like they are losing enthusiasm, which immediately reignites. ¡°Then I want all of you to close whatever sleeping arrangements you have made. We are all sleeping on the ship for the next few days, and I want it ready to move at a moments notice if I give the signal.¡± I tell the crew, and one of them asks, confused.


    ¡°Sir, what is the signal.¡± These guys are mostly foreigners and not used to calling someone ¡®Ser¡¯, so they just call all superiors except the captain ¡®Sir¡¯. ¡°When you see the docks on fire and a hundred guards are chasing a man and a giant dog, that is a good time to weigh anchor.¡± I tell them sarcastically. They gulp at the now serious implications, some doubting if I was joking and others wondering just what could warrant such a response. Soon we all break up and I go to get some sleep since I can assume I won¡¯t be getting much over the next few days, if any.

 chapter 37 - Climbing in Chaos

    Peytr Baelish POV


    It seems that despite the setbacks and changes, the situation has ultimately ended in my favour.


    When Catelyn brought Tyrion to the Eyrie I knew my opportunity had come. I told Jaime about his brother¡¯s situation knowing that it would start a conflict between the Lannisters and the Starks. A conflict that I could use to sell favours to either side.


    When Jaime started to get the idea to use a hostage to release Tyrion, I told him through the use of a spy that he thought was loyal to the Lannisters, but had actually been bought by me some months ago, that Ned was currently at my brothel. I knew Jaime and Ned would not involve me in their conflict. I could even use my appearance to remove any suspicion of my foreknowledge in the events.


    The rash man Jaime is would lead troops to the brothel and attack Ned. Either Ned would be killed or captured wouldn¡¯t matter to me. Jaime disregarded a vital fact. He wanted to use Ned to trade for Tyrion with Catelyn, but he neglected that Tyrion was no longer her prisoner, but rather Lysa¡¯s who is under my control. It is amazing what desperate and miserable people will do when you show them even the slightest amount of affection. I Have made use of these aspects many a time, both in brothels and in connections.


    Lysa will not release Tyrion without my say so, so even if Ned captured it would ultimately lead to nothing. It would just lead to greater conflicts that might even send the kingdom into another war. The last war brought me so much freedom to move. When everyone is busy fighting they tenfd to forget their money pouches, only caring for killing their enemies. They know war is expensive and so they don¡¯t care that their vaults are emptying, so long as they get what they want they will pay any price.


    If Ned died then all the better, as Catelyn would then be available for my pursuit. Comforting the grieving widow is the sort of thing any good friend should do. It was the folly of my youth to try and duel Brandon Stark for her hand. I was rash and nearly paid for it with my life. After the war with the Trident I realized that if I had instead used my time to raise my station and power, I might have contended for her hand instead of Ned.


    It was about then that things started to unravel from my control. The first issue was Ned¡¯s capture which was a failure. The arrival of Ser Baskerville was an unexpected twist.The fact he could triumph from that situation was even more so, though that should be partly due to my fault. I have known about Baskerville for some time, though it was only recently that he made any moves that were worthy of my attention.


    I have properties all over Westeros, primarily brothels and gambling dens, as well as a number of respectable establishments as well. The manager of one of my properties in the North has told me a great deal about Ser Baskerville through the reports he sent me. It was mildly interesting at the beginning, but after he was clearly unable to be used or affect me in any way I dismissed the reports. Although I prefer to use words and numbers to combat my enemies, I have always been on the look-out for protection, recent events have only highlighted this. I had this manager reach out to Baskerville when he was still just a commoner. He refused unfortunately, though it was no great loss as there are plenty of others that were willing to take his place.


    After recent events with Jaime and Ned I looked into the reason for the failure, and the more I look into it the more I wish I had offered a higher price. He has demonstrated not just skill bordering on legendary, but has displayed excellent tactical and even political skills. His ability to read between the lines and look to the future remind me of myself in my youth. His willingness to perform somewhat questionable tasks for the reasonable price, as shown by his paid targets in the tournament days, make him the ideal person to accomplish special tasks.


    His skill at dealing with Jaime Lannister on the road, was incredible. When I first heard that the Kingslayer lost to someone I thought that the North had simply gained a good fighter this time. I made a note of the name, not for recruitment but in case I needed a favour from Cersei and could sell Baskervilles head for a price. After the brothel I looked into those events more clearly. The way he dealt with Jaime was not just a physical feat but a mental one. Someone at such an age with physical, mental and tactical ability could be one of the legends of an age. He could follow in the footsteps of Barristan Selmy and Duncan the Tall.


    I was considering if I needed to make arrangements to deal with him. He was too capable to leave by Ned¡¯s side, but my investigation showed him preparing to leave King¡¯s Landing. He had readied a ship and was making arrangements with the Iron Bank to move his entire fortune to the North. I was even more impressed with his decisiveness. Perhaps the Lannisters would call this cowardly and the Vale Lords would say abandoning his lord when he knows he is in danger is disgraceful, but knowing when the situation is against you and cutting your loses is an admirable trait in my book. Since it was clear he wasn¡¯t planning to remain and interfere in King¡¯s Landing I decided to just leave him be.


    The fact that I was too distracted with other work was also a reason to leave him alone. The day after the incident at the brothel, Lysa told me that the imp was free. It seemed that he made use of the situation to call for a trial by combat, which he won through the use of a champion. With both the law and honour demanding he be released, she was forced to comply.


    The Lords and knights of the Vale are some of my favourite people to use. They are loyal to a fault and will go to any lengths to uphold justice. This might seem like a disadvantage to someone like myself, as morally challenged as others see me but that is only if they can prove it. They are all loyal to House Arryn, of which the remaining members are Lysa and her son Robbin. Both of whom are under my control and persuasion, earning me control over the entire Vale, if not officially. As for their justice, that only applies when they know someone is guilty, and there are very few of them who possess the cunning and craftiness to unravel my schemes. Instead I just need to use them like the Tyrion case. By saying he was behind the assassination of the Bran boy, and providing information the knife was belonging to him, they will all jump at the chance to capture him.If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    What I did not count on was Tyrions ability to manipulate them and others. Not only did he call for a trial by combat, but he also managed to persuade a sell-sword who had never met him before to risk his life for him. When he won the Vale lords were forced to let him go and Lysa could do nothing to stop it. The annoying part of the Vale men is that they will not choose loyalty over honour. If Lysa asked them to capture Tyrion again, honour would demand they refuse, and they may even question her from then on.


    I spent the next few days trying to plan how to keep this conflict going if both Tyrion and Ned are free.I was planning to hire men from Gulltown or the other towns in the area to either capture or kill him, when Ned himself provides the timber for his pyre.


    Earlier this evening Cersei came to me with a plan and proposition. It seems Ned finally found out about the queen and her brothers little secret. How the 3 royal children are all bastards, and are the offspring of incest.


    This comes as no surprise to me. I and several others have known for a while, though it seems the very outrageousness of the act has been what kept others from finding out. It was gossiped for several years a decade ago that the queen had a lover, however her lack of contact with potential partners and the fact those gossipers would leave the castle one by one and never be seen from again, caused the rumours to die down. The only people who know are like myself, we have little to gain from revealing the knowledge at the moment and are just waiting for the right time.


    Ned doesn¡¯t want to wait however. He pieced the truth together and is ready to release it to the king. If he did, I would say good show to him, but instead I almost laughed at what he did next. He told Cersei that she had until the morning to leave King¡¯s Landing with her children, because that would be when he would tell the king. I assume it was done in attempt to save the children, but I can only think he deserves what comes next.


    Cersei is a scorpion, and when she feels under threat, she will sting everyone in her surroundings till everyone is dead. The servants in charge of the king¡¯s chambers have been in her pocket for years, likely so she can keep track of the king¡¯s whores and deal out the suitable punishments.Though it could be she was planning this for a while.


    The bed sheets have been doused in a special substance called ¡®Emperors Breath¡¯ named due to the origin. In the South on the Isle of Naarth, they have many species of butterflies that are poisonous to everyone except for the local inhabitants. One particular species is called the ¡®Emperor¡¯s skin moth¡¯ due in part to its large size, but also due to its skin. Most of the other varieties carry their poison in their pollen, but this one has it in its skin, which is extremely poisonous to the touch when shed.


    Cersei sprayed his sheets with the shed skin of that moth, so that when he sleeps the king will either breath in the skin fragments, or it will be absorbed through the skin. Either one will cause death, the only difference is whether it is 1 hour or 3. Tomorrow the king will be found dead and Cersei will have ordered her soldiers to slaughter the Stark guards, taking the Lord and his children captive. Through several planted evidences in his room and testimonies from bought servants she can say that It was a conspiracy to gain control of the throne and rule as regent. With Grand maesterPycell being the one to examine the body and the false evidence and witness, the trial will be all but conclusive.


    As for why she came to tell me her plans was because she needed me to complete them. The king owed the Lannisters a lot of money, and in exchange for reducing the interest requested they receive several political benefits. The main one applicable in this caseis the number of soldiers they can have as guards. Most lords can only have a small number of guards at one time. Even when Paramounts visit King¡¯s Landing they can have at most 100 guards, which is how many Lord Stark has. The Lannisters are allowed 200, combined with the Queens 100, not to mention the royal guards she has bought over the years, they will have no issue slaughtering the Starks. The problem is what comes after.


    With the king dead and the Hand accused of treason, there will be doubt be unrest, from both the masses and the nobles. While they might not be overly supportive of Ned, seeing as he was a new arrival, but they know Cersei and Joffrey. They have both acquired a reputation over the years for their cruelty, and the thought of the 2 of them in power is a scary thought. They need me to control the Goldcloaks so that they can keep the peace and suppress any dissent.


    I wouldn¡¯t do it for free, and asked for compensation. She agreed to grant me the Seat of Lord of Harrenhal, and arrange for my marriage with Lysa Arryn.


    Harrenhal is the former seat of House Hoare, who once stood against the Targaryens when Aegon the 1st invaded Westeros. The Lord and his entire family was burned alive inside the walls by dragons, and since then it has been abandoned. The area surrounding it still has a few farms and villages, but the castle has been left in ruins for centuries,ruled by one incompetent family after the next, and is thought to be haunted by the ghosts of those that burned.


    The men who would leave such an obvious prize alone are either fools or those lacking in capability. I have no need for stories of ghosts, but I do have need for the great position of Harrenhal. It is located near to the crossroad of 2 major roads, King¡¯s Road and the River Road. From it I would have connections to King¡¯s Landing and 4 other kingdoms. As for the castle itself, while the damage done to it and lack of maintenance has let it fall to ruins, the foundation is still there. It is in a strategic position and has the walls and landscape to become one of the greatest keeps in Westeros. All it needs is the money to make the repairs and money is the thing I have in abundance.


    No one has quite comprehended how deep my pockets really are. My known businesses are already enough to make me one of the richest in the lands, but through my position as Master of coin I have managed to inflate my assets even more. By using the kings taxes, I have invested in businesses that I either own or possess shares in. I then hide the expenses by exaggerating other expenses. When Robert goes on a spending spree, I will purchase services and goods at high price, and then replace them with either inferior goods, or using my own people to reduce the cost. I charge the full cost and use several accounting systems to hide the missing money so none are the wiser. If I liquidate my assets and use the money to rebuild Harrenhal over the years. It can become the Seat of power for my House, with the economic power over several major trade routes, military power of the old House Hoare, and the political importance of being the connection with the Vale and the King.


    When I marry Lysa I will become the Lord Protector of the Vale when she dies and until Robbin comes of age. Lysa has spoiled her son rotten, and the boy adores me. Controlling him once his mother is gone will be easy, and I will soon hold the power over the Vale and be the most powerful Lord in the Riverlands, greater than even the Tullys. Never again will I have to suffer the humiliation of having the woman I love beg for my life from a Northern brute. Instead the men of the land will beg for my favour and Cat will finally be within my grasp once more.

 chapter 38 - Prepare to Leave.

    Ben POV


    It has been 5 days since the attack on the brothel and I have been living on egg shells the entire time.


    The first night, while i sent everyone to stay on board the ship, I was waiting in my room in the inn, fully armed, with a candle on by bedside table and a bucket of oil by my feet. I was not joking when I said I would use the docks burning as a signal. Brutus was waiting outside, and if he smelled trouble, he would signal me and then run back to the docks to warn and protect the others. At the same time, I would throw the bucket at the wall opposite the window followed by the candle.


    I feel sorry for the owner and other residents but this is as desperate as it can get. I have made myself the enemy of the Lannister family and they have one of the strongest presences in the city. If they were to go all out in their revenge, they could bring 100 men easily to have me killed. They could forge any number of crimes to justify the act after I am dead and no one would be able to refute them, not even Ned.


    I have already scouted a number of escape routes. After the fire is started, I would leap from the window to the nearby rooftop, and from there to the next roof. The gap between the buildings from opposite streets are about 20 metres, and a normal man wouldn¡¯t make the distance. I am not normal. Even if the distance was twice that, if I flared my qi I could still grab the edge of the roof. As it is I can just jump from street to street without the use of qi,relying only on my superior muscles.


    If they see me they won¡¯t be able to follow, but it is much more likely they will be too distracted by other things. The fire will catch the eyes and alert the other residents in the surroundings something is going on. It would be just a few minutes before the streets are filled and the Goldcloaks are on their way. Any pursuit will be greatly hampered and I can make it to the docks where we can escape.


    Fortunately, this plan was never enacted. There was no army coming to kill me, no assassins either. The morning came and we were all safe. I wasn¡¯t sure if that meant we were not going to be attacked ever, but I wasn¡¯t going to take the chance. The crew was told that until we leave they were never to be more than a 30 minute run from the ship. Elsa was not allowed more than 500 metres from the ship, under threat that if she went past it, I would tie her to the main mast. She was not happy.


    The reason I didn¡¯t leave immediately was because I had to make some arrangements with the bank. I didn¡¯t plan to return to King¡¯s Landing for a few years, if ever, but all my money was in the bank here. Since it was clear that we weren¡¯t being attacked immediately, I decided to risk delaying our departure till I could arrange a transfer.


    I could have just withdrawn the gold and put it on my ship, but that is a lot of gold, and I don¡¯t really trust the entire crew yet. The Ravens are loyal to Ethel and Captain Curt has proven himself to me, but the rest I barely know. Though I can trust them to do their job, especially since between myself, Ed, Nathan and the Ravens I control the largest armed group on the ship. There is a total of 25,900 dragons in my account. That is enough money for all the crew members to live a life of luxury. It is enough for a group of them to risk their life for. Though I am not afraid they will succeed, if they do something stupid and kill my family or friends then that is just not worth the risk.


    The Iron Bank offers a special service for transferring accounts to banks in different cities. This is very useful for criminals who have saved a lot of money and need to run without being able to return, or when powerful families want to relocate to other areas of the world. The Iron Bank issues several written documents that signify the amount that I have in my account and which city I will now be withdrawing from. They have several transfers within their organisations a few times a year. On one of those occasions my gold will be transferred, usually by ship, to the area of my choice, in this case White Port. White Port is the largest port in the North and under the authority of House Manderly, who are loyal to the Starks. The great part about this system is that even if the ship with my gold is stolen or lost, with the written documents I can still access the same amount as the bank will replace the lost income. There are two downsides to this action.Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.


    The first is cost. The Iron Bank charges for just about everything. In this case they charge 10% of the total sum transferred. I withdrew 900 dragons and kept it in a small chest to act as emergency spending on the journey north, so the bank will receive 2,500 dragons to transfer my 22,500. It is a lot but it will be worth it if I avoid potential disaster of losing all of it or something more important. Besides I was originally planning to spend a lot more on the ship and crew. The fortunate encounter with captain Curt helped to save me some funds.


    The other problem was the time it takes. It requires signatures from myself, several witnesses and the bank clerks from both banks. Even after paying for express transfer via raven, it still took 4 days to get it all done and receive my receipts. All throughout the days I was waiting I was on edge, expecting the trouble planned on the first night to come for me.


    A soon as I receive the receipts I placed them in a waterproof tube, thanked the clerks, and left with Brutus. I told everyone this morning to be on the ship by noon and ready to leave the second I get there. I had already pushed my luck waiting this long to leave and have no intention to stretch it further. I had just left the building with Brutus, the wind blowing my hair. Might be windy, hopefully that will help us rather than delay us. I have very little knowledge of sailing. We left the city through the Mud Gate and were heading to the docks, when Brutus started sniffing the air.


    He barks at me and sends a signal to indicate the Starks. ¡°Ned, Here?¡± I ask. He shakes his head and signals for females. ¡°Sansa or Arya? Or could it be Catelyn?¡± I try to specify. He taps his foot twice the indicate the second option. ¡°Where is she?¡± I ask him to lead me. He bounds down the streets to the left of where the docks are. As we round the keep I see Arya, dirty and crying, carrying a fencing sword with a mustached man and Nymeria beside her. The man draws a sword and gets into position when he sees us, but lowers his guard a moment later. He seems to recognize me.


    Nymeria starts barking, though Arya doesn¡¯t realize, and bounds up to Brutus. Though Arya overestimated the ability to keep up with Brutus in terms of size, I can see where she was confused. Nymeria is already about 50kg, about the size of an average adult dog, with sharp teeth and wild fur.


    ¡°Arya! What are you doing here and who is this?¡± I ask and get ready to plant a knife between the man¡¯s eyes if the answer isn¡¯t a friend. Brutus is also ready to jump between Arya and a potential assailant.


    ¡°Ben? Ben!! Quick you have to help, the keep, guards fighting, and and ¡­.¡± she appears to finally acknowledge her surroundings at my voice. She runs to me and starts shouting about random things before breaking down and collapse, exhausted. I hug her tightly and wait for her to calm down. Instead I address the man before me.


    ¡°My name is Ser Ben Baskerville, knight under Lord Stark. Who might you be sir?¡± Normally in a questionable situation like this I wouldn¡¯t give away my name or allegiance but this is also a test. In this open area with no one around, if he showed any signs of hostility to either my name or House Stark then I would end him before he gets a single word out. If his follow up answer is either unbelievable or not to my liking I may still kill him. I have been very stressed over the past few days and killing a potential enemy will give me a great sense of relief. The primary reason I am keeping him alive for now is as a source of information into just why Arya, who last I heard was in the Red Keep, has suddenly appeared.


    ¡°My name is Syrio Forell, the First sword of Braavos. I am Lady Arya¡¯s dancing instructor, under the employ of Lord Stark. It is good to meet you Ser Baskerville, your skill at the Hand¡¯s Tourney was quite the accomplishment.¡± He greets men with a light bow. I see no hesitation in his movements and no anger in his eyes either. He is either telling the truth, or a really good actor. Either way he has passed for now.


    ¡°Very well Syrio, let us vacate the area for now. I have a ship where we should be safe for the moment and you can explain the situation to me.¡± I tell him and lead Arya who has tired herself out back to the docks.

 chapter 39 - Bloody Keep

    Arya POV (1 hour earlier)


    I was going downstairs to the dining hall for some breakfast when I heard a lot of shouting from outside. Harry and James checked the window. Father said that I needed to have guards at all times for the next few days, and I and Sansa are not to leave the Tower of the hand without permission. We both made a fuss at that point, Sansa because she wasn¡¯t allowed to see her ¡®precious¡¯ Joffrey, and me because it is so boring in here. At least I can still do practice with Syrio in the afternoon and Nymeria to keep me company. She was following me at the moment, excited to eat breakfast, where I would slip her some of my bacon.


    The sound was getting louder and suddenly Harry backs from the window deathly white. ¡°Lady Arya, we need to leave. Now!¡± he tells me. I keep telling them not to call me ¡®Lady¡¯ and everytime they just smile like I''m some child having a tantrum. I was about to say it again when I see how serious the two of them look.


    ¡°What¡¯s going on? What is that noise?¡± I ask. The noise is really loud now, with people shouting and screaming becoming clear now. I am scared at this point when Harry grabs me by the shoulder and drags me down the hall.


    ¡°We¡¯re under attack!¡± He shouts. ¡°There are hundreds of soldiers forcing their way to into the building. The guards outside are already dead, they will be on our floor soon. We need to go down the rear staircase and get out back. Then we can go to the main building where the Lord and captain Jory are.¡± He tells me as he draws his sword and pulls me along.


    There are 2 staircases in the Tower of the Hand. The first leads to the dining hall and the main entrance, the other to the servant¡¯s quarters and the back entrance. Sansa has her lessons in the main buildings with the Septon, while father had to go to an emergency meeting of the small council earlier.


    We run along the corridor and down the steps. We are running down the last corridor when we reach the junction in the path. From the direction of the main hall a bunch of men with a king¡¯s guard at the lead stops calls to us.


    ¡°Halt! In the name of the king, lay down your arms and surrender. Arya Stark by order of the king you are required to come with me and stand before him and your father.¡± The kings guard, Ser Meryn, ordered us. I never liked any of the kings guards. Father said the commander, Barristan, was a good man, but so far whenever I pass them, they always look like they are sticking their noses up at us. This time is no different, except he is matching it with an angry scowl and bloodied sword.


    Harry pushes me to James and stands before us. He looks over his shoulder and tells us. ¡°James, take Arya to the Lord. I will ¡­" He doesn¡¯t finish. While his head was turned, he was stabbed in the throat by Meryn. After killing Harry, Meryn moves forward with his bloodied sword, the rest of the soldiers following him.


    ¡°ARYA, RUN!!¡± James shouted to me, clashing swords with the men. He blocks about 2 strikes before one of the soldiers stabs him with their spears while Meryn locks his sword. As James falls to the floor, Meryn swings his sword down on him again, cutting his head off. I turn to run, but Meryn grabs me by the hair.


    ¡°Stop struggling brat, make this harder and I will break your legs before bringing you to the king.¡± He warns me. As I struggle Nymeria leaps at Meryn biting his arms in an attempt to free me. It is useless, her teeth can¡¯t break his armour and Meryn just kicks her in annoyance. ¡°Fucking mutt. Kill the dog.¡±


    ¡°NOO!! I screamas one of the men moves forward. He is about to stab her with his spear when a sword tip pierces his neck from behind. He falls to the ground and Syrio is standing behind him, sword in one hand and dagger in the other, both covered in blood. In the corridor where once stood 6 soldiers, now lay dead, throats slit. Syrio killed all of them without ever making a sound.If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    ¡°Who the fuck are you? Do you know what you just did?¡± Meryn throws me against the wall and turns to face Syrio, sword raised in defence. ¡°Those are the soldiers under the king, killing them is an act of treason.¡± Syrio appears to look very bored with what he is saying and even gives a slight yawn. ¡°I am Ser Meryn Trant, a member of the king¡¯s guard, and by his authority I command you to surr...¡± He starts, but never finishes.


    With a quick leap forward Syrio bats Meryn¡¯s sword away and thrusts his own into Meryn¡¯s mouth, and through the brain. ¡°I am Syrio Forell, the First sword of Braavos. And I command you to die.¡± Meryn¡¯s life lingers for a bit more, before Syrio withdraws his sword and he slumps to the ground, dead. Syrio wipes his sword and then moves to me.


    ¡°Arya, are you alright child? Come you must rise. We must get out of the Red Keep.¡± He takes my hand and lifts me up, checking for wounds. I get up and check on Nymeria. She only got stunned and didn¡¯t break anything luckily.


    ¡°We need to get to the main Keep, that is where my father and Sansa went this morning. Jory and his men are there as well. If we find father and the king then we will be safe.¡± I tell Syrio the plan Harry and James thought of. As I think of them, I turn to look at their butchered bodies. They died to give me even a few more seconds to run. Without them Syrio would have been late. Nymeria would be dead and I would have been captured.


    ¡°The Red Keep is swarming with soldiers. The main hall was already filled with them, and I fear that whatever this is, your father and the king are powerless to stop it for now. We must get you out of the Red Keep, out of King¡¯s Landing even. Once the fighting is stopped we can return, but if you are taken and used as a hostage it will become much harder for your father.¡± He tells me the worst news possible. If the main building Is also taken, then father and Sansa are likely taken, if not worse. I take a few deep breaths, calm myself, and nod.


    ¡°Very good. We must find a way out. When I was heading here the main gate was locked and under guard. There is no way we will escape from there.¡± It was when he told me about the gate that I remembered the secret passageway, telling him that we needed to go to the dungeons. ¡°The dungeons? Arya my dear we are trying to avoid the dungeons not enter them.¡± He tells me with a queer look.


    ¡°No! There is a secret passage there. When I was chasing a cat, I followed it into this crevice that led to an underground path. That led to the beach outside of King¡¯s Landing.¡± I tell him about my recent adventure. As part of my training Syrio told me to chase cats. It is a test of reflexes and speed to catch such slippery animals. One of them it led me through that secret passage and I had to walk back to the Red Keep through the main gate.


    ¡°Then let us go.¡± Syrio declares. We run down the corridor through the rear exit. Out in the courtyard there is people fighting and dying. We run for the black dungeons, anyone that tries to stop us is cut down by Syrio. When we reach the entrance, I hear a shout from behind us.


    ¡°Over there! The Stark girl is over there!¡± One of the Lannister soldiers was pointing to us and shouting. Most of the Stark guards were dead now, with a few scattered clashing noises coming from the nearby buildings. Several of the soldiers had seen us and were now heading our way. We quickly entered the dungeons and headed down the stairs, towards the Black Cells.


    When we pass a particular turn, I stop Syrio and lead him down a crevice. The path is hidden by a combination of the torch creating shadows and shiny surfaces on the opposite walls to attract attention. I would have never found it if I didn¡¯t follow the cat that had adjusted to the environment down here.


    I led Syrio and Nymeria down the path, the sound of guards entering the dungeons behind us. They pass the entrance and continue on, never seeing us in here. We continue all the way to the end, making a number of turns when the path twists into different directions. If it wasn¡¯t for following the cat when I came down here i would have definitely gotten lost down here. We exit into the sea breeze, sun having fully risen now. I have lost my energy and only want to drop, but Syrio forces me to continue. Suddenly I hear Nymeria barking and Syrio tenses up. I think it is the soldiers catching up and just look at the ground, waiting for them to take me.


    ¡°Arya?! What are you doing here and who is this?¡± I hear a voice that is very familiar. I look up and see Ben and Brutus, standing on the sand before us. Irub my eyes,then when it is clearly not an illusion, I run to him. I try to speak, but can¡¯t get full sentences out. Eventually I faint and fall asleep in his arms. The next time I wake I am on a bed in a wooden room, Nymeria and Brutus sleeping on the floor before me. Nymeria starts to bark when she notices I am awake, while Brutus sniffs me and then sits down again.


    A few seconds later Ben enters the room and asks me what happened. I do my best and at the end he tells me not to worry. He sent a man to tell people to gather in his room.

 chapter 40 - Problems and Resolve

    Ben POV


    After Arya fell asleep, I brought them back to the ship and placed her in my bed. I left Brutus to watch her and signal me when she woke. When she did, I brought her some food and water. When Syrio wanted to see her, I told him he needed to wait. I told Brutus to watch him and not let the man leave while I asked Arya what happened.


    I already asked Syrio earlier and his story seemed to check out but I wasn¡¯t taking any chances. He matches the description of what Arya told me about her dancing instructor, the story made sense considering the situation and he didn¡¯t have the attitude of a kidnapper. When I suggested we return to my ship he made no attempt to take Arya elsewhere. He also hasn¡¯t tried to leave before Arya woke up, and any time he asked to see her I escorted him to make sure there was no funny business. If he made even the slightest off motion that looked to silence her for good, I would have shown him a world of pain. I may be against torture as a last method of gathering information, but for those who harm my friends it also adds punishment into the mix, which is just efficient in my book.


    I had little worry of his escape considering where we were. I ordered the captain to weigh anchor and take us to the edge of the Blackwater Bay. I did not want us to be too slow to leave and end up either boarded or blockaded. We stopped just a 10 -minute sail from the docks, though this area is considered an unprotected area. It is not protected from storms or from thieves if you park here. We won¡¯t be here long in any event, and we still have a longboat that is used as a life-boat that we can use to send a small team to shore.


    He made no suspicious movements during his stay and seemed to show genuine concern for Arya. When Arya woke and was in a suitable state to talk, she admitted to Syrio¡¯s identity as her teacher and saviour. That removed a lot of doubt on my mind about his story, though probably because it was one of the worst possible situations, I asked Arya again in the vain hope it was a lie.


    I wasn¡¯t that lucky. The Red Keep was attacked, and it was not an attack from the outside since I and no one else in the city had any idea it was happening. From the fact it was Lannister soldiers that attacked I can assume that it was not the king¡¯s orders. Ned would never commit treason and although Jory said that Ned had a falling out with him, unless Robert went insane, he would never just slaughter the Stark guards and kidnap the children. In fact, it is more likely Aegon has risen from the dead and is commanding dead soldiers considering how much like the past this is. It is almost being repeated for heaven¡¯s sake.


    The good news is that they were trying to capture Arya alive. That means at the very least Sansa should also be alive and Ned too if I''m lucky. I don¡¯t know for what reason they have them, it could be anything from hostages to ransoms. All I do know is that it gives me time to rescue them


    I gather the crew together and give them a briefing. ¡°Listen up everyone, there has been a change of plans. We are staying here tonight. When the sun is setting, I intend to take the longboat to shore and investigate the situation. I need 5 volunteers to come aboard with me. This is extra work so I will pay them an extra 3 stags each for the job.¡± I quickly get 5 volunteers, it is always best to motivate rather than threaten, ignoring Ed and Nathan when they try to join. I would have gone alone than take them with me. If the worst happens, I can run away and abandon the crew members if I need to, but I can¡¯t if my family comes. ¡°Alright everyone return to your posts. I will fill in the volunteers on their mission later when we leave.¡± I dismiss everyone and head to my quarters where Syrio and Arya are waiting. My friends and family join me a second later.


    ¡°So boss, what¡¯s the plan?¡± Ethel has taken to calling me boss since I officially hired him. I felt bad that I was dragging him and the Ravens into this mess when they need to return to the North. Unlike me they belong to a mercenary group and should have headed back a while ago. I decided to make it an official mission and paid them a total of 5 dragons for escorting myself back to the North. The normal pay would be a single dragon, maybe 2, for a security job on a ship like this, so even after paying the company 10% cut they will still make a tidy sum. I can also feel a lot better by treating the Ravens like normal mercenaries rather than friends like Ethel. Don¡¯t get me wrong I like them, but this is a dangerous journey and other than my important people, everyone and thing is disposable.


    ¡°We are going to escort the Starks back to the North. Tonight, when it is dark I will row back to the city and scout the situation. The crew chosen will gather information. The gates shut at night so they won¡¯t be able to get inside, but there are a number of bars and skeevy establishments in the FishMarkets outside.¡± I tell them.


    FishMarket is a part of the city that has earned an unofficial name. Just like Flea Bottom is the slum district in the city, FishMarket is another poor area, though slightly better. It is primarily an area for the dock workers and fishermen who live in kings Landing but can¡¯t afford better houses inside the walls. It is rarely visited by the guards so there is quite a lot of crime there.A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    ¡°The rules on weapons aren¡¯t applied outside the gates so they will carry swords to avoid trouble and be given some money to gain information. They will find out if there was anything interesting happening today or if there are any announcements for the next few days. I will be scouting the area for weak spots.¡± I inform them. The gates are always patrolled and I don¡¯t have time to find the smugglers who could get me through the walls of the city. The walls that surround the Red Keep are largely undermanned however. It is due to their confidence that no one could breach them.


    The rear walls are defended by sheer 50-metre-tall cliffs followed by another 30 metres of castle walls. The walls have been wiped flat by the wind and water so there are no handholds that lead to the top. No one could throw a grapple high enough and no ladder is long enough that wouldn¡¯t easily be spotted. Even if you could get up it is impossible to get enough up there to be a threat. There are hundreds of guards patrolling the grounds at all times not to mention the servants who would call the alarm if you eventry to sneak to the main building. Even if you got a dozen men up there, there is no way they made it fully armoured and would be quickly killed by the elite guards.


    I am the exception. With qi I could harden and sharpen a pair of knives to use as climbing spikes. With qi enforced arrows I could create steps for myself by plunging them into the rockface, also helping with making an escape route. Like that I could get to the top with my bow, knives and sword. If it was the day or I was heading to the main building, then I would probably be spotted. But since I will invade at night and head to the dungeons, there will be little to no servant traffic and only guards to deal with, which will be scattered. My plan is to scout the ideal place to infiltrate and see if the crew can find any information about what the situation is. I will then bring the appropriate number of people and equipment to bring them out the following night.


    Depending on the situation I may need to create a diversion the following day. If Ned and Sansa are in the dungeons, and I actually hope they are, then I will not only have to kill the guards but somehow get them out of the Red Keep. I could try to find Arya¡¯s way, but the path is well hidden and she can¡¯t describe the exact positioning of the exit, or the way it leads to the exit. From what she told me there were several other paths that she doesn¡¯t know where they go. I will not risk getting lost down there where I could be surrounded by guards in pursuit, if the route and exit isn¡¯t already found and guarded.


    When Syrio and Arya were fleeing they said guards were following them into the dungeon. They will have realised that she is no longer in the Red Keep and be on the look-out for how she escaped. The dungeon will be inspected top to bottom and even if they haven¡¯t found the exit to the path the entrance will definitely have been discovered.


    The front gate is out, obviously, so the only way out is how I got in, and that is working under a lot of assumptions. First, I will have to enter and extract the Starks, all without drawing the attention of the outside patrols. If they realise what I am trying and trap me down in the dungeons, I am dead. If I get them out of the dungeons and we are detected, there is no way I will be able to get them to the walls. A single person, skilled at hiding myself and avoiding scouts, can make the journey across the courtyard easily, 3 raises the chance of detection immensely. If I brought a rope and we all went one after the other it would still take 3 minutes for an experienced climber to get down. For amateurslike them I would put it at 10 for Ned and 20 at least for Sansa, if she even makes it down without falling to her death, which is unlikely. That is all without taking the time to reach the wall by that time we would have been killed.


    I haven¡¯t even gotten to the parts where I am assuming they are both there and in perfect physical condition. If they are injured, or if one of them is held somewhere else, I would never get them down, or get them to leave the other. By the way if they are both held in another part of the Keep I am not even going to try to find them. After listing out all my problems and the requirements for a successful operation, watching the chance of success get lower and lower with each point I make...Why am I doing this again?


    That is not a joke. I am literally risking my life at best, eternal imprisonment and torture at worst. I like Ned and his children, but I love my family and they are currently all here. I am not a virgin to the cost of war. I have lost friends and loved ones in the past, because of my mistakes and decisions. I have also ordered men to their deaths to achieve a goal. Sometimes it wasn¡¯t even worth it, I have been defeated in battle, both martial and strategically, and both soldiers and civilians have died because of it. This could be just one of those times I need to cut my losses and live to fight another day.


    I pace the room, back and forth, debating my decisions. I go over the possible choices, the pros and cons. Everyone had left my room 10 minutes ago to do their respective jobs or to find some distractions. Eventually I find myself leaving my room and am walking along the deck when I see Arya by the side of the boat, staring towards King¡¯s Landing. Nymeria is beside her and is trying to comfort her. Tears fall from her face and drop into the ocean.


    I have known that girl for 4 years now, and not once have I ever seen her cry. When she tripped and fell, scrapes and bruises covering her, she gets back up. When knocked down, she doesn¡¯t take it, she knocks back. When life gets hard, she gets harder. I am suddenly reminded of when I had defeated Jaime and Ned asked to speak to me. He said, ¡®I swear to you Ser Baskerville, by the gods New and Old, if you protect my family, I will protect yours¡¯. A smile comes to my lips. Damn you Stark, well played.


    I walk up to Arya and place my hand on her head. ¡°Cheer up brat. I can¡¯t promise that I will get your family back, but I will try my damned best. And if I fail, I will make the ones responsible know what it means to anger the pack. THE NORTH REMEMBERS!!! HA HA HA!!¡± I laugh, my decision made. My family is on the ship, they will make it back to the North whether I am on it or not. Far as I am concerned, I have already gotten an extension of 20 years on a life that should have ended. I have no regrets on how I ended my life in the old one, at peace surrounded by loved ones. But for this one, if it is going to end in the next few days, it will end in a bang.

 chapter 41 - Public Trial

    Cersei POV


    It is finally over. That fat, whoremongering husband of mine is finally dead, the Starks are imprisoned, and the city is under my control.


    The city gates have been closed and no-one will leave until I say so. The ravens are all accounted for by Pycell. No news will get to our enemies until i have made preparations and are ready. When they do find out, it will be spun to my discretion. Baelish has told me the Goldcloaks are out on the streets and though there are concerns, there are no riots or rumours leading to treason.


    There were 3 problems that occurred but the largest of them will be solved in this meeting. We are currently inside the small council chamber, I am sitting in the place of my son, Joffrey. Baelish, Varys and Pycell are the only members present other than myself. The master of ships, Stannis hasn¡¯t been to King¡¯s Landing for months, and Renly has escaped the city.


    Renly has always been a nuisance to me in court, but he was a minor one that has since learned to shut up with the removal of Jon Arryn. I should have known however that a man as cowardly as that would surely run at the first sign of trouble. He apparently had spies among my soldiers who told him about the attack. Renly lives in the city rather than the Keep and I couldn¡¯t send the appropriate force to capture him at his home in the noble district without alarming the other nobles and their guards. I originally planned to restrain him like Ned. I sent a letter calling for an emergency small council meeting and once in the council he would be not allowed to leave without my say so. He should have also been less of a fight than Ned was. Ned brought down 3 men before he was subdued, unwilling to accept his fate till the end.


    After forcing him to sign a letter to the other Stormland lords renouncing all claim to the throne and declaring Joffrey the rightful king, he would stay in kings landing. He would be ¡®helping¡¯ his nephew to manage the kingdom, causing him to remain in the Keep long-term. He received word of the attack and instead of coming to the keep he fled the city. Last word had him racing to the Stormland and would reach it before any pursuers could make it.


    I have sent word to father that the Baratheon brothers would be trouble. He will send an army to destroy them, turning them into another example of what happens to those that threaten our family. The first example would be the Starks fate.


    ¡°How goes the search for Arya Stark?¡± I ask them. That is the smallest problem that I have to deal with, though no less annoying. The Stark daughters were needed for other plans. Her sister, Sansa, has been cooperative and is currently being kept in one of the guest rooms, several handmaidens keeping an eye on her. The bratty one that beat Joffrey with a stick escaped.


    I sent Ser Meryn to retrieve her from the Tower of the Hand, yet not only did he fail, he died as well. She was last seen fleeing into the dungeons with that dog and another man. Varys tells me the man was her dancing instructor, though his real occupation is as a master sword master. Leave it to the Northerners to be so barbaric as to give their daughters sharp steel to wield.Clearly Sansa didn¡¯t take after her father¡¯s barbaric customs. If she did, I would likely have put her in the cells, same as her father. Instead she has cooperated and is being kept under watch in the main keep. Several handmaidens watch her and make sure she is taken care of. If this situation is to have a positive outcome, she must be alive and healthy.


    ¡°The guards have searched the dungeons and found no signs of her, your grace. We did find a secret entrance that leads to a number of passages under the keep, though we have yet to fully explore it. The size of the caverns and the number of hidden pathways have made scouting it difficult.¡± Baelish reports. He is the person in this room that I have to worry the most about. He has kept to his side of the arrangement so far, but I would not put it past him to scheme for greater benefits once he has what he wants.


    ¡°Those passages are most likely the passages built by Maegor Targaryen. Maegor was afflicted with terrible paranoia, leading him to construct hundreds of secret passages and escape routes in the Red Keep and the surroundings. When they were finished however, he ordered every builder involved with its construction to be executed. This was to make sure that only he would know about all of them. Since his passing the successors of the Targaryen line have discovered many of them, but every decade or so there will be another one found. I assume Arya Stark came upon one of these and has used it to evade us for now.¡± Varys reports, bowing like he should. He has always kept to himself, though he has over the years informed me about several leaks in the secret of my children, the most notable was Jon Arryn.


    ¡°Baelish I want the Goldcloaks to search every crook in this city, if she got out of the Red Keep she must be in the city. Order them to inspect everyone that tries to leave the city. Varys have your birds look into everyone that is connected to Ned and would be willing to hide her. If they have her then I want them caught and arrested under conspiring treason. She must be brought alive.¡± I order the two.


    ¡°Yes, your Grace.¡± They answer together


    ¡°Now to the issue of my husband¡¯s passing and Ned Starks betrayal. Last night my husband died of heart failure, excessive drinking the night before, and of recent, being the primary cause.¡± This is partly true. I had swapped his normal wine for stronger variety the evening before. If the wine was poisoned it would be too obvious, but his notoriety for drunkenness is finally useful for something. ¡°At the small council meeting he attempted to declare himself regent and seize power. This was a betrayal of the king¡¯s trust and when opposed by the entirety of the small council, he tried to take power by force. Thanks to the soldiers loyal to my late husband he was stopped, though there was much bloodshed.¡±


    Everyone here is knowledgeable to the truth, but like father always said. ¡®The truth is only real when we give it form¡¯. The lie will need to be told later so may as well have everyone practice it.


    I was originally going to have Ned executed but Varys came to me earlier and told me of an alternative. With Sansa under our control he could convince Ned to admit to this crime himself. After pleading mercy, he will be sent to the Wall, where he will be unable to command the North ever again. Even if he tells his son of the secret, without his leadership the other lords would not rise in rebellion. Sansa will marry Joffrey and through her can control the North and keep them in line.This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    ¡°He will be tried in public to which he will confess his guilt to taking advantage of my husbands passing to take power, where he will be judged by king Joffrey.¡± This will act as a coronation ceremony as well. Once everyone accepts the sentencing it will also be accepting of Joffrey as king. I will speak to him later as to what will need to happen. ¡°Varys, you are confident that you can convince Ned to answer honestly so that this trial can be done as efficiently as possible?¡± I stress.


    ¡°Absolutely your grace. Ned Stark is a reasonable man. Once he has realised his plans have failed, I am sure he will accept his punishment and plead for mercy, both for his sake and the sake of the kingdom.¡± Varys replies, reminding me to leave Ned an out, as if he hasn¡¯t already stressed the importance of this enough. I am well aware of the consequences if this fails.


    ¡°Very well then. Let us move onto the next item. Grand MaesterPycell, how goes the funeral preparation?¡± I ask. As much as I wish this business was over, I know that there are many small tasks that must be done before tomorrow to make sure nothing goes wrong.


    Captain Curt Douglass POV


    I watch the sun rise, as is my habit, and gaze upon the clouds. It is a clear day, the winds are strong and steady. There are few gusts and the weather should hold for the rest of the day. It is a good day for sailing. Luckily for us as we are likely to be sailing hard and fast come the evening. My crew rowed back to us from King¡¯s Landing this morning, without Ben. They came with a message.


    Last night when they arrived they came across 3 pieces of bad news. The king being dead and his son now inheriting was the first. The second was the guards had apparently found The little girls escape route and were now patrolling the shore. Ben didn¡¯t tell us exactly how he was planning to get into the Red Keep, but 200 armed guards patrolling the place he was planning to enter and extract the Starks made that very unlikely.


    The third, and the reason he didn¡¯t come back, was the news that Ned Stark was going to have a trial was announced at dawn. They were saying that the Hand of the king had committed treason against the crown and would be judged by the king in the town square by the king. Ben sent a message that he needed to know what the sentencing was for Ned.


    If he was sentenced to death we would be staying in Kings Landing another few days. A noble like Lord Stark will have several days before the actual execution, time during which Ben can make an escape attempt. If he is sentenced to the Wall or exiled we will be needed to either intercept the transport or return to the North to tell the truth to his Son.


    ¡°Boss, can I talk to you?¡± Henry, a friend of mine who has been sailing with me since the beginning, approaches and whispers to me. We walk to a secluded part of the ship, away from any busy people and where the waves would drown our voices. ¡°Why are we still here?¡± He asks.


    I frown at his question. I don¡¯t need to ask for clarification. He wants to leave Ben on shore and sail off. ¡°This wasn¡¯t part of the deal. We were told that we would only be taking him to see the world. I understand that, rich guy wanting to travel, needs a crew to make sure he doesn¡¯t sink the ship the second he hits the Narrow Sea. But this? This is way beyond what we were asked to do. Mathew told me what they found out on shore.¡± Mathew was one of the men Ben tasked to gather information on the shore. Neither Ben or I expected them to keep the news to themselves, so we didn¡¯t bother telling them to.


    ¡°Kings are dead and blood has been shed. Fighting soldiers and nobles goes well past what we are used to. I say we take the ship and leave this city. We have enough supplies to go anywhere in the kingdom or across the sea to Essos.¡± He continues to talk, losing nervousness as he talks. It seems he has become more and more confident as he talks. I wait for him to finish before telling him why it won¡¯t work.


    ¡°Have you forgotten that we signed a contract with the Iron Bank. You couldn¡¯t read it but I did. On the contract it states that if we go back on our contract the gold that was originally going to be used to pay us, will be used to hire assassins to kill us. It doesn¡¯t matter where we go, we will be finished. Even if we go to Essos the Iron Bank is still there. News will spread that we betrayed such a large contract and never be trusted to trae again.¡± I wait for him to take that in, and noticing he is still determined, I reveal another flaw in his plan.


    ¡°Even if I wanted to, we wouldn¡¯t do it. Have you forgotten that we have other passengers? The Raven lads and Ben¡¯s brother are still on this ship. They are all skilled fighters with the weapons to match. If we try to leave without Ben we would be killed.¡± The reminder of the other men on this ship reminds him of the difference in fighting strength.


    ¡°Except for the brother, the rest should realise how stupid this is. We can convince them to join us, the brother alone can¡¯t resist us. Even if they don¡¯t we outnumber them 5 to one. We can grab them and tie them up, then drop them on an island somewhere.¡± He refutes this, thinking if all the men join we can overpower them, and they would be right if they didn¡¯t count that monster.


    ¡°And what about the dogs. Brutus, the monster hound. I know you were sceptical about what I told you at the brothel, but trust me when I say it was an under-exaggeration if anything.¡± I remind him of Ben¡¯s pet, and the thing that gave me nightmares for days. ¡°If you want to tangle with something that eats armoured soldiers like cookies, be my guest. I won¡¯t do it.¡± I assure him of my non-participation. He starts to doubt himself, but just as he was going to continue, we both feel a chill wash over us and turn to the main deck.


    There, Brutus was standing. He was looking at us both and had his lips raised, revealing his teeth. He stared at us for a good while, me and hm covered in sweat. I knew, deep down, that he couldn¡¯t possible have heard us from that distance over the waves. Even if he did, Brutus was a beast. A powerful, nightmarish beast but still unable to understand humans. But when I looked into his eyes, I can¡¯t help but feel he has seen through us.


    He stares for a full minute, before turning away, assured in something. I turn to Henry and repeat. ¡°I will not fight. If you want to fight go ahead, but I will have no part in it.¡± I watch his reaction, his next moves deciding his fate. I watch as his shoulders slump, the fight draining from him, and he nods in acceptance.


    As he walks away I sigh in relief. I am glad he didn¡¯t continue otherwise I would need to do something I don¡¯t want to. Even without the unexpected appearance of Brutus, I would not have fought. Not just because of my pride and loyalty to Ben, but also self preservation. Even if we could kill Brutus and the rest of the Ravens I would not survive the coming storm.


    I lied slightly when I told Henry about the contract. Although the money will be used to hire assassins in the case of betrayal, the only one that would be killed is myself. 8000 gold coins is a lot of money, but divided between 60 so men, and that is only a bit over a hundred for each of us. Though there are many people in this world that would kill someone for that money, sailors are a bit of an exception. My crew and I could sail to one of the far ports like east of Quarth and no one would follow us for such a measly sum. The reward wouldn¡¯t even cover the cost of finding us.


    8,000 for a single unimportant captain however, there are few men who could resist such a prize, my men included if they found out. That was why neither me nor Ben told the crew and their contracts, even if they could read, only said they would forfeit the reward, not what the reward would then be used on. Like this I would be responsible for keeping the crew in line when Ben is gone. A good method and one I can¡¯t even argue against considering it just worked

 chapter 42 - 2 Arrows, 3 Views

    Ben POV


    ¡°Hang the traitor! He should be flayed alive for his betrayal!¡± one rather outspoken voice cries from the crowd. I would be more concerned for Ned if this wasn¡¯t the 5th time he said this.


    I look down at the man in disgust, resisting the temptation to kill him so that he would shut up. Why can¡¯t he be like the other masses and just watch the show, or at least come up with some better material. Honestly the Lannisters need to come up with better grunts if they can¡¯t even rile up a crowd properly.


    I am currently lying down on the roof of a shop facing the plaza. I have been here for the past 3 hours, ever since the announcement for the trial was given this morning. I couldn¡¯t have come later otherwise I would have been spotted by the ever increasing crowds that are filling the plaza.


    Last night was a disappointment. They found Arya¡¯s escape route and were searching the beach all night. They likely thought Arya would have tried to find a place to hide following the events of the previous night. They were very lax, especially toward the end of the night, but there was still no opportunity. There were about 200 guards on the beach spread out in groups of 3 to 5. On an open beach with very little cover, hundreds of eyes, no way was I going to get close enough to the walls to even scout the situation, let alone attempt to climb the walls. The only good news is that after today they will have checked all the places along the beach and leave. I can return another night to make my attempt.


    I returned to the meeting point, prepared to rule out tonight and try again tomorrow, when I learned about the trial. This was bad. Rushing a trial like this means they already have the situation in hand and have a sentence prepared. This limits my potions and reduces my timeframe for action. On the plus side it speeds up our departure. Where we have anchored is unsuitable for long stays and we will need to leave before a storm hits. I sent the crew back to the ship and told them to wait for me.


    The gates were still locked and I highly doubted they would open until the trial was over at least. So, I travelled along the wall from the gate, and found a seclude section where there were no guards patrolling along the top or civilians in the alleys. I fired 3 arrows at the 15-metre wall, at the 8, 10 and 13 -metre marks, diagonally above the other so as to be used by alternating feet. They all dug in several inches to the wall, nearly half of the shaft. With a running start I leapt at the wall and kicked on the wall twice, reaching the 8-metre mark. I used the arrow as a stepping point with my left and leapt to the next one with my right. I repeated this till I got to the top and climbed onto the walkway.


    The arrow shafts had been bent by my feet, nearly snapping, despite placing my foot as close to the wall as possible to reduce momentum applied. If I had been prepared for such a situation, or needed a long-term path, I could have used steel or bronze shafted arrows. For tier 2 archers like myself they can be used to bring down heavy enemies or like this, create pathways to higher ground. After finding the plaza I picked the ideal location to gather information. Theshop is placed 100 metres from the stand where the trial will take place, the roof cannot be seen from the ground and is located closest to the walls of the city. Like this I won¡¯t need to waste time moving through or around the tight crowds.


    ¡°Hang the traitor! He should be flayed alive for his betrayal!¡± The man shouts for the 6th time today, pushing my restraint to the limit as I resist putting an arrow in his head. I know he is just doing his job, but that doesn¡¯t mean he should do it badly. Originally there was a lot of talk in the plaza over the suspicious nature of the king¡¯s death. Robert might not have been a good king, but from what I heard he was well liked. The Lannisters have a reputation for cruelty, a combination of their attack 15 years ago and recent events. In order to counter the opinion against the trial, there are people like this.


    When the crowd started to get crowded about an hour ago these screamers appeared, scattered around the plaza. They would shout something, people discuss it, then they move on to another area and repeat the same trick. Eventually the sheep start to think that everyone has this opinion, since it comes from everywhere, and scream their own insults and damming''s so they don¡¯t feel left out. Everyone wants to be popular and on the winning side, opposing opinions are dangerous on days like this. It is an obvious trick, if you see it from above, but the people down there can¡¯t.


    It doesn¡¯t really matter, as the opinions of the crowd are only mildly significant. Though if they are on my side, that will be good, it won¡¯t make my actual job easier as it needs to be done without anyone¡¯s knowledge. I am here to find out Ned¡¯s fate, and thus my next course of action.


    If he is to be executed, I need to know when. If it is something else then I need to know what so I can decide if I should still free him or not. I still haven¡¯t seen Sansa, and I will need to rescue her as well, which will be difficult if they are already on guard after saving Ned.


    I wait for another 10 minutes, when there is a commotion from the far crowd. There is a large group of guards pushing their way through a booing crowd. They were Goldcloaks, armed with shields and maces for pushing apart the crowd. In the centre of them was Ned. He had a blackened eye, dishevelled hair and was limping on one of his legs. He was tied at the hands and held on both sides by guards.


    About this time, form the opposite side of the plaza and group of palanquins was brought to the stands. The people that alighted were some of the most powerful people in the country, led by the crown prince of shit himself. The crowd over there seems much more positive, cries of ¡®Long live the king¡¯ and ¡®All hail king Joffrey¡¯ ring out. When both sides have reached the stands, the Grand maester, an ancient looking man with large chains around his neck walks to the front.


    ¡°We are gathered here today to render judgement on a most heinous crime." He rattles in a raspy voice. I am half surprised he made it up those steps with how out of breath he is with the speech. ¡°The night before the last, our beloved king, Robert Baratheon, First of his name, protector of the realm...¡± He continues with the king¡¯s titles. ¡°...passed from this world from sickness. His first-born son, Joffrey Baratheon, was next in line to take the throne. However, in a despicable act of treason, the Hand of the king, Lord Eddard Stark, attempted to usurp the throne for himself.¡± There was a roaring from the crowd, boos and rubbish thrown in equal measure. The Grand maester waited for several moments for the crowd to die down before speaking again. ¡°The evidence of these deeds are numerous and irrefutable. However, the king is a kind and just ruler. Eddard Stark is still entitled to the rights of every citizen in this just kingdom. He has begged for permission to speak for himself.¡± He finishes and bows to Joffrey.


    I watch as Ned is brought before the crowd, clearly not in a very caring mood. Ned takes a deep breath, hesitates for a few seconds, then speaks. ¡°I, Lord Eddard Stark, confess to the crimes against me!¡± he announces, shocking me. ¡°I betrayed the trust of my friend, Robert Baratheon.¡± He pauses for a moment, then speaks in a quieter voice. ¡°I tried to seize power from the rightful heir, Joffrey. On behalf of my years of service, I beg the mercy of the crown.¡±


    This is wrong. I have known Ned for years, he would never betray his duty. He would also never beg, not to them. I watch as Joffrey walks to the front of the stage, his guards surrounding him. He has a smug smile on his face, mirrored by his mother. It takes everything I have not to shoot them both right now, but I can¡¯t let emotions ruin the plan. This is the defining point, where my future actions will be decided.


    ¡°My mother has suggested that Lord Stark should be granted mercy. He will be sent to the Wall, stripped of all titles and authority, where he would fight defending the border with the order of the Black.¡± Joffrey declares. Suppose I should be glad he is a momma¡¯s boy. If he is sent to the North that is the best option for me. I can wait until Ned has left, then try and rescue Sansa. I haven¡¯t seen her today, so if she is still alive, she will be in the Keep, ideally the dungeon. What happens after the Starks are all back home and safe is no longer my concern. If the Starks want revenge, I will help them, but the planning will be done by those in power and know of the situation.


    Joffrey continues to talk however. ¡°But these are the wishes of soft-hearted women. As long as I am your king, I will never allow treason to go unpunished. I sentence him to death!!¡± He shouts. Well I should have known the fucker would never be smart or merciful. Well I need to find out when the execution is going to... ¡°To be carried out immediately. Ser Ilan, bring me his head!!¡± ¡­ THE FUCK!!


    The fuck is that little shit doing! Ned is the Paramount of the North, as high of a noble as you can get. Killing him in the middle of the plaza, as soon as the trial is over. That sort of thing is what wars are caused by. It seems I am not the exception to this thought process. The small council and the Queen are all rushing to Joffrey, trying to get him to reconsider. He doesn¡¯t seem to listen, just keeps smiling and chuckling.


    There is no chance of them getting some sense stuffed in his ears anytime soon and I can¡¯t wait. They are already bringing Ned before a chopping block. Ser Ilan, a bald man with a face that gives children nightmares, puts on a black mask and carries a large sword to the side of the block. I consider options. I am too far to get there in time, even killing Ser Ilan would only buy me a minute before he is replaced with another, and I will have given away my position. I will have to either run, or fight. If I run, Ned is dead. If I fight, both me and Ned are dead. There are hundreds of guards in the plaza, everything from crossbows, spears and cavalry, while I only have 5 arrows and my sword. I would die and they would still kill Ned. It would be a pointless death.


    I glare at the stands, thinking how I failed Ned, Arya and myself. It is as I am clenching my bow, nearly snapping it with my strength, when a voice appears in my mind. ¡®They are of the North. They deserve better than a butcher¡¯. I look to Ned and from here I can see his eyes and tell what he is thinking.This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    There is no fear, no guilt, only worry. Concern for the future and his family. Ilan walk up to the block, ready to cut off Ned¡¯s head, when I decide to deny him. Ned will die no traitor¡¯s death, and will be given a final feeling of relief before his death. I made Arya a promise after all.


    I draw my bow, arrow aimed towards the stands, when I see a flash of gold, and anger courses through me. I knock a second arrow, 2 at once, and fill this second arrow with as much qi as I can manage, the shaft thrumming with energy,then I launch them both. I stand straight on the roof, takeadeep breath, and shout.


    Civilian POV


    It was a surprising moment. I came here to find out what happened to the king, to realise there would be a performance.


    The king was dead, the Hand had turned traitor, and now Joffrey was king. I am only a baker in Flea Bottom, I don¡¯t know all these complicated people and high-born men and women. But I was there 15 years ago when the Lannisters invaded. They pillaged the city, made the streets run red with blood.


    My own wife was raped and killed by their soldiers. I was lucky that I and my son were spared, though they beat me to the ground while my child cried from the next room. I say lucky because there were many families that had it worse. I know the new king is a Baratheon, and Robert was a good king, he never mistreated us, but King Joffrey just looks so much like the Lannisters that razed the city.


    The fact that the king¡¯s first declaration was to cut someone¡¯s head off, even if they were traitors, makes me very uneasy. I watched as the executioner raised his sword, ready to swing it down, when suddenly something hit the traitor.


    A solid thump sound echoed off him, jolting him. An arrow was suddenly poking out of his chest, surprising him and everyone else. In the sudden quiet from the previously roaring, now stunned, crowd, a voice bellows like thunder, ringing off the buildings. ¡°ARYA IS SAFE!!! THE NORTH REMEMBERS!!¡±


    The voice echoed so much, and the crowd was so clustered, I couldn¡¯t see where the voice came from. It was when I was looking around to find the origin, that I looked back to the traitor. He was gazing upwards towards the sky, a smile appears on his face.


    I recognize that look. It was the same look I had when I woke after being beaten by the soldiers. I had just cried my eyes out, my wife dead before me, when I heard a crying form the cupboard¡¯s. I found my son there, safe. My wife had put him there so he wouldn¡¯t be found. I was still sad over her death, but I couldn¡¯t help but thank the gods that they had spared him. That same look appeared on his face, the one saying at least some good was left in this world. I watched as he fell to the ground, tears forming in my eyes for reasons unknown.


    It was when I wiped my eyes that I heard the most horrible scream I had ever heard before.


    Varys POV


    This idiot is about to ruin everything. ¡°Your majesty, I must advise against this. This action is rash and will have long term consequences.¡± Hiding my inner anger, I try to persuade Joffrey from this action.


    ¡°Joffrey, my sweet, please listen to me. This wasn¡¯t the plan. Ned was to be sent to the wall, where he would live the rest of his life in misery, remember?¡± Cersei also tries to reason with him, applying to his cruelty and obsession with torment. A strange thing for a mother to say to her son, but it is probably the most effective manner.


    The fact that even Cersei, who before today I would have thought to be the most vicious person in Kings Landing, realises how important this is scares me. If Ned was sent to the Wall, Sansa could have still been married and the North would not rebel. This would ensure the kingdoms stability, and the Targaryens could be resisted.


    This single action will send the entire kingdom into another civil war. One that we may not only lose but that will ruin this kingdom, leaving it open for the greater threat. I was just about to try and convince the king again, before it is too late to take back decisions, when I see a light. It was like nothing I have ever seen before, and I have seen a lot. Before I could speak, I saw it fly in this direction. Luckily, I was not the only one to see it.


    Ser Barristan Selmy, who had been watching the crowds for any signs of trouble, suddenly turned and leapt to the side, towards the path between the object and our group. The object collided with his arm, though instead of stopping, it went straight through the centre of his arm.


    Piercing plate, then chain, then flesh and bone before repeating on the way out again. It continued it¡¯s path unabated, flying straight into the head of Joffrey. He was facing towards the execution spot, so when the object collided with him it went straight into his nose, drilling till it was all the way inside. His face was still showing surprise by Selmy¡¯s daring rescue attempt.All that can be seen of that look now is the slightly opened lips.


    The strangest part was what followed. After the arrow stopped, deep in his skull, before he could fall, his head exploded. The back of his skull broke open like something was trying to break out of it, blood, brain and hair spraying in a geyser over the person behind him. That person being Cersei.


    Her eyes were wide, as was her mouth at the time unfortunately. She watched as her son died in front of her, her last sight of him being the back of his head blown open like a melon. Joffrey slumped to the floor, falling backwards, face up so the arrow was pointing to the sky, his crown falling from his head and rolling away. I was not the only one watching at this point, the entire small council and Kingsguard watched as their new king was killed on the first day he came into his position.


    Cersei finally reacted, screaming like a banshee, grief filling her wail. She bent her knees to her son, cradled his head and dumbly fiddled with the shaft. ¡°M-m-my sweet, sw-ee-eet baby, it¡¯s alright it will be okay. Mummy will fix it.¡± She stutters inconsistently, clutching the arrow, and slowly pulling it from the skull. The matter around it had been turned to pulp, bone and all, making it easy to withdraw. As she looked at her son, brains and eyes falling through the gap into the hole to the pavement, she seemed to break. She rolled her eyes, fainted to the ground in the pile of her sons blood. I can''t help but think of how now both sets of Lannister¡¯s famous golden hair are now soaked red.


    ¡°ARYA IS SAFE!!! THE NORTH REMEMBERS!!¡± This sentence resounds across the plaza. I turn to look at the other direction, noticing for the first time that Ned Stark now has an arrow in him as well, though in his chest. I see the shooter on top of the nearby buildings. He has a bow in hand, a sword on his hip and a daring look in his eyes. He watches Ned fall to the ground then turns and climbs over the roof to the other side, out of view.


    That was Ser Ben Baskerville. I made it a point to memorise his face, as a competent tactician and incredible fighter. As the greatest archer in Westeros it is only fitting that he would be the one to make such a shot. I can see several in the crowds also recognised him, as expected for a tourney champion. I can imagine whether he escapes or not, the events of today will be sung about by every bard in the city tonight.


    As I look at the dead bodies of the king and Stark, the fainted queen and roaring crowd I think to myself. I have no idea if this is going to be better or worse for the kingdom. For now, I will stand to the back, out of the way, and watch the braver people take charge. With new information and plans I will reattempt to make this kingdom safe and prosperous again.


    Ben POV


    I jump from roof to roof, till I am about 3 streets away from originally. From there I ditch my bow and arrows, falling to the alley beneath me. This is far enough away that the crowds are non-existent. Everyone in this area would have gone to the plaza if they could. The guards and soldiers will search the area where I fired from, though not before forcing themselves through the crowds. Even when they get there it will be pointless as I am already several buildings away from them. They would never expect a man to jump that sort of distance. That gives me time to get even further before they expand the search.


    I run down the alley before turning right on the main road, heading for the walls. I pace myself, to recover the energy I lost from that shot. I put a lot of energy into that, intending to send the arrow through both Joffrey and Cersei¡¯s heads. I did not expect for Barristan to get in the way and reduce the power of the arrow, letting Cersei live. Though I suppose from that scream that seeing your own son die in front of you in such a brutal manner is punishment enough... for now.


    I have no sympathy for Cersei¡¯s circumstance. Being a mother earns you no pity from me. We are all someone¡¯s relative or loved one, yet we still kill each other. I feel more regretful of Barristan. That shot was more destructive than a regular arrow, the arm he used to block the shot will be ruined.


    As I approach the edge of the city i spot the part of the wall where I entered and see some unwelcome sights. It seems my entrance was found, a dozen guards are surrounding it and looking down. Without stopping I run to the middle part of the staircase and climb it the same way I did the wall. Once on the stairs I run up the remaining steps and draw my sword.


    With qi flowing, i swing 3 times in a single second, eliminating 5 of them before they even turn around. Another 2 swings and a thrust kill 3 more before they draw their swords. One of them falls backwards over the edge in fear. Another gets his sword out, though doesn¡¯t attack me, too scared. The last just falls to his knees, pissing his pants in fear. I kill the man with the sword, look to the kneeling man, and slice his throat just as he starts to beg, then jump over the wall. I couldn¡¯t have let him live as he would definitely sound the alarm and tell them where I was. With all of them dead I will gain a few more minutes before they find the bodies.


    As I drop, I grab the arrow shafts, snapping them and slowing my fall. I roll when I land, and from a sprinting start I run through the alleys towards Blackwater Bay. The alarm is ringing at this point, likely realising that I had left the plaza. They would be shutting down the gates and maintaining a look-out at this point, but I have already left the city so it is useless. I still need to leave King¡¯s Landing in it¡¯s entirety. They will soon find the bodies and realise I have escaped and search the FishMarket.


    I reach the water, passing several surprised fishermen. I toss my sword to the side and dive into the water. Assuming a front crawl I swim to the other side of the Bay. The city is separated from the other side by a mile of water, taking me about 10 minutes to reach the closest section of the Kingswood, at the mouth of Blackwater Rush. From there I know I am safe from any pursuit. They would never imagine I could swim to the other side of the bay, and instead assume I am hiding somewhere in either the city or FishMarket. Even the fishermen I passed would never think I was some assassin and report me. Reporting doesn¡¯t go well in the slum areas, especially the docks where snitches are very easily taken care of.


    I rest for half an hour, then start jogging towards where my ship is docked. I will tell them to raise anchor and set sail for White Harbour. They will have recognised me as the shooter and look into my past actions. I was not quiet about my ship and it will take them no more than a few hours to send out some patrol ships to inspect the shores for us. If I get there in less than an hour and set sail immediately, we will be able to avoid any pursuers.


    I am not leaving Kings Landing forever like I once thought. I will return Arya to her brother, Rob, then my family home. After that I will return to Kings Landing with enough men and weapons and planning to save Sansa. And deal with the Lannisters who killed my friend and Lord. I once said I didn¡¯t want to get involved in politics if they left my loved ones, friends and interests alone. Well now they messed with all 3. I may have a habit for avoiding trouble when possible, but that doesn¡¯t mean I leave my enemies to grow in peace.


    God explaining this to the Stark kids is going to be a pain.

 chapter 43 - Enemies all around

    Tywin POV (1 week after trial)


    ¡°Give me a hundred riders. I will head North, find Baskerville, and take his head.¡± Jaime demands, slamming the table. The wine bottle shakes, though I steady it before it falls. ¡°We know where he is going, Varys told us he was preparing to go to White Harbour. If I leave now I can reach the North when they land. Without horses of their own I will have time to catch him before he reaches Winterfell.¡±


    Jaime has just started reading the letter from Kings Landing I showed him, and after a few sentences destroyed a chair and spoke nonsense like this. ¡°No. You will remain here to command the army. No-one will go North.¡± I deny him. As I sit in my chair, look at the map and plan our next move. Despite my anger, I can¡¯t help but admire the fact that my children have managed to enrage nearly every Kingdom in Westeros. I see Jaime calming down and about to argue again, when I cut him off.


    ¡°The North is about to go to war. Their Paramount has just been killed in the capital, by the king no less.¡± Jaime mentions that it was Baskerville that killed him. ¡°And the moment you can convince the Lords in the North that is true is when you will be able to talk the dead from their graves. Robb Stark has already called the banners and from what Varys has said most have already declared their support, with the remaining have yet to respond. In a few months they will have gathered 30 to 40 thousand troops to march south onto Kings Landing. This is not like the past where you could go wherever you wanted, the Northerners will kill you soon as they see you.¡± I explain to him the reason his plan to capture the assassin is stupid. ¡°I know you grieve for your nephew¡¯s passing and your sister¡¯s condition, but this is no time for stupidity.¡±


    Jaime calms down some more, then re-engages me with another plan. ¡°Then we should strike before they are ready. Half our forces are already gathered and uncle has just finished gathering the other half at Casterly Rock.¡± Our forces defeated the Tully forces 2 days ago and we were in the middle of pursuit when we received the raven. The Tullys were unable to gather their full force to Golden Tooth pass, partly due to the lack of unity with the Riverland lords, and partly due to Clegane¡¯s raiding of their fields, preventing theother lords from sending their forces. We quickly destroyed them and they are now on their way to Riverrun to seek shelter. That was all done with only half our forces. I originally had Kevan ready the other half so we could end this conflict quickly and show the world what happens when you poke the lion. Now we have shown the world what happens when a lion¡¯s cubs taunt every beast in the jungle.


    ¡°Once uncle Kevan joins us we will have a combined force of 60,000 without even mustering our entire force. With conscription we could muster another 20,000. The Tullys only have about 6,000 to defend Riverrun.By leaving 10,000 troops to keep them looked inside, the rest of our forces could march North to defeat the Starks before they gather their full forces.¡± He then recovers his former sarcastic tone, having cooled slightly. ¡°Or could it be family is not that important. You went to war when Tyrion was captured. Could it be when your grandson is murdered in front of a crowd you will not even punish him.¡± He attempts to provoke me.


    ¡°*sigh* You should read the entire letter before continuing with that thought. Planning without taking in the full information is for fools.¡± He looks back at the letter he discarded earlier, picking it up to continue. I wait for him to finish, he was never a strong reader, and when he does, I can see him thinking. He knows the problem but is still trying to find a way around it.


    ¡°Renly escaped Kings Landing and returned to the Stormlands. In a few weeks he will have reached Storms End and called his banners. He and his brother have always been opposed to our family in court, and with the recent events with Ned he would never trust us enough to swear fealty.¡± It was a common joke, though never spoken openly, among the nobility that the Baratheon brothers all have 2 of 3 things needed to conquer a kingdom. Tactical mind, political charisma and the ambition. Robert had the first 2, but found himself severely lacking in want of the throne once he had it. His brothers both wanted power but each found lacking in the other quality. Stannis had the might, his countless victories and strict discipline has allowed him to achieve victory with a smaller force many times. Renly was a match in court for anyone on the small council, despite his youth, and has gained the firm support of the other Stormland Lords. If the brothers overcome their dislike for each other, then they may replicate Roberts achievements during the rebellion.


    ¡°Something your sister, and you to a lesser extent, have never comprehended is that a strong House does not mean we can oppose every other. Your sister¡¯s actions have caused us to be at conflict with the North and Stormlands in addition to our current conflict with the Riverlands. If we are not careful then even the Vale could join them and we will be facing another rebellion, though there will be no way for us to join the winners this time.¡± Baelish has assured me that Lysa Arryn would never risk the safety of herself and her son by sending the Vale forces out, but if I trusted the word of men like that I would be dead same as Eddard Stark.


    They don¡¯t even need the Vale Lords to join to defeat us. Unlike the Targaryens we don¡¯t have Dorne and the Reach to support us. In fact, The Dornish hate my family even more than Roberts, while the Tyrells have been resentful of us keeping them from court. The Reach I worry about the least, they are not the sort to risk their troops and people in an unsure situation. They are much more likely to remain neutral and strike when the sides have changed, or just kneel to the winner.


    Dorne has been waiting for an opportunity like this for a long time. The Prince of Dorne, Doran Martell, has kept his people in control for the most part, but I don¡¯t trust his supposed bending the knee during Roberts rebellion for a second. He is not as hot-blooded as his brother or fellow countrymen, but maintains a cold demeanour, waiting for the right time to strike. A distracted and surrounded House like ours is just such an opportunity. It will take time for him to attack, seperated by the Stormlands and the capital, but he will strike.


    ¡°If we head North it will be to our demise. The Neck has defended the North for thousands of years, no army without dragons has ever successfully invaded it. Even if they don¡¯t gather their full force they will still gather enough to stop us at Moat Caitlin. We will be drawn into an extended conflict hundreds of miles from our lands. Our supply lines will stretch along the Riverlands, enemy territory.¡± I explain why his plan would not work. ¡°It would only increase our enemies. The Lords of the North will be hesitant to commit the entirety of their forces to The Starks so that they can be led by an inexperienced boy. Invade the North and they will use their full force to resist us.¡±The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°The Tullys are already defeated, it is just the question of asking for it and the other Lords will swear fealty to us. The Riverlands are the most fertile land in Westeros other than the Reach. We can transport their grain to the North so that even if we are cut off from supplies we can last for a year at war. By that time the Starks will be defeated. If we form a defence south of the Neck and wait for them to come to us, we can defeat them. The Northern Lords would lose faith in the new Lord after his defeat and we can sue for peace. With his sister as our hostage and no way to defeat us, he will bend the knee and might even trade Baskerville for his sisters safety.¡± He has started to piece together a plan, and is even on the right track. His obsession with Baskerville is going to lead him down a bad path if this continues though.


    ¡°You forget that this entire plan relies on too many unknowns. Even if we have the supplies to defend against the North, if the Tullys break the siege on Riverrun we will be facing a force on both sides. Their forces may be small, but once the other Lords are given a chance to recover and no longer raided by Clegane, many will think to lift the siege. The Tullys have cultivated marriage and political alliances with many houses over the years. Without a large enough army to keep them in line they will come their Paramount¡¯s aid and destroy the small force we left behind.¡± The Riverlands are the weakest territory in Westeros, except maybe the Iron Islands, lacking the natural barriers of other kingdoms. They have survived by strategically making allies with their neighbours for times of trouble.


    ¡°You are also forgetting the most important point. Most of our enemies aren¡¯t coming to attack our army, but rather Kings Landing. If we send the majority, or even a significant number of troops, we leave ourselves open. The Vale, Stormlands, Reach and Dorne are all possibilities that could strike at us. We are surrounded on all sides and our only chance of victory is to deal with our enemies one at a time.¡± This is a war where my family will be tested, not just myself but my relatives. This war will be fought on multiple fronts and I can¡¯t be everywhere at once.


    ¡°I am going to divide our forces into 3. You will remain with our current forces and continue to Riverrun. You will lay siege to it and once you have breached it you will use Riverrun as the base to subdue the rest of the River Lords West of the Trident. You will also be there to reinforce our own territory. I will order Stafford to conscript another 20,000 men and remain on standby.¡± I wouldn¡¯t put it past Balon and the Iron born to attack in our vulnerable state. Stafford is my cousin, though distant, and while he lacks the brains for leading an army, the Iron Born are not a real army either. He should be capable of butting heads with any raiding parties.


    ¡°You will need to deploy your cavalry to assist him if that is the case. I will take Clegane and his riders south to join Kevan¡¯s force and travel east to the Ruby Ford. The Starks and men of the Vale,if they fight, will head to Kings Landing. I will take the time for them to muster their forces and head south to prepare defences at the town of Darry, the area south of the Ford, while Clegane will take a division to guard the bridge along the Kings Road. With them I will be able to contend with both their forces if the Vale joins. When you are finished with Riverrun, you will lead your army and the Lords who commit to us to assist me and we will crush them between our 2 armies.¡± I pause to sip on my wine, giving him a chance to question or oppose the plan. When he doesn¡¯t I am sure he has fully calmed by now and is thinking strategically. ¡°If Baelish was telling the truth, then I will be able to defeat the Stark army, thus the threat to the North will be settled. From there the war will be over.¡± I finish my wine and rest my back.


    ¡°The war will be over? What of the Stormlands, Reach and Dorne? These 3 all have a grudge against us and even if we defeat the Northern threat, what of the South? We will be tired from fighting, and even if we defeat the north, if the other Houses attack Kings Landing we will have lost. Tommen is now king, but he doesn¡¯t know how to rule or fight. Cersei fainted after Joffrey¡¯s death and has been grief stricken since. She is too weak to rule in his place. Send me to the capital, I will...¡± Before he can convince me to send him to comfort his sister, I stop him.


    ¡°No. You are not able to rule Kings Landing. You are a member of the Kingsguard, not even the commander, nor will you be before Selmy dies. You hold neither the authority nor are you the most accomplished general, that would be Selmy. His injury will heal, though he may be weaker of body, his mind is still the one which led men through 3 wars.¡± If I named someone else he would probably have resisted. But Barristan Selmy is a man he has always respected, and for good reason. Selmy is similar to Robert Baratheon in that he is a skilled fighter and tactician, but unlike the latter, Selmy knew his limits. He never tried to delve into politics or rule over others. Instead he stuck to his strong suits and it served him well.


    ¡°I will send Kevan to Kings Landing. After I meet up with his force I will take over the army while I send him to capital to serve as Hand of the king in my absence. He will bring 2 dozen officers with him and will restructure the guard to defend from a siege.¡± He asks why he can¡¯t be made Hand of the King. ¡°Your duty is to defend the kings safety, there is no precedent for a member of the Kingsguard serving as Hand of the king. It will be a reason for our enemies to contend with you.¡±


    ¡°As for the Storm and Dorne, they will be dealt with by the Tyrells.¡± I point out Lannisport and the reach on the map. ¡°Martin will travel to Highgarden to negotiate an alliance with the Tyrells. Both Tommen and Marcella are unmarried and lack betrothed, same with several of the Tyrell children. I will propose an alliance of their choosing to them. They will defend the south while we defend the north.¡± I tell him. Martin Lannister is another distant relative, though is one of the more competent ones. Not as much as Kevan, but he has managed Lannisport for many years, and through it has had several trade deals and positive meetings with the Reach nobility. He is the best person I have to parley with them.


    I talk with Jaime for another 30 minutes, discussing minor issues and reassuring him, then sending him off. When he leaves and is far away, I let myself go for a moment, throwing my plate to the floor, shattering it. If anyone wonders they will think it was from Jaime¡¯s previous outburst. The important point is that they not know how worried I am. The plan I just laid out was the best option, if everything went right, then we will win.Bbut nothing ever goes right. A plan never survives the first engagement.


    If it was people like Ned and Arryn I was dealing with, I can predict, plan and outmaneuver. Child lords and insane women? Those are the characters that no-one knows what they will do. They could do the most unexpected or stupid moves at the right time to cause irreparable damage.


    Why did Cersei kill Robert? I don¡¯t believe for a second that lie about him dying from sickness and if it was someone else then she and Pycell would have sent me word of their suspicions. Instead they tried to hide them. Robert should have lived for another 5-10 years before being removed once he lacked use. Joffrey would become king and my family would control the seven kingdoms. My debts could be paid back using the revenue from the taxes, and even if the other lords realized my families current weakness, it would be too late. I would have secured my families place in the kingdom for the next hundred years.


    Instead everything happened too soon and without my knowledge. This led to the fuck up with Joffrey. Now I have to stay strong even longer. If I can win this war, I will have cemented my legacy and ensure my families survival. If I fail, I will not have to worry about the future, for my family will have none.

 chapter 44 - Sending a Message

    Ajax POV


    ¡°This place is actually pretty nice once the rubbish is swept away.¡± I mention off-handedly. The streets are wide, few people on them despite being one of the economic districts and the middle of the day. Though that might be due to the nature of the products sold here having a serious shortage in recent days. The people that walk along the streets are not looking to purchase, but to avoid as much attention as possible.


    ¡°Though it is a shame that the previously booming economic district is currently in such a state. I will have to bring this up at the next meeting and see if I can get this area converted to another purpose. The large open areas and auction platforms would be ideal to display and bid for artwork and would do good to enrich the local culture. I read once that when certain places outlawed customs that had become second nature, even if they were negatively effected by those previous customs, they tend to resist.¡± I explain to my companions, who all walk respectively behind me. I know most won¡¯t respond, but it is still good to voice the ideas, so they understand my meanings. That and I get bored when there is nothing to do.


    ¡°Whatever you say boss.¡± Ah good old Golm. He is one of the few people who will voice his opinion without my expressly asking for it. Though it is rarely a productive opinion it is still good to break up the monotomy.


    Golm is a large fellow, just shy of 7 feet, and when you are only 5.2 tall it is quite the contrast. In fact, I bet that most of the pedestrians we pass will see him first and me second, despite the fact I am walking in front. I don¡¯t mind. In my profession I have found it more useful to remain unseen, and if we were back in Qarth I would prefer to walk in the middle of the group so that no one could see me.


    But this isn¡¯t Qarth, and I am not the person I was before. If I want to step out into the light, I need to act more... open? That should be it, open. I need people to see me and know who I am. Like this they know to behave when I arrive. Though the people I am visiting are seeing me for the first time, so they can be forgiven for not recognising me straight away. I am a reasonable man after all.


    I come upon a beggars street. Not the actual name, just what you call this section of the city. In every city there will always be an alley, usually a dozen, with small beggar children who are hiding from the guards and larger beggars. Despite its name it is not where they beg. The alley is located next to the main hub, where the rich and gullible wander, close enough so that when the guards come along to clear them off, they have somewhere to hide.


    The assortment of faces watch as I and my team enter the alley. They huddle their bodies tight and hold their breaths. That much is to be expected when a dozen heavily armed men enter their home, each stinking of blood from earlier work. As I walk down the alley, I frown at the surprise they showed at my arrival. That and their clearly poor presentation is quite disappointing for the rats working for Angel¡¯s Wing. The thought gives me an itch, so I decide to test them.


    I find one of the solitary rats and in a menacing voice, I ask him. ¡°Pathetic, Oi worm. Where is the Angel¡¯s Wing?¡± she, and it is a girl though it would confuse a normal person I am used to the signs, freezes like deer before a wolf. She waits for a few seconds as if hoping I would go away if she didn¡¯t move. When I keep staring at her with a sneer on my face, waiting, she starts mumbling with her head down. I lift my hand and swing it toward her head, the shadow of my movement causes her to flinch and brace for impact.


    *pat* I place my hand on her head and when she relaxes from the lack of pain I turn her head upwards to face me. ¡°Wrong attitude. When faced with a big and scary person like me and my compatriots, acting meek and small will either infuriate me or bring out my sadistic side. Either one will lead to you in pain.¡± She looks confused at my changed attitude. I have lost the sneer and growl, instead am talking in a clear voice that suits a scholar discussing theories.


    ¡°The correct response is to look me in the eye and smile. Say you have a hearing problem, preferably an infection as that will reduce contact, and request, politely, that I repeat the question. Most people have a hard time striking a smiling person, it makes them feel uncomfortable. Giving a helpful answer will reduce the chance of a beating, after all we want to encourage helpful behaviour. Even if you lack the practice and nerves to act like this, weakness will only lead to torment. Even ignorance is preferable. Go dumb and deaf, act stupid and drool. If I really wanted information I would at most hit you once, then move on. Even if I was feeling sadistic and just wanted to hurt you, the lack of reaction will ruin most of the fun. When that happens, you don¡¯t brace to resist the blow. You need to go with the motion, that reduces the force and pain.¡± The rest of the rats are listening now, their curiosity beating their desire to avoid drawing attention. They aren¡¯t stupid or broken, which is good seeing as it saves me the trouble of removing them.


    ¡°Before I leaveI have a few more pieces of advice. Find a bucket and fill it at the well. When you leave for the rush period, wash only your faces. If your entire bodies are filthy people will avoid you and only the kindest of souls will approach to give coins. If your faces are clean it gives an appropriate contrast with your dirty bodies, an impression of innocence and poverty. This tugs at the hearts of those mothers and young romantics, opening hearts and purses.¡± I impart the Black Dragon handbook to the rats. Hopefully they will remember them quicker and save my men having to completely retrain them.


    I stand up and leave, my audience watching me go. Their eyes no longer hold terror, rather reverence and worship. They don¡¯t know me but they know I speak the truth. I understand them and they understand me, like there is a bond with us. Which to be fair there is. After all I was once one of them, though much better at what I do.Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    At the end of the alley I and my men turn right and continue to our destination. Golm can¡¯t help but chuckle and soon the rest join him. I decide to let the slip in discipline go as they worked so hard today and this was our last destination. I arrive before a large building, 3 stories tall, in the middle of deserted streets. The windows are covered in drapes hiding the inside from being seen. There are 2 large men guarding the front entrance. The make a move to stop us, when quick as lighting, 2 of my shadow guards move forward. They grab them by the throats and squeeze till they drop unconscious, the action perfected from repeated use. The men have asked why we don¡¯t just kill them, which I remind them we are not in Qarth. We lack the numbers we did there and recruiting additional muscle is expensive and time consuming. We need examples, not corpses.


    My men search the bodies and remove the key from the right one. We open the door and make our way inside. Other than me and Golm, everyone spreads out. The guards caught unaware are dealt with in similar manners, those that resist are subdued with a dagger to the shoulder or a snapped knee. Soon the men got the message and even those that were prepared dropped their weapons. We move to the top floor where 2 rather skilled guards are holding my men back. My guys only have daggers and in this wide hall against skilled swordsmen, they are restricted by range and a desire not to kill. Ialmost give permission, but seeing as these 2 are quite capable, I decide to spare them so they can work for me.


    With a flick of the wrist I throw a pair of needles at their knees, followed by a running jump, which ends in a twin sideways kick. The needle hits a pressure point causing them to wince and close their eyes, which then stay closed after being kicked on the chins. They drop to the floor in a clump, while I gracefully land and pirouette. ¡°Golm. Door.¡± I tell my heavy-set companion. Golm is the only one of my group not a shadow guard, and also the only one to carry a large warhammer, which he is now wielding.


    With a powerful swing, Golm strikes the hard oak door, smashing it from the hinges. Judging by the direction of the swing, I would judge the lock broke before the hinges, I think absentmindfully. The man I am looking for, one sir Enayr, is currently holding a loaded crossbow. An item he uses to fire an arrow straight into my chest... and then into the wall down the hallway.


    I have in the mean time turned into smoke, and moved from my original position to Enayr across the room. I grab his throat, though not to render him unconscious. However this next part goes, I need him responsive. I apply just enough pressure to silence him and then throw him towards Golm, who holds his arms behind his back.


    We make our way downstairs to the ground floor where everyone was waiting. My men and the thugs, as well as the ¡®other¡¯ staff. Women in skimpy clothing, collars around their necks. Seems the former owner didn¡¯t get the message. I have Golm place the man in front of everyone, then ask him a question. It was an easy one with an obvious answer.


    ¡°Who is in charge here?¡± I have him look me in the eye. As he saw the beast which dwelled within, all fight left his body. He shuddered and dropped to his knees.


    ¡°Master Syros Pahren, he gives me commands and I only follow them, I swear. Please I will give you anything just don¡¯t kill me!¡± he starts to break down and cry towards the end. I sigh and shake my head at the answer. I thought the dragons on our backs and the raid would have been enough of a hint if he still didn¡¯t get the message a week ago. Turning to Glom I nod my head. Lifting his hammer, Golm swings down and crushes Enayr¡¯s left leg.


    ¡°AAAAAAHHHHHH!!!¡± He screams. As he writhes on the ground, clutching at what remained of his leg, Golm swung again, at the right this time. The pain proved too much for him and he fainted, soiling the floor with vomit and blood.


    ¡°Huh, not sure if that shows he was tougher than the others or weaker. The other guys fainted on the first leg, then woke and started screaming when we broke the second. Oh well. You two.¡± I point to 2 of the largest and toughest looking thugs, though that isn¡¯t saying much since everyone in the room is either crying or fainted like our dear friend here. ¡°I want you two to bring our dear Enayr here to the beggars street. After that you and everyone here will have the rest of the day off. Go home and refresh. There are going to be some changes in this establishment.¡± I smile and address the rest of the room. The unconscious members will be told later, but I don¡¯t want to ruin the current atmosphere with trying to wake them.


    ¡°First, this man here is the new manager.¡± I put my hand on one of my shadow guards, who removes his mask so they can recognize him. ¡°Anyone who wants to keep working here can come tomorrow. That goes for you girls too. If you want to be employed like people, then you can come and we will discuss a reasonable wage.¡± I address the thugs and the former slaves. Seriously, you would think the army of unsullied would be enough of a sign slaves were not a good idea. Though I suppose for a former criminal den that didillegal things in a slave city, like this would be expected.


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to come here if you don¡¯t want to, of course. By declaration of Queen Daenerys Stormborn of House Targaryen, First of her name, Mother of Dragons, Khaleesi of the Great Grass Sea, Breaker of Chains, and rightful ruler of the Seven Kingdoms.¡± I take a deep breath. If it wasn¡¯t for the fact she earned most of them, and she would probably get sad if I did, I would ask her to cut a few of those out of her name. ¡°No man or woman will ever be a slave in the great city of Astapor, ever again. If you return it will be of your own decision, and if you leave no one will come after you. You all enjoy the rest of your day.¡± I give them a small bow and parting, then make towards the door.


    ¡°Oh I almost forgot. Sorry I have repeated this speech so many times today that I think it has already been said. You ever feel like that Golm?¡± I ask my friend, who nods in agreement. ¡°Yeah so though you can leave if you want, if you return and agree to the working conditions, you will have to follow them. Break the rules or betray us, and you will end up like Enayr.¡± I leave the room with that thought and leave the building.


    God, I am exhausted, I usually move at night, and my theatrics are usually visual rather than vocal. They also rarely need to be repeated before. This was the seventh den we had been to and they all ended the same way. Fortunately this was the last of them run by the masters, all the rest were by merchants and they should pack up when they get the message. I suppose this is just another one of the skills I need to practice if I want to become a lord, need to make a good impression.


    I hum a happy tune as I make my way back to the Crimson Palace where Daenerys likes to discuss the meetings. Personally, I like a comfy sofa to hard chairs, but what do I know. She¡¯s the Queen.

 chapter 45 - Troubling Capital

Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.

 chapter 46 - Stormy Seas, Stormy Thoughts

    Ben POV


    ¡°Watch out!¡± Curt screamed to me. Thanks to that warning I manage to duck underneath the pulley before it took my head off. The man previously in charge of securing that was not so lucky. It had caught his wrist when it was torn from the side, dislocating his shoulder and leaving him screaming on the deck, no one free to help him.


    The winds are roaring and the rain strikes the deck like arrows. Several huge waves reached our deck and knocked 2 men overboard, no time or capability to save them. Everyone is running everywhere, trying to keep the ship together while we outlast the storm. Below deck isn¡¯t much better. Several barrels became untied and started bucking everywhere, breaking one of the men¡¯s back, killing him immediately. Crates and personal chests spilled over the floor, ruining the food and damaging the other items.


    I did my best to help, my greater strength and speed letting me help where I could, even stopped one of the men from going overboard when he slipped and rolled past me. But this is not something that can be dealt with by pure muscle. I can¡¯t cut down the wind, or shoot the eye of the storm. This requires training and experience, and in that case, I am hopefully outmatched by the other crew. The other landlovers, Brutus included, are all inside my cabin which is the safest place for now. They can barely stand up straight in this weather, they would only add to the casualty count if the tried to help.


    Just when the wind seemed like it was finally letting up, disaster, and lightning, struck. There were 2 masts on the ship, the primary and tallest one was just struck by lightning. The man in the crows nest was a lost cause, as were the sails that caught fire. They were quickly put out by the rain, but the damage was already done. I suppose we should thank our lucky stars that the mast didn¡¯t split or collapse, though the fraying of the wood leads me to believe it will be soon. We kept struggling for another hour, but eventually the storm passed and we entered a period of calm. While Curt went to check on the ship I went to cabin.


    In there I found my family and the Ravens, all huddled together, pale and frightened. None of them,except for Syrio who looks fine, had ever been on a ship before this trip, and between their sea sickness the past couple days and the recent events has put them into precarious positions. Me andBrutus each have much stronger constitutions and sense of balance. Other than the first day where I was getting my sea legs, I have been fine for the rest of the journey. I look around the room, asking after everyone, but other than a few bruises they all were in a fit state. ¡°Elsa, Arya are you two alright?¡± I ask the youngest and only 2 girls on the ship. They were currently sitting on the bed surrounded by the combined fluff of Brutus and Nymeria.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine.¡± ¡°I¡¯m alright Ben. How is the rest of the crew?¡± Arya and Elsa answer respectively, Arya more terse than usual. Our relationship hasn¡¯t been quite the same since the night of her father¡¯s death 5 days ago. She asked me where Ned was why we were leaving without him. Despite saying I would tell her later, I was busy organising our departure, and exhausted from several miles of running and swimming, she kept pestering me. In the end I told Brutus to take her to the room and keep her there. Elsa went with to try and calm down the irrate she-wolf.


    When we were finally in the clear I found Arya in the cabin, stroking Nymeria and calmed down. She looked at me expectantly, and after clearing the room, I told her what happened. Starting from the night before Ned¡¯s death, how it was too great a risk, to the mockery of a trial, she was calm and engrossed in the story. She became distraught when I got to the part of Joffrey calling for his death, she started to deny it, the thought he was dead too much. I waited for her to calm down, and told her that Ned died to my arrow.


    I debated for a while whether to tell her about that part or not. I was the only one at the plaza so I would be the only one to know the truth on this ship. But thinking of future events I think I may need to. The fact I killed Ned is true, no matter my own thoughts on the matter,I did kill my liege lord and the father of Robb, the now heir to Winterfell. I need to bring Arya home and that means appearing before Robb.


    I have known Robb since he was just a boy, he has similar tendencies to his father so he should be understanding of the circumstances. ¡®Should¡¯ sort of goes out the window when anger meets grief meets man who put an arrow through your father¡¯s chest. The smart thing to do would probably be to drop Arya off with Ethel and the Ravens and have them deliver Arya home. Ethel is a knight under House Moss, Robb can¡¯t touch him unless he committed a crime, which he hasn¡¯t. I would take the ship to Essos where I can lay low. I have enough money to rest the ship and crew in a small port for 2 months or so, when hopefully Robb will be too busy to mind me. I can then return to White Harbour, retrieve my gold, sail away with my family and never come back to Westeros. I have assassinated 2 of the most powerful people in a single day, if I run, I will be a wanted man by everyone.If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    That is the smart thing, and once again I find myself cursing Ned. I made a promise to look after his family, and that means Robb as well. Robb will march south to save Sansa, someone I alsoneed to save, and that means fighting in a war. I don¡¯t know the current strength divisions in Westeros, but I do know the Lannisters aren¡¯t paper tigers, they are golden lions. It will be a tough fight. One Robb may lose, with or without me, but I know he will have an easier time winning with me. I swear only the Starks could make honour feel contagious.


    That doesn¡¯t mean I have inherited Ned¡¯s suicidal tendencies, I like to make preparations, which brings me to telling Arya about my part. I may be the only one on the ship that knows the truth, but I can be certain Robb knows, and probably most of the North. They will have gotten a raven the day it happened. So, if Robb feels like getting revenge on the man who ¡®murdered¡¯ his father, Arya will be very helpful in keeping me healthy. Both the fact that I returned his sister home and if she speaks on my behalf will go along way.


    With that thought you might be wondering why tell Arya about killing her dad? If I want her to speak to Robb, she is going to know what I did anyway. Better to find out now when she has about a week of sailing together to forgive me, than wait till we are before Robb and think I hid the truth from her. Feelings of betrayal do not make for convincing arguments for mercy. Even if she doesn¡¯t forgive me completely and we go back to before this, it will still be better than the alternative. Beside she is still a child, and I have found in my experience kids have trouble remembering anything for too long, even grudges.


    Two aspects helped in this case. The first are the furballs on the bed. Nymeria and Brutus know when their owners are feeling down and made an effort to cheer us up. Brutus in particular could feel my guilt towards Arya, so he would pick her up by the scruff of her neck and bring her to me. The sight of her trying to free herself would bring a smile to myself and the rest of the crew. Even she herself would cheer up and stop moping for a while.


    Syrio was also extremely helpful. Arya would train with him whenever it was convenient, the distraction helpful in making her forget her troubles. The exercise and new environment of the ocean adventure cheered her up and let her relieve some stress. Makes me feel bad for nearly killing him when we first met.


    In any case, she has gotten a lot better than the start where she would barely talk to me. She might not be asking me to play with her like in the past, but she still plays with Brutus and Elsa. When I am sure everyone is okay, I return to the deck to find Curt. I wasn¡¯t expecting the news to be good, but it was worse than I thought.


    ¡°We lost 5 men over all. 3 overboard, 1 who broke his back and another got struck by lightning in the crows nest. There is another 4 with fractures, so the crew is down by nearly a fifth.¡± He tells me in a somber tone. 9 out of the original 60 men we started with, sailors not including the people in the cabin, were lost. ¡°That was one of the worst storms I have ever seen, especially outside the Stepstones and Shipbreaker Bay.¡±


    ¡°What were the damages?¡± I ask him.


    ¡°Several of the ropes and boards were snapped and below deck we lost a barrel of water and some of our supplies to spillages, nothing major. The biggest damage was to the main mast.¡± As he mentions the mast, we both look to the charred logs. ¡°Heard of ships being struck by lightning before, never experienced it. *sigh* Poor Tom, he never knew what hit him. The mast it barely standing. Even if we had sails, I would not dare to use them. Even without them I am just waiting for the wind to blow it down.¡±


    ¡°So, what do you recommend? Can we still make it to White Harbour?¡± There I can leave Ed and Elsa with the ship and let them become the holders of my account. If Robb has gone completely mad with grief, and this is a long shot, I want them to at least be able to survive if I don¡¯t.


    ¡°Not a chance. With one sail, a damaged one at that, it would take us too long to reach the White Harbour and would either have to go on half rations or stop somewhere for supplies. That would take another week or 2. And that is only if we can make it to The North without the main mast collapsing. If it does, then we will likely lose more men and the potential damage is way too risky.¡± He and I look to the mast and listen to the creak in the light wind. ¡°Right now we are just about to pass the Bay of Crabs in the Vale. I suggest we head to Gulltown. It is one of the largest ports in Westeros, we can find some good shipwrights to replace the mast, or repair it enough to sail if you want to rush. I warn you, replacing the mast will not be quick and repairing the mast will only stop it falling off, I still wouldn¡¯t use a sail on it.¡±


    I think over the options. ¡°We will go to Gulltown, we can¡¯t risk the mast breaking and leaving us stranded at sea. How long will it take?¡± We are in no rush now that we are clear of the Crownlands. The Vale is more inclined to the Starks than the Lannisters. Though I am sure they have spies, it will take time for them to get messages to the capital and back. Sending armed forces would be more likely to cause another war, and rushed assassinations are of little threat to me so long as we are careful.

 chapter 47 - Brutus Grows

ndnd


    The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

 chapter 48 - Travelling the High Road

The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.

 chapter 49 - Convincing Argument

This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.

 chapter 50 - Dornish Ambitions 1

    Tyrion POV


    I find myself wondering if I did something wrong this year. Broke some tradition, desecrated an idol or cursed some god in a drunken stupor so bad they decided to curse me.


    In the last 2 months I have been a prisoner to 3 of the great Houses. Tully, Arryn and Starks. I always thought the first timewould be when father finally decided to dispose of me, or Cersei framed me for some crime and I was imprisoned in the Black Dungeons. The fact my family is the first suspects for my potential imprisonment is saddening to say the least.


    I somewhat doubt my last method of freedom will repeat, from what I gathered after asking the kingdom¡¯s situation. In the Eyrie I was falsely accused of a crime and used the right of Trial by Combat to escape. Lysa even tried to deny me that right, restricting my champion to being present, meaning I couldn¡¯t ask for my brother. It was fortunate that Bronn was available to stand for me. I promised him riches and position in exchange for keeping me alive.


    When Arya pointed me out, he could have denied knowing who I was, betrayed me or something. Instead he took the risk to offend a group of armed men to secure our escape I know he did what he did for purely selfish reasons. I was the highest payer for his services and he thought he could get out of the situation with a hostage. I still owe him a debt and I can no longer repay him.


    To my current circumstances, it has been several days since my encounter with this group, and we have finally passed the Bloody Gate and have entered the Riverlands. Baskerville decided we would switch from the High Road to the countryside, making my journey much more unpleasant. I keep my complaints to myself, as after finding the precise nature of my captor only reinforces the previous threat.


    Ser Ben Baskerville, greatest knight in the North, owner of the Bloody Hound... and killer of Joffrey Baratheon, my nephew and the late king of Westeros. The first 2 titles were ones I heard in Winterfell, when the whores would tell me stories of the interesting characters in the North, he was at the top of the list. I lacked the opportunity to meet this fabled knight, as occupied with avoiding the drag of noble etiquette¡¯s, something I greatly miss. It was so long since I had heard the tales and the likelihood of him being in the Vale was so small that it didn¡¯t come to mind that he was Ser Baskerville until I identified Arya Stark.


    The third title was a great shock, as was the events that led to it. I do find some amusement in the fact the little shit was a king for all of one day before being killed. Given his personality it was inevitable, but I thought it woud take at least a week. The death of Robert Baratheon, my family declaring war on the Tullys, Ned Starks death and the subsequent rebellion of the North, it is all enough to make me want to return to my sky cell. At least I only had to worry about one direction, rather than be surrounded by people who want me dead.


    At least if I am going to be captured by anyone, the North seems the best option so far. After the first day I was freed from most of my restraints. Other than a rope tied around my waist, limiting me from getting more than 2 metres from my guard, the ropes binding my arms and legs were removed. Baskerville said if I got free, I would just be tracked and killed so I am free to run if I wish. Needless to say, I am not willing to chance escape on the odds of me out running the mountain that is Brutus.


    They have given me equal parts of food and water, and thanks to the presence of Arya, there are frequent breaks. When I questioned Baskerville of my likely fate, I was told I would be handed over to Robb Stark, and from there I would be exchanged for Sansa Stark, who is currently still in Kings Landing. That is a relief.


    If I am to be used in exchange for Robb Starks sister, he should keep me in decent condition until the point she is free. I doubt father would be willing to bow his head for my sake, and if I was instead being held for ransom or to force a surrender that could make my experience... uncomfortable.


    I have heard many stories of what my father does to men when he needs to send a message, and I worry the Starks may go to similar lengths.


    Doran Martell POV


    ¡°We will not attack King¡¯s Landing.¡± I tell my brother, Oberyn, who has just burst into the room.Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.


    One week ago, I received several ravens from different sources. One of them came from Tommen ¡®Baratheon¡¯ the newly coronated king. I could tell the words were not his own, though the writing was reminiscent of a child writing very slowly to ensure it was neat. The message requested that I head to King¡¯s Landing to join him in celebrating his recent succession.


    A laughable excuse, one that only a child would believe. The one behind the letter was likely the now Queen Regent, Cersei Lannister. If I went to the capital, the only ones celebrating would be the Lannisters, as I was forced to bend the knee and call my forces to fight their battles. No, only fools would trust the Lannisters intentions after what happened to Eddard Stark.


    Many people in Westeros believe that we in Dorne hate the Royal family and their supporters. This is wrong, at least in mine and the majority cases. I hate only the Lannisters, for they were the ones to rape and murder my family.


    I held no hate for Robert, but also no love for him. He was justified in his rebellion. Aerys was an insane man who spurned Dorne and my family. When my sister birth to her children, the mad king refused to hold his grandchildren or offer them any sort of love. He said they smelled of Dorne, at times describing them as sheep who were privileged to be born from a dragon¡¯s seed.


    Even during the war, he dismissed and scorned us. When my uncle, Lewyn Martell, fell at the Trident, instead of feeling remorse for his loyal Kingsguard, he only felt suspicion. The Mad king thought that when his son, Rhaegar, died it was due to my uncle betraying him, despite the fact my uncle died before Rhaegar. Because of this Aerys held my sister and her children hostage in the Red Keep when he sent his wife and other children away to Dragonstone.


    I do not hate Rhaegar for his disloyalty to my sister. Though Ellia loved him and gave him children, we Dornish know better than any that our hearts are not so simple. Rhaegar loved another, and for that I do not fault him. Aerys paranoia and arrogance in front of my people, on the other hand, led to the deaths of my family, and wounds that hurt Dorne to this day.


    What Robert did, or I should say didn¡¯t do, was punish the Lannisters. When they raided the city, murdered my sister and her children, they were not punished for committing such vile war crimes. They were rewarded by marrying the king and being welcomed to court, while Dorne was scorned.


    Eddard Stark on the other hand, was a man I respected and who respected us in return. Not only did he denounce the Lannisters publicly, he also called for them to be punished. Though he did not succeed he did more than even our former allies, the Tyrells, did. When he defeated Ser Arthur Dane, despite the fact he was believed to have kidnapped his sister, he reacted with honour not rage. Rather than march on House Dane in revenge, he instead returned their ancestral sword, Dawn.


    ¡°We don¡¯t have the ability to defeat the Lannisters yet. Striking now would just cause more damage to us than them. You forget we have only just recovered a portion of our strength.¡± I tell my brother. Though he has spent a large amount of time in Essos over the years, I know he is aware of our condition after the war and presently.


    Dorne was the most heavily damaged in the war. Not only did we send the most troops to fight for Aerys, but we are the furthest from the main battles at the Trident and Crownlands. We were given almost no support from the crown or our allies, so we had to empty our treasuries and granaries just to support our troops.


    When the fighting stopped, I submitted, though declined to bend the knee, to Robert, to the dismay of my countrymen. Future events proved my actions were correct. The war with the Iron Islands showed that Robert was a warmongerer. There were arguments among my countrymen that Robert was weakened, and with the Dornish Marshes, our greatest natural defence, he would never take the risk to invade. They were wrong, Robert would have taken any excuse to go to war, and with most of our forces dead or scattered, no money or food we could not fight him.


    ¡°I know brother, you are afraid for our people.¡± Oberyn says as he pours himself and me a glass of wine. ¡°I listened to you back then because I knew you were right. We were weak and our enemies were strong. Now is different.¡± He takes a seat opposite me.


    ¡°It is as you said, we have recovered our strength from before, and this time you are prepared. I know all about the spies you planted. When they looked down at you.¡± Oberyn gestures to my wheel chair. ¡°They underestimated you. When they lowered their guards you planted eggs in their gardens, eggs that have hatched into vipers ready to strike.¡±


    ¡°I know that when I travelled in Essos, the men you sent with me weren¡¯t just to keep an eye on me. They were ambassadors and emmissaries. Our former allies were false ones, those who when the time came, they used our fallen bodies as steps to climb the ladder.¡± Oberyn takes a drink before getting to the important matter.


    I smile as he tells me all this. I knew he was aware of my actions. I am one of the few people that seem to remember that while my brother is a drunk, lust-filled warrior... he is also one of the most learned and well-travelled men in Westeros. He studied at the citadel and could have become an arch maester. He has travelled most of the known world, visited dozens of cultures and interacted with their people. Granted most of those interactions were with their women, but that is beside the point.


    ¡°I am well aware of my actions these past years, just like I know you were as well. It was the reason you never hid your intentions, why you always acted so extravagantly. The other powers always paid attention to you while my people were allowed to work in secret.¡± I reveal my brothers disguise. He has always been the more brazen one, and his hatred for our enemies is true. But he is no fool, who would constantly warn his enemies of his position. Not unless it had a purpose.

 chapter 51 - Dornish Ambitions 2

    The room grows silent for a while. Suddenly, we both smile. A strange sight, 2 snakes smiling at each other.


    There are many outside Dorne, and even those within, that believe my brother and I detest each other. The peaceful older brother, the king who only wants peace and prosperity for his people, and is willing to forsake his family to do so. The younger brother, renowned warrior, who wishes little more that to gut each and every one of the Lannisters.


    They thought that civil war will eventually break out in Dorne. The vengeful Lords supporting Oberyn, the Loyal stable Lords supporting myself. An attractive thought for those who have reason to fear us, Dorne tearing itself apart.


    Instead, not only do my brother and I love each other, but we are even able to understand and cooperate with each other¡¯s actions. My brother understood the reason for my spies and people, while I understood his actions to help hide them. All because of our mutual desire to avenge Ellia.


    This misunderstanding by the other Lords only allowed us to rebuild the strength of Dorne. They released the pressure off of us to try and ensure we fought each other instead of uniting against foreign threats. This mistake gave us room to grow to the extent we can contend with our neighbours again.


    When we stop our chuckling, Oberyn gets a serious face. ¡°Brother, I have always understood your actions, and know we have always had the same goal. Avenge Ellia.¡± I snarl at that. The mention of my sister is one of the few things that can break my fa?ade. I try to keep it in check, but there are times, like now, when I forget to brace myself and reveal my fangs.


    ¡°You sent messengers to our bannermen. Asking to gather their troops and supplies and send them to Kingsgrave in the Princes Pass. However, you told them to gather only a third of their troops, totaling 10,000 men. The Lords close to the pass were ordered to send men to reclaim Vultures Roost, repairing the castle and prepare it¡¯s defences?¡± My brother questions me.


    ¡°That is right.¡± I answer him.


    *Bang* Oberyn slams the table, leaning across to stare at me. ¡°Why? Our enemies are weak and divided. If we attack, we can deal a serious blow to the Lannisters. Instead you are preparing our forces and borders for a siege.To defend. Why would you let this opportunity slip us by?¡± My brother asks. For the first time in ages I can see anger towards me in his eyes. This means nothing. Because a second later he shrinks back when he sees what lies in mine.


    Disappointment.


    ¡°You are right brother. If we strike now, we could deal a great blow, scatter their forces, shatter the kingdom... Then what? The Lannisters will simply retreat to their keep in the Westerlands and we will never be able to touch them.¡± I grab the map to my side depicting Westeros. ¡°I am not preparing to strike the Lannisters. I am preparing a war to destroy them.¡±


    ¡°We are separated from the capital and the Westerlands by the Reach and the Stormlands. If we truly want to destroy the Lannisters, it would require a long conflict which is impossible to do so with the other territories in the way. They would never ally with us to destroy them as they are our enemies as well.¡± The Stormlands have been our rivals for centuries, while the Reach betrayed us after the war against Robert. They would never allow us to send our armies across their lands to wage war on the Westerlands.


    Oberyn thinks for a moment. ¡°You want to wait until they are weakened before striking. The Stormlands are at war with the Lannisters. By only sending a portion of our forces to the Pass and appearing to focus on fortifications, we are preparing a false front. They will believe we plan to stay neutral. They will then focus on each other and neglecting to prepare against us.¡± Oberyn analyses.


    The second interesting letter I received was from Stannis Baratheon. He wrote that the new king Tommen was actually the bastard spawn of incest. He is therefore illegitimate and Stannis is the rightful heir. Useful information, though I immediately dismissed the idea of siding with Stannis. Stannis is far stricter than Robert and would settle for nothing less than full submission. I won¡¯t side with Stannis while there is a better option available.


    Oberyn demonstrates his tactical senses, instantly seeing the plan that took me days to plan. Both the Lannisters and Baratheons are wary of Dorne. If they believe we have no intention of attacking them, they will fight among themselves, instead of reserving their strength for a potential attack from the south. My brother served as a sell-sword for several years in Essos, and has experienced many battles. His intuition when it comes to engagements is above mine, though his lack of experience in management leaves him insufficient foresight.


    He is lacking an essential piece of information, in the form of the third letter. I needed to speak to him regarding this, so his entering is actually good timing for me.


    ¡°You are correct in that I plan to wait for them to weaken before attacking, but even if all our neighbours and enemies lost half their strength, we still wouldn¡¯t be able to win¡± I tell him. We have recovered somewhat from 15 years ago, but so have our enemies, and they were less injured than we were. ¡°Our forces are still the smallest of the southern kingdoms, and if we want to destroy the Lannisters, we need to be a match for all of the southern Kingdoms uniting against us. The only way to do this is if they are weakened to such a degree, or if we raise our strength.¡± Defeating one of our weakened enemies is possible, but facing 2 or even 3 is too much. Their foundations are all too great to collapse from this war alone, meaning they will still have strength to mount a resistance against us.Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    I pass him the third letter. It was sent from a mutual acquaintance of ours. The mother of Oberyn¡¯s 4th daughter, Sarella, was a merchant and captain from the Summer Isles. She recently spent time in Slaver¡¯s Bay and happened to come across a shocking piece of information, which she sent to us.


    ¡°Daenerys Targaryen is alive. Not only is she alive, but she has overthrown the Powerful Masters of Astapor and now rules the city as it¡¯s queen. She commands the unsullied, and with them she declared there would never again be slaves in Astapor.And one day, she would sail to Westeros to reclaim her throne.¡± I reveal the key to my future plans.


    Oberyn reads the letter, disbelief on his face. When he reads the rest of the letter, he questions me about the part I was sure he would.


    ¡°Dragons? 3 of them?¡± He questions. If this information didn¡¯t come from his former lover, a woman he trusts, he would likely call it a false rumour being spread to mislead her enemies.


    ¡°Yes brother, dragons. Young ones, but already at the age where they are flying around ramparts and breathing fire. In a few years they will be at the age where the feats of Aegon may be replicated.¡± I say.


    ¡°What do you plan to do. Help her in winning the throne, in exchange for destroying the Lannisters?¡± He asks, still restricting his thoughts to revenge. Though that is one of my goals, I also have to think to the future and the benefits for our people. I cannot be like him and pursue only vengeance.


    ¡°In a way. I have gathered 2,000 of my most elite soldiers. I will use our fleet to transport them across the sea to Astapor. Trystane will go as well to act as our ambassador and negotiator. He will also attempt to win the new queen¡¯s heart, and propose a marriage alliance with Dorne.¡± My second son is around the same age as the young Targaryen so it would be an appropriate match.


    I considered sending Quentyn, my eldest son, however that runs risks. From my sources I have found that prior to conquering Astapor, the girl was unimportant, a strong name and pretty face, little else. A young child who so rapidly gains power is an incredible feat. However, she will have no intention of releasing that power. An older husband will bring risk of others looking to him as the real power, which may offend her even if we don¡¯t intend to. There is also the difference in my son¡¯s personalities.


    My eldest child is Arriane, and according to Dornish traditions, the eldest child will inherit the family title, not the eldest son like the rest of Westeros. My sons were therefore never prioritised in learning to rule, but Trystane has prepared himself better than Quentyn. Trystane has spent more time with Arriane, and has trained to serve her in the future. He has the closer relationship with her, and the milder personality.


    The Targaryen is young, and though conquering a city is impressive, keeping it is another matter. With Trystane¡¯s support, her foundations will be stronger, and the likelihood of her marriage is more likely. Trystane¡¯s close relationship with Arianne will also ensure a closer relationship with House Martell and the royal family.


    ¡°Our family rose to power when Nymeria landed on our shores and joined forces with House Martell. Together we conquered the other Houses to become the Royal family of Dorne. We will repeat those events. When Daenerys brings her army to Westeros, she will land on Dorne, and with our combined forces and her dragons, we will destroy our mutual enemy, House Lannister, destroying everyone in our way.¡± I remind Oberyn of our history, and how I intend to use the lessons it has taught us.


    Aegon had a very small army when he first landed in Westeros, yet with 3 dragons he conquered the other kingdoms. With the other Houses weakened by war, while our troops are fresh, they may even surrender to us. From there it will no longer be a question of whether we defeat the Lannisters, but when.


    My brother finishes his cup and bows to me. ¡°I am sorry brother. I thought you had forgotten the debt the Lannisters owed our family. I thought like many of those other fools, that you were a coward. I am ashamed.¡±


    ¡°You have nothing to apologise for. I have kept my plans secret for so long, and am impressed you were able to guess so much so quickly. But, if you do want to apologise, I require your help.¡± I tell Oberyn. He lifts his head and nods to me to continue.


    ¡°I want you to take your eldest 4 daughters to Astapor and accompany Trystane while he is there.¡± Oberyn looks surprised. He doesn¡¯t speak and instead waits for me. ¡°You will command our forces as the general, while your daughters will be your captains under you.¡±


    ¡°Why? I can understand why you want me to go, and I will if you ask. I am used to Essos, have many allies and know the forces that reside there. Though I worry that this will draw unnecessary attention. Many people keep their eyes on me, if they know I am leaving then it will reveal our intentions to form an alliance and bring unnecessary trouble onto us.¡± Oberyn consents.


    ¡°But why my daughters? They are capable, I am sure of that, but there are many others who could take their place.¡± Oberynasks, hints of a fathers concern in his voice. Knowing how hard it is for me to send Trystane to a foreign place with conflict almost guaranteed, I am reluctant to ask this of my brother. But it is necessary.


    ¡°The first reason is as you already said, they are capable, both as warriors and intellectually. There are 2 others. The first is that they are our family members. As both our relatives and officers in our army, they will gain additional time to spend with the queen, strengthening our bonds.¡± The greater her feelings towards our family, and by seeing our capability, the greater the chances of a marriage with Trystane and positive relationship with Dorne.


    ¡°The final reason is as a message. The majority of the Lords of Westeros believe that only men should rule, and will use this as a reason to contest her. We do not believe this and must show it. Your daughters are capable officers, and will show we do not fear having a woman lead us. This will reassure her that by allying with us she will not just become a puppet.¡± I explain.


    Oberyn thinks my plans through and eventually agrees. He even points out that with our fleet absent, our enemies may just lower their guard even more. Without our ability to strike from the seas gone from Westeros and our armies placed defensively, they will be certain that they are safe from us. I didn¡¯t think of that, though it is a beneficial revelation that will raise our chances of victory.


    When Oberyn leaves I take out my quill and paper. I write several letters to the relevant parties then seal them. Though I trust my brother, there are certain parts of my plan I didn¡¯t tell him. Some things are best kept to myself. In case I fail at least Oberyn and Trystane will survive. Together they will have a chance to rebuild.

 chapter 52 - Wolf Scheme 1

Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there.

 chapter 53 - Wolfs Scheme 2

The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.


    th

 chapter 54 - Wolfs Scheme 3

The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.

 chapter 55 - Cursing the Starks

    Ben POV


    My group travels with the scouts acting as our escorts. I see the army camp at about the same time as the army. The Twins may not be the most impressive structures in Westeros I have seen, but they do paint a decent picture. The idea behind them was an impressive one. Build a bridge connecting the East of the Riverlands to the West, on the border with the North.


    From an economic standpoint I have to admire the Frey ancestors who had the foresight to build such a structure. The fact it wasn¡¯t even for personal benefit is rather admirable. The Twins were the result of 3 generations tirelessly building a bridge that would bring wealth and security to their family for centuries to come. They all knew they wouldn¡¯t see the final construction, and had to live frugallythroughout their lives. Very few people can think in terms of long-term benefits, and to put their future generations above themselves.


    The Twins didn¡¯t just make the Frey¡¯s rich either. They may have benefitted the most from the venture, but many forget that the bridge benefits others as well. The Riverlands gained greater connections with their neighbours across the Fork. The North could trade with the eastern lands, meaning more food and supplies for those harsh winters, meaning less starved to death.


    The nobles of the North and Riverlands call them ¡®up-jumped toll keepers¡¯, but I like to think the original Freys were far greater than that. They were entrepreneurs, whose selfless actions benefitted not just their own family, but many others as well.


    The tents of the Stark army were sprawled beside the river for a mile long. The constant movement in the camp, combined with the dozens of banners waving in the wind created a blur of colours and sounds. It would make a decentpainting if it wasn¡¯t for the somber atmosphere of those preparing for war.


    As we reached the camp, the officer that went ahead of us to inform Robb came before us. ¡°Ser Baskerville, Lady Arya. You need to come with me. Lord Stark has called for you to come to the war tent. The rest of your people will need to wait here.¡± He tells us. As he does a number of men come forward, their stance looking as if they are there to ensure my men don¡¯t go where they¡¯re not supposed to.


    ¡°Ben, might I inquire as to what I will be doing? As much as I have enjoyed our journey, I am rather tired of sitting in a saddle. Some food and drink would also be good if it can be spared.¡± Tyrion comments before I can leave. The dwarf has probably had it roughest on this journey. Due to my desire to avoid main roads I have taken off the beaten tracks and through the woods. As someone used to noble life he has probably not undergone a lot of tough travel before. Arya is the only other noble and of similar stature, but she is used to riding the Wolfswood in the North. I hardly think the diminutive Lannister has had quite the same upbringing.


    ¡°How the hell should I know? Assuming I survive today, you will no longer be my prisoner. I would start thinking how you are going to appeal to Robb and Lady Catelyn if I was you.¡± I smile darkly, bitterly pointing out my own fate is already in question, and I have no time to care about him.


    As I am led by the guards, Arya riding at my side and trying to hurry us as fast as possible, I can¡¯t help but think that at least the venue is to my advantage. The Green Fork beside us flows strong and fast. Few could swim across, and I have no reason to fear the few.


    When we reach the main tent, we are met by even more guards. They asked for my weapons, which I obliged. I passed my sword, knives and armour, before they gave me a pat down, though not too thorough, to my benefit. I breathe a sigh of relief when they don¡¯t check my boots. ¡®If this goes wrong, I at least have the back-up'' I think darkly.


    Two of the guards enter with me on either side, Arya has no-one obviously. As I enter the tent, my right foot feeling particularly heavy, I take in my surroundings. It is a large tent with a large table in the middle, what is probably a map has been rolled over to conceal it. Across the table from me are a dozen men and women.


    Most of them are the Lords, Ladies or important members of the army. Some I have met or seen before at one feast or the other. There are only 2 important people to me at the moment. They are my new liege Lord and his mother. As I kneel in front of the table, the latter of the 2 rushes forward.


    ¡°Mother!!¡± Arya screams and rushes to meet her halfway around the table. They meet in the middle, Lady Catelyn bending to hug her more closely. As they envelop each other tears flow freely from their eyes.


    Arya had been feeling more and more nervous as we got closer to the North. When we entered the camp, it was everything she could do not to rush here ahead of us. I could tell that Lady Catelyn felt the same, the desire in her eyes when we entered was plain to see. It is clear that when they finally saw one another the emotions were too much to handle, causing them to abandon their attempts at maintaining stern looks.


    When they look to Robb, he views the rest of the room, hesitates, then goes to hug his sister. The rest of the Lords smile at the display, except for a few who seem to look down on the display. I can¡¯t enjoy the view though, as I am too busy cursing the Starks and all their ancestors.


    As I watch the reunion from my knelt position, I feel the object inside my boot. I was debating the use of it for several days now, but when I arrived in camp, I thought I had made my mind on whether to enact the back-up, if it came to it, as evidenced by my decision to sneak it into the tent. Seeing them together now, I know that I couldn¡¯t. For the first time, I wonder if the Starks possess some type of magic or energy that drives me to do these stupid things.Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    When Robb finally releases his sister, he walks back to the main seat and calls the meeting to order.


    ¡°Ser Ben Baskerville. You have risked great danger to bring my sister home to me. Before I decide on your reward, I would like to hear about the events of Kings Landing. There have been several conflicting reports about what happened there. Hearing the word of someone who was there would be greatly appreciated.¡± Robb addresses me.


    I go into the story of what happened. Whether or not the Starks have some sort of magic, it has not made me completely brain dead. I know how to stack the deck, so I start my story from when I saved Arya¡¯s life on the road to Kings Landing, though it is likely he has already heard about that, reminding everyone that I have saved her life several times is to my benefit. I put stress and attention on the Baelish brothel incident and the saving of Arya a second time outside the capital.


    When I got to the part about the trial, I neither exaggerated certain parts or ignored others, as I am not sure how good Robs information is. When the audience heard of how I was the one to end Ned¡¯s life, the Lords intook several breaths. Some gave understanding nods, others disgruntled, and a few looked angry. I couldn¡¯t tell what Robb was thinking, his face barely twitching when he heard about his father.


    Perhaps not surprisingly, the greatest shock to the surrounding Lords was the recounting of events after that. Catelyn was particularly worried when she heard we were in a storm, hugging her daughter tighter. It was when I reached the part about Tyrion that the room erupted in noise.


    ¡°Tyrion Lannister! Tywins son!¡±


    ¡°This is great news for the war.¡±


    ¡°We could use him in the next negotiations.¡±


    The Lords were already debating how best to use Tyrion, forgetting that Robb has yet to give his opinion.


    ¡°My Lord Stark!¡± I shout above the din, quietening the rest. I brace myself for what is to come next. ¡°May I ask if you have any questions or opinions you wish to share?¡± I ask wanting to get the matter over with.


    The Lords sit down and turn to look at Robb. It is this action that reminds me of Ned. Despite his age being the youngest, despite the immense pressure, he still looks strong and steady. He gives the impression of an experienced Lord, his subjects looking to him.


    Robb is silent for several moments. A pin could drop, and still it would be heard. Suddenly he places his hands on the table and stands. The chair is pushed back, and he walks around the table. He picks up Ice, the ceremonial greatsword, made through unknown means. It is a large weapon, unwieldy in battle, and is rather used as an executioners blade. He stops in front of me, blade in the ground, hands on the Hilt.


    ¡°Ser Ben Baskerville.¡± Robb begins. ¡°I have only one question for you. During the execution of my father, Lord Eddard, you shot him in the chest, ending his life. I wish to know the reasons behind your actions?¡± He asks me.


    ¡°Wait, Robb! Ben didn¡¯t want to kill father. He did everything to save him, me and...¡± Arya calls to him from the side. As she tries to defend me, Lady Stark hushes her.


    ¡°Quiet Arya. This is Robb¡¯s decision. He is the Lord, and must decide the sentence.¡± She says. At least Arya seems to have forgiven me, that is a relief. I smile as even that little bit might be enough to save my life.


    I look up from the ground, staring Robb straight in the eyes. ¡°The Lannister¡¯s wanted to chop his head off and mount it on a pike. They wanted to turn him into a traitor. I have known Lord Stark for 4 years. He is no traitor.¡± I declare.


    ¡°Ned was one of the most honourable men I knew. He promised to look after my family, if I looked after his.¡± A few of the older Lords look slightly off, me calling Ned personally in public. But fuck them, this is between the Starks and me.


    ¡°Ned deserved a better death. He deserved better than them.¡± I see the emotion in Robb¡¯s eyes, and decide to wrap it up. ¡°I know I am not much. I am just a knight, not even one with noble blood. But I trusted your father, and I think he trusted me. I may not be much, but I am a lot better than those fuckers who call themselves Royals.¡±


    The room is silent. I had several speeches thought up, ones that would take advantage of the rooms compilation, the current gossip and news, using our history as a case... In the end they all went out the window, same with the back-up plan. If I am going to die here, it will be because I told the truth, and expressed my real feelings.


    ¡°You¡¯re wrong.¡± Robb whispers. My hope goes out with those words.


    He slowly lifts Ice above his head, positioned to swing down. As the worst case seems to be happening, I reach my hand towards my boot. Robb is right in front of me, the river to my rear. I won¡¯t get a better opening than this.


    As I touch my boot, however, I strengthen my resolve. I clench my fist and thrust it to the ground, holding it there. There are voices from the rest of the room.


    ¡°Robb, don¡¯t do I! Ben saved my life, he is a good person, please don¡¯t!!¡± Arya screams from the side.


    ¡°Robb, please consider for a moment. This is not what you want to do. It is not what your father would want.¡± Lady Stark speaks from the side. I would point out how ironic it that the one who spoke of Robb making his own choices is now trying to change his. I would if I wasn¡¯t about to lose the ability to talk, and I don¡¯t want my last words to be a snarky quip. Not really my style.


    Well, if I have to die, at least it will be quick. That great sword is heavy and sharp, it will sever my head in one clean swing. I find myself looking back at my life, finding again there were no regrets. Like I said before, my life should have ended when I was 40. I got a 20 year extension, more than most could hope for. I can firmly say I didn¡¯t waste them.


    ¡°You¡¯re wrong Ben.¡± Robb repeats. I can¡¯t see his face as I am looking down. I may have no regrets, but that doesn¡¯t mean I want to see the blade swinging down. ¡°You are not a knight.¡±


    There are gasps from the surroundings, then I feel a heavy weight on my left shoulder. ¡°You are no longer a knight. From now on you are a Lord.¡± Robb announces. He taps my left shoulder, then raises it to my right.


    ¡°In the name of House Stark, I, Robb Stark, Lord Paramount of the North, name you, Ben Baskerville from Oakbridge, Lord of House Baskerville. For your accomplishments on the battlefield, saving my sister and killing the false king Joffrey, I award you with this title, with the lands, privileges and rights that accompany it.¡± He lifts the sword from my shoulders and returns it to the floor. ¡°Stand Lord Baskerville. May the Old gods always guide you. FOR THE NORTH!!!¡± He shouts, fist raised.


    ¡°FOR THE NORTH!!¡± The rest of the Lords stand and raise their fists in agreement. There Is a round of three cheers, and then many conversations erupted from the room, though I wasn¡¯t paying attention. I was too busy laughing, and once again cursing the Starks.


    I hope the Old Gods curse them with long-life and many happy days.

 chapter 56 - Back-Up

The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation.

 chapter 57 - Multiple Fronts

Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.

 chapter 58- Undetected

Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.

 chapter 59 - South of Trident

    Tywin POV


    The Stark boy is attempting to cross the river. That is the main point in the letter before me.


    This was a letter I received by raven an hour ago. The sender was Walder Frey, who sent it in the hopes that I would send support. By that he meat he wants me to fight his battles for him.


    I head to the drawer and pour myself a cup of wine. Dornish, which is ironically my problem at the moment. I received a letter from my brother a week ago, giving details from Varys¡¯s spies. They spoke of movement by the Dornish, how a small army was positioned in the Princes Pass to the south.


    Until then I thought that things were finally becoming clear and that the storm had passed.


    When Stannis declared himself the rightful king, spreading those filthy lies about my children, I had concerns that I would be defeated. Stannis is one of the greatest military commanders in the kingdom, equal to my own reputation, if not exceeding it in recent years. If he managed to gain the support from the Stormlands then I would be unlikely to resist.


    My current forces number only 30,000, while the Stormlands could muster over 40,000. Though my own forces have greater discipline and unity, the quality of the Stormlords surpass my own bannermen on average. Following that brute Robert on so many campaigns has inspired a certain level of martial prowess and military mindset among the Lords. While the Westerlands are still competent, they fall short of the Stormlands.


    All of this is without considering the North that is currently marching on me. If they joined forces, or if they just attacked at the same time, they could roll over very force from the Neck to Storms End. If that happened I would be left with no choice but to abandon the capital and retreat to the Golden Tooth.


    Once I have secured my path to the Westerlands and joined with Jaime¡¯s army, I can finish off the Tully and turn Riverrun into a forward base of operations and face my enemies from one direction.


    Unfortunately, abandoning the capital and allowing Stannis to capture it will greatly lower the legitimacy of my grandchildren in the eyes of the other nobles. If they think I am running scared and my family are collapsing, then our allies in the Reach and Crownlands may consider changing sides. Even my own bannermen will likely consider betraying me for their own survival and potential benefits. Taking my title of Paramount of the Westerlands is an attractive prize if they think I can¡¯t hold it.


    When Lord Tyrell sent me a message agreeing to my marriage alliance I was finally able to relax. Among other political and economical allowances, his daughter would be married to Tommen and she would become queen. An acceptable demand, though the other requests will be costly, I have confidence I will eventually take them back in time.


    The important thing is that i now had access to the Reach¡¯s numbers and grain. They have the largest number of soldiers other than my own, about 60,000. Though, I am somewhat worried about their leadership and quality. Other than a few such as the Tarly, the other Reach Lords are notorious for their softness, far lower than mine or Stannis¡¯s bannermen


    The head of the Tyrell family is particularly looked down upon for his failure to defeat Stannis at Storm¡¯s End during the rebellion. Though he does have other talents.Economically the Reach is the only rival to the Westerlands. This is partly due to their fortunate location, but also due to the Tyrell¡¯s good management.


    Regardless what I think of them, they are what I need at the moment. With superior numbers they can still defeat Stannis when they combine their forces with the men in Kings Landing. The greatest worry was that Stannis would gather support and attack before they were ready.


    That concern was removed when Renly appeared at Storm¡¯s End. My daughter originally sent pursuers after the youngest Baratheon, and it seems he escaped to our benefit. When he declared he was also contending for the throne I was at first shocked, then delighted.


    Another man trying to remove my family from power would normally be distressing, but not when he reduces the power of my other enemies. When Renly asked support from his bannermen, he divided the Stormlords. Some of them had already declared for Stannis, while others thought he had the better claim to the throne. Renly still had the support of his closest bannermen, and due to his popularity was able to gather the support of others, but it still left several in the middle.


    The Lords that couldn¡¯t decide who to follow and made themselves neutral. Now the 2 brothers are opposed to each-other, neither having the full support of the Stormlands.


    The larger force currently belongs to Stannis, who has a little under 15,000 men with Renly a bit over 12,000 from Varys¡¯s spies. The numbers are similar, but the superior force is undoubtedly Stannis. Not only is his army larger, he a more experienced commander, he controls the royal fleet, the soldiers on board being the most elite fighters at sea in the entire Seven Kingdoms. The Ironborn are arguably better fighters, slightly, but Stannis¡¯s men are better trained and disciplined. If the Ironborn didn¡¯t have 2-3 times the number, thenthe title of greatest fleet would have been taken from them.


    But even with all that it won¡¯t be an easy fight. Stannis might be exceptional, but Renly¡¯s bannermen are no push-overs either. And Renly still has one great advantage over Stannis, and that is Storm¡¯s End. The seat of Baratheon¡¯s has never fallen to a siege. Even during Aegon¡¯s conquest it was due to the stupidity of the former owner leaving the safety of his keep to meet them in the field that led to it¡¯s capture.


    Renly is not as brave as the former Lords, and will not be likely to take to the field unless he has a clear advantage. And while the ancestral seat of the Baratheon¡¯s remains in Renly¡¯s control his bannermen will not abandon him lightly.


    Stannis knows it¡¯s strength better than anyone. So long as it stands, Stannis will never win an easy victory, which means extended conflict between the brothers, further weakening the Stormlands and earning me time to deal with my other enemies.


    Though it seems the Tyrells have also thought of this, and are thus taking their time to respond to my call. They are likely hoping to wait until the Baratheons are weakened before dealing the finishing blow. This will save their strength while mine is spent dealing with the Tully and Starks, then do the bare minimum to earn the reward I have promised. I worry that with the difference between my power and the Tyrell¡¯s closing, I need to finish this war soon. Otherwise it will be their family controlling the kingdom rather than mine.Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.


    I couldn¡¯t afford to wait though, as while my rear is still exposed, I can¡¯t move my forces out of fear of being flanked. I still haven¡¯t forgotten the Vale and Iron Islands who have yet to support a side in this conflict. They both have enough forces to tip the currently fragile balance to either side. Unfortunately, I lack the resources to win over the Iron Islands and the Vale after already making promises to the Reach.


    Thus, I entered into another round of negotiations with the Tyrell to provide sooner assistance, promising Lord Tyrell the position of Master of Coin. I intended to send Baelish away anyway. Both to remove his influence at court and to send him to the Vale so he can bring them back into the fold.


    If he can convince his old paramour then it would give me a much greater manoeuvrability. If Lysa Arryn could commit even a token force, it could demoralize the Starks enough to bring them to the bargaining table. If he believes his own aunt has sided against him, then he will feel the strain I have of being surrounded on all sides.


    Just when it was finally agreed, they took back their words and requested a further delay. The Dorne had placed soldiers on the Princes Pass and the Reach needed to ensure they were ready for a potential incursion in case they invaded.


    I had to sigh at that. Varys provided a more accurate analysis, showing the Dornish were fortifying choke points and fortresses rather than scouting invasion routes. The Second Prince of Dorne, Prince Oberyn Martell was also spotted leading the Martell forces there. It was clear that they weren¡¯t going to attack, but they already ruined the opportunity. If the Starks were held up by the Twins, I would have sent the mountain to lead our cavalry to harass their rear and inflict damage. With him caught from both sides he would have


    Now I can¡¯t risk dividing my forces further without the Reach defending my rear. If one of the Baratheons get impatient and attacks King¡¯s Landing before dealing with the other brother, I will need to hurry back to defend it. Something much harder to do without my cavalry.


    This would be easier if I could have Tommen and my daughter move to the Westerlands, but no-one would follow a king that abandons their capital, especially one that hasn¡¯t even been attacked yet.


    I was able to negotiate the use of their navy. My spies were able to detect the departure of the Dornish fleet and they haven¡¯t landed anywhere on Westeros. Varys informed me that the princes Trystane and Quentyn Tyrell were seen to board the ships before they left. It is assumed that they were sent away to Essos where they would be safe while the war occurred.


    A reasonable assumption that bothers me. Doran Tyrell is a cautious and cunning man. I cannot see him sending away the majority of his fleet just to protect his sons. If I wasn¡¯t occupied with the army I could devote more energy to the south, but currently my best informants are focusing on the north and east. Until I have resolved them, I cannot look into Dorne. Instead I tell Varys to look into it and hope the man¡¯s fear of me and common sense will lead to him telling the truth when I ask.


    With the Tyrell fleet joined with the Lannister, we now have enough ships to contend with Stannis in the event he proves triumphant. Once the ships reach King¡¯s Landing I will be more confident with it¡¯s defence until the Tyrell can organise their troops.


    I also send 2 ravens. One to Walder Frey, telling him that if he can delay the Starks for 3 weeks, then I will have reached the Twins and reinforce him. This is a lie as unless both the Baratheons were suddenly killed I would never make it there in just a few weeks. I am sending it so as to buy time for Jaime, the other recipient of the letter.


    In it I explain the situation, and tell him he needs to speed up the siege. If the Frey can delay the Starks for a few weeks then we can defeat the Tully at Riverrun and confront the Stark host with our superior combined force. Even if Walder cannot delay the Starks, I will still be notified when they cross and can inform Jaime to prepare his defences. Without the element of surprise, I doubt Robb will defeat my son with our forces equal.


    If the Stark boy actually tries to attack the Twins then he will lose too many men and be severely weakened. We will finish our enemies to the North and then crush our foes to the south.


    Robb POV


    I stand beside my bannermen as I look towards the Twins. The fires from the watchmen on top of the walls illuminate the structure and remind me of the challenge that my soldiers need to overcome.


    It has just turned midnight and my men are in position. In the area closest to the Twins you will see several men patrolling the area, same as every other night. This is an illusion done to reduce the Frey¡¯s guard. Inside the tents, soldiers are armed and at the ready, the tents filled to the brim. Earlier in the day I had them slowly fill the tents and only some would return to other parts of the camp, to keep the Frey from getting suspicious. The dozen or so tents are filled with over 500 of my best soldiers from both my own and the other Lords.


    The tent at the front will have the gap facing towards the Twins and will be responsible for leading the others. When Lolder rides out from the gate, and only if he comes out, a war cry will be called and they will charge for the opening. The rest of the men in the tents will flow out as well upon hearing the war cry.


    They will have to be quick. I don¡¯t know how many men Lolder can muster but it surely won¡¯t be many. Killing a few guards by surprise and then opening the gate will be possible, but having them hold the gate from the rest of the soldiers on the wall will be impossible. In fact I told Lolder to inform his men to surrender immediately and kneel on the ground so they aren¡¯t killed by my men by mistake. Though his death would be no great loss, I wish to honour my oath to him so long as he does not betray me.


    ¡°Ser Wendell, are the men ready to fill the gap?¡± I ask Wendell Manderly by my side. Behind me and the rest of the Lords are about 1,500 cavalry, the entirety of my armies cavalry. If the gates are seized by my men then I will lead my cavalry through the gate and reinforce the vanguard before the rest of my army follows us in. If the cavalry gets inside the Eastern Twin will be captured. The enemy should collapse, and all that will be left is to cross the bridge and take the Western Twin.


    ¡°Yes Milord, all the horses have been calmed and we will be ready to charge as soon as you give the order.¡± Wendell answers. The Manderly¡¯s are the family with the most cavalry other than my own. As they are also a firm supporter of my House and Wendell is a capable commander himself, I decided to make him the leader of the cavalry when I am not present.


    ¡°My Lord!¡± a young runner calls to me as he approaches camp. He is stopped by the guards before I allow him through. He bends over and holds his knees, panting, before giving me his message.


    ¡°My Lord, I am the messenger sent by Lord Baskerville. He told me to tell you that his troops are across the river and in position. We are ready to attack as soon as you are.¡± He announces to the surprise of the other Lords.


    They knew what Ben was responsible for attacking the other side of the wins. When they were told he had only requested 100 men they were dismissive except a few who expressed their admiration at his bravery, Lord Umber being the greatest approver. Most were still doubtful how he was going to cross undetected when he only had a few hours and a single raft.


    When the young soldier told me how the men crossed we were all shocked. I never knew those were 2 methods for crossing a river. They sound complicated, but when pictured in your mind seems obvious.


    Just then I heard someone beside me call my attention to the front. There was movement from the gate, followed by a loud noise. The gate was opened and suddenly 3 riders rode out from the gate. The one in the front was carrying a torch and shouting.


    I couldn¡¯t tell the face and voice clearly, but as it got closer I was almost certain It was Lolder. Seems he followed through. Shortly after the men from the front let out a war cry and charged forward, the riders making sure to keep left and out of the way. The rest of the men hiding in tents suddenly burst out and headed for the Twins as well.


    ¡°Ready the men!! As soon as they clear the gate, we are going to charge the breach and secure the courtyard. Wendell, ready the cavalry, once they give the signal, we need to be ready to move! Theon, sound the horn, wake the men.¡± I inform the relevant people as we ready ourselves.


    Theon blows a loud horn beside me. To not be too suspicious I had half the camp sleep in the camp and didn¡¯t tell them what is happening. It was a risk, but with only half our army on ready we were still double the Frey and there were no other nearby forces. I have confidence by the time the men wake and are set to order, we will have taken the Eastern Twin. By that time, hopefully Ben will have prevented Walder from escaping and we can move with our entire force to take the remaining Twin across the river.

 chapter 60 - Breaching the Gate

Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.

 chapter 61 - Walder Frey

Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.

 chapter 62 - Courage Vs Experience

st


    Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.

 chapter 63 - Dying Loyalty

    Ser Daniel Coryn POV


    I awake to the throbbing pain in my left arm, which was quickly followed by the rest of my body. I taste the dirt in my mouth and move to push myself up, which is foiled when the agony from my arm forces me to the ground again. I clutch my left arm with my right and lie there as I wait for the pain to pass, teeth gritted.


    Once the pain starts to fade, I regain my recent memories that led me to this position. After being dismissed by Lord Frey, I went down to the main hall where I gathered the disorganised rabble that retreated from the gate. We were quickly joined by the men that were previously asleep in the barracks. They had only now finished getting their armour and weapons ready. If they were any slower the battle would have ended, but I decided to admonish them later.


    Once nearly the entirety of the soldiers remaining in the East Twins was here, about 700, I brought them round the side entrance and made my way to the stables. After hearing the situation from the men that fell back to the keep i debated that it was the best idea to get the horses first.


    The enemies were entrenched on the walls and had the courtyard supressed. I need to prepare the carriages and horses for Lord Frey anyway, so rather than dividing my forces and receive unnecessary casualties, I decided to get them first. I can then attack the gates with all of my forces. By using horses to flank from the side I can take them by surprise and enter the towers quickly before they can stop us. Then they will have to defend the pair of stairs that lead to the courtyard, and the ones inside the towers. The divided force will have no chance against our superior numbers.


    When I entered the stables, I was met with a surprise. Several men were opening the doors to the pens and cutting the ropes securing the horses. Noticing they were wearing Stark colours I immediately led my men to attack. Most were killed and a pair was taken alive. One of the men wasn¡¯t seen when we entered and tried to rush for a torch on the walls. He was stopped by a spear throw from my men, pinning him to the floor before he soon died.


    I was suspicious so I began to interrogate the captured soldiers. After breaking a few fingers and cutting off an ear, I found how close I was to disaster. I couldn¡¯t help but curse the deviousness of the enemy. Their attempt to ruin our retreat was almost successful. If they had then we would have been trapped. Even if we escaped the keep some other way, maybe rappelling down the walls with ropes, without the horses and carriages the lord won¡¯t outrun the Stark cavalry.


    I killed the captives, despite their begging. Partly in rage, but also because they have no use now that we are abandoning the Twins. I was about to order my men to rush to the gate, when I stopped and think.


    According to the captives the enemy weren¡¯t planning to retreat until they set fire to the stables and the men we just killed return. That gives me some time, but not much. Once the enemy realise their soldiers haven¡¯t returned, they will realise something is wrong. They might set fire to the gate in a panic and that would be bad. My only hope was to reach the gate before they can retreat. They won¡¯t set fire to the gate while they are on the inside, as that would leave them trapped as well.


    We won¡¯t make it on foot, even with the element of surprise. We still have to run about 100 metres before we reach the gate while they are right outside it, even taking into account the time to descend the stairs. I quickly divide my men into 3 parts.


    The first are the foot soldiers that remained from the gates. They are sent to return the horses to their stables, but with the doors open. The second is for the best 100 men, including myself, to mount and take the horses to the end of the stables


    There is enough room for us to get a 50 metre warm up before we leave the stables which I intend to make use of. Once the stable doors are opened, we will ride out and charge the gates, stopping them from leaving. The final group is the largest, and they set to mounting the other horses in the pens. Oncethe second group leaves they will follow us as fast as they can to help.


    Once the enemies are all dead, we could remove the obstacles. All that¡¯s left then is to wait for Lord Frey to arrive and we can leave the keep and our enemies behind.


    It all went well up until I was halfway to the gate, then something struck my horse and I was sent flying. I now realise that I broke my arm in the fall, and looking behind me I see my horse is dead with an arrow poking out of its skull. Thinking it could have been worse, I could have snapped my neck instead, I turn to face the gate.


    I am faced with my worst fear. A large pyre has been made in front of the gate. The opening that was once large enough for several wagons to pass through, is now hidden behind a wall of flames.


    I wonder how that was possible. Even without me to lead the way, my men should still have made it to thegate before the enemy retreated. A clue becomes apparent when I look to the end of the walkways.


    I must have been out for several minutes because my men had already engaged the enemy on the walls. Most of the Stark men were dead, only a few still struggled on the ends. They didn¡¯t for much longer, as 2 more died before the last few flung themselves from the walls. Likely they hoped to escape that way, but thinking to survive a 20 metre drop is fairy tales.


    I make my way over to the other knights and officers. ¡°So, they lit the pyre even when they were still inside. I can¡¯t help but admire their resolve, to cut us off at the cost of their own lives.¡± I analyse the Stark men must have sacrificedthemselves to stall us here, and prevent us from fleeing.The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°That was the weird thing.¡± Callis Frey tells me, eyes looking to my injured arm. ¡°They didn¡¯t act like martyrs. When weengaged them, they were disorganised and their morale was in tatters. Instead of trying to take us with them, many tried to surrender, though we denied it. At the end many were looking to the outside and cursing someone.¡± He explains. Callis Frey was one of Lord Frey¡¯s bastards that was legitimized, and was made one of the officers in the cavalry. He is one of the worst though, yet he acts superior due to his relation to our Lord.


    That is curious. I can only assume someone was placed behind the carriages with a torch. Likely he was supposed to wait till they were all through before lighting the pyre but with our appearancehe panicked and lit the carriages before running away.


    I can¡¯t help but feel even worse about the situation. I know it is semantics at this point, but the fact that we were foiled by cowardice rather than bravery makes our defeat even harder to bear.


    I shake my head and dismiss such thoughts. Instead I start to assign the men their duties. I organise several teams to form a water chain. They will look for buckets and form a chain from the well in the courtyard to the flaming carriages. Once they put out the fire, we can have the horses drag the wreckage away and clear the path. We will have to seat Lord Frey on one of the horses and travel slowly until we find somewhere with another carriage.


    A man is sent inside the keep to find Lord Frey and inform him that we have taken the gate but there are complications. He needs to head here as soon as possible so that we can leave as soon as the obstacles are removed. Ser Marr won¡¯t be able to hold the Stark horde for long. The thought of abandoning my long time friend is saddening, but I know it is necessary.


    A few minutes have passed and the water chain has just formed, when the messenger returns. He rushes like his life depends on it and I fear what news he brings.


    ¡°Ser Coryn *pant pant* Lord Frey is dead!!¡± He shouts, his words bringing a stop to all motion.


    ¡°What!? How is that possible?! I was with Lord Frey not half an hour ago. Marr still holds the Starks back and he was guarded by his men when I last saw him. How could he have died?¡± I shout grabbing him with my good arm.


    ¡°I-I don¡¯t know. Lord Frey suddenly collapsed and none could wake him. They sent for maesterCalmon but Oliver says he felt the Lords wrists and can¡¯t feel a heartbeat. Lord Ryman was also there though he was killed by an arrow.¡± The messenger declares. The other officers have gathered round and are talking now.


    ¡°Then it is hopeless. With the Lord dead what are we to do? We need to surrender.¡± One declares.


    ¡°Are you crazy! The Starks will definitely kill us. We need to run, put out the fires then flee with as much as we can carry.¡± Another rejects and alternatively proposes.


    ¡°Hold your tongues! I will have no more of such treasonous talk. The battle is not over. If Lord Walder has indeed perished then Lord Stevran is next in line and we must see to his safety.¡± I order their silence, reminding them that our duty is to the Frey family, one that does not end with Lord Walder¡¯s death.


    Though I am reluctant to admit to our Lord¡¯s passing, I trust in Oliver, a member of the Lord¡¯s guard, and the messenger wouldn¡¯t make such a dire mistake. Now is not the time to be divided, instead we must have even greater haste in our actions.


    Noticing that the water chain has stopped moving, distracted by our discussion and the lack of instruction, I order the officers to resume putting out the fire. I then tell one of the officers to get a team and head to the keep to look for Lord Stevran. With his fathers passing it is he we must escort from the Twins and then it will be his decision how to proceed.


    I notice there was a distinct lack of movement though. Many were hesitant and some outright glared at me with opposition and hate. Seeing the need to make an example I prepare to order them once more and draw my sword if necessary, though it is awkward with my non-dominant hand. Instead I feel a sharp pain as something enters my back. Stunned, I stumble forward and fall as it is removed.


    I fall to the ground, my body failing, and felt agony again when I try and use my injured arm to stabilise myself. Instead I roll to my side and grasp it again, screaming as the combined sensation from both my old and new wound overlap.


    ¡°You fucking idiot. Why would we waste time looking for that old idiot, the keep is about to fall? Everyone, follow me! I will lead us out of this hell and to survival!!¡± I hear someone shout. I open my eyes and see Callis Frey standing above me, bloody sword proving his betrayal.


    The bastard probably thought he looked gallant standing over a knight and speaking a few words. But between the lighting, the bloody sword and the generally weaselly face, all I and anyone can see is what he is. An opportunistic bastard that just stabbed his commanding officer in the back.


    Several of those that are loyal to me stand against him in outrage, some going as far as to draw their swords.


    ¡°You back-stabbing shit!! How dare you do that to Ser Coryn?! I am going to run you through like the dog you are!¡± Matt shouts and moves towards Callis. It is then that Callis¡¯s men move to defend him. Some look reluctant, but others look joyfull and greed fills their eyes.


    ¡°Coryn was a useless man who wanted all of us to die alongside him. I needed to remove him for the sake of House Frey. Due to the sudden passing of my father I am assuming command of the army until a new Lord is appointed. Now shut the fuck up and put out the fire.¡± Callis shouts and tries to assert his control before anyone can oppose.


    If my mouth wasn¡¯t already full of blood, I would curse the prick. If my body wasn¡¯t broken, I would beat him to an inch of his life and throw him on the pyre. He¡¯s so full of shit that it might just put out the flames.


    Matt and the rest glare at Callis with gritted teeth, but start to back-off due to being outnumbered. It is then that a new group confronts Callis, but the reason being different to Matt.


    ¡°Callis you low born bastard, what gives you the right to assume the title of Lord. You are nothing but a bastard that grandfather took pity on! If anyone should take up the burden of Lord it should be me!¡± Declares Walder. This is one of Lord Walder¡¯s grandsons that was named after him and is another officer.


    Just like a dam, shouts and claims are thrown all over the place. The army is suddenly split into a dozen factions, calling support either to themselves or to their family members, those here and not.


    This goes on for 10 minutes, and while my life fades the fires continue to burn, both of us now forgotten. With eyes focused only on themselves, they neglect the east gate to the bridge. I watch as doors open and barriers raise. Men stream from the buildings as riders pour through the now open path, the banner of a wolf raised at its head.


    My soldiers, if you can call them that, don¡¯t realise what is happening until they are upon us. Some at the back seemed to notice and tried to warn the rest, but couldn¡¯t be heard over the cacophony that was this power-struggle.


    I close my eyes and pray to the Seven, hoping he will forgive me for failing him and my Lord.

 chapter 64 - Capital Conflict 1

You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.

 chapter 65 - Capital Conflict 2

    ¡°Perhaps we should be looking to how to solve the problem, not bickering about how we got here. The fact remains the current population is too great for the number of guards even if we weren¡¯t sending half to the walls. We should think how to either increase the guards or to lower the number of refugees.¡± Baelish directs us back to the topic at hand. Though I suspect it is mostly done to assist his lackey from embarrassing himself further.


    ¡°Usually in this case we would ask for aid from either the nobles or the surrounding Lords to loan their soldiers and guards, but they have been quite resistant to the idea. Most of the soldiers have been sent to the north to assist Lord Tywin, while the nobles have refused to part with their protection. The recent events have caused hesitation in lending their protection to the royal family.¡± Baelish continues. He gives a slight glance in Cersei¡¯s direction, which all of us but Tommen mimic.


    The late Ned Starks act of lending his guards to the Watch and leaving him unprotected is a rumour floating among the nobles. The few nobles that haven¡¯t abandoned the city to return to their estates either don¡¯t have the required guards or are unwilling to turn them over to earn the royal families ¡®good faith¡¯. Unless we offer significant rewards that are not worth the quality, their guards will remain right beside them until this period of unrest is over.


    Cersei does not let the barb go unnoticed and returns it. ¡°In the event the cities protection is insufficient does it not fall to the master of coin to provide funds for the additional man-power?¡± She throws at him.


    ¡°The kingdoms treasury is empty, as your grace is aware, with what little liquid funds we had were already spent hiring the additional 1000 men. To recruit additional forces, I would need to borrow from outside sources again, but most would take too long, and those few that would, such as the Iron Bank, have rejected my proposal. The uncertainty of the situation has made them reluctant to invest, and there have even been hints that they will not lend any more until we have repaid atleast a percentage of what is owed, though they have yet to officially request more than the interest.¡± Baelish responds, reminding me of the headache that Robert left the Kingdom with.


    It is amazing that I once looked up to the man. Though my brother always dismissed him as a fool, and I knew he was no great ruler, as a fellow fighter and general I was respectful of his exploits. Though there is a difference between not being a very good ruler, and a down-right horrible one.


    My brother informed me of how much Robert was borrowing from my family, but the full picture of just how much was owed is staggering. 6 million dragons, 3 million of which is owed to the Iron Bank at 12.5% interest. The kingdom makes on average 500,000 durig the long Summers and 300,000 during the Winters, meaning the average earnings of the kingdom is only slightly above the interest we need to pay yearly to keep the amount from increasing. It is fortunate that the majority of the remaining debt is to the Lannister and Tyrell families which will soon be the royal family.


    If we were faced with several years of Summer then perhaps we could focus our expenses on reducing the amount owed to the Iron Bank thus reducing the interest and bringing the kingdom back into the green. However, we have just experienced several years of Summer and it is unlikely to last much longer, followed by what is expected to be the longest Winter in a hundred years.


    These remaining years of Summer won¡¯t even be ones at peace. The war will divert men from the fields and ruin the harvests, with half the Kingdoms at conflict with us and refusing to pay taxes. From the lands we have that remain loyal we will be lucky to receive 100,000 dragons. Though we could use the funds belonging to the Tyrell and Lannister families, it would only weaken our family further and put greater strain on the realm.


    ¡°The Iron Bank are nothing more than merchants that have an intimidating name. ¡®A Lannister always pays their debts¡¯, we are their greatest customers and as such deserve their trust. If they refuse to do business with them then we will ignore all future transactions with them, including the interest. We will pay what is owed and nothing more.¡± Cersei boldly states.Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    I frown and address her foolish statement, forgetting my manners in my anger. ¡°Are you insane? We already have half the kingdoms at our throat due to your actions, do you want to turn the most powerful bank in the world against us as well?¡±


    ¡°Could it be that you are afraid Uncle? The Iron Bank may have an intimidating name, but that is all. They don¡¯t have troops or land. That we deal with them is their honour, us working by their terms so long was solely due to our honour and if they wish to oppose us we could crush them like gnats.¡± Cersei sneers at me. The rest of the small council duck their heads to avoid our attention, other that Tommen who looks concerned at us fighting.


    ¡°They might not have household troops, but they do have gold and live in the most mercenary infested city in the world. The Iron Bank is the direct sponsor of a dozen mercenary companies, with connections to hundreds of others. From Braavos alone they could hire 10,000 sell-swords and reach numbers of 100,000 if they look to the rest of Essos.¡± I remind her that unlike Westeros, where large sell-sword companies are in the minority, in Essos they are scattered all over with some being individually capable of contending therealms of Westeros.


    I may not worry about them to the same extent as my brother, who believes they are more dangerous in subtler ways, but I know not to anger a force which could drown us in a wave of gold. Especially not when we are facing so many enemies of our own.


    ¡°Uncle, please I am sure mother was only concerned for the realm and made some harsh remarks without meaning to. Let¡¯s please focus on what we can do to solve our current problem. Grandmaester, do you have any wisdom to give on the subject?¡± Tommen speaks up to halt the conflict, directing our attention to perhaps the most neutral man in the room.


    Cersei and I back down with the opportunity provided. I feel embarrassed rising to the situation in public, though I am pleased Tommen used the distraction to calm it before escalating. I wish he would learn to call us the Lord Hand and Queen Regent though. Such familiarities are not appropriate in public, especially in important settings.


    ¡°Your Grace, I am afraid I cannot offer any quick cure to the illness that plagues this kingdom. All I can offer is knowledge from the past to try and avoid the situation deteriorating.¡± Pycell speaks in his fragile tone of voice, rasping breaths in between excuses.


    ¡°The war is unlikely to end in any short time, and I am afraid the refugee problem will become worse. The criminal element is only one of the symptoms of a city filled beyond its capacity. We will soon face food shortages and in the past when such large numbers are enclosed in walls, disease has been known to occur.¡± Pycell voices the greatest of my worries, especially with the possibility of this city coming under siege.


    The food situation is not much of a worry, we were well stocked before this conflict and the alliance with the Reach will allow food flow to resume shortly. The greatest issue is the possibility of a plague occurring. There have been several occasions in the history of the Seven Kingdoms where a fortress fell not to attackers but rather to illness. If one starts and is not contained in time then we may need to abandon the capital without ever seeing our enemy.


    ¡°Would the best solution not be to simply close the gates and deny them access? Rather than have them clogging the streets and cost us for their upkeep, wouldn¡¯t it be more prudent to send them to the fields where they can be of use?¡± Cersei suggests rather harshly.


    ¡°But mother, they are scared and running from war, what will they think if I just shut the gate on them?¡± Tommen asks, more out of concern for thepeasants safety than his own reputation.


    ¡°I know it may seem harsh, your Grace, but it is probably for the best. Though you are truly kind to put the people¡¯s needs before your own, I fear that mercy without taking care of oneself will only lead to destruction of both parties. If the people are allowed to enter without having the space or food to feed them, they will only suffer more, with us soon facing the confused masses who unjustly blame us for their problems.¡± Pycell comforts Tommen.


    ¡°I agree, Your Grace. Under the circumstances a heavy hand is needed. They won¡¯t be left to rot outside, we can send them to the nearby fields that have been left deserted on account of the men marching to war.¡± I tell Tommen of my position, Varys and Baelish remaining silent.


    What I don¡¯t tell Tommen is that they will probably be safer in the countryside than the capital at the moment. The northern fields are protected by my brother and they will be safe from bandits with the constant patrols Tywin has ordered to ensure clear supply lines. The capital on the other hand is facing the possibility of a siege from the East. Speaking of which...


    ¡°Now that that issue is out of the way, Varys what have your spies to tell about our enemies to the East?¡± I ask the spymaster, not anticipating just how bad the answer to that question is.

 chapter 66 - The 2 Chosen Ones

    Varys POV


    I am faced with a dilemma. I walk along the corridor and back to my room, the meeting that lasted hours has finally ended.


    In the meeting I told the small council of the current threat to the Lannister rule, one that could either be the kingdoms saviour or destroyer. Daenerys Targaryen.


    It seems the princess not only survived her trip across the Red Waste but has even found herself some unlikely allies. The first is the Black Dragons of Qarth, named after the unproven sightings of dark coloured dragons that roam the plains of Asshai.


    They are a not nobles, merchants or even sell-swords. They are a criminal organisation that specialises in assassination. When one speaks of the top assassins guilds, the first one will always be the Faceless men. Situated in Braavos they worship the god of Death, the God of many Faces, and are known for both their high price of purchase, and exceptional method in which they carry out kills on even the most guarded targets.


    The Faceless men are considered more famous in Westeros and the Western coast of Essos though, and the further you go past the ruins of Old Valyria the less they are heard and used. The second group that were particularly famous a decade ago were the Sorrowfull men, whose base was actually inside Qarth. They were famous for saying ¡®I am sorry¡¯ just before killing their targets. Their connections with the Warlock and other so-called sorcerers has allowed them to use a large number to poisonous and flashy methods of assassination that allowed them to compete with the Faceless Men.


    What few outside of Qarth know is that the Sorrowful men are no more. An upcoming group challenged them for supremacy and they began a month of killing and counter killing. The people of Qarth were terrified,and believed that it was the cause of spirits and demons, as the people that died were both known to few others and died in especially gruesome ways. The 2 groups attempted to intimidate the opposing side with their own unique methods, and it initially seemed like the Faceless men were victorious with the ones identified dead belonging overwhelmingly to the Black Dragons.


    There was one they could never catch however, and that led to their downfall. The leader of the Black Dragons and its founder, was a man of mystery who until a short while ago was known only as ¡®Dusk¡¯ due to his killings only happening at night. Every night another of the Sorrowfull¡¯s top men would fall. It didn¡¯t matter how many of the Black Dragons they seemingly killed, as they could never get the leader.


    In the end they lost so many of their core members that they tried to involve outsiders. They offered sums and favours to the 13 Merchants that ruled the city of Qarth, hoping to use their influence and power to flush Dusk from hiding. The result was that one of the 13 was killed the next night with a message written into their bodies with a knife. The 13 only had to stay neutral and let the assassins fight, otherwise he would start targeting them.


    The 13 have always been good at picking the winning side and knowing who offers the better deal. Compared with just staying out of the way and using huge amounts of resources to save a dying and weak assassins guild, the choice was obvious. In a few days, the remaining Sorrowfull elements fled from the city and the Black Dragons took over. Their ranks filled with amazing speed and they soon replaced the Faceless as the prime assassination organisation in the region, involving themselves in not just Qarth, but the surrounding towns and cities that lined the Straits.


    The Sorrowfull still had several bases scattered around,such as in the Slavers Bay and East of Quarth in YiTi and Asshai, but with their leadership either dead or running they soon fell to disorder as well. The splinter groups either changed their names to become new organisations, or they declared themselves to be the new Sorrowfull Men, throwing off the old leadership.


    For 10 years the Black Dragons expanded with reported numbers reaching over the hundreds. They started to spread beyond the border cities of Quarth, where their businesses included not just assassinations but other disreputable activities. This all changed 6 months ago, when Daenerys Targaryen arrived in Qarth. She tried to get support from the 13 merchants but she was refused. One of the 13, Xaro Daro attempted to wed her so that he could get control of her dragons, even staging a coup in the city to try and take power.


    Daenerys was saved by the unlikely arrival of Dusk. She apparently negotiated the help of the Black Dragons, and with their help she fled from Qarth with her dragons and they made their way to Astapor. I am extremely curious to what she offered, because not only did Dusk offer to help reclaim the Seven Kingdoms, he also stepped out into the light for her. For the first time in 2 decades since Dusk first made his mark in Qarth, he revealed his face and true name, Ajax.


    It was with the help of Ajax and her now loyal knight, Jorah Mormont, that she made it to Astapor and acquired her second set of allies. The Unsullied.


    Though they are looked down upon by the nobles and Masters of both continents for being slaves, no-one can deny their skill on the battlefield. Since their victory in Qohor against the unstoppable Dothraki Hordes they have been purchased by rich men all over Essos as private protection and elite foot soldiers.


    Daenerys set the Unsullied free and earned their loyalty. With them Daenerys conquered the city of Astapor and now resides there as it¡¯s queen. It was until this point that I informed the rest of the Small council. Any less and they would think I was hiding information when they eventually came to know of it themselves.Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.


    What I did not tell them was that The Targaryen has started recruiting additional forces among the freed slaves to expand her army. She also publicly declared that she will be returning to Westeros to reclaim what belongs to her family. If I told them this then despite the lack of funds they would stop at nothing to rid the world of her.


    Tommen is a good candidate for a king. Despite his age he has great promise, comes from the most powerful family in Westeros and will soon be married to the second most powerful family, with Lady Margery being one known to have the people in her heart. He has the greatest support in Westeros and if given time he will grow to be a great king.


    The problem is that he might not be given that time. When this war ends the Seven Kingdoms may not necessarily unite again. Even if the Lannister army is victorious in the field, if the victory comes at too great a cost, or it takes too long, then we will be facing chaos comparable to the Age of Heroes.


    It is called the Age of Heroes because of the countless amazing figures that arose during the time, men and women who performed feats thought impossible. What they neglect is the countless innocents sacrificed in the wars these heroes started. What the kingdom needs is not someone that does amazing things at the cost of their people, but a ruler who will put aside their ambitions and pride for the sake of the peoples prosperity.


    Unfortunately, that requires a firm foundation that Tommen lacks. If he is not successful in putting down the rebellions, then we will be faced with constant dissent for the next half a century. In that case it is perhaps a ¡®hero¡¯ that we need. One who will intimidate the unruly Lords and would be kings into submission.


    If that comes to be, then Daenerys is perhaps the better option. She has the right name, her family ruling Westeros for centuries, so she has the birth-right. She has the will, bending the Dothraki hordes to her cause, surviving the schemes of assassins and merchants in Qarth. Going on to conquer the city of Astapor, one that has remained in the hands of the Powerful Masters hands for centuries, ever since the fall of Valaryia.


    She has the might to crush her opposition. A powerful army that is regarded as the most disciplined force across 2 continents, and one of the most feared organisations in the world. And she has 3 dragons.


    The only problem is that there will be another war to fight. With the Tyrell declaring support for Tommen, Deanerys has only Dorne to support her. The other kingdoms will not throw their weight behind the child of the Mad King, one they have never met and who leads a foreign army. It could be another Aegon Targaryen all over, where entire cities and landscapes are burned to ash.


    Now that I have a choice between the 2, I want to leave it open until it is clear which is the right one. I downplayed the threat of the Targaryen, stressing that she was on the other side of the world and lacked the troops to be a significant threat. I highlighted that we had closer threats that were more pressing, that we could deal with her when the current situation was resolved.


    This war will decide who I need to support. If Tywin successfully wins the war with enough of his power remaining, then Tommen will be allowed to grow and with time we may see decades of peace led by a kind king. Unfortunately, Daenerys will have to be dealt with, before she can grow to be a threat. Though she has strong guards, can they defend from poison and a knife from behind? The whispers in the dark that tear her supporters from her side and leave her exposed?


    On the other hand, if this war goes poorly, then I will need to speed up collapse of Tommen¡¯s reign and secure other allies for Deanerys¡¯s eventual return.


    When I reach the room, I begin to write several encripted notes, a set of codes I devised when I was still in Pentos and send for my steward. ¡°Erich, could you please inform the servants that I wish to bathe at 9. I would like to have rose scented lavender added to it, please.¡± I inform Erich Brax.


    My steward is a spy put in place years ago by the Lannisters. What they don¡¯t know is that he was a spy that I manipulated them into sending. Afterall, there are few spies more vulnerable than little Erich here.


    Erich is the 3rd son of House Brax in the Westerlands, a small House in the Westerlands, and his mother had him with a man other than Lord Brax. Lady Brax was the second wife of Lord Brax and has only Erich as a child. When she failed to produce a child with the Lord, and was suspected of being barren, she made love to a stable-hand in secret, which produced my steward.


    Lady Brax tried to have the real father removed, and failed, causing the man to flee and go into hiding. When Erich was assigned as my steward, I sent a detailed picture of the father, a chap that now goes by Harry in Wendish Town, to Lady Brax. She then confirmed with Erich that the man was his father and that her husband could never know or they would both be killed. Having an affair and impersonating a noble heir is quite a serious crime after all.


    Erich begged me not to tell anyone, and what he could do to ensure my silence. I told him he only needed to do what he was supposed to. Pass information about me to the Lannisters, though only the information I wanted.


    My request for a bath has several messages. The mention of ¡®rose¡¯ indicates I want him to contact my broker in the city who has information on the Tyrell family. The Lannisters will pay attention to my movements, but my intentions with the Tyrell are not only expected of me, but they are entirely beneficial to the Lannisters, as they can use my connections through me to better look into their new adversaries. The message that I want hidden is contained before that.


    The request for a bath at 9 indicates i want him to contact one of my birds among the kitchen staff, a lovely young girl called Ira. Ira will find my notes in a hollowed wood by the stables, and will transport the notes outside of the keep to one of the drop boxes in the city. Another of my birds will take those notes and bring them outside the city where one of my trusted agents will be waiting.


    They will read the message. The message is constructed in a way that it gives 2 messages depending on what method youn use to read it. The first way gives only the recipient and when it needs to be received, the second contains the instructions for the recipient. Even if my enemies discover one of the primary chains, it will take time to follow the path to the actual agents, and by that time I will have discovered the slip and warn them. Even if the agents are found they will have serious trouble getting them to reveal information.


    My agents are all former birds that have grown up, and they were ones found to be intelligent and fiercely loyal to me. They were taught to read and write, as well as methods of interrogation and how to resist them. The final stage is that they will have their tongues cut and swallow a toxin that destroys their vocal cords. This is done to prevent them revealing information accidentally. I comfort myself that they were all in worse situations before, that without me they would have died anyway on the streets or fields of wars. In the end the greatest solace is that their sacrifice serves the greater good, that their actions will help to save countless others from filling their shoes.

 chapter 67 - The Cost of War

Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site.


    rd

 chapter 68 - Regrets, Roasts and Revelations

rd


    This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work.

 chapter 69 - New information, New plans

A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.

 chapter 70 - Dreams and Determination

    The evening sun wakes me from my slumber as it shines upon my face. The room I currently occupy is one of the former Frey residences that faces the West side. It is a small room with a desk, small wardrobe and bed suitable for a knight. As a lord i was given a room inside the castle so I didn¡¯t need to sleep outside in a tent, but due to my low standing I was not given one of the better rooms.


    The Frey rarely had visiting guests of high standing and fewer still who wished to spend the night under the roof of the late Walder. Most would rather choose to rent a room in one of the inns than spend more time than necessary with the Frey family. The combined with the huge family meant that space was limited so most of the good rooms were used by the family members, this being one of them.


    The few noble guest rooms were occupied by the larger Nobles like Umber and Bolton, while the small Lords like myself were delegated the rooms of the remaining Frey. Ironically the dead members¡¯ rooms are still unoccupied as it is considered in bad taste to kill someone and sleep in their bed the next night.


    Instead the surviving family were evicted- no, sorry, i mean they willingly relinquished their rooms for their guests while they moved to either the servant¡¯s quarters or barracks.


    I rise from my bed, shirtless but still wearing last night¡¯s trousers, and moved to the wardrobe in search of clothes. The servant that led me to my room also told me that they had brought my luggage from the main camp, as well as settled my horse in the stables.


    This was about 4 in the morning, when after spending half the night walking and drinking, I made my way back to the keep and caught one of the night maids to show me where I could sleep.


    Luckily, I ran out of ale outside the keep and was too far to easily refill. Combined with my superior constitution allowed me to sober up enough before my exhaustion caused me to sleep outside where I would have likely become sick. Without a barrier between myself and the ground, the heat from my body would have been drawn away and I would have caught pneumonia.


    After stripping myself of yesterday¡¯s clothes I chuck on a fresh set and leave the room. My first stop is the well outside where I draw a bucket worth. Taking a few gulps first to quench my thirst, I then use a cloth to wipe my face and body from most of the grime. The cold water is brisk upon my skin and despite the lack of soap I feel a thousand times cleaner. After making my way to the kitchen i ask the chef to give me something to eat. He informs me that dinner for the soldiers will be in an hour and to wait till then.


    It was clear that he mistook me for a peasant, and normally i wouldn¡¯t bother arguing, but because i was particularly hungry and I didn¡¯t want to dine in the hall with the other Lords I informed him of who i was.


    My name seemed to give a rather dramatic reaction, whitening face and shaking hands that he almost dropped his knife before clutching it closer as if to protect himself. Thinking for a second it was an understandable reaction. He is one of the Frey¡¯s chef and I am likely considered a bogeyman in the keep after last night¡¯s antics.


    Though he looked to doubt me for a moment, but either he saw me before and now remembers my face, or the look in myeyes convinced him how serious i was. He immediately apologised and offered to cook some stew if I desired. I told him not to go through the trouble, just get me some bread and jerky from the pantry.


    With it I made myself a sandwich and made to leave before pausing at the doorway. I turned and tossed a stag I received from my pocket.


    ¡°For your trouble.¡± I spoke before leaving. I thought there was no point scaring the poor man over a meal, especially if I am planning to stickaround. That¡¯s right, I decided to stay.


    I admit I debated it for a while. In fact, it was just before I went to bed that I thought I would definitely leave. As soon as I woke I would grab Brutus and my horse, ride for White Harbour and my family, then off to Essos. Where exactly i don¡¯t know.


    I figured that there was no point sticking with the army, if I did then I would just be made to kill more irrelevant people. The ones truly responsible for the war and Ned¡¯s death are in the capital, but this war won¡¯t lead to their deaths. I could tell from Rob¡¯s tone that while he hated the Lannisters like Tywin and Cersei, his desire lied in his sisters return.


    So long as Sansa remained with them, their death would never come. Even if we sieged King¡¯s Landing and destroyed their army, so long as Sansa remains in their hands they can bargain for their lives. The only ones to die are soldiers that follow orders and maybe some bannermen that had no part in what happened in Kings Landing.


    I am not saying killing is evil, as that would be hypocritical. I would and have killed for self preservation, for my loved ones and for benefit. The problem is I could see none of these fighting the Lannisters.


    At least till i closed my eyes to sleep.


    In my dream i watched as Ned lost his head, only to disappear and be replaced by the other Starks, Rob, Sansa, Bran, Arya and Rickon. I watched as their lives were taken from them, all because they got wrapped up in schemes not their own.


    Every time that blade swung, stripping the world of a young wolf, i felt a piece of my heart disappear as well. When the last head fell, and my tears had dried, I found myself face to face with Ned. Literally, as he was only a head, as he looked at me with disappointment.


    ¡°Ben, was my vow so weak that it lasted not even a year before you have forgotten?¡± He asked in a somber and soft voice. I looked at him in confusion, until his face disappeared and a different scene appeared. An open field with 2 riders side by side. It took a moment to realise it was me and Ned.


    I am pretty sure I know what is coming next, but i still watch anyway. ¡°Those who keep their oaths are in short supply these days, knowing another is serving my family brings me comfort.¡± Ned drew his sword. ¡°I swear to you Ser Baskerville, by the gods New and Old, if you protect my family, I will protect yours.¡± As Ned finishes swearing his vows he stays in that position for some time before he disappears again.A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    I feel tears come again and it seems even dried as my eyes are they can still produce the flood. It is only now I realise how mistaken I was, nearly betraying the qualities I once thought so precious.


    I wanted to flee the war to protect my family and avoid suffering. But the Starks are a part of my family, brothers and sisters I spent years watching grow into the people they are today. Ned was my friend and betraying his trust will cause my heart to suffer. Since I will face pain stay or leave, I will choose the method most likely to preserve my family.


    Though in the great scheme of war maybe I will have little effect, but I know Rob and the North will have a greater chance winning with me here. And should our army fail on the field, I will take to the woods and hills, and deliver my terror to the Westerlands. For as long as soldiers bearing lions try to take my home, I will grant no peace to the Lannister lands.


    With my decision made my dream vanished and only the eternal darkness welcomed me. With my mind and soul at peace all remained was to rest my weary body and prepare for what would come.


    *****


    After an hour I made my way to the main study, previously belonging to Walder Frey but has now been repurposed by Rob into a meeting room for the War council. After asking a guard where Rob was i was told there had been a meeting earlier but I was asleep at the time and Rob ordered that i be left alone as I was in need of rest. On the way up the tower to the study i passed by several Lords who were descending.


    ¡°Good lad. Keep your head up.¡± Lord Umber says patting me on the shoulder as he passed. He gives a huge smile and I nod while returning a grin. The other Lords are far less friendly, but most greet me with a ¡®Milord¡¯ as we pass which i return. Some look to me disapprovingly, but whether that was for missing the meeting, my previous behaviour or some other reason is unknown. I dismiss those and greet them all the same. After they all passed, I continued up the tower before reaching a room with a thick door and 2 guards standing outside.


    ¡°Inform Lord Stark that I am here to see him.¡± I speakto the one on the right who bows shortly and knocks on the door before entering. A few seconds later he exits the room and tells me i am allowed inside.


    As the guard closes the door behind me i take in the room. Rob is sitting behind a desk with a chalice and pitcher of what islikely to be water beside him and several pages with writing laid out in front of him.Lady Stark is standing to the right behind him, from what i assume was her previously pacing.


    ¡°Ben! Glad you are feeling better. I wanted to call you for the meeting but thought some sleep would do you better so you had a fresh mind. I was going to send a servant to fetch you after the meeting if you had awoken, but it seems you beat me to it.¡± Rob says with a smile, my improved demeanour obvious to him.


    ¡°Sorry for my tardiness, Lord Stark. In truth I should have slept much earlier the previous night, but I needed time to clear my head.¡± I don¡¯t return the informal greeting and instead slightly bow my head. As i raise it i look him in the eyes and try to bring out the elephant in the room.


    ¡°More so than my lateness, my foolishness is what I really feel the need to apologise for, My Lord. Due to my arrogance, I lost dozens of your soldiers and abandoned them to their doom on the day of the attack. They were brave and loyal men, who joined an unknown commander to attack a heavily armed fort with far fewer numbers. If i had kept them contained and retreated when I had the chance, or just made greater considerations for a counterattack, then maybe they would still be here to serve you.¡± When i finished kneeled to the floor. ¡°I await any punishment you choose to give me, My Lord.¡±


    Rob waits for a few moments then places the quill e was writing with on the table. Lady Stark looks to me for a moment, then turns to face Rob, appearing to wait for his decision like i am. When Rob speaks hedoes so in a tired voice.


    ¡°*sigh* several people have approached me concerning that. Some like Umber think what you did was disappointing, but considering your accomplishments could just be waved off as no rewards and no punishment. Others like Roose think you did the correct thing and has expressed admiration for your tactical talent. He wants you to be in charge of the armies scouts,so you could plan more effective ambushes in the future.¡± Rob starts with the good news before giving the bad.


    ¡°The majority however think you fucked up and acted disgracefully, the knights in particular, but you haven¡¯t exactly been winning many points with them recently. Most viewed you as a competitor for fame and promotion until recently and your lack of tact last night did nothing to win you any friends. They argue you should be stripped of your title as punishment. The biggest problem lies with the commoners. A lot think you were a coward to abandon your men to the enemy. Even the few survivors of your unit don¡¯t have much to say in your defence. Most of them call you a demon, someone who can perform the impossible and slaughter our enemy, but treats our own like shit as well. They don¡¯t dare gossip about punishing you, but most just want to keep as far away from you as possible.¡± Rob explains with a smocking smile.


    That is understandable. What they are saying is mostly true, though there are a few exaggerations and assumptions, i can¡¯t argue the events. I feel like the best comparison for my reputation at the moment is that of Gregor Clegane, ¡®The Mountain''. A powerful fighter who is renowned for his strength and his cruelty.


    Though it is likely nowhere near asbad as his, afterall he has been known for years and has never done anything to contradict his reputation. Besides i have never been particularly cruel to the peasants, my reputation born of cowardice rather than rage. A shame my previous popularity has been forgotten


    Huh, actually it seems i am ironically more similar to the ¡®Kingslayer¡¯ than the mountain. Jaime may be a renowned fighter but his most famous act is his stabbing of the Mad King in theback, a cowardly and dishonourable act in the eyes of nobles and commoners alike. His glory as the youngest Kings Guard swapped for the shame of being the only one to kill their king.


    ¡°In the end i can¡¯t just dismiss your punishment, not if I want to keep the moral of the army. But I am also not going to do something stupid like dismiss you for a single mistake. Instead i am revoking your right of command. I will announce that you are never allowed to command any forces other than your own. I am instead assigning you as the forward scout on our march to Riverrun. You will risk your life and use your accomplishments to make up for the ones you Lost.¡± Rob declares solemnly.


    Rob decides my sentence and i have to agree that it is a good one. The right of command refers to the fact that during war what a noble says pretty much goes. Unless a soldier or servant has been given orders otherwise they are required to cater to the commands of the nobles, as their ¡®superior officers¡¯. I being stripped of that right means I can¡¯t give anyone orders and am automatically considered thelowest in the chain of command among the nobility for whatever unit i join. Assigning me to the scouts is just another way to shame me as it means living in the pen and venturing into dangerous territory ahead of the army for days at a time. On top of the risk accompanied it is considered undignified and improper for one of nobility


    But the second ¡¯punishment¡¯ makes the first pretty much irrelevant. The one in charge of the Stark scouts at the moment is Theon, who knows better than to give me trouble if he wants to avoid some good-natured sparing at least. On top of the fact that scouts require being seperated from the army for extended periods means no-one can give me orders most of the time anyway and we are left to our own devices.


    As for danger, i had confidence in escaping from the entire Northern army when i was right in the middle of it, i am pretty sure i can avoid some patrols.

 chapter 71 - Preparing a play

    ¡°I accept my punishment and thank Milord for his mercy and for the opportunity to make up for the shame i have caused you.¡± I say to Rob from my kneeling position, not letting my internal thoughts appear on my face.


    ¡°That is good. I hope you will make the best use of this decision.¡± Rob replies in a solemn manner. He then smiles and speaks again. ¡°Now will you please stand up and join me for a drink? I really need to take a break from this paperwork.¡±


    I return the smile, knowing that with Rob¡¯s words my punishment is finished and the formalities can be dispensed. We can now return to what we were before.


    ¡°I will happily accompany you Rob, but i will pass on the liquor. I wasted enough time last night and need a clear head. At least if you don¡¯t want a bear to continue walking free inside the keep, scaring the help and eating the supplies.¡± I reply, remembering that i still need to find Brutus.


    I can feel his Qi vaguely so i know he is still in the keep, or at least the surrounding area, and he is smart enough to behave. Still, i don¡¯t want to push my luck with him getting worried and a misunderstanding happens.


    ¡°*sigh* That¡¯s a shame. You know, i miss the days when Theon and I would sneak away from lessons with a flask of wine and hide in town. Now i drink because it is socially expected of me, with the number of times i do with friends becoming less and less. I never knew leadership could turn simple pleasures into chores.¡± Robb speaks with a melancholy look in his eyes.


    It makes me think back to 2 years ago, i had just finished a tourney and came across Robb and Theon leaving the keep for one of their outings. They invited me and Jon along, but Jon thought it was improper so he skipped it. I had no such reservations so after leaving Brutus with the younglings, i brought the 2 to the town.


    When we got back after dark i watched as they got chewed out by Lady Stark and later told to do additional training the next day by Ned. I think Lady Stark would have scolded me as well if she got the chance, but i was smart enough to leave when she finished with them.


    ¡°Oh well. Maybe it is for the best that we don¡¯t drink. I wanted to fill you in on what you missed at the meeting. Maybe you can see something that we missed.¡± Robb then relays the details of their discussion.


    When he told me the Tyrells had joined with the Lannisters i had to admit i wasn¡¯t expecting it. I don¡¯t know much about the Tyrells, afte rall the Reach is separated by the Riverlands and Westerlands from the North. We have almost no trade with them as their main exports are grain, livestock and horses.


    Most of our food is traded from the Riverlands and livestock is one our exports so we rarely buy outside sources. Our lands aren¡¯t the best for raising horses so the few we purchase are typically inferior breeds from the Riverlands and Westerlands. The few prize horses that come from the Reach are usually bought specially, where the nobles travel to the Reach to choose the horse that fits them best.


    Combined with the fact that the Iron Islands act as a barrier for ships travelling North in the West, means people of my station almost never interact with the people from the Reach. My knowledge of them comes from history and my short time in King¡¯s Landing.


    Historically the Tyrells, Paramounts of the Reach, have always taken the safe approach, similar to the Frey they tend to wait for a determined winner before making a move. During Robert¡¯s Rebellion, while they sided with the Mad King, they only sieged Storms End, and after the battle of the Trident had surrendered, unlike the Dorne who continued to resist for a time.


    As for King¡¯s Landing, all i know is that the combined suppression of the Baratheons and the Lannisters kept the Tyrell and most of the Reach from having any power in the Capital. It was only recently that with the support of Renly Baratheon that they started to make their appearance.


    I suppose benefits truly do mean the most in the end. Out of the eligible contenders for the throne, Tommen is definitely the strongest and Renly is the weakest. Even if it seems like a betrayal, the Tyrells are unlikely to risk their entire family¡¯s destruction by siding with Renly.


    When Robb told me the effects of this news, i could somewhat expect it. With the Tyrells siding with Tommen, the enemy could theoretically deal with all dissenters at the same time, even if it meant fighting on multiple fronts. The only counter is to deal a large enough blow to their forces before they have time to regroup.


    If we divide the army and use one to distract Tywin, while the other strikes Jaime, we could cripple half the Lannister forces and gain reinforcements from the rest of the Riverlands.


    ¡°Is there no-one else that we could ask for help? What about asking your aunt and the Vale Lords? They seemed pretty favourable of your side when i was there. Or hell, you could even try the Iron Islands. They might not like us but they aren¡¯t exactly fans of the Lannisters and Baratheons either. Besides the only heir to House Greyjoy is still with us and he is one of your honour guards. If BaLon doesn¡¯t want to risk his line coming to an end they need to make sure we survive this war.¡± I ask to confirm we have explored our options.If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    ¡°That won¡¯t work. My sister is adamant on the Vale remaining out of the war. Maybe if we defeated the Lannisters a few times, prove we have a chance at coming out victorious, we could convince her to deploy the other Lords.¡± Lady Stark shakes her head in disappointment.


    ¡°The Iron Islands is even more unlikely. We would need to send a messenger to Seaguard, then sail a ship to the Islands and only then could negotiations begin. Even if Balon immediately agreed to fight with us it would take too long to gather his bannermen. By that time Riverrun would have fallen and the rest of the Riverlands with it.¡±


    ¡°Even if the Iron Islands then joined us, they are famous for their navy, not their armies. They have the fewest troops out of the rest of the kingdoms, even less than the Riverlands. We would have no chance against the monstrosity that is the Lannister and Tyrell alliance.¡± Rob replies.


    ¡°It is far more likely for them to attack us instead. The Iron Islands have always been the sort to bully the weaker party.¡± Lady Stark adds with a touch of scorn. Seems she is one of the many Northerners who hold distaste for the Iron Islanders. Probably even more considering the Riverlands, her homelands, history with the Islands.


    ¡°So we¡¯re on our own? *sigh* that just makes me even more hesitant to divide our forces. If we send too many as a distraction, then even if we catch Jaime off-guard we may still lose. Don¡¯t forget that He is not some paper lion. He has been fighting alongside the King¡¯s Guard since he was 15, and followed experienced commanders like Ser Barristan and King Robert. He won¡¯t lose easily.¡± I point out my concerns.


    ¡°We have no choice but to risk it. Even with the Tully forces in Riverrun we only just outnumber the Lannister forces lead by Jaime. If they find out we are coming then Tywin can send reinforcements from the Westerlands or his own force. If Jaime knows we are coming from the North then he will position his defences and troops to prepare for us. If we take them by surprise the fact they are divided to siege Riverrun is our best hope.¡± Rob reminds me of the need to hide our forces...


    ¡°Hold on. We just need to make Tywin think we are still on this side of the river, right? There is no real need to make him think we are marching south, we could just tell them we are still in the siege couldn¡¯t we?¡± I ask to clarify the main reason behind the need to send a vanguard.


    ¡°Lord Hornwood already suggested this. Even if we sent them false information, a single scout is all it would take to determine the lie. We briefly considered leaving the distraction Force at the Twins to put on the show that we are still sieging the Twins, thus not having to put so much risk on losing the vanguard. But unless we left most of our forces behind the difference in numbers would be too obvious. Tywin would immediately question where the rest of our forces have gone.¡±


    ¡°We would have to leave behind too many that it would defeat the main purpose of defeating Jaime. A vanguard will disguise the rest of our force and put too much pressure on Tywin to risk our bluff.¡± Rob answers, assuming my next suggestion and shooting it down.


    Instead i ask a different question. ¡°Hey Rob, What is the difference between a levy and a peasant?¡± I ask.


    ¡°A levy is just a peasant that has been conscripted and armed with a weapon.¡± Rob answers, clearly confused with the change in topic.


    ¡°And from a distance, can you tell the difference between a peasant armed with a sword and one armed with a stick?¡± I ask another, a smile slowly growing on my face.


    Rob frowns and instead of answering, asks me instead. ¡°What are you thinking, Ben?¡±


    ¡°We need to make any scouts Tywin sends think we are still East of the Green Fork. To that we can trick them into thinking we are still sieging the Twins, but we don¡¯t necessarily need soldiers to do the sieging.¡±


    Rob and Lady Stark look to me with surprise, the realisation of what i am suggesting dawning on them.


    ¡°Are you suggesting to create another army made of peasants armed with sticks?¡± Lady Stark ask.


    ¡°¡¯Army¡¯ is perhaps too generous. More like a campsite. The lands belonging to the Frey easily have several tens of thousands of peasants in the surrounding villages and towns. Arranging for 20,000 to move into tents outside the East Twin is no more than a few days work. Course, we can¡¯t just leave them like that. If a scout gets too close or they act too weirdly then it may give the game away.¡±


    ¡°So here is my suggestion. You were already planning to leave 1 thousand soldiers to guard the East Twin. Leave another 2 thousand to keep order and patrol the surroundings. Like this we could put on a show of a ¡®siege¡¯ for several weeks, enough time for us to travel south with the rest of our army and attack Jaime unprepared. By the time they realise what has happened it will be too late.¡± I reveal the entirety of my plan, grin spread clear across my face.


    The 2 others look at one another, questions and debates flashing across their eyes as they contemplate the pros and cons. In the end they decide to just voice the question.


    ¡°Is it really that easy? Using a bunch of peasants to trick Tywin and the rest of the Lannisters?¡± Rob asks.


    ¡°It is a huge risk. But no greater risk than trying to defeat Jaime with a smaller force by surprise. At least if we go with this plan we will have our entire army together and if the unexpected happens we will have more manoeuvrability to deal with it. If it becomes truly hopeless, we can still retreat back to the North where we can defend for several years and drag the Lannisters to the negotiating table.¡± Lady Stark lays out the worst possible situation. Though retreating and bunkering down north of the Neck is definitely the best response to that.


    The final say lays with Rob however, so both his mother and I look to him. He thinks about it for a moment, stands and begins to pace. I can hear him mumbling, and his mother seems to consider speaking, but ultimately decides to keep silent. After a minute he looks to me.


    ¡°I will call the Lords for another meeting. If we want this plan to work then we need to act quickly.¡± He says with determination in his eyes. I smile at that and start to think about where Brutus is likely hiding at. We have a lot of work to do and while they are gathering peasants we need to start scouting the southern route.

 chapter 72 - Meeting of the Bear and Hound

    Rob and i walked to the door and as i leave Rob, he tells the guards to call the other Lords for another meeting in an hour.


    I briefly wonder if it is better for me to attend the meeting, but i think it will be more efficient for me to miss it. If i showed up then some would comment on my absence from the last meeting, others would bring up my punishment and some may disagree or even outright reject the plan if they find out it came from me.


    Better to let Rob act like it was his plan and that i tell them my punishment without me there. That will make it seem like an internal matter and they shouldn¡¯t comment on it. Besides the main task for this plan is gathering the peasants which requires manpower, of which i have none.


    The only thing to discuss is the logistics which they are more informed about. Though i could help if i knew the specifics, but i am still new to the war camp and don¡¯t even know the exact numbers each Lord has under them. No i would be better off staying out of the way and finding Brutus. Maybe later i will find Theon and discuss with him how to carry out the scouting operations later.


    After descending the stairs i arrive at the main hall. Grabbing a maid i ask her if she¡¯s seen a giant dog anywhere. She told me she hadn¡¯t, but one of the kitchen hands was complaining that there was a beast in the back courtyard. Because he was too scared he couldn¡¯t get to the storehouse where they kept the flour and he was shouted at by the cook.


    Well the only animals that could scare someone like that are Brutus and Grey Wind, Rob¡¯s direwolf, and i would bet my beast is more intimidating. Making my way after getting directions, i suddenly feel something.


    Now that i am closer to Brutus i can feel some emotions in his qi, this particular one being pleasure. As i cross through another hallway and out the back door i find myself greeted with a sight out of a fairy tale.


    A giant beast, lying down on the floor with his eyes closed in contentment, and beside him is a young woman dressed in furs, stroking the beast behind the ears. The beast in this situation is clearly Brutus, but the lady is an unknown. I don¡¯t interrupt for the moment and try to get a better look.


    The woman is rather tall; i can tell that even from her kneeling position. Beneath her fur cloak is a dark green short dress that leads to a pair of brown trousers. Peeking out from her cloak is a pair of sturdy boots. Her hair is shoulder length, straight and black like a raven¡¯s. While her hands appear rough and strong, her face was smooth with light freckles on her cheeks.


    Though i am almost certain that i haven¡¯t met her before, i can¡¯t help but feel that she is familiar. As i am pondering her identity however, i hear someone call me.


    ¡°Lord Baskerville!¡± I turn my head to see a group of 3 men armed in fine clothes and sword at their sides. ¡°I hope you are finally here to take care of your nuisance of a beast. We have already received several complaints about your hound, how it has scared the ladies and servants, causing activities to cease in the kitchen. You realise that this means you are stalling the rest of the Lords and knights from eating and thus distracting them from their vital duties.¡±


    The middle of the gentlemen, who i suspect to be knights or highborn sons, as they definitely aren¡¯t Lords, speaks out to me in a scolding tone. He looks familiar as well, but unlike the woman, who i am not sure about, i am almost certain i have met him before. He is wearing a green shirt, but of a lighter colour than the woman, thick trousers and a short beard upon his face. He wears no sleeves, showing his crossed and trained arms.


    ¡°If it wasn¡¯t for the words of Lady Mormont i would have already dispatched your beast and sent the meat to the kitchen so it could better serve the army and to make up for the disruptions it has caused.¡± The man continues, bringing a frown to my face and my fingers start to feel a knife.


    I have no doubt the man is bluffing. There isn¡¯t anyone in either Twin that doesn¡¯t know who Brutus is and what he can do. The idea that this man of average stature could kill him is laughable. Even I would have trouble dealing with Brutus unless i used a bow, and while this bearded man likely knows the sword, he is no master.


    But that begs the question why he is clearly provoking me. I sense animosity from him, but also a lack of focus, like he is thinking of something else. Course that doesn¡¯t mean i will just let him continue to insult me and Brutus.The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    ¡°Brutus has been trained to never attack unprovoked, and was trusted by the late Ned Stark himself to escort his children unattended on several occasions. The staff¡¯s, as well as others who i will not name, lack of courage is not his concern.¡± I reply, putting particular emphasis on ¡°others¡±, as i stare at him.


    The message was clear as his face changes slightly, from mocking to annoyed. It is as i am wondering if he will make the next move that i hear the woman speak from the side.


    ¡°Enough Harken. Brutus is a comrade who fought beside the army when capturing this castle. Your attempt to liken him to a common beast to be butchered is insulting to both him and the men who died beside us.¡± She rises from the floor, to Brutus¡¯s displeasure at the lack of scratches, and turns to face us. It is at this point that i see the morning star attached to her hip and feel a picture completed.


    Dacey Mormont, the Fae of Bear Island. House Mormont has always been a good talking point in the pubs and inns of western North. It¡¯s unique position as the only House on Bear Island, as well it being a constant point of conflict between the North and our long-time foes, the Iron Born, makes for a many good stories.


    Recent years in particular have focused around the women of House Mormont. After the previous head fled the North, from punishment or something, his sister Mage ¡°the Mace¡± Mormont took over.


    The greatest talking point about Mage isn¡¯t her fighting skills, apparently something to be expected of someone who lives in a territory constantly raided, but how she has 4 children but no one knows who the father is. Instead Mage claims that her children have no father per say, but rather when a Mormont woman wants children she will go out into the woods and consort with beasts. A rather unbelievable rumour, but one that has yet to be disproved, especially since one of Mage¡¯s daughters has 2 children of her own and they likewise don¡¯t have any father to speak of.


    Just as i was thinking about the past, i found Dacey turning from Harken to face me. ¡°And you. Your confidence in your companion¡¯s behaviour has no relation to the thoughts ofothers. Expecting servants who have never seen a predator larger than a dog to be comfortable around Brutus is laughable. While Harken was wrong to dismiss Brutus¡¯s efforts, you were likewise at the wrong for disregarding the feelings of those that serve you.¡± She glares at me, height matching my own, with her hand placed on her morning star.


    Surprised at her words i take a step back as she steps forward.


    I consider explaining that i was joking about the servants courage, and was trying to insinuate Harken was the coward, but i quickly realise how childish that sounds. Without a quick response coming to mind i debate using sarcasm or humour to try and deflect for a moment, but her eyes seem to deny it.


    Deep green, like a forest full of fir trees, it reminded me of why she was called the Fae of Bear Island. As the heir to House Mormont with no male siblings to contend, many of the knights and second sons of the West coast regard the eldest daughter as the ideal marriage partner. Her looks that seemed to defy her mother¡¯s heritage, were one of the many topics that were discussed in the pubs and inns. They say her father had to of been a spirit to counter Mage¡¯s poor complexion.


    Though she is by no means the fairest of maidens, skin and hair worn by the elements, it seems only add to her charm. As i watch the slight changes in her expression i find myself unable to reply to her accusation, caught like a fish on a hook.


    After a few seconds she frowns again and turns to the other group. ¡°C¡¯mon Harken, mother wanted to see me after the meeting to convey Lord Stark¡¯s decision, i imagine Lord Crastac would want to do the same with you.¡± She says to them before leaving, her entourage quickly following, Harken looking to engage her in conversation.


    I suddenly remember where Harken seemed familiar from, the name ¡°Crastac¡± shining a light on my mind. Several years ago, before i was a knight, i participated in a tourney hosted by House Crastac for the Lord¡¯s first daughter¡¯s birthday. I succeeded in getting past the preliminaries, not without injuries, and reached the semi-finals.


    There was no archery contest as it wasn¡¯t to the Lord¡¯s preference, so i did my best in the fights, though i lost in the semis. My opponent was the second son to Lord Crastac, Harken, and i narrowly lost due to my injuries affecting my balance. But as a result of my harsh struggling i landed 2 solid blows to Harken¡¯s knee, which led to serious swelling after the fight.


    Unable to continue despite being the victor of the semi, he was forced to forfeit the final and concede victory to another. This was considered a rather embarrassing situation for House Crastac, since a knight from a rival House was the champion, and Harken surrendering gave the impression he was afraid.


    Though Lord Crastac never bothered me about it, Harken was heard afterwards complaining that i was spiteful with my strikes, trying to injure him so that his opponent would win the tourney. Obviously nonsense, i was trying to beat win the tourney myself, and only concentrated on his knee because he had the habit of over extending his front foot when he lunged. Eventually he wised up to it and fought conservatively for the rest of our match and beat me in the end, but the damage was done.


    I watch them walk away, my thoughts distracted, until i feel something rubbing against my hand. I look to see my primary objective, Brutus rubbing his snout on my hand apparently missing Dacey¡¯s attention.


    ¡°Come on you big baby, breaks over. Now the time to hunt has arrived.¡± I tell my companion with a smile, thoughts cleared with thoughts on what we need to do.


    Brutus understands my intentions and his lips curl into a smile as well. If the servants were to see the 2 of us then they would likely piss themselves in fear, the pair of us like 2 devils chuckling at the suffering to come.

 chapter 73 - Renlys Dilemma

    Loras Tyrell (5 days later)


    ¡°Lord Redwyne sends his apologies as he is unable to commit to your cause as he is dedicated to the Tyrell family and they have declared themselves for Tommen. He says he will continue to present your case to the Tyrell family and asks for your patience.¡± Maester Workall reads as he opens another letter, before handing it to his assistant who places it on a tray. A small pile is gathered on it, each letter bringing my kings frown lower and lower.


    ¡°Lord Brackweave says he is sorry for his delay, but though his sickness has passed his son has now fallen ill as well. He regrets he cannot send any troops at the moment as he claims he spotted scouts, either of bandit descent or Stannis¡¯s forces in the nearby woods.¡± As Workall takes the next letter to read, he stops for the first time and looks at Renly with a concerned look.


    As Renly gestures to him with impatience, Workall starts to read without the clarity he did before. ¡°The High Prince of Dorne, Doran Martell will support no one but the true heir to the throne, ah...¡± He patters off, reluctant to continue.


    ¡°Out with it! Tell me exactly what the ¡®High Prince¡¯ of Dorne says.¡± Renly shouts with venom covering his voice. Workall shivers before stuttering the rest of the message. I hold my breath in anticipation, for after all the other rejections, the maester and Renly had grown dulled. For this one to have such an impact, I brace myself at the turnout.


    ¡°...The tr-true heir to the throne, some... dressed up... Peacock... Has no right playing at being king!¡± Workall stutters the beginning before rushing the end. The room holds its breath for what seems like an age before a sudden clash and spark shatters the silence.


    ¡°THOSE UNGRATEFULL BASTARDS!!! They should be coming to me on their knees begging to serve me! No right to be king? I am the only one with any right!!¡± Renly screams to the room as if trying to reach Dorne with his voice alone. One of the braziers sitting beside his throne was grabbed and tossed into the middle of the room, lit coals spilling to the floor.


    ¡°The rest of them are just warmongering barbarians who only think about finding the biggest stick so they can extort the commoners for more gold. Do the nobles not realise that I am the only one that can keep the kingdom from falling.¡± Renly rants to himself, the room deciding to keep quiet.


    After several tense moments He speaks again, sharply. ¡°All of you leave me. I need to think.¡± He waves to the room. Workall and the guards bow before leaving with quick feet. All but myself. I stay where I am and as the rest leave Renly looks to me. We stare at one another before the faintest of a smile appears on his face, the first I have seen in days.


    Renly returns to his throne and as he sits I take my place behind him and start to massage his shoulders. He visibly relaxes as I get the deepest of knots, and when he is suitably calm, he asks me in a voice lacking the energy and passion he showed moments ago.


    ¡°Was I wrong, Loras? To believeIi could rule a kingdom with kindness rather than fear? I did it with the Stormlands, turned the territory Robert ruined into a land where bellies were full and the common people had shelter over their heads. I could have done it with the rest of them as well, instead of the pointless grudges we had before on actions decades past.¡± Renly speaks.


    I am conflicted, as on one hand Renly is correct. Since taking the seat of Paramount of the Stormlands Renly has charmed the other Lords and Ladies, earning their cooperation in his projects. Emphasising improvements to agriculture and trade between neighbouring domains led to more food and disposable income which led to greater taxes. The Stormlands became the richest it has been for over 50 years.


    His plans for the rest of the kingdoms, especially the ones Robert discriminated against, had the means to be successful. With my assistance he already helped the Reach to return to the court in Kings Landing, and together we could release the tensions in Dorne. Like that we would no longer need to spend so many funds on our borders to prevent conflict, and that money could be spent on improving the people¡¯s lives.


    Renly even had a plan to improve the Iron Island. After the war with the Ironborn 6 years ago the islands pretty much closed themselves off from Westeros, with minimal trade occurring with the other kingdoms. Renly wanted to use the heir to the Greyjoy throne, Theon Greyjoy, to change the way of the Ironborn.


    Not only did Balon¡¯s son grow up outside the Ironborns influence, he was raised by the honourable Eddard Stark a man my father often mentioned his jealousy for his reputation. He would no doubt hold different views from his fellow Ironborn about how to act, but this would put him into contention with his fellow Lords.


    That is where Renly would offer his assistance, providing his support in terms of trade and military from the Reach and Stormlands to help the Ironborn adopt new policies and even change the millennia long feud with the islanders and the mainland. But...


    ¡°But that requires people actually listening to me.¡± Renly answers for me, his smile changing to one of mocking.


    ¡°People do listen. The Dornish are prickly bastards who hate your family to the bone, you can¡¯t take that one letter for granted. The other lords are just undecided. I don¡¯t know what my family is doing, but I am sure they are tricking the Lannisters. They would never betray your kindness towards them after all these years.¡± I say in their defence, trying to keep his hopes up.


    ¡°Undecided? You are right about that. They haven¡¯t decided who is going to win this fight yet so they are avoiding any side, just like during my brothers rebellion. Even my own Lords, those that gave their word to fight besides me always, have sided with my brother over me. Even the ones like Brackweave who say they are on my side are avoiding me at all possibilities. His son falls sick right after he did? Scouts in the woods when House Buckler at Bronze Gate has seen not even a wiff of foreign forces? He is stalling until I either march to war where I win or lose without him, or I am attacked and he can hide in his keep under the excuse of defending his home.¡± Renly dismisses my words, even spiting my family, though I think he doesn¡¯t realise that.


    I decide not to hold it against him, as painful it is to have my lover speak the words many mocked us for in the past. Though the past actions of my family are often misunderstood by those who fail to look too deeply, I can¡¯t defend them too strongly since their current actions do speak against them.Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    I am just about to try and offer more words of encouragement, when the doors suddenly swing open to let in the captain of the guards, Michael, who performs a quick salute before speaking.


    ¡°My king! Apologies for the interruption. An urgent raven has arrived from Lord Staemon. He says Stannis has attacked! His fleet sailed down the Wind water and ambushed his keep. If nothing is done they will fall within the next 2 days.¡± Michael announces.


    Shocked I and Renly freeze for a moment before my king shows concern for his follower. ¡°Michael, is there any way we can send aid in time?¡± He asks.


    ¡°Impossible, my King. Staemon reports that Stannis is leading a force 10,000 strong. Most of our forces are concentrated here and at the Bronze Gate. Neither can mobilise and travel fast enough to make any difference to the fight, and unless we combine our numbers we can¡¯t defeat such a force in the field.¡± Michael answers in the negative.


    ¡°My king, let me lead our forces to the Bronze Gate. We can¡¯t save Staemon, but if we don¡¯t stop his advance he will sweep the central Stormlands causing most of our supporters to desert us.¡± As I step around the throne I ask Renly while kneeling.


    While Stannis controls the King¡¯s fleet and most of the coastal Lords have sworn to him, the opposite is true for the inland Lords. If we use the Bronze Gate to pin down his forces we could barricade the Wind water and prevent Stannis¡¯s forces from being resupplied by his fleet. Then it is just a matter of wearing him down and one of Renly¡¯s greatest problems will disappear like that.


    ¡°This is our chance. If we trap Stannis then we can unite the Stormlands, and King¡¯s Landing will fall next.¡± I sell him my plans, and he expresses his concern for me to my joy.


    ¡°Can you win though? My brother is a lot of foul things, but a poor commander he is not.¡± Renly asks with worry.


    ¡°Not to worry, my King. Stannis may have earned his fame on the seas, but I will show him that I am no fake knight.¡± While others may mock me as the ¡®flower knight¡¯ few dare to say it to my face, for fear they find themselves beaten by the man they mock.


    My father trained me since young, arranging the best tutors to turn me into the ideal knight, whether in the sword or the field. Dozens have surrendered in the face of my sword or fallen from my joust. If Stannis dares to face me I will show him the thorns of the Tyrell family.


    Likely seeing the resolution in my eyes, Renly nods his head and replies. ¡°Very well. I, Renly Baratheon, first of my name, hereby name Ser Loras Tyrell as the War Marshall for my forces. You may take all but my guard with you and command all who swear to me. If you can defeat Stannis then you may do so. But buying time is the most important. Remember, I need you to stall Stannis for 2 months. If you can then victory is at hand.¡± Renly makes his declaration followed by a cryptic reminder. I don¡¯t know what he means but just nod and agree before leaving.


    Now isn¡¯t the time to question him and I need to be quick if we want to keep the initiative.


    Thomas Hanker (2 days later)


    Pain. That was the first thing I felt as I woke up, my head splitting in two. As I opened my eyes I tried to reach up and grab my head but quickly realised that was impossible. A tugging feeling on my wrists which I saw was caused by the bindings between them and the chair I was sitting on. A quick look to my surroundings showed I was in a small room with wooden walls.


    The aching in my joints wasn¡¯t enough to dissuade my panic. I quickly tried to free myself, but found my legs and waist were similarly tied to the chair and my efforts only resulted in losing balance and nearly falling.


    Just as I was about to hit the floor, a strong force steadied me from behind. The relief I felt at not falling was short lived, as soon as I was righted my helper showed himself to me.


    A large maw filled with teeth circled from behind, leading to a body like a bears, but slimmer and with thicker fur. A long bushy tail and feet that seemed to leave prints in the hard wooden. All of these gave the animal a terrifying presence.


    But the truly scary thing about this beast was its eyes. Looking into them I could see them staring back, not with hunger, but intelligence. It watched my movements and even glanced at the restraints at my arms and legs for a moment before returning to my face.


    After a few agonizing seconds, the beast turned and left the room, even pausing to close the door! As the door closed I felt my heart that previously seemed to stop, pound against my chest like it was trying to escape. It took several deep breaths to calm down slightly, and it was then I noticed a smell.


    Realising what it was I looked down and realised my trousers were damp from what I can only assume is piss. I frowned at first, but soon became confused.


    ¡°My bladder was empty, I didn¡¯t piss just then, why are they damp?¡± I asked myself, though in a voice barely louder than a whisper. I didn¡¯t want to risk the monster coming back after hearing a ruckus.


    As I think on why my trousers are wet I am reminded of what happened before I got into this situation. I sleeping on the hill a short distance from Fairmarket, Harry, my friend, was on watch.


    The 2 of us are scouts that were assigned to keep an eye out for any suspicious crossings on the bridge crossing the Blue Fork. Large supply convoys, bands of riders or numerous men carrying weapons, that sort of thing.


    It was supposed to be a safe job. Though a few weeks ago it would have been dangerous with the Blackfish and his raiders riding around, but since that monster in armour showed up they all scattered to the winds. And though we were on the lookout for enemy reinforcements, the number of Houses that can help are too few, so the likelihood of trouble was low to say the least.


    That doesn¡¯t mean me and Harry were taking it easy though. 5 years ago, Ser Kevin, brother to the Lord, reorganised the scouts and updated our training. Harry and I were dressed in commoners clothing we stole from the locals and operated on rotating watch.


    One keeps watch, the other sleeps with shifts rotating on a 4 hour basis. Every 3 days we swap with another team. If we spot something then one of us runs back to the house we appropriated, where the rest of our team and horses are waiting. We will send a message to the main force while the other stays to get a better idea of the numbers and other details.


    Our spot was well hidden, and even if someone spotted us I had the idea to collect some dry wood and keep it beside us. If someone did come along we would pretend to be gathering firewood.


    All that didn¡¯t help when Harry suddenly gasped in pain and I looked to see him bent over. I shot up in surprise and started towards him, when suddenly a giant shadow leapt from the bushes and charged across the short clearing to me.


    I didn¡¯t even see it clearly before it pounced and I was knocked flat on the ground, wind expelling from my chest. As I tried to suck in air, a powerful force pressed on my throat. I struggled and grasped at the hairy appendage before the lack of oxygen forced me unconscious.


    I realise they must have taken me somewhere, and it is then realise this room is familiar. It used to be the storage room for the man that lived here until we appropriated it to store our equipment. The familiar surroundings don¡¯t make me feel any better, as whoever kidnapped me has found our hideout as well.


    Just then the room opens, and as I shiver at the thought the beast returned, a man enters. Tall, with strong frame, a sword resting at his hip.


    ¡°Excellent, you¡¯re awake. I was wondering if you maybe got a concussion and that would make this next part more difficult for me.¡± The man says with a smile like seeing an old friend.


    I was going to ask what was happening when he turned around and I saw the monster again. The thing entered the room and turning my chair around, it started to drag me out.


    ¡°Let¡¯s get this interrogation started, shall we? You woke up just as I was about to start preparing dinner and the 2 of us are hungry.¡± The man with a smiling face laughs light heartedly. Each word he says sends shivers down my spine and I nearly begin weeping.

 chapter 74 - Interrogation

    Ben POV


    ¡®Interrogation¡¯ is the means by which we gain information through the target, by ways of making them want to tell you themselves. This is done through either desire or fear.


    Promises of wealth? Revenge? Maybe completing some long term goal. Bribery in other words where one trades favour with their captive in exchange for their information. This is difficult as it requires not only a significant amount of investment and knowledge about the target, but also trust. You need to trust the target that they are giving you the correct info, but the target also needs to trust that you will uphold their end of the bargain.


    The other method is to use the fear of pain or loss to encourage their cooperation. Torture is what most think about when they heard the word ¡®interrogation¡¯. Inflicting huge amounts of pain so that they will tell you what you want in order to stop the suffering.


    The problem is that in a lot of cases rather than what you want, they tell you what you want to hear. If they give you the truth, but it is contrary to what you believe is correct, then you continue their torture because you believe they are lying. They then change their story to what you think is the truth. Then you either can¡¯t tell what is true, or worse you think the lie is correct.


    This method is not only the worst morally and the hardest to gather reliable information, but it also causes damage to the interrogator themselves.


    Very few methods of torture can be done without leaving marks upon the person¡¯s body, and the few that do usually require special materials, such as poisons, or skill like waterboarding. Combined with the fact the subject will not be inclined in any way to remain silent after the event, means your reputation with enemies and allies alike will drop rapidly, with almost no way to remove the title of ¡®torturer¡¯ from your head, no matter how much good your actions end up contributing to the cause.


    Some have managed to make the reputation work for themselves, the Boltons whose very sigil is that of a flayed man is one of them. They used their reputation to strike fear into their enemies and subjects to become minor kings of the North several hundred years ago. Even today they are one of the strongest Houses in the North, thanks to their history of past victories and their foes outcome.


    However I found there is a level of damage psychologically to the interrogator. When you inflict large amounts of pain on a regular basis to defenceless individuals, some of whom you hold no grudge against, it haunts your dreams until you normalise it. I have met and seen men who in order to cope with what they do, they would dehumanise the targets. The men become monsters, so whatever is done to them is good.


    Some even begin to associate the pain they cause others with their own pleasure. Every scream they hear that is not their own gives them a sense of control over their lives. These sadists soon cannot live without that sense of purpose and will use any excuse to inflict pain on others. The most famous is probably the Mad King who took pleasure in burning men alive for it made him feel like a dragon.


    Of course you could use their fear of others pain, like that of their loved ones, but like desires that requires information and resources I don¡¯t have. Which leads me to my current situation.


    As I re-enter the living room, one that gives me a feeling of nostalgia for my home in Oakbridge, I can hear the sound of wood against wood as Brutus drags the other prisoner I approach the man that wasn¡¯t in a possible coma for the past hour.


    He told me his name was Harry but not much else. I didn¡¯t want to begin the interrogation in seriousness till they were both awake, especially since the other one may have suffered a concussion which would complicate things.


    I must admit, my impression of the Lannisters may be among the lowest when it comes to morals, they do know how to run an army. When Jaime attacked me in King¡¯s Landing I already realised he was a good commander, his forces being disciplined and well trained.


    But anyone with enough money can train a few dozen elites. The quality of the bottom ranks tends to determine if they are a proper army or not. These scouts were well equipped, trained and their doctrine definitely surpasses most of the northerners. Against any normal force they would have never been captured.


    Their only fault was lacking initiative and perspective. If they had looked at the situation from the side of the enemy then they would realise that the bridge at Fairmarket is essential and thus needs to be monitored. Anyone could see that there would definitely be scouts watching the crossing.


    Of course they can¡¯t be blamed completely as in most situations the enemy would have no course of action to prevent detection. To find the Lannister scouts one would have to cross the river, and if you use the bridge then that means the scouts will spot you and they can run away before you can find and stop them.


    Even if you send your own scouts first to avoid suspicion, that will only delay so long. You can¡¯t just start searching the surroundings without looking inconspicuous. Then either the Lannisters will retreat, or capture your own scout to interrogate them.


    The only way to avoid these situations is to do what I did. Cross the Fork at a spot further West of Fairmarket and circle round out of sight. Unlike the Green Fork, the Blue is considerably thinner and shallower in several locations to swim, or you can requisition one of the many fishing boats in the area.You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story.


    Of course this isn¡¯t fool proof. Even experienced scouts would have serious trouble looking for people that are trying to avoid detection in a radius of several miles. It is about 50/50 chance whether you find them first or not. I however have an advantage.


    Brutus can track much better than any human, and unlike me he can track nearly as well at night as he does in the day through the use of smell. Like this we searched the area undetected until we found several suspicious characters.


    At first I worried they could just be locals relaxing on a hill, but after watching for 30 minutes with no other activity than one of them watching Fairmarket, I concluded they weren¡¯t civilians. A quick check to the sides and in the trees, and I reached the conclusion they were on their own for the moment, though I still decided to be cautious.


    After giving Brutus the resting person as a target, I removed my water sack and threw it at the man on watch as Brutus charged out. The sack struck the watcher in the stomach, winding him. While he was out of breath I charged up and subdued him on the floor.


    Meanwhile Brutus had the other one pinned to the floor, his paw applying pressure to his throat in mimicry of a choke hold. I taught him that manoeuver since we were assigned to the scouts, in case we needed to take someone alive.


    After gagging my one tying his hands behind his back, I left Brutus to watch them while I checked the surroundings for anyone we could have missed. I didn¡¯t find anything, but Brutus informed me there were other people¡¯s scents that led away from the hill.


    Picking my guy from the floor I realised the other one was unconscious. So tying him the same as the other I sent Brutus to scout where they go while I watched the prisoners. When he came back I picked up the unconscious one and escorted the other while we followed Brutus to an isolated cabin, one that likely belonged to a logger in the past.


    I saw 2 men outside, one chopping wood and the other tending the only visible horse. I first considered just leaving and taking my prisoners with me, but judging by the temporary equipment at these scouts spot on the hill it is likely their absences will be noticed soon, making my effort to avoid being spotted useless.


    Then I debate taking them alive, but that is quickly dismissed. I already had 2 for questioning and it is unlikely anyone important will be staying here. In addition I have no idea how many are inside the house and though I am not afraid, they might do something desperate or destroy some documents if they realise they are being attacked.


    So after tying the prisoners to a tree, with a raised bow I shot the man chopping wood. The arrow went straight through his neck. In his shock he used the few seconds he had to feel the shaft before he choked and fell to the floor. This wasn¡¯t completely silent and the other man started moving over, but I quickly dealt with him, a shot through the eye to destroy the brain.


    At this time Brutus had reached the cabin and with one quick strike he was through the door, qi wrapping his body like armour. A few screams later and Brutus returned outside. After checking for any others in the surroundings we brought the dead out of the cabin, I placed them next to the ones I killed before I brought my prisoners inside.


    Now I watched as Brutus dragged his prisoner past Harry, where he could see him and let out a gasp at the realisation his friend was alive.


    ¡°Harry! You¡¯re alright? Did he do anything? Oi, Sir, Lord, please what do you want with us?¡± he asked, his fear temporarily decreased due to his relief at seeing his friend. This fear gradually returned as he was dragged further away and out the room. Brutus will take him to where he can¡¯t hear us talking, but not too far that a loud shout won¡¯t reach.


    I don¡¯t want them to know what the other said, but also want to reassure them I won¡¯t make them scream. Facing the remaining man, I talk to build a connection and understanding.


    ¡°Do you know who are one of the worst enemies?¡± After a pause I continued. ¡°It is the ones that don¡¯t surrender. If an opponent is determined to fight to the end it makes victory much harder. I personally feel that was one of the greatest differences in the rule with the Mad King and King Robert.


    On one hand you have the Mad King who would often burn his allies, let alone the tortures he inflicted on his enemies. And the other was Robert, a man who sent his personal maester to tend to Ser Barristan, a man that tried very hard to chop his head off. Aerys¡¯s enemies couldn¡¯t lose, or they would face a fate worse than death. Robert however spared many of those that opposed him.


    History has shown that those who spare the defeated tend to have more defeated to spare. My Lord, Robert Stark, is your enemy. You, are my prisoner. I could kill you, or I could torture you first.¡± That brings a twitch to his eyes. ¡°Or I could spare you and your friend. Let you leave so you can spread the benevolence and mercy of Robert Stark all across the Kingdoms. So that when we surprise your allies at Riverrun, they will do the smart thing and surrender.¡±


    I let him ponder on my words, the desire for freedom conflicting with his distrust for me. Before he can decide, I remind him of the situation he is in before he commits himself to resistance.


    ¡°I WANT that to happen. But I NEED the information you and your friend have. Which is why I am going to ask you some questions, and then I am going to ask your friend. For every piece of information you give that I think is useful, I will give you a silver stag. Tell me enough and you will have enough to travel home and avoid this war altogether.¡± As I show him the coins one by one his eyes are drawn to my hand.


    ¡°Of course this is all under the assumption you tell me the truth." The coins disappear and my smile turned to a snarl. I take a wooden plate from the table, one of the simple but sturdy ones, meant to last a long time.


    ¡°If your stories do not match, then one of you is lying. If one of you is lying, spitting at my generosity and kindness, we will go with the first option. I will break each of your bones *snap* one *Snap* by *snap* one.¡± Towards the end of my sentence I use qi to strengthen my hands and snap the plate in half, before taking the pieces and snapping them again.


    When I had four pieces I was afraid I wouldn¡¯t manage it and embarrass myself, but flaring qi hard eventually did it. In the end my point was made, and on top of fearing what he knows I can do, he now fears the unknown after that display of superhuman ability.


    ¡°I¡¯m going to give you a few minutes while I go and explain this to your friend out there. When I come back I am going to remove that gag and you will tell me what you know, and only know not think. I will then do the same with your friend out there. I suggest you think carefully about what you want to say, because if I need to come back no-one will be happy.¡± As I say this I leave the room, the sweat falling from Harry¡¯s brow going unseen, though I could hear his panicking breath.


    I may have walked a bit quicker than I hoped, and once I was outside I clutched my hand that was cramping badly. After letting it settle I resolved to only do 2 snaps with the next one.

 chapter 75 - Moving Camp

    Rob Stark (Fairmarket 3 days later)


    ¡°So my great uncle is dead?¡± I ask Theon after he finished his report. Though it was not the last thing he said I held back my emotions while he finished his report.


    ¡°That is what the prisoners reported. Ser Brynden Tully was responsible for leading the survivors from the Golden Tooth and several volunteer knights to launch raids against the Lannister supply lines and rear camps. Jaimie Lannister tried several times to catch him but ultimately failed.


    2 weeks ago Tywin sent 4 thousand men West to supress the Lords south of the Trident, while the Mountain himself led 500 riders to hunt the Blackfish, before setting himself on the keeps of the knights and Lords who helped him. They were pushed north until Oldstones where Ser Tully was reported to have fell. I¡¯m sorry, Milord.¡± Theon finishes with a look to me.


    I don¡¯t answer him and the room turns silent for a while. I admit I never had a very close relationship with my great uncle, considering he was estranged from my mothers side of the family, but recent events has made me appreciate family, and to hear of another member be killed by the Lannisters grinds me.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for your loss lad, Lady Stark. But I knew the man when he was still young and know that he would have liked nothing better than to go out the way he did. The man died the way he lived, with a sword in his hands and friends to his side. We can only go on and make the man¡¯s sacrifice be worth something.¡± Lord Umber speaks up in an attempt to lighten the mood, which works for the other Lords, but fails for my mother who shows a forced smile.


    ¡°Thank you for your words, Lord Umber. I just wish I could have seen my uncle before he passed, perhaps even reunited he and my father. Now I just hope we can reach my father and brother before it is too late for them.¡± She says with a slight croak in her throat.


    ¡°Lady Stark makes a good point, especially if what Lord Baskerville had to say was correct. If the Mountain is raiding the Lords loyal to Lord Tully in search of hostages, we may have less time than we hoped.¡± Roose Bolton adds to the side.


    ¡°What do you mean Roosy?¡± Umber asks casually, which brings a slight frown to Roose¡¯s brow.


    ¡°While Riverrun is nearly impossible to penetrate with supplies, that only applies to outside forces. After losing their only sign of reinforcements with the fall of the Blackfish, to see their family members rounded up and in the hands of Ser Clegane is a terrifying prospect. If the other Lords trapped in Riverrun decide that there is no hope in sight, they may mutiny against Hoster Tully to seek the mercy of the Lannisters. If that happens then we will be the ones forced to siege Riverrun, with no hope of getting the Riverlands support.¡± The other Lords look worried at this, though Umber just barks.


    ¡°In that case we better get a fucking move on! Let¡¯s hurry on and give those some relief before they piss themselves!¡± Umber declares which earns him a few smirks.


    ¡°I agree with Lord Bolton, the situation is somewhat dire. And I conclude with Lord Umber, though perhaps not so crudely, that we should march as soon as possible. But we should still proceed with a proper plan. Theon, remind me what the scout situation is like.¡± I calm the room and bring the matter to hand.


    ¡°Ben- pardon, Lord Baskerville says that Jaime has spread the scouts around the area between the Blue Fork and the Red in an attempt to search for any other insurgents and make sure none of the Lords think of uniting against the increased pressure they are facing. Though this means there is no way to avoid them completely, because they aren¡¯t focused on any area in particular, they shouldn¡¯t notice the missing scouts if we move quick enough. Lord Baskerville says that he recommends travelling as fast as we can to Riverrun to catch them off guard.¡± Theon adds.


    ¡°I conclude with Lord Baskervilles assessment. If we are going to progress forward it makes no difference whether we try to hide our forces or not. Either the scouts find us or they realise their scouts are disappearing. It is impossible to surprise them with an army this size, and a splinter force would have limited effectiveness without knowledge of the area.¡± Lord Bolton comments, earning several nods of agreement, before continuing.


    ¡°It is regrettable as the Whispering woods would be the ideal location to hide our forces but without a guide it is too risky. The men that know the area well enough are either trapped in Riverrun or were part of the Blackfishes band. Rather it would be the Lannisters who have been here for weeks tracking rebels that are more familiar with the area.¡± He adds reminding us of the loss my uncles passing brings.


    ¡°So we fight! Travel fast and hit them hard. Our numbers are similar but we have the terrain advantage. With the golden boys surrounding Riverrun they are divided and are positioned for sieging not a field fight. We move quick enough and even if they know we are coming it will only give them time to piss in a bucket instead of their pants. They¡¯ll have no time to change their fortifications before we are right on top of them!¡± Lord Umber shouts to the support of the other bannermen.      The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    I have to agree with him. The Lannisters can¡¯t win the fight with the troops they have especially with our different objectives. I just have to relieve the siege on Riverrun to free my grandfather and his allies. Jaime has to keep them in Riverrun and defend against us.


    If he moves his troops across the river to fight us in the north, then my grandfather can attack the south bank, cutting them from all supplies. Then we can just bunker down and let them starve.


    If they retreat to the south to secure passage to the Westerlands, we can join my grandfathers forces and unite all the lords north of the Trident. Then with Riverrun acting as the core, in addition to the fleet of river boats, we can prevent them ever crossing again, with launching strikes all across the banks from the Bay of Crabs to the Westerland hills.


    The worst thing they could do is try and hold us both. But that means dividing their forces into three. Even if Jaime left the absolute minimum on the 2 southern sides to contain the Tully forces, we would still greatly outnumber them, and if we add the Tully¡¯s who can attack from behind we nearly double what he can field against us.


    ¡°I think we are all in agreement with what we must do then?¡± When no one offers any opposition I continue. ¡°Then we will march as soon as possible with all possible speed. Theon, inform our scouts to focus on the path forward, any enemy troops are to be killed instead of captured if found. Though they will know we are coming we can still hide our numbers if we need to. Also, have the most experienced search for possible ambush points in the area. If Jaime gets desperate he may try to attack us first to cause us damage and even the numbers.¡±


    Ben POV (1 week later, just outside the Lannister encampment)


    With my belly to the ground and dark cloak across my back, I creeped up the ridge and observed the camp for the second night in a row. Across the abandoned fields where farmers used to call their home, lied the Lannister camp.


    As the greatest and strongest scout in the army I took point in examining any potentially dangerous areas, and once I was sure they were safe I left the continuous observation to another scout to make sure no other forces tried to occupy the area. I killed as many as 5 scout teams, each about half a dozen strong, nearly half the total for the scouts.


    After 4 days I changed my objective, by this point Jaime will have no doubt noticed our advance. Even if we had eliminated every scout, which due to the lack of time was impossible, but the missing scouts would have surely told Jaime that we were coming.


    Instead of killing scouts I decided to spy on the enemy camp. Brutus and I travelled solo through the whispering woods and on the 6th night I left Brutus in the woods to observe the camp before moving back to the woods during the day.


    What I saw originally confused me, as though it looked like Jaime was preparing to resist Robb, he was going about it in a weird way.


    Though I couldn¡¯t get an exact count, it appeared the camp had as many as 20 thousand and as few as 15 thousand troops, with what looked a little less than 2 thousand horses. From the captured scouts we learned the Lannister force had around 30 thousand total troops, with 2 of them being cavalry. This means they concentrated most of their forces on the North bank and from what I saw looked like fresh defensive constructions in preparation for fighting the Northern army and continuing the siege on Riverrun.


    This confused me because it was what we thought was the least likely action Jaime would have taken. It is impossible to overcome the difference in numbers and terrain he is currently faced with unless he has some serious trump card in his back pocket.


    If it was someone else I might think these are the actions of a greedy and overly stubborn commander, who doesn¡¯t want to give up on Riverrun and can overcome the odds with determination and will.


    But I fought Jaime in Kings Landing. He had all the advantages and could have won, but chose to retreat because the cost was too much. If he could retreat when he was In the stronger position then I can¡¯t see why he would retreat when he is losing.


    I spent the next day thinking of all possible scenarios in which he could turn this around. There are no ambushes along  the road to Riverrun, and no where to receive reinforcements in time.


    Unless our information is completely wrong but with the number of sources that is extremely unlikely. It wasn¡¯t just me that performed interrogations but a dozen other captives were questioned and all information concurs with our findings. And since we travelled from the Twins to Fairmarket several Riverland Lords have joined up with us, not only sharing food and supplies, but they added their soldiers, 2 thousand, as well as information.


    Their relatives and friends all over the Riverlands all told them that no one is near Riverrun except for Jaimie¡¯s forces. It is possible there could be traitors, but the Lannisters are easily the most hated family in the Riverlands at the moment. Except for the families that sided with the crown in the beginning all the others have been raided by the Mountain with several houses even being razed to the ground for their defiance.


    It is as I was considering returning to the main troop to report on my findings that I came across an anomaly. Deciding to confirm my thoughts, I went back to the camp the following night and took the risk to climb a closer and taller point to observe.


    I realised that though there had been new fortifications , instead of making them all around the camp, they mostly focused on the West and North sides. Even in the dead of the night they were building the West walls.


    As I looked closer I noticed something even stranger. They weren¡¯t just ignoring the East side, they were even removing several structures and moving them to the West. A few had even taken some obstructions from where the Bridge leading to Riverrun should be. It looked like the entire camp was shifting to the West.


    But this is all it does, as not only does it offer no greater defence against, it even presents an opening for the Riverrun  forces to more easily break out and attack.


    It is that which lights a candle in my mind, but before I jump to any conclusions I head back to Brutus and on his back we race back to the camp. From there I will let Robb and the other Lords know what I found and see if they can confirm my suspicions.

 update

    Hey guys just got back from skiing.


    So according to the poll i will be delivering the rest of the arc as one large chapter. There is enough material for approximately 3 to 5 chapters i believe and there may be more if i can think of more and understandably i will not have a lot of time over the next week due to christmas and new years.This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    I will likely start writing little bits over the next few days and will try to get more done after New Years. I will give the next update on my progress on the 15th of Jan with my goal for completion being the 1st of Feb.


    I wish you all a merry christmas and look forward to my final post before i start my next fiction.

 update

    So i said i would keep you guys updated on my progress so here it is.


    I''ve written about 7,000 words so far and feel that i am only halfway done the final chap. Turns out there was more to write about than i thought.


    Fortunately i am finished with holiday stuff so i can focus on finishing this. at my current pace i should finish between the 20th and 25th, so keep an eye out on these dates. The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement.


    Also i was checking the poll for spoiler and it is currently at 50% for each. I did say i would only do if it was a majority so if it stays equal or lower then i will not release the spoilers. sorry for those that wanted it.


    When i release the final chapter i will also give a brief synopsis for my next novel, opinions and ideas would be greatly appreciated.


    Thanks for you patience

 chapter 76 - War of Riverrun

    (Stark camp, 20 miles north of Riverrun)


    As I stood before the war table, a rough map of what I saw drawn out in front of the commanding Lords, I waited for the question that I knew they would ask.


    Rob looks around the table and after seeing everyone had a broad idea of what they were seeing, he looked to me. ¡°This is a trap, isn¡¯t it?¡± He asks.


    Before I can respond, another Lord, Hornwood, interrupts. ¡°Of course this is a trap! Look at that pathetic East defence; it is practically begging to be attacked. It is one of the most pathetic defences I have ever seen, and even the other sides aren¡¯t anything special. If it wasn¡¯t for Lord Baskerville telling me that the Lannisters were purposefully making it worse, then I would probably say we should attack there on principal alone. Instead it only makes me wonder just what dastardly trap he has waiting for us inside that camp out of sight.¡± Lord Horwood announces before starting to twiddle his thin beard.


    Many in the room nod their heads in agreement, but it is Roose that points out an fault. ¡°Lord Hornwood makes a valid point, but it doesn¡¯t account for the moving of the camp to the West. I can understand leaving an opening to bait us into exploiting a false weakness, but if they let us resupply Riverrun then it is pointless. With our appearance the morale in Riverrun will experience a huge boost, and if we can deliver supplies to them then we win. We don¡¯t have to destroy them in combat, just cut them off from logistics for a few days.


    With our greater numbers and the river to their back we can effectively cut them off from all support. They will either collapse or be forced to abandon their fortifications in desperation to attack us. There is no point to shift the camp and leave an opening for Riverrun if their intention is to continue the siege¡± Roose Bolton declares his doubts, same as the ones that caused me to return to observe the camp for a second night.


    As the Lords begin to discuss, I considered announcing my suspicions, but a look from Rob and light wave of the hand causes me to wait for the discussion to die down and someone asks Rob for his opinion. When they do he asks me to give my thoughts as I have the clearest idea of the encampment.


    ¡°I believe Lord Rob is correct in that the camp is definitely a trap, as well as held the same suspicions as Lord Bolton about the camp position. Which is why I feel we have disregarded a force whose actions could upset the whole battle.¡± I point to Riverrun. ¡°The Riverland forces in Riverrun.¡±


    As the other Lords show confusion on their face, I continue. ¡°We have always seen the Riverland forces as our allies, who when we attack Jaime could either strike the Lannister supply lines or attack Jaime in the rear. What we have forgotten is that if they strike they will almost certainly lower the drawbridge to do so, and if they can get out, others can get in.¡± As I say some Lords like Bolton and Hornwood show a look of realisation.


    ¡°I think the camp is exposed not to bait us, but for the Riverrun forces. If they were planning a siege there would be no point to have all their cavalry as they wouldn¡¯t be able to show off their strengths. And if they were planning to engage us in the field there is no need to waste time on camp defences. I think they are going to pretend to fight us but their main target will be Riverrun.


    When the Riverland army sees us they will view it as a sign to counter attack. When they see the shoddy defences and most of the Lannister force moving to engage us they will fight. Strategically it is wise to strike the enemies rear, and emotionally they have suffered multiple defeats and been trapped in the fort for months. They will be desperate for revenge. Even if several people see it suspiciously, when they watch us, their allies, fighting they will be honour bound to fight with us.


    When enough have left the keep is when they will change direction.¡± I take several of the figures denoting the Lannister forces and turn them around. ¡°A small force will be left to delay us, while their cavalry and most of their infantry will turn around. If I was them then that weakness in the Eastern camp is not for us but for themselves.


    When Riverrun attacks the Western forces left in the camp, Jaime will lead the returning force through the Eastern opening and flank them. They will be outnumbered, weakened from months of rations and have fragile morale after numerous defeats. If they collapse before we arrive, Jaime can invade Riverrun and raise the bridge, reversing our positions.


    If even a few hundred manage to get inside it will be impossible to break in quickly. And unlike your grandfather, the Lannisters still control 2 sides of the river to receive supplies from. It would take way too long to get across without boats, by that time they will receive enough supplies to last another couple of months at least.


    With Riverrun captured their Lords dead or imprisoned, it will be impossible to unite the other River Lords. Any hope of putting pressure on the crown will be gone and our only chance will be to retreat north to survive.¡± Once I finished giving my assumptions the entire room went silent. Not just the cunning Lords but even the rash ones could see how fucked we would be if we had to siege Riverrun.


    Several spoke of how it was acting under a lot of assumptions, that maybe the Tully force would not leave the keep in which case the Lannisters would be stabbing themselves in the foot. They were refuted by others with the words ¡®that¡¯s what I would do¡¯ in the Tully¡¯s situation.


    It is a confusing and difficult manoeuvre which is impossible to accomplish without the discipline and high morale of the enemy army. I have little doubt our own force would be unlikely to do the same. If it works then it would be recorded as one of the greatest upsets in history.


    ¡°So, how do we stop it, Lord Stark?¡± I ask Rob.


    I myself am drawing a blank on it. We have too little time to act before Jaime is reinforced by either his father or Stafford in the Westerlands. Most of the surrounding Lords have either been defeated or submitted, which combined with their greater familiarity with the area means we are in enemy territory.


    There is no way to send a message to Riverrun, by raven or foot, without a huge risk of interception, meaning we can¡¯t warn them or coordinate correctly.


    If we hesitate where we are then we run the risk of being ambushed or losing all our momentum from rushing here. If they have enough time they won¡¯t need tricks, but will just continue with fortifications, at which point it will be way too costly to take the camp even if we wanted to. If we lose half our army then even if we relieve Riverrun we won¡¯t be any better than we started.


    The room goes silent as we look to the young commander. After a moment Rob declares, ¡°We reinforce Riverrun.¡±


    We pause and several look at each other. ¡®Reinforce Riverrun? I thought that was the whole point of us marching here, what else would we do.¡¯ Was the thought on everyone¡¯s mind.


    ¡°Jaime wants to feign weakness in order to bait my grandfather out of the castle. What he has neglected is that it will create an opening for us. The key will be our cavalry. If Jaime sends most of his forces with the intention of stalling us, we will be aggressive. With the knights as our spear we will pierce their defence in the middle, split their force while we continue to Riverrun. If he holds a significant number back then we will flank the East where there is the most room to manoeuvre and the weakened walls are located.


    In the first case we will reverse our position, instead of them holding us back, our infantry will stop them from returning to camp while we destroy whatever force remained. In the second we take advantage of their lesser numbers to avoid them completely and strike the weak defences in the camp, adding our strength to the Riverland force and securing the bridgehead.¡± Rob proposes a bold plan that leaves me with my mouth open.


    ¡°It is risky, separating our elites from the main force, but it will work. The Lannister troops will have divided attention, thinking they just have to stall us till my grandfather sorties, and then they can retreat. They won¡¯t have their hearts in the fight, which we will take advantage of to act aggressive and eliminate the majority of their force while also preventing Jaime from claiming his one lifeline that is Riverrun. He will be forced to either retreat or surrender.¡± He smiles as he shows the positioning of the troops on the board.


    As I watch the pieces move and imagine the battle in my head, I can see it playing out as Rob predicted. To be honest there is probably not going to be a need for it. Jaime¡¯s plan to take Riverrun is unlikely to succeed as it works on too many assumptions.


    He needs to split his already smaller force even more, and balance it so that he can both hold our army back long enough, and take Riverrun quickly. If he fails either then he will be trapped between the 2 armies.


    Though I suppose the fact that if he succeeds then it means death for us necessitates leaving nothing to chance. The Lannisters know that they have to win, so their desperation could tip the tides.


    As the rest of the Lords talk for some more, we eventually agree with the plan and distribute the roles. Lord Umber is given overall command of the infantry, seeing as House Umber has one of the largest forces and the need for aggressive tactics, while Wendell Manderly is tasked with leading the knights to act as a vanguard. Rob himself states that he will lead the combined cavalry to follow.


    His mother gets a start at that and even some of the Lords voice their objections to taking the lead, Rob refutes them saying he is needed to ensure the cooperation of the Riverland forces when they make contact. Though there is still some opposition they agree that there is no one Lord Tully would trust more in this army than his grandson.


    The last order was given to the scouts to ensure they spread out before the battle to watch for reinforcements. In particular Theon was given a small patrol to head to the whispering woods and then towards the bridge that crosses the Tumblestone 20 miles to the West.


    If there are hidden enemies they will hide in the woods, while if anyone tries to escape the battle the bridge is the most likely path of retreat. In the end he gives the order that if Jaime is found at he should be captured if at all possible. If both sons are put in our camp, Tywin will be forced to meet their terms if he ever wants to continue his family legacy.


    As we leave the tent to prepare ourselves and our troops, I am approached by Lady Catelyn.


    ¡°Lord Baskerville, could I have a moment of your time in private?¡± She asks. When I consent she leads me to her tent and dismisses the guards. Sensing the mood, I ask Brutus to stand guard outside and warn off anyone approaching.


    When we enter she takes the seat first and then offers me the one opposite which I accept. As we are seated I wait for her to broach the subject on her mind.


    ¡°I would like to thank you for all that you have done for this family. What happened in the capital wasn¡¯t your fault and I surely don¡¯t blame you for Ned. Since then you have contributed much, returning my daughter, capturing Tyrion and volunteering yourself at the Twins. Despite only serving my family for a short few years you have done more than some who have served us for decades. Your Lordship was well deserved.¡± She says with a slight bow of her head.


    ¡°Thank you for your kind words Lady Stark, but they are unneeded. Lord Eddard was kind and deserving of loyalty, while I view your family like my own.¡± I reply with a bow of my own and wait for her request.


    I have no doubt that reminding me of my failure with Ned and that my lordship came from Rob wasn¡¯t by accident.


    ¡°It is why these next words are hard for me to ask considering you have already done so much for our family, but I can think of no one else I can trust with the task. During the fighting, I ask that you stay by Rob¡¯s side and ensure his safety. Even if you need to take him from the battlefield over your shoulders, against his will, if he is going to die you must save him.¡± As she asks this she holds her hands together and looks me straight in the eyes.


    I realise how difficult this is to ask. Originally I was planning to fight in the vanguard where I and Brutus could act as the steel tip that allows for easier entry to the enemy, or join Lord Umber¡¯s force and roam the field, sniping the commanders and trying to collapse their formations.


    What she is asking is for me to ride alongside Rob with his ¡®Wolf Guard¡¯. A group of young noble children who act as Rob¡¯s honour guard. The Umber, Karstark and Mormont heirs are all a part of this group, placed there by their families as a way of strengthening the ties between them and the Starks, as well as experiencing war in a relatively safe place. Though they are definitely all exceptional fighters to defend Rob, their impact in the war as a whole is rather minor.


    Not only will I not be able to contribute the full extent of my abilities, it would also be deemed inappropriate by the others. A full-fledged Lord as myself standing by the young Paramount and a bunch of heirs, though I am not different in age by much, would be seen as either toadying to Lord Stark or hiding from the battle.


    Especially the part where I might need to drag Rob from the battlefield. Though I can see the need for it, as if something goes wrong Rob might be too passionate to leave his men behind, and if he is killed or captured then we are finished. But if I am the one to do it, though it would save Rob from criticism, it will cement my reputation as a coward as well as earn Rob¡¯s wrath


    Though I don¡¯t care about my reputation so much, and Rob isn¡¯t likely to hold a grudge against me, anyone else would have serious concerns offending their paramount like this which is why she is asking me.


    I am certain that there is no one in this army that is stronger than me at the moment. Though I can¡¯t fight an entire army by myself, I can take advantage of a chaotic battlefield to break out and flee even while taking someone with me.


    I almost refused. Not because I wasn¡¯t worried about Rob, but because I didn¡¯t think there was any point. Though he would be separated from the primary force, there would still be over 2,000 men protecting him, all of whom are our elites and mounted. There are few situations that could pose a danger, and even fewer that he could not avoid with the open ground and superior mobility.


    Instead I could be putting my talents to use and affect the battle as a whole. If I can cause the enemy to collapse half an hour earlier, then hundreds of lives wouldn¡¯t need to be sacrificed. Not to mention that saying yes now creates a president for the future. If she asks me to do this in every battle from here on it could lead to problems down the road.


    But as I see the desperation in her eyes I eventually fold. I know that if she could take his place, or get Rob to stay behind without humiliating him then she would.


    As she thanks me and ensures she will always remember this favour, I decide that at after this battle, or the war at the latest, I would start training Qi users. It is clear I can¡¯t be everywhere and if we want to guarantee our victory then we need every advantage.


    Though they won¡¯t be of use anytime soon, with the low energy levels in this world and none of the supplements from my old, it would require probably 10 years just to reach 1<sup>st</sup> tier with average talent, and only the talented ones would have a chance to reach 2<sup>nd</sup> before the age of 30.


    But if I take several orphans from young, which there will be a lot after this war, and train them in the way of war and instil loyalty to the Starks, then once they reach an appropriate level they train others, in 3 to 4 decades I could have several dozen qi users. With luck some of them could be talented and reach 2<sup>nd</sup> tier to take over from me, and if I train them as rangers with beast companions, I could double this number.


    If I keep my current rate of training then I could reach the 3<sup>rd</sup> tier myself by the age of 30, doubling my lifespan. Spending the next 30 to 40 years or so ensuring the Starks had an order of loyal elites is no sweat off my back. If they are in trouble I could assassinate their enemies as well and leave them to grow.


    As I think of where to get the first recruits I think that Arya and Rickon would be good choices. Not only would the first batch have guaranteed loyalty to Rob, but if several members of the Stark family are qi practioners then it will reduce the future threat of assassinations. The rest could be sourced from the war orphans giving a sample size of 8 or 10 to start.


    It¡¯s a shame that Rob and Sansa are a bit too old to start, while Bran is crippled. Though they could theoretically still learn some, it would have minimal effect, and for the first trial group I need results.


    ¡°Ser, there you are!¡± I hear someone shout as I approached my tent.


    Turning I see Ethan waving as he approached with a huge smile on his face. His clothes were dirty and crumpled like he had been travelling non-stop.


    ¡°Ah-wait! Apologies, I meant my Lord. Sorry for the improper address, I only arrived 2 hours ago and when I reported my identity to the patrol men they said you were in a meeting. I didn¡¯t even know you were a Lord, which would have been nice to mention in your letter.¡± Ethan continues, a slight pout appearing on his face.


    ¡°Ha ha! No worries Ethan, I wouldn¡¯t mind if you called me just Ben considering how long you¡¯ve served me. And sorry about the letter, it couldn¡¯t be long if I was sending by raven, and there was more important information to write about. But what took you so long, I was expecting you a week ago and was worried you didn¡¯t receive my message.¡± I ask.


    A single rider moves much faster than an army and even if he had to ask locals for where we were travelling it shouldn¡¯t have made much of a difference.


    ¡°Part of it was my fault, Milord. In my haste I chose against hiring a guide and ended up taking a side path and losing several days finding my way out again. Then, when I reached the Bloody Gate I was further delayed by the checks, as alertness has been raised with the war tensions.¡± Ethan explains.


    ¡°Well that¡¯s fine. I¡¯m just glad you got here safely and just in time for the fun to begin. Come, I will call some servants to prepare a bath so you can get clean then we will talk properly. I want to know how Elsa and Ed were when you left them. Then I will let you know what the plan for tomorrow is and what we will be doing. That is if you don¡¯t want to stay in camp?¡± I ask.


    Though it is unlikely considering the rush he was in to get here, I had to ask. We are going to fight a war, one where even I could face danger, let alone a squire who has yet to kill another man yet. I always planned to bring him to the Wall to volunteer with the Rangers on an expedition, or venture to the Vale Hills in search of bandits to look for his first real opponent.


    Not to say the Wildlings or Hill tribes are weaklings, in fact anyone who has ever fought them would claim they are tougher than most soldiers. They would be a real threat to the Lords if they had proper weapons and organisation.


    I would choose them because they can be found in small groups where I can control the situation, and no one in civilised Westeros would care if some die.


    ¡°What are you saying!? I have been waiting all my life for a moment like this. It doesn¡¯t matter if you ask me to charge a line of spears; I will follow you anywhere, Lord Baskerville!¡± Ethan swears while bending on one knee.


    Grabbing his shoulders and lifting him to his feet I smile and rebuke him. ¡°Calm yourself, Ethan, I was just asking to be sure. Honestly your skill on the horse and with a sword make you just acceptable to ride with me tomorrow, though not on the front lines. I have been requested to defend Lord Stark on the field tomorrow, which means you will be protecting him alongside me. The chances of fighting personally is small, though if it does become required it will mean the Paramount himself is in danger and you will need to put all your focus on him. Rather than killing the enemy, you must ensure Lord Stark does not receive even a single wound, even if you have to throw yourself in front of the foes sword. Do you understand?¡± I inflate the importance of his assignment to him.


    ¡°Yes, milord! I swear that so long as I am alive, not a drop of blood will leave the Paramount¡¯s body!¡± Ethan once again promises.


    I feel he is getting too excited again, but deciding that it is better than losing interest and sneaking off in the battle to look for glory I allow it. After sending him off to bathe and eat I wait in my tent and prepare a second sleeping area for him as I assume he hasn¡¯t been assigned proper dwelling yet, and with the fight upon us it is unlikely he would.


    (Following day, noon)


    As we slowly trot forward the Lannister army comes into sight.


    Our forces were on high alert the previous night and woke at dawn. Ethan and I woke several hours earlier to join the night shift. If there was going to be an ambush then just before the sun rises is the best time to do so.


    The scouts were the first to set off, spreading in all directions, with the largest group being the hundred riders Theon was in charge of. They set off for the whispering woods and by about 10 in the morning the scouts returned along with a pair of riders from Theon¡¯s band.


    The scouts all reported no changes to the Lannister camp or the surrounding area, while the pair of riders said the woods near the edges was clear. They also said that Theon left half his men to monitor the woods just in case, while he brought the rest of his men to cut off the escape route at the bridge.


    A rather cautious approach, as it leaves little risk of any hidden force deeper in the woods from emerging undetected. But it also means he has greater pressure to stop any escapees with his decreased manpower.


    But in the end the key is winning the battle, if letting a few potential prisoners get away is the cost of guaranteeing our rear is secured then it is worth it.


    We spent the next two hours slowly crawling up on the Lannister army, Rob and myself in the middle of the army. Rob briefly expressed his doubt at me not joining the scouts to check on the surroundings. I responded with the fact that any force that could make a difference today is large enough that even a one-eyed lady could spot it; my expertise wasn¡¯t needed and would instead be better put to use preparing for the battlefield.


    Rob accepted that as he likely assumed I was seeking to redeem myself on the field. Ultimately my position as part of the scouts is voluntary. As a Lord under him, Rob has the right to dismiss me from the army or punish me if I break a serious law, but otherwise I am up to my own devices.


    If he tried to command me to the front, or make me do some demeaning job live cook for him or serve him wine, I would have every right to refuse. If he attempted force me he would be met with the opposition from every Lord here, even the ones that don¡¯t like me. It doesn¡¯t matter how new or small my House is, a noble is always given respect otherwise there may come a day they themselves are treated the same.


    Rob is the Paramount, not the king. He is usually responsible for organising us Lords and representing our interests, but cannot command us to acts that we aren¡¯t legally bound to or choose to.


    Though I imagine that might change if this war continues like this. A conflict of this level that affects an entire continent like this rarely ends with everyone shaking hands and letting bygones be bygones. At least it is rarely the same people that started the conflict shaking hands.


    When the enemy came in sight we began to slow. Once we reach about 1.5km from the camp then we will stop and hold position. In the end the first to attack need to be the Lannister army.


    Though we resolved to fight aggressively, the key area is still the bridgehead leading to Riverrun. If we engage them too close to the river then when we pass them with our cavalry they may still have time to retreat before our infantry can lock them down.Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    We also need to know the rough numbers they are sending in the first wave to stall us. If they send most if not all in a thin line, then we will penetrate the centre and destroy their formation before charging forward.


    If they hold a significant force back in the camp then we will flank to the sides. Not only will their lesser numbers mean they are less likely to stop us, but it means the initial pressure on Riverrun is greater so the importance on getting to the bridge as fast as possible is the priority.


    Someone brought up the possibility that they don¡¯t attack during the day. If they wait till night it will be even harder to judge numbers and coordinating large groups will be exponentially more difficult, and in that regard we are the Lannisters inferior.


    Some suggested attacking ourselves, but most were reluctant. Not just for the reasons above, but if we are wrong about all our assumptions and the weak fortifications are hiding a trap, then we may suffer serious casualties that will affect the rest of the war.


    Instead we decided to resort to our original plan where we would bunker down and isolate them from supplies while wearing them down over the course of the next week.


    In order to inform Riverrun of our plans as well as what we suspect the Lannisters are up to, I personally will be infiltrating the keep as soon as dark falls along with a sealed letter from Rob. With their base shifted to the West they are leaving the East open for me and Brutus to sneak through. Even if they focused all their scouts on the Eastern side they can¡¯t mobilise a fast enough response force to stop me and Brutus from reaching the river and just swimming to the castle.


    Once Lord Tully receives the letter we can coordinate our forces to prevent any food or supplies reaching Jaime. The Tully force will attack the South West bank that is now of similar size to prevent any supplies being sent across the river, while we will prevent any reaching the main Lannister force from land. Though they can get water from the river, without a large stockpile of food and feed both their horses and soldiers will collapse quickly.


    After 30 minutes that plan became irrelevant however. Once they gathered up we watched as a large force exited the camp and forming into lines. Just as we were preparing ourselves, we watched as a lone rider exited the formation, the Lannister banner attached to a pole held in his hands.


    ¡°An ambassador. I was hoping the brat wouldn¡¯t bother at this point so we could just get on with it.¡± Lord Umber speaks in a loud voice filled with disdain. The ¡®ambassador¡¯ is nothing more than a messenger sent to negotiate terms. They will give their offer and requirements for avoiding the battle altogether.


    It is more of a tradition in Westeros, as most of the times the terms are just ridiculous demands or sometimes subtle provocations used to get inside the head of the enemy.


    Though it sometimes does lead to avoiding bloodshed, throughout the history of the Seven Kingdoms it is almost entirely between small contingents that such agreements are made. When you spend the amount of time, coin and resources mobilising an army of this size it is almost guaranteed that you are going to use it unless a new event has arisen that makes victory impossible.


    The only thing that would get Rob to call off his forces would be the immediate retreat of all Lannister forces across the river, and leaving the territory of the Tully¡¯s. If they had any intention of doing that then they would have just done it the second they knew we were coming, not on the day of the battle. If they retreat in the face of the enemy like this it is the same as declaring they are afraid of us.


    If they did it before then they could claim it was just positioning their forces in a more strategic spot, and they could do it without seeming like they are asking our permission. When the rider stops in the middle of the field Rob turns to the side and calls out to a nearby horseman.


    ¡°Mannis, deliver our terms.¡± The man he spoke to was named Mannis Bolton, one of the cousins to Lord Bolton.


    No one suggested ignoring the messenger to humiliate the enemy or kill him to enrage them. It is considered a taboo to kill a man seeking to discuss peace, and killing a messenger is just disgraceful. Even if it is pointless we still need to send a messenger of our own to show our men that we sought to avoid conflict up until the last minute.


    ¡°Yes Milord!¡± the man chosen to be our messenger is a large man, larger than his cousin, with a large, ugly scar on his cheek and missing a part of his ear. Both injuries were caused by an arrow when besieging Pyke during the Greyjoy Rebellion.


    He was chosen as it is customary the messenger is someone of reasonable birth and since the negotiations are pointless, they may as well scare them a bit. Both his appearance and name are enough to remind the enemy who they are fighting and what could happen.


    We wait another half an hour while the messengers meet and return to their respective armies. The negotiations were pointless after all, as they refused our offer and we refused theirs. They suggested that we surrender and that Rob and the rest of the Lords allow themselves to be escorted to the capital to beg forgiveness for their recent actions.


    Jaime¡¯s only offer was that he would plead on our behalf to the king to ask for mercy using the fact we haven¡¯t caused much harm yet. If we continue with our course then we would be nothing more than traitors to the realm and would be faced with the harshest punishment.


    The contents were pointless, but what happened in their camp was what got our attention. Once we sent our messenger a pillar of continuous smoke left the camp into the sky.


    Clearly It was a signal but for who was the question. Someone suggested it was for those on the other sides of the river, possible but a bit excessive. For their respective distances then horns should be more than enough and require far less time. This smoke pillar can be seen for many miles.


    Another guessed it was for any scout groups or patrols, but unlikely. We haven¡¯t seen any scouts outside 20 kilmetres since 2 days ago. Jaime realised we were just killing them so he called them back. The few he might have left in the field aren¡¯t worth the effort of calling them back as they likely total less than a hundred.


    The only possibility is they are signalling an out of sight force, but there is none that could arrive in time. We have accounted for all the Lannister forces and the few Riverland Lords that sided with them are mostly on the other side of the river. The few on this side are both too few and too far. We already checked the surrounding area and with no towns or other cover the only place they could hide is the Whispering woods, but we have men watching there.


    It seems that Rob thinks the same because he quickly gives orders to 50 riders. ¡°Ser Vass, lead another band of riders and double the watch on Whispering woods. If that signal is for someone then it can only be there.¡± As the elderly knight salutes and leads the riders away, Rob addresses the other Lords.


    ¡°Put the smoke out of your minds for now. Even if there is a trick we will find it, and if not then it must be Jaime¡¯s bluff to throw us off.¡± As he says this the men calms down and spread the word to the rest of the army, reminding them to stay focused.


    Since his words make sense I try and focus as well. And just as we solve that issue the enemy makes its next move. We watch as the lines form and make their way forward.


    Predictably they sent their infantry, and it seems they only sent a smallish number. But what we found strange was the lack of horses.


    Though we can¡¯t see the inside of the camp from here we can clearly tell that no cavalry is among the first force, whether in front to cause maximum initial damage, or the rear so they can quickly retreat to Riverrun.


    ¡°What are they doing? There¡¯s no point in having cavalry in the camp, and if they dismount to use them as infantry then they may as well use them in the field.¡± Lord Umber gives voice to his doubts.


    Though most think a man on horseback is better than on foot, there are a few instances where they are worse. Though they give the riders greater height and weight to their blows, they lack flexibility and control since they are dependent on another creature for footing and the head gets in the way of striking from multiple directions.


    Their greatest advantage comes from their mobility and momentum the charge offers, both of which require space to manoeuvre and build up speed. Close combat in an enclosed camp and later trying to cross a narrow bridge and enter a fort? If they were going to waste them like that they may as well have tried raiding us as we were travelling here.


    ¡°Don¡¯t be confused! Jaime is likely holding them back to intercept us. The initial plan hasn¡¯t changed; we will flank their forces from the East and make our way to Riverrun. We just have to take more care that the Lannisters don¡¯t send their cavalry to intercept us half way. If they do then we will just have to hope they then lack the strength to defeat the Riverrun forces.¡± Rob declares before ordering Ser Manderly to prepare the vanguard. With the relatively few men in front of us we can sweep around to the side and bypass the forward lines.


    It¡¯s times like this that makes me glad there were incredibly few battles on this scale in my old world. We haven¡¯t even fought yet and there are already so many areas and conflicts to consider. The requirement for multiple capable commanders who can adapt becomes even more important than the quality of the troops. Most of the times the fights were close enough that I could personally react to the event.


    After 5 minutes the Lannisters have made their way halfway across the field and already seem to be slowing down. As we are ready ourselves, Lord Umber gives the order for the main force to engage while Rob and I follow Wendell as he flanks to the left.


    I briefly debate whether to ride in front of Rob or behind. The front is where the fiercest fighting will be, but it is also where our strongest forces are located, and that smoke pillar still gives me a bad feeling. So Brutus and I take position to the rear of Rob and his band so we can react as quickly as possible to trouble. Ethan is beside me, loadout is primarily his riding blade and 2 sets of quivers on either side. His main responsibility is to watch my side and hand me resupply when I need it.


    Rob POV


    I feel the wind blowing past my ears as I ride, combined with the pounding of hooves becomes deafening. I have ridden faster than this before, but never has my heart beaten so quickly.


    Riding on your own and riding as part of a host is completely different. Not only do you have to take care not to collide with anyone else, but the dangers of falling off are much higher. As soon as I hit the ground I would be trampled by dozens of hooves with no chance of survival.


    As we ride past the Lannister army my fear of falling passes to be replaced by anxiety over the coming conflict. As we passed the infantry you could feel the tension rise from everyone. If Jaime was going to use his cavalry to intercept us then this is the time. His riders would still have room to build up speed before clashing with us, turning it into an all-out brawl.


    Though we outnumber the Lannister riders the difference is smaller than the infantry and the chance of mishaps is high.


    My fears are unfounded as we encounter no resistance crossing the fields. The flanks of the Lannister army turn to face us, perhaps fearing we are attempting to cut into their sides, but they are quickly engaged by our own forces that have made their way to the fields centre now.


    As we approach the camp the sounds of fighting in front drown out those in the rear. Instead of finding pike men and archers waiting for us we are met with an open wall, just past which we see the Riverrun bridge lowered and the Lannister blockade overrun.


    As the Lannisters retreat to the West of the camp we make our way to the few horsemen among the Riverrun forces. Under the banner of the Tullys rides an old knight clad in scale armour, resembling a grey fish.


    The man was Ser Robin Ryger, the captain of the Riverrun guards. I¡¯ve seen him several times in the past when I visited my grandfather and he hasn¡¯t changed a bit. Older than most knights with a bald head, serious look and large build. Though he would usually have a small smile when looking at me in the past, now only a strict scowl adorns his face.


    ¡°Hold!! I am Ser Ryger, knight to Lord Tully and commander of this army. Who is your commander!?¡± He calls as my vanguard makes way for me and my honour guard to make our ways forward.


    Ser Manderly looks to be about to announce me, but I cut him off. ¡°Uncle Ryder, It is I Robb Stark, Lord of House Stark and Warden of the North! We are here to help, and to warn you!!¡± I don¡¯t want to waste any time with theatrics while the enemy is metres from us and the bridge to Riverrun right next to us.


    ¡°Rob- Pardon, Lord Stark!? It is great to see you in good help but what are you doing here and not with your army?¡± Ryger questions. It is obvious to him that the amin Lannister army is still behind us, meaning our commander, I, is effectively behind enemy lines.


    ¡°We had to warn you! We believe that the Lannisters only look to be fighting us, but are instead planning to double back on Riverrun and take the castle. When that happens the battle won¡¯t matter as they will never lose so long as they hold Riverrun.¡± Skipping the reasons I quickly tell him the conclusion we came to.


    ¡°Those bastards! We were wondering what their strange actions were. But while that explains destroying their barricades, what were they doing with the animals?¡± Another rider, a younger Lord notes. On his back is a cape with the clack Talon of House Lychester so I can only assume he is from that family. Not knowing what he meant I asked him to continue.


    ¡°Horses, donkeys and oxen have been repeatedly sent to different sides of the Fork over the past 3 days. Nearly all the Horses to the South East and work animals to the North, this side.¡± He explained.


    ¡°That¡¯s impossible.¡± From behind Ben spoke up. ¡°I personally saw the horses in the camp, at least 2 thousand of them.¡±


    ¡°Lord Lychester tells the truth. In addition that wasn¡¯t the only thing they moved. From the South West they sent at least 2 thousand men to the south East. Then yesterday they all abandoned their camp. At night we sent trackers to look for them and found them 5 miles east and another mile from the river. All their rafts and boats were sent down river to the east as well.¡± Lord Ryger explains and every word gives me more and more tension.


    ¡°What boats? I thought all the boats were stowed away in the keep?¡± Eric Karstark asks beside me. As he asks I notice the fighting has reached a lull. The Riverland army has stopped pursuing the Lannisters, while the enemy is positioned a hundred 2 hundred metres away, just out of bow range.


    Though our side is waiting for their orders, theirs is clearly waiting for something as well.


    ¡°Ours were all stored or destroyed, but over the past month they have been gathering vessels and constructing rafts from all over-¡°. ¡°FUCK!!¡±


    As Ryger was explaining a sudden curse from behind interrupted him and startled the rest of us as well. As I turned I watched as Ben was pushing his way to the rear of the formation, curses from those around him as he and Brutus shoved their way past. After a few seconds the tension gets to me and I follow him.


    As we made our way to the back several men called in surprise. ¡°Who are they?¡± ¡°Are they ours? Whose banner is that?¡± ¡°Is that the Enemy?¡±


    When I look across the field I see another army, one that just split into 2. Half that seems to be primarily footmen are making their way to the rear of our main army, while the other is quickly making their way across the field towards us.


    ¡°That¡¯s the Clegane banner. It¡¯s the fucking Mountain!¡± Torrhen Karstark shouts beside me.


    We watch as the enemy starts their charge, getting faster and faster as they approach. Soon they will be on us and we will be destroyed.


    ¡°We need to form up, be ready to receive!¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s no time, we need to flee!¡±


    ¡°Where?! Where can we go?!¡±


    The men shout in a panic around me as I realise they are right. Clegane will take only a few minutes to cross that field and then they will be on us. In that time we will only be able to turn around, all the momentum will be on their side.


    We can¡¯t run, the Lannisters are to the East and West, while the river is to the South and the barricades are to the North cutting us from returning to the army.


    ¡°Rob! Quickly, get your men inside the keep, we¡¯ll raise the bridge and trap them outside.¡± Ryger suggests, forgetting titles in his panic.


    He is right, Riverrun is the only place to go if I want to survive, but it is the same as entering a coffin to hide from the executioner. We will barely be able to get a few thousand men inside before they arrive and we have to close the gate. My main army will then be surrounded and either defeated or forced to retreat. I will then be trapped in Riverrun with my grandfather with no one to save us. The war will be over, with our loss.


    As the knights all panic around me, asking for orders to fight or run, I feel a firm hand on my shoulder. I look to see Ben beside me, eyes darting around, hovering on the river in particular. As I am about to ask what he wants, he gives a loud sigh and looks at me.


    ¡°I¡¯ll buy some time, get ready and do whatever you think is best.¡± After that he pats me on the head and moves forward.


    ¡°Ethan, ditch the quivers you won¡¯t need them!! Stay by Lord Stark and protect him. I will see you later.¡± And just like that he kicked his horses sides and galloped forward, charging to the enemy alone except for the hound by his side.


    Ben POV


    ¡®My apologies Lady Stark, but it isn¡¯t quite desperate enough just yet.¡¯ I think to myself as I quickly approach the enemy. Drawing my bow I aim at the lead rider, a huge mother fucker I can only assume is the mountain. I saw him once at the tourney and got to say he deserves his reputation. Though I¡¯ve seen bigger in my past life he is by far the largest in this one.


    But the Mountain isn¡¯t the problem; the problem is the thousands of heavy cavalry riding next to him. I¡¯ve faced charges like this before and have come to think of them like an avalanche.


    When several hundred kilos is travelling at high speeds there is almost nothing that can withstand it. Though horses and knights are somewhat less sturdy than stone, a combination of muscle, bone and metal makes for a significant whack either way.


    There was a country near to my own called Orion, and unlike our lands which were primarily hills and valleys, there were plains suitable for rearing horses and livestock. Their cavalry was particularly infamous on the battlefield, and while they didn¡¯t border us, they did border one of our allies, the Kura.


    As part of a defensive pact we would sometimes assist them in resisting the Orion. They countered the cavalry by investing in quick defensive fortifications, by training men to build trenches and barricades in quick time. They would either create a defence capable of withstanding their charge, or dissuade them from charging altogether.


    Unfortunately this meant they were almost always on the back foot, requiring time to set up and could not launch attacks of their own on open field. Eventually they would be worn down or caught by surprise and forced to give ground.


    This was fine for the Kura, as they were the sort who preferred to throw money at a problem than an army. If they needed soldiers, they hired mercenaries. If they wanted to cause the enemy damage they would hire assassins and saboteurs to disrupt logistics. Once the enemy tired itself out they would pay them a settlement to end the aggressions and go back to making money.


    This didn¡¯t sit with me, so I developed a specialty counter that relied on what the Banders territory did to counter avalanches. As we reached the 500 metre mark I fuelled my arrow with qi and let it fly. Like an eagle the arrow flew across the field and struck its mark¡­ right in the centre of the horse¡¯s chest.


    Even with the thick leather tarp and strong muscles to protect it, combining the force of that strengthened arrow with the horses own momentum forced it through the bone and bristle all the way to the feathers. Just like that the horse neighed in pain and collapsed throwing itself and the rider forward.


    And just like that, the Mountain falls and the chain reaction begins.


    Unlike boulders, cavalries speed is dependent not on gravity, but on the horse. A heavy mass that can¡¯t move is not going to hurt anyone. And unlike a boulder both the rider and animal can feel fear. The man behind sees the person in front fall and in shock tries to avoid tripping over the horse, which he ultimately fails. At that speed they collide with the dead horse and fall to the ground themselves.


    By this time the following people have realised what has happened and had enough time to move to the sides, but that is okay. As the riders in the rear move to the left and right to avoid falling, and the riders directly next to Clegane stop to check on him, likely his guards, and the entire formation now has a gap and is forced to slow slightly.


    Of course I don¡¯t expect this to stay that way. Already the 2 now wings are converging into a point again and will soon resume. I don¡¯t allow this and place 2 arrows on my bow, charging them again.


    In these few seconds we have closed another hundred metres, so while I can¡¯t put as much force into each arrow as the first, the closer distance makes up for it. As they fly the same thing as the mountain happens to the leading riders.


    The individual collapse doesn¡¯t have as much affect as the mountain¡¯s due to the slower speed of the riders, the precedent and likely lower importance of the 2, the combined effect is greater. Some in order to avoid collision go to the left and right flanks again, while others go down the middle.


    The previously arrowhead formation has now become more of a trapezium. With the loss of 3 leading figures, the chaos of avoiding collisions and fear of not knowing what is happening has caused the charge to slow from its initial 30km/hr, to the near stop now.


    In the particularly rocky and mountainous regions of my home it is illegal to log the woods uphill of settlements. The trees act as cushions in the event of a rockslide, with each collision acting to drain the energy of the boulders until they reach a collective stop.


    At this point would either be the time I order the counter charge while they are stopped, or call a retreat if we didn¡¯t have the numbers. But since I am on my own and don¡¯t command the army I look back to see what the Starks are doing. Seeing them turned around and gearing up I smile. Rather than wait for them to join me, I decide to carry on and sow more confusion.


    Speeding to the right I keep myself between the river and the left flank of the enemy, about 200 metres away. With qi focused in my body to speed it up and my bow to ensure it doesn¡¯t break, I send arrow after arrow in rapid succession.


    These don¡¯t have any real target and don¡¯t even fire with the goal to kill. Their only point is to get the attention of those on the right and further spread chaos in the command. As I fire the last of my 20 arrows several riders decide they had enough and about 2 dozen shout a war cry and charge towards me.


    While 2 dozen doesn¡¯t seem like much out of 2 thousand, it is enough to get the attention of those in the centre. Like this they are now splitting their thoughts from those in front and to the left, while the left flank doesn¡¯t know whether to wait for orders or help their comrades.


    Knowing it is too late for them, I see out of the corner of my eye the North is making their way across the field. Like this the positions are reversed, with the North having the advantage of momentum and the Lannisters are trapped in confusion.


    I quickly put Robb and our army out of thought for the moment and focus on the men coming at me. If Robb wasn¡¯t coming I would have no choice but to flee to the river and go with what is quickly becoming my main escape plan, cross the Fork.


    But instead I throw my bow behind me and draw my sword. I rather like that bow and there is a risk of it breaking if I take it into combat so I threw it away, Brutus can track it down later.


    With Brutus in the lead we make our way forward to engage. These men are dressed in plate and mail, clearly knights rather than mercs, so I have Brutus lead to startle the horses before I make my move.


    When fighting from the back of a horse the key points are ones flexibility, speed and control of the horse. Though I am no master rider, I have spent the past few years constantly on horseback while travelling the North, meaning I am slightly better than average. My agility however easily eclipses these men.


    Combined with my qi enhanced blade and 6 men suddenly lost their main hand as they swung their blade, while another 2 were torn from their saddles by Brutus¡¯s teeth.


    The others kept their distance after seeing the blood spurt from newly severed stumps, and the screams from their comrades. While they hesitated and spread out I moved through the gap and made my way to the main fighting.


    By now Robb had engaged the Lannisters and instantly caused massive damage. It was clear they were going to win, but I wanted to make sure. Leaving those few knights to Brutus I made my way into the thick.


    Unlike with footmen it is incredibly difficult to maintain battle lines once they are engaged, especially after one side has ploughed right through the middle of the other. Now the Lannisters are divided into 2 with the Starks in the middle and working their way outwards.


    Taking advantage of their inwards focus I strike at the outer rim of the left flank and start cutting heads and stabbing backs. When I draw a little too much attention I disengage and move to a different area.


    The previous enemies either lost track of me in the chaos or soon were preoccupied with the Stark army coming at them from the other side. After 5 runs it was clear the Starks had one seeing the Lannisters were breaking ranks and starting to flee.


    Since I didn¡¯t want to get surrounded I made it look like I was fleeing as well and made my way back to where I thought Brutus might have been. Just as I turned I was faced with a giant sword being swung right at my face.


    With a severe twist to the right I avoided the swing by hanging off my horse, precariously balanced. The blow did not strike air, and instead buried itself deep in my horse¡¯s neck. With a great neigh followed by gurgling as blood bubbled in its throat, it and I fell to the ground. With my balance thrown and the way the horse fell, I quickly found myself crushed by my steed.


    Gritting my teeth as I hissed, I could feel the weight of my fallen companion crushing my almost certainly broken leg. Still, I got myself under control with several rapid breaths and made to use my remaining leg and arms to move the horse. Though several hundred kilos is a daunting task for most, for me it is just a light sweat, though the pain surely made it harder.


    Just as I stated someone stomped on the horse¡¯s body, sending another round of pain through me. As I look up I saw a mountain of a man. At least 7 feet tall, covered head to toe in metal plate.


    Though I can¡¯t see his face and he wears no Sigel, it can only be Ser Gregor Clegane. The man I thought died in the initial fall, but not only has he survived he found another horse, likely from his guards. Speaking of them, the handful that survived are surrounding his rear and protecting us from the few Starks that approach.


    Clegane reaches down for his sword, a huge piece of metal that got stuck in my horses neck and dragged down, and dislodges it, drawing viscera and blood along with it. As he steps around the horse towards me I call out.


    ¡°Hey there Clegane, what are you doing standing on two legs? Shouldn¡¯t you be on all four like the dog you are?¡± I ask in an attempt to enrage him.


    After considering my options, fighting is definitely out. Though I still have a pair of knives on me, my sword long gone somewhere, even putting what little qi I have left is unlikely to kill him with a throw from this angle. If he got his hands on me I would have a chance, as although he is strong, I am likely a match and a single stab will put him down. But retrieving that sword threw that possibility out the window.


    My only option is to stall for Brutus. As soon as I went down I already called for help and can feel he is coming. If I can buy a few seconds then he will be here and can tear this motherfucker up.


    I hoped with his obvious hatred of me he would react and taunt me a little about my impending demise, but instead he just raised his sword high and prepared to swing. From the angle I could tell that he wasn¡¯t aiming for my head, but rather for my waist, likely intending to let me die from disembowelment, a slow death. Dick.


    If he at least approached from the front I could make an attempt to grab his legs and try to throw him off balance and buy myself a few seconds, but from this twisted position I could only watch.


    It was as I watched I saw behind him a much smaller person approach at a run. After bypassing the guards who were focused on the Stark riders, they ran right up to the Mountain and swung the mace in their hands as fast as they could.


    *Crunch* the mace made solid connection with the thinner parts of the plate and the metal, and likely several ribs, was crushed under the blow. Clegane dropped his sword and turned away, more out of surprise than pain. As he does I realise who the new arrival is. Dacey Mormont.


    Forgetting for the moment how or why she was here, I focused on removing my horse¡¯s corpse from my leg. If the mountain comes for me again, or his guards, at least I will be able to jump and flounder around.


    As I was finally freed I turn to see how their fight was going, and it looked like I was unneeded.


    As Dacey swung her mace, Clegane dodged with surprising speed for one his size, he threw a large swing towards her face. His long and enormous arms made to look like a mace of his own, but were even less effective than Dacey¡¯s.


    By ducking the blow Dacey took advantage of his thrown balance to deliver a stomp with her right foot to his left, sending him to his knees. As she rounded his back she made to swing at his now accessible head.


    However, like he had eyes in the back of his head, Clegane rather than avoid the blow, threw himself into it before it completed its full motion. With the helmet and dissipated force, he not only survived, but managed to grab Dacey¡¯s arms and drag her to the ground.


    Realising what this meant, I quickly got to my feet and started to limp as Clegane began raining punches. Drawing my 2 knives I charged them with as much qi as I had, and threw myself at Clegane¡¯s back, plunging my right into the back of his helmet and the other into the neck guard.


    I held him upright for the last few twitches of life, and when I felt it pass I let his body fall to the side before collapsing myself, not even bothering to retrieve my knives.


    The few guards still alive made several shocked cries which soon turned into shrieks as a grey blur charged into the fray. After Brutus leapt up and dragged a rider from his horse, he proceeded to put his foot on the man¡¯s back and bite his arm, and then pulled. We watched as he tore the man¡¯s limb from his still living body before he charged to others. Losing all their morale they quickly fled only to be pursued by Stark riders.


    Brutus made his way to where I and Dacey were and checked I was safe. As I placed my hand on his head, panting, I heard a groan and looked to see Dacey sit up from the floor.


    Her face was battered, nose clearly broken and blood was dripping from her mouth. After fiddling with her tongue and coughing she spat into her hand and 2 of her molars and a canine came out. As she looked to me she reminded me of those whores from Winter Town who sometimes got unpleasant company.


    I had never seen anyone so beautiful.


    As our eyes met we started to smile, missing teeth and all, soon we were enveloped in laughter. A few knights recognized Brutus and came to fetch us while Robb led the rest of the men to cut off the infantry before they made their way to our main army¡¯s rear.


    Needless to say I was more tired and injured than I had ever been in this life, and I couldn¡¯t be happier.

 future novel ideas

    Idea 1


    Reincarnation of modern day male lead into the world of swords and magic. born into a low ranking noble family into a feudal society initially, the lead is one who upon realising the difference between classes lifestyle and his rather tentative position he makes actions to ensure his future position and treatment.


    He will have a system, but one with several serious restraints. I am not particularly intelligent or knowledgeable so if i want to make a MC excell without resorting to the cliche plot-armor and making everyone else a complete idiot, i need to give them an advantage.


    I want to make this one more focused on kingdom building so while there will stilll be wars and combat it will primarily be with armies and few occasions will the Mc be able to have a significant impact on his own.


    Idea 2


    Transmigration of modern day person into world of Xianxia. In this novel i plan to introduce various cultivation levels and start him in the middle levels. to compare in terms of ships he is like a type 42 destroyer. lots of power but plenty of bigger and more advanced ships out there, with no real use to big players than maybe training. Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.


    I hope to bring the mentality of the average modern man to this world, with no advanced training or special mindset. so unlike other novels where the Mc somehow jumps levels due to experience, when they are clearly the newcomers, they will actually be weaker than most of their counterparts of similar level especially in the beginning. They will also be very slow to adjust to violent encounters and killing. they will eventually get used to it but am going to aim for a slow progression.


    I will insert a more compassionate personality than the average person so their desire to use limited knowledge from the old world and the strength he currently possesses to make the lives of commoners easier. So kind of a xianxia and kingdom building novel.


    Haven''t decided whether to add a system yet or not.


    Idea 3


    based in england in the near future, the entire world is shown a dream that depicts judgement day in the form of a zombie apocalypse in 2 years time. The world is devided between the believers and deniers.


    Our MC is an average person who though not completely believing in the apocalypse, uses it as an excuse to better himself and eventually enjoys preparing for it.


    At the start he doesn''t excell more than others and focuses more on personal survival, later through a bit of luck and determination starts to have an impact in a supporting role. want to do more of an action adventure for this one with maybe some alternative points of view with secondary charaters to do some kingdom building or politics.